JP2020078661A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.SOLUTION: Ball entrance means is disposed at a position where a game ball flowed down through a first flow channel can enter, and on the basis of an entrance of a game ball to the ball entrance means, a specific privilege becoming advantageous to a player is granted by prescribed privilege granting means. Flow channel distribution means can be changed between a first distribution state where a game ball flowed into a specific flow channel is likely to be distributed to the first flow channel, and a second distribution state where the game ball is more likely to be distributed to a second flow channel than in the first distribution state. A state of the flow channel distribution means can be changed at least to the first distribution state and the second distribution state according to a game state by setting means. Accordingly, even if the player shoots a game ball toward the specific flow channel, a privilege to be granted according to the game state can be made different so as to achieve an effect of preventing a game from becoming monotonous.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is carried out to determine whether or not a game ball is hit based on winning a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, there is known one having a plurality of winning openings through which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins. In this conventional game machine, by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning hole, it is possible to change the number of prize balls obtainable according to the direction in which the player shoots the game balls. is there.

JP 2001-129177 A

  However, since the number of prize balls that can be won by winning is generally larger than the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize hole, the player usually decides whether or not he or she wins. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. In other words, it was common for a player to keep hitting a game ball in the same direction until a hit. Therefore, when the player hits the ball in the same direction, the ball may continue to win the same winning opening, and the number of prize balls to be paid out may be scarcely changed. That is, the game may be monotonous.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a monotonous game.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1, a specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path. Based on the ball entering means provided at a position where the player can enter the ball and the game ball entering the ball entering means, the player is compared with the case where the game ball flows down the second flow path. A comparison is made between a specific privilege granting means for granting an advantageous specific privilege, a first distribution state in which the game balls flowing into the specific flow channel are easily distributed to the first flow channel, and the first distribution state. The game ball can be changed to a second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path, and the state of the flow path distribution means is at least the first distribution state according to the game state. And a setting unit capable of setting the second distribution state.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a normal ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball, and the normal ball entering means. And a game value imparting means for imparting a predetermined game value based on the entry of a game ball, wherein the specific privilege imparting means imparts a game value higher than the predetermined game value as the specific privilege. To do.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein a lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition and a lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. And a game state setting means for setting the game state to a privilege game state advantageous to the player, based on that the setting means is set to the privilege game state by the game state setting means. The state of the flow path distributing means is set to the first distribution state.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, the specific flow path is branched into the first flow path and the second flow path. When the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter. The specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the above is granted by the predetermined privilege granting means. The first distribution state in which the game spheres flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path as compared to the first distribution state. The flow path distribution means is variable. The state of the flow path distribution means is changed to at least a first distribution state and a second distribution state by the setting means according to the game state.

  As a result, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, it becomes easy to give a specific privilege by the game balls flowing into the specific flow path, and the game is set to the second distribution state. In the state, it becomes difficult to give a specific privilege. Therefore, even if the player hits the game ball toward the specific flow path, the privilege to be given can be changed according to the game state, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. There is an effect.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of claim 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the normal ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and based on the game ball entering the normal ball entering means, a predetermined value is given by the game value adding means. A game value is given. By the specific privilege granting means, a gaming value higher than a predetermined gaming value is granted as the specific privilege.

  As a result, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, a larger number of games are played when the game balls flow into the specific flow path, as compared with the gaming state set to the second distribution state. It's easier to get value. Therefore, it is possible to change the game value given according to the game state, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine of claim 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, the lottery means executes the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is advantageous to the player by the game state setting means on the basis that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result. Is set to. Based on the fact that the gaming state setting means has set the privilege gaming state, the state of the flow channel sorting means is set to the first sorting state by the setting means.

  As a result, when the gaming state is set to the special gaming state, the special gaming state is advantageous to the player, and more gaming value is given by the game balls flowing into the specific flow path. It is easy to be done. Therefore, the privilege game state can be made more advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's expectation of the bonus game state.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen where right-handed navigation was displayed, and (b) is a figure which illustrated a display screen where a right-handed warning image was displayed. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen in a big hit, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the display screen when a ball hits a big value winning hole during a big hit. (A), (b) is a figure which illustrated the display screen in which the warning image was displayed. It is a front view of a storage device. (A) is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the sphere which flowed into the storage device when the storage valve was closed, and (b) was flowed into the storage device when the storage valve was opened. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of a sphere. It is a diagram showing the upstream side of the path provided on the right side of the game board. It is a diagram showing the downstream side of the path provided on the right side of the game board. (A) is a figure which shows the state by which the 1st specific winning opening was opened, and (b) is a figure which shows the state by which the 2nd specific winning opening was opened. (A) is a figure which shows the path|route of the sphere in the state where the 1st specific winning opening was closed, and (b) is a figure which shows the path of the sphere in the state where the 1st specific winning opening is opened. (A) is a figure which shows the path|route of the sphere in the state where the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth was closed, and (b) is a figure which shows the path|route of a sphere in the state which the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth is open. (A) is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the sphere which entered into the 2nd variable winning a prize device in the state where the probability variation entrance is closed, and (b) is a probability variation entrance being opened. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball which entered into the 2nd variable winning device in the state which is. (A) is a figure which shows the timekeeping change of the state of the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth and the state of the flow path in a 2nd variable winning device in the 12th round of jackpot B, (b) is 12 of jackpot B. It is a figure which shows the timekeeping change of the state of the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth and the state of the flow path in a 2nd variable winning a prize device in the round. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the special jackpot type It is a figure and (c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically correspondence relation with the 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal design. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting winning processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-reading process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the ending processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a winning command setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing an error notification process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a hit time notification process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a normal time notification process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. 7 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen when the storage valve of 2nd Embodiment is closed, (b) shows the display screen when the storage valve of 2nd Embodiment is open. It is the figure which illustrated. It is a front view of the storage device in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is the figure which illustrated the case where the ball which flowed into the storage device was guided to the high value winning a prize mouth when the storage valve in 2nd Embodiment was closed, (b) is the It is the figure which illustrated the case where the sphere which flowed into the storage device is guided to the small value winning a prize mouth when the storage valve in 2 embodiment is closed. It is the figure which illustrated the advancing direction of the sphere which flowed into the storage device when the storage valve in a 2nd embodiment is opened. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. is there. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows storage control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the warning process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process at the time of storage performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process at the time of cancellation performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the display screen during the big hit in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the downstream side among the paths provided in the right side of the game board in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a plan view of a storage device and a second variable winning device in a state where a slide member of a modified example of the first embodiment is projected to the front side in front view, and (b) is a modification of the first embodiment. It is a top view of a storage device and a 2nd variable winning a prize device in the state where the slide member of an example was embedded in the back side at the front. It is a figure showing the regulation contents of the 1st hit classification selection table in the modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot operation setting processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a winning opening closing processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time notification process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the sphere which flowed into the inside of a storage device in the state where the sphere stored in the storage device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment was in a disadvantageous position for the player. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the sphere which flowed into the inside of a storage device in the state which the sphere stored in the storage device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment had become advantageous arrangement for a player. It is a figure which shows the suggestion display image displayed on the display screen in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the cancellation|release suggestion display process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the storage state command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinge 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (gaming ball) flows down in front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 17) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, or the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface protruding to the front side, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to descend downward to the right in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 17) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means perform a change control of the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or the reach production is performed, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right illumination portion 32 so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which a ball is directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a wind turbine (the movable member 310 is shown, and others are shown). In addition to the rails 61, 62, the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the normal winning opening (not shown). (Through gate) 67, variable display device unit 80, storage device 600, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the front surface side of the base plate 60 on the rear surface side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80, and the storage device 600 are router-processed base plates 60. It is arranged in the through hole formed in the and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by forming an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of special symbols (first symbols) is carried out by the fact that there is a winning in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball is the normal entrance 67. When passing, a lottery for normal symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of the special symbol which is performed for the first entrance 64 and the entry into the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is done, the jackpot type is also determined. For convenience of explanation, the lottery for the special symbol that is performed for entering the first inlet 64 will be referred to as “lottery for the special symbol 1”, and will be performed for entering the second inlet 640. The lottery of the special symbol that is called is referred to as "lottery of the special symbol 2".

  When the special symbol jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a that is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse). Alternatively, the operation of opening is repeated 15 times (15 rounds) until 10 balls are won. More specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won), 12 In the round, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a larger amount of winning balls are paid out than usual.

  In addition, inside the second variable winning device 650, there are two types of ball entrances (probably variable ball entrance 654 and normal ball entrance) for determining the added value after the jackpot that is given after the special game state is over. Mouth 655) is provided (see FIG. 15). Although details will be described later, when a ball enters the probability variation entrance 654 in the special game state, a “high probability state of special symbol” is added as an added value after the jackpot is over. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the probability variation entrance 654 even during the special game state, a “normal symbol time saving state” is given as an added value after the jackpot. In addition, as a jackpot type of the special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided (see FIG. 18(b)). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the ease with which the ball enters the certainty variation entrance 654 is different.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances is different for each type of entrance. Each is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1), or the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 640 (special If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed and a variable display according to the lottery is started. In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  On the other hand, in the lottery for ordinary symbols performed for the passage of the ball at the ordinary ball entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. It becomes easy. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is selected, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball normally passes through the ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished on the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next ordinary symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 15 rounds (15R big hit). In addition, in the special game state, when the ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 654, as a value added after the jackpot ends, the pachinko machine 10 has a high special symbol from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. Transition to the stochastic state (during the change of special symbols). On the other hand, in the special game state, if the ball does not enter the probability variation entrance 654 even once, as a value added after the jackpot, until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the jackpot In the meantime, it shifts to the time saving state of ordinary symbols. In addition, when it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the jackpot ends, it also shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. The low probability state of this special symbol continues until the next big hit. In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the “big hit B”, compared to the “big hit A”, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the certain variation entrance ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the big hit state). That is, since the “big hit B” is more likely to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol after the big hit ends, it becomes easier to become the big hit again at a short interval after the end of the big hit. Therefore, the "big hit B" is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A".

  Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot is finished, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, to a special game state. It is a game state that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol in the present embodiment (during the change of the special symbol) includes the state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased and the ball easily wins the second entrance 640. . On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" refers to a time when the special symbol is not in the probability change, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than during the probability change of the special symbol. Further, the time saving state of the normal symbol (during time saving) refers to a state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily wins the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, the normal state is a state of the game that is neither during the probability change of the special symbol nor during the time saving of the normal symbol (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is increased).

  During the probability change of the special symbol, or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, not only the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, which is the normal state. A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), a ball is won in the second entrance 640, as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the ball enters the second ball inlet 640 easily. That is, the lottery for special symbols is facilitated.

  In addition, during the sudden change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time. The number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting a normal symbol may be increased more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is not changed, and the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened, and At least one of the numbers of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be changed. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the normal symbol ( You may comprise so that only the winning probability of (2nd pattern) may be improved compared with the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, when the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the probability variation state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot, but is not limited to this. You may limit the number of times. Specifically, for example, from the end of the special game state until the special symbol lottery is finished 10 times, the special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is given, and after the special symbol lottery is finished 10 times May be configured to be set to a normal state. Further, the number of times the special symbol is in the probability changing state is not limited to 10 times, and may be arbitrarily set. Similarly, in the present embodiment, when the ball does not enter the probability variation entrance 654 in the special game state, the special symbol lottery is configured to be in a time saving state until the lottery is completed 100 times. However, the time saving period of the normal symbol is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily set.

  The first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area in front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not the lottery for the special symbol, which is performed in association with the entry into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (starting winning), is being executed by a lighting state. By performing a variable display, as a stop symbol after the fluctuation ends, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entrance 64 Among them, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed, is indicated by a lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of balls is reserved up to four times for each type of ball entrance, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reservations is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (e.g., 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as reduced working hours. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but when it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). A special design (first design) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), it is used as a trigger to perform variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) on the first symbol display device 37. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 17 ), for example, upper, middle, and lower. Three symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 17) is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display The display is decorative according to the display of the device 37. Instead of the liquid crystal display, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. First, FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. Yes, FIG.4(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached patterns simulating characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 17) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is configured to occur after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", a variable display in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are arranged is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", the main number to which any one of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including an odd number is added A variable display in which the symbols are arranged is displayed. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is out of alignment, a variable display in which the main symbols having the same number are not arranged is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The upper one-third is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom for periodical display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, which suggests to the player that the jackpot is in a state where it is easier to make a transition to the big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character 710 (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character A notice production is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), The number of entered balls is respectively reserved up to 4 times, and the reserved number of balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each one reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserve sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it is indicated that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere number designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. In addition, FIG. 4B is an example in the case where the number of reserved balls corresponding to the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is four. When a holding ball corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 occurs, a holding ball number design of a mode different from the holding ball number design displayed in the small area Ds1 of FIG. 4A is displayed. To be done. As a result, the player can easily determine the number of reserved balls corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. You can check.

  In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be reserved up to four times each, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5( a ), a display (right-handed navigation) that prompts the third symbol display device 81 to launch a ball aiming at a path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 is displayed. The display contents when they occur will be described.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is changed to a certain state or when the normal symbol is shortened, so the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By hitting (right hitting), it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second entrance 640. In addition, as will be described later in detail, when the jackpot is achieved by the special symbol lottery (lottery of the special symbol 2) performed based on the fact that the ball enters the second inlet port 640, the first inlet port 64 Compared to the case where a big prize is obtained by a special symbol lottery (lottery of the special symbol 1) performed based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball, it is more likely to be a "big prize B". Therefore, in the probability change state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot or in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right stroke. In other words, even if the special symbol is changed to a certain state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the player cannot enter the ball into the second entrance 640 unless he/she hits it right. The player cannot fully receive the benefits of the probability change state of the symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probability change state of the special symbol, or in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the player displays the image (right-hand navigation) illustrated in FIG. It is configured so that the benefits of being in a time-saving state with normal patterns can be reliably obtained.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5A, in the right-hand navigation, a character "Aim at the right" is displayed in the small area Ds3 in the sub-display area Ds, and a rightward direction is displayed above and below the character. Three arrows are displayed. By displaying these characters and the arrow, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to surely make the player obtain the benefit of the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5B, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. In the warning image illustrated in FIG. 5B, right-hand strike is performed even though it is not a period in which the player should hit the ball (right-hand) to the route (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. It is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined to be executed. More specifically, in a normal state (a state in which the special symbol is neither the probability changing state nor the normal symbol time saving state), it is displayed when it is determined that the player is making a right hit.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as not to be opened easily in a normal state (even if the player hits the ball to the right, it is difficult to enter the ball into the second entrance 640). For this reason, if the player hits the ball right in the normal state, the chance of receiving the special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with the case where the player hits the ball with the left ball hitting the first entrance 64. That is, if the player hits the ball right in the normal state, it is less likely to be a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying the right-handed warning image and urging the player to left-handedly, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5B, when it is determined that the player is right-handing in the normal state, a “warning” is given to the entire small display area Ds (small areas Ds1 to Ds3). The characters “and left” are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to make the player notice that right-handedness should not be performed (left-handedness should be performed). In addition, the clerk in the hall also confirms whether or not there is a right-handed warning screen (see FIG. 5B) to check whether or not there is a player executing an irregular game method of right-handed in a normal state. It can be easily identified.

  As a method for determining whether or not the ball is right-handed, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) into which the ball may flow when the ball is right-handed. . More specifically, when a ball enters any of the general winning openings 601 and 602 or the outlets 603a to 603c provided inside the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) (in each entrance) When it is determined that the ball has passed the provided ball input switch), it is determined that the player is making a right hit.

  Here, the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) is in a state in which it is easy to let the ball flow down to the general winning opening 601 (see FIG. 9A) and the ball is flowing down to the general winning opening 602, depending on the gaming state. It is set to two types of states, that is, an easy state (see FIG. 9B). Then, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state) (probably changed state of special symbol, time saving state of normal symbol, normal state), it is set to a state in which the ball easily flows down to the general winning opening 601. This general winning opening 601 is a winning opening in which the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is entered is smaller than that of the general winning opening 602 (for example, three). Therefore, even if the player hits the ball to the right in the normal state, there is little merit to put the ball into the storage device 600 (the number of balls to be held cannot be increased). That is, when right-handedness is executed in the normal state, the frequency of receiving the special symbol lottery decreases, and the number of balls held also decreases, so that the player is disadvantageous. Therefore, in order to prevent the player from continuing to play the game method that is disadvantageous to him (the game method of right-handing in the normal state), a right-handing warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed. Is configured.

  It should be noted that, as a judgment factor of whether or not to display the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B), not only the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 which is easy to win in the normal state but also the winning The presence or absence of a ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 or the like, which is difficult to play, is also determined because the possibility of illegal playing is taken into consideration. That is, in the normal state, by continuously illegally entering balls into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, which has a large number of winning prize balls (for example, 15 payouts), without a big hit. There is a possibility that an illegal game method for obtaining a large amount of prize balls will be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has won (genuine) a general winning a prize (high value winning a prize) 602 in a normal state, the player is left-handed (right). A right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) that prompts (not to strike) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegal games.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered any of the respective entrances (general winning openings 601 and 602 and out openings 603a to 603c) provided in the storage device 600 in the normal state. In addition, the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has won (entered) a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with a lot of prize balls to be paid out, an illegal game is detected. It may be configured such that the right-handed warning image is displayed when it is determined that the warning is performed. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), if it is detected that a ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, it is illegally performed on the hall computer. It may be configured to output a signal indicating. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraud, and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 in which the fraudulent activity is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the player makes a right-hand hit based on detecting a ball entering each of the ball entrances (general winning openings 601, 602, outgoing openings 603a to 603c) provided inside the storage device 600. Although it is determined that the right stroke is performed, the method of determining whether or not the right stroke is performed is not limited to this. For example, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (through gate), it may be configured to determine that the ball is hit to the right, or a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. A well-known sensor capable of detecting the passage of the ball may be provided above, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor, it may be determined that the player is making a right hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special game state (during the big hit state) will be described. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third round of the jackpot. As shown in the figure, when a jackpot is hit, for example, an image in which a boy character 710 discovers a treasure chest 715 filled with treasures is displayed. This treasure suggests a large number of prize balls that the player obtains in the special game state (big hit state). By this display, the joy of winning the prize ball can be amplified, so that the player can be satisfied with the fact that the jackpot has been won. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81, a display area 714 for displaying the current round number is provided. In the example of FIG. 6A, the characters “ROUND 3” are displayed in the display area 714. By confirming this display, the player can recognize that the present is the third round of the big hit. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a right-handed navigation image is displayed as in the probability changing state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. That is, the character "Aim for the right!!" is displayed in the small area Ds3, and rightward arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying this right-handed navigation image, the player is made to recognize that the ball should be launched to the route (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the special game state (during the big hit state). be able to. If left hitting is performed despite the special game state (big hit state), it is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 and is opened in the special game state (big hit state). It becomes impossible to make a ball enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, it becomes impossible to obtain a large amount of prize balls, and the player loses money. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6A) is displayed even in the special game state (big hit state) to urge the player to make a right-handed hit. Thereby, the player is configured to win a prize ball in a big hit.

  In addition, in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a winning number display area MA for displaying the number of winnings (balls) to the general winning opening 602 is formed. As shown in 6(a), for example, the characters “EXTRA BONUS×10” are displayed in the winning number display area MA. The word "EXTRA BONUS" means that a prize ball is obtained by a method different from that obtained by throwing the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. ing. Specifically, it means obtaining a prize ball by inserting the ball into the general winning opening 602. Further, the character “×10” indicates the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 in a big hit. In the example of FIG. 6A, it means that the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 ten times in the first to third rounds.

  Further, a schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed above the character string “EXTRA BONUS×10”, and a character string “EXTRA BONUS gate is open” is displayed above the character string. This allows the player to easily recognize that the storage valve 604a is set to the open state (released state). In addition, in the schematic view of the storage device 600 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a balloon in which the character “Aim!” is written is displayed at the position of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. .. By this balloon, it is possible to let the player recognize that it is advantageous (a large amount of prize balls can be obtained) when the balls are inserted into the general winning opening 602.

  In addition, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing display contents when a ball enters the general winning opening 602 in the special game state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 6( b ), when a ball hitting the general winning opening 602 is detected during a big hit, the letters “GET” are displayed in the portion where the schematic view of the storage device 600 is displayed. At the same time, an image in which a ball enters is displayed at a location corresponding to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the schematic view of the storage device 600. Further, in the winning number display area MA, the display content is changed from “EXTRA BONUS×10” to “EXTRA BONUS×11”. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the prize ball has been obtained by the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602.

  In this way, by displaying the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 during the big hit, the winning balls are provided separately from the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a in the big hit. It is possible to make the player recognize the number of times the player has won. Therefore, it is possible to make the game play with the expectation that the number of "EXTRA BONUS" (the number of balls entered into the general winning opening 602) will increase. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, various warning images will be described with reference to FIG. 7. First, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a left-handing warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when left-handing is performed in the special game state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 7A, when it is determined that the player is left-handed, a large display area 716 for displaying a warning is formed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the large display area, the character "warning" is displayed in a large size, and the character "Attack the attacker by right-handing!" is displayed below the character "warning". By displaying these characters in the large display area, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current game method (left hitting) is an incorrect game method. Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), it is possible to surely make the player obtain a large amount of prize balls.

  The determination as to whether or not the player is left-handed is made by determining whether or not a ball has entered the first entrance 64. That is, by determining that the ball has entered the first ball inlet 64 during the special game state (during the big hit state), it is determined that the player is left-handed, and a left-handed warning image ( Control is performed so as to display (see FIG. 7A).

  In the present embodiment, the left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7A) is displayed when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a passage sensor that detects passage of a sphere is provided on a path (flow path) provided on the left side of the game board 13, and a left-handed warning image (when a passage of the sphere is detected by the sensor during a big hit) You may comprise so that FIG.7(a) may be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7B, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the storage device 600 is, for example, when a ball is detected in a general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 or a special playing status (big hit) despite the special playing status (big hit status). If a ball is detected in the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and a warning image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600, the word “warning” is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, at the bottom of the screen, the words "Please call the gate error staff" are displayed. Since these characters allow the player to determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to promptly request a clerk or the like in the hall for repair or the like.

  In addition, when the ball is fixed to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, which has a large number of prize balls always paid out, by illegally changing the wiring, etc. The clerk can determine the possibility of misconduct simply by checking the warning image (see FIG. 7B). Therefore, by fixing the ball to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in a state where it is easy to enter, and striking the ball toward the storage device 600, an attempt is made to suppress fraudulent acts of increasing the ball without going through the jackpot. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 (through gate). A variable display in which the lights are alternately turned on for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  The pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 when the variable display on the second symbol display device is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"). It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a time.

  The time required for variable display of the second symbol (fluctuation time) is set so that the special symbol is changing during probability, or the normal symbol is shorter than the normal state when the gaming state is in the normal state. Thereby, during the probability change of the special symbol, and during the time saving of the normal symbol, since the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chances of winning the normal symbol are increased, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to be in the open state of the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol, and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to make a state in which the ball can easily win the second ball entrance 640.

  In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol, or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the winning probability is increased, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a and the number of times of opening are increased, or the like, to the second entrance 640. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the prize, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, and the hit probability of the regular symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one normal symbol hit may be constant regardless of the game state.

  The normal ball entrance 67 is attached to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. ing. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is hit and a lottery is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also lit up. .. Four second design holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. Alternatively, a part of the device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passage of the ball through the normal entrance 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times). .. Moreover, the number of the normal entrance 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal entrance 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller is caused by the turning on of the first winning hole switch. 110 (see FIG. 17) is a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, to the right of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front (below the normal entrance 67), a second entrance 640 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning hole switch is turned on. The main control unit 110 (see FIG. 17) is used to perform a big hit lottery, and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  Further, each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second ball entrance 640 may be different numbers. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64 is set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second ball entrance 640 is set to be 5. Good.

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed by the passage of the ball to the normal entrance 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (Enlarged state), and the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640.

  As mentioned above, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the time required to display the variation of the ordinary symbol is short, so the variation of the ordinary symbol In the display, the symbol "○" is easily displayed. Therefore, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the normal symbol, the time for which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to make a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second ball entrance 640 as compared with the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball is won at the first ball entrance 64 and when the ball is won at the second ball entrance 640. is there. However, as a type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is hit, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot B) that makes it easier to put a ball into the certainty variation entrance ball 654 during the special game state is the second entrance 640 The case where the ball wins is set higher than the case where the ball wins the first ball entrance 64.

  In the normal operation, the electric accessory that accompanies the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entrance 640. Therefore, the first entrance without the electric accessory is provided. A ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hitting”), and a lot of chances for a big hit lottery are obtained by winning a prize in the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during the sudden change of the special symbol or during the shortening of the time period of the ordinary symbol, by passing the ball through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is easily opened, and the second entrance Since it is in a state that it is easy to win the ball entrance 640, the ball is shot toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the normal entry It is advantageous for the player to pass the ball 67 to open the electric accessory and aim to win the jackpot B by winning the second ball 640.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbol is in the process of being changed, during the time saving of the normal symbol, or in the normal state), the game is played. The person can change the way of shooting the ball into "left hit" and "right hit". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the player hits the ball, so that the player can enjoy the game.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball inlet 64 (lower left side of the second ball inlet 640), and a horizontally elongated rectangular first specific winning port is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. (Large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot in the special symbol lottery performed due to the winning of the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the jackpot is stopped. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is notified. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or 10 balls are won).

  The first specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a can be repeated at most 14 times (14 rounds). More specifically, the opening and closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is executed in the special game state 1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the first specific winning port 65a, and a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis ( (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the closed state and the closed state of are alternately repeated.

  A second variable winning device 650 is provided on the lower left side of the first variable winning device 65, and a second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided above the second variable winning device 650. . The opening/closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 650a forms a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 by projecting to the front side in front view (see FIG. 14(a)). ). On the other hand, when a special design lottery results in a big hit, and in the 12th round, the opening/closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 650a slides toward the back side in front view, and is buried in the back side of the game board 13, so that the ball comes first. An open state in which a ball can be entered into the 2-variable winning device 650 is formed (see FIG. 14B).

  As described above, based on the fact that the ball that has entered the second specific winning port 650a in the special game state (big hit) enters the certainty variation ball port 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650. , After the jackpot is over, the special symbol shifts to the probability change state. On the other hand, if the balls do not enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the special game state, or if the balls enter the second specific winning opening 650a, all the balls enter the normal winning opening 655. If you do, after the jackpot is over, it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. In addition to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, other winning openings may be provided as winning openings opened in the special gaming state. On the contrary, the winning opening may be only the first specific winning opening 65a. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the arrangement of the present embodiment, and it may be arranged at any position.

  A storage device 600 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning device 65. The storage device 600 is provided with a plurality of ball entrances (general winning openings 601, 602 and out entrances 603a to 603c) therein, and causes the entered ball to flow down to any of the ball entrances. be able to. Further, the storage device 600 can store only one ball that has entered the inside (stop the flow down). Further, this storage device 600 is covered with a transparent cover body on the front side in front view, and to which entrance port the ball that the player has flown (entered) into the storage device 600 enters. Is configured so that it can be easily confirmed. Details of the storage device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an outline of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 8, the storage device 600 is configured so that a sphere can enter the inside thereof via the guide flow path 605. It should be noted that the storage device 600 is configured such that, when the player hits the ball to the right, one ball enters about three of the hit balls. The balls that have not entered the guide flow path 605 travel down the upper left side of the storage device 600 and flow down toward the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, in the special game state, a part of the ball shot by the player toward the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a enters the storage device 600 via the guide flow path 605. Is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 8, inside the storage device 600, two types of flow paths branched by the branch member 604 are provided downstream of the guide flow path 605. Specifically, inside the storage device 600, a guide flow path 606 is provided on the left side in front view. Most of the spheres that have flowed down the guide flow path 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided on the downstream side. This general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is provided with a detection switch 601a (not shown) that can detect that a ball has entered (passed). When the detection switch 601a detects that a ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, three prize balls are paid out. It should be noted that, to the left and right of this general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, balls that have not flown into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though they flow down the guide flow path 606 are discharged. Out outlets 603a and 603b are provided. By these outlets, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the accumulation of the spheres inside the storage device 600, and reliably discharge the spheres flowing down the guide flow path 606. Further, like the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, detection switches 603a1 and 603b1 (not shown) are provided at these outlets 603a and 603b, respectively. With these detection switches 603a1 and 603b1, the number of discharged balls can be accurately determined.

  Inside the storage device 600, a guide flow path 607 through which a sphere can flow is provided on the right side in front view. Most of the game balls flowing down the guide flow path 607 enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is provided with a detection switch 602a (not shown) that can detect that a ball has entered (passed). When it is detected by the detection switch 602a that a ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, 15 prize balls are paid out. That is, more prize balls can be obtained when the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 than when the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. it can. Outlet openings 603b and 603c are provided on the left and right sides of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, respectively. These outlets prevent (suppress) the balls that have not entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 from accumulating inside the storage device 600, and prevent the balls that have flowed down the guide flow path 607. It can be reliably discharged. Further, similarly to the outlets 603a and 603b, the outlet 603c is provided with a detection switch 603c1 (not shown). The detection switch 603c1 can accurately determine the number of discharged balls.

  Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special game state (big hit state) is set, it is set to a state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. In a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the state is set so that it is easy to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. That is, in the special game state, a large amount of prize balls are obtained by opening the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, and in addition to the general winning opening (large value winning) in the storage device 600. It is configured such that a prize ball can be obtained by winning the ball in the mouth 602. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, and the merit of the player due to the big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy the game with a big hit, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, which has a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out, is closed by the storage valve 607a, and the number of award balls to be paid out relatively. Balls are set in a state where it is easy for a ball to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of points. That is, in a state other than the special game state, since there is little merit to insert the ball into the storage device 600, even in a state other than the special game state, by always aiming at the storage device 600, a large amount of payout is to be paid. An irregular game method can be prevented (suppressed). As described above, the storage device 600 is configured such that one ball enters approximately three right-handed balls. The number of prize balls paid out when the player enters the general prize hole (small value prize hole) 601 is three. That is, even if the player hits the ball right in the normal state, it is difficult to draw a special symbol, and it is not possible to increase the number of balls by paying out based on the winning of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be made to want to hit left.

  A storage valve 607a is provided in the guide passage 607. The storage valve 607a can block the guide passage 607 by protruding toward the front side in front view, and can prevent the flow of the sphere that has proceeded to the guide passage 607. That is, the ball can be stopped (the ball is stored) at the upper part of the storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a is configured to be driven by a storage device solenoid 610 (see FIG. 17). More specifically, by driving the storage device solenoid 610, a state in which the storage valve 607a projects toward the front side in the front view (a state in which the guide flow passage 607 is blocked) and a state in which the storage valve 607a extends toward the rear side in the front view. It is configured to be able to switch to a buried state (a state in which a sphere can flow down the guide flow channel 607). The sphere stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a is prevented (suppressed) from flowing out to the guide flow passage 606 side by being surrounded by the inner wall of the guide flow passage 607 and the branch member 604. .. That is, the protrusion 604a provided on the branch member 604 is set to be sufficiently high so that the balls stored above the storage valve 607a do not flow out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the operation of the ball that has entered the storage device 600 will be described for each of the two possible states of the storage valve 607a described above. FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an operation of a ball that has entered the storage device 600 in a state where the storage valve 607a is projected to the front side, and FIG. It is a figure which shows operation|movement of the sphere which entered the storage device 600 in the state where it was buried in.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, at least half of the lower end of the guide flow channel 605 overlaps with the upper end of the guide flow channel 607. On the other hand, the upper end portion of the guide flow passage 606 is located on the left side of the central axis 605a of the guide flow passage 605, and almost does not overlap the lower end portion of the guide flow passage 605. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide flow path 605 easily advances to the guide flow path 607.

  The sphere that has proceeded to the guide flow path 607 is prevented from flowing down by the storage valve 607a, and stops at the upper part of the storage valve 607a (the sphere is stored). Then, in the state where the sphere is stopped (the sphere is stored) at the upper part of the storage valve 607a, when another sphere newly flows down the guiding flow path 605, the new flowing down the guiding flow path 605. The sphere that has come into contact with the sphere stored on the storage valve 607a (contact). Due to this contact (interference), the trajectory (downward direction) of the sphere newly flowing down the guide flow channel 605 is changed.

  Since the guide flow passage 607 is provided on the slightly right side of the guide flow passage 605 (see FIG. 9A), the sphere stored on the storage valve 607a is newly added to the guide flow passage 605. In most cases, it is stopping on the right side of the ball flowing down. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing down the guide flow path 605 collides with the left side of the sphere stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, and repels to the left side in front view. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing down the guide flow path 605 advances to the guide flow path 606 provided on the left side in front view. As described above, most of the balls that have flowed down the guide flow path 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a relatively small number of prize balls to be paid out (the number of prize balls is 3). That is, in the state where the storage valve 607a projects toward the front side in front view and the sphere cannot flow down the guide flow channel 607 (the state where the guide flow channel 607 is closed), most of the balls that have entered the storage device 600 are generally. The player enters a winning opening (small value winning opening) 601.

  On the other hand, when the storage valve 607a is buried in the back side of the front view (see FIG. 9(b)), there is nothing that hinders the flow of the sphere that has proceeded to the guide channel 607, so the guide channel 607 is not present. The sphere that has proceeded to flows down the guide flow path 607 as it is, and enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. As described above, the general winning opening (large-value winning opening) 602 has a relatively large number (15) of winning prize balls to be paid out, and therefore has many advantages for the player to win the prize.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the ball can flow down the guide flow path 607 (see FIG. 9B) when a big hit occurs. Therefore, in the special game state, by striking to the right, by winning the ball to the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained, and in addition, the right hitting is ejected. A prize ball can be obtained by a part of the formed ball winning the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, and the merit of the player due to the big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy the game with a big hit, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, as described above, in states other than the special game state (big hit state), the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, which has a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out, is closed by the storage valve 607a, and is relatively paid out. The state is set such that the balls can easily enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of prize balls. That is, in a state other than the special game state, since there is little merit to insert the ball into the storage device 600, even in a state other than the special game state, by always aiming at the storage device 600, a large amount of payout is to be paid. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the playing method.

  In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the guide flow path 606 enters the general winning opening (small value prize opening) 601, and the ball flowing down the guide flow path 607 enters the general winning entrance 602. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a known clune means having a plurality of winning openings is provided on the downstream side of each of the guide channels, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning openings to be entered. Good. As a result, even if the prize flow path 606 flows down, it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls by entering the prize hole with a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be interestingly watched until the ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters one of the winning openings. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a closes the guide passage 607 so that the sphere can be stored on the way of the guide passage 607. However, for example, an electromagnet or the like is used to guide the guide passage. You may comprise so that a sphere may be stored on the way of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction flow path 607, and magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than the special game state (during the big hit state). As a result, the sphere that first flows into the guide flow path 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the sphere can be stopped (the sphere is stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a is one, but the number is not limited to this, and two or more balls may be stored. Furthermore, when a plurality of balls are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or may be arranged side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the outlet is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the outlet, a prize opening for paying out prize balls may be provided. Further, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls enter each prize hole may be different. More specifically, for example, six prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603a, ten prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603b, and prize balls are replaced in place of the out port 603c. However, 12 prize holes may be provided. As a result, it is possible to more interestingly observe when the sphere flows down the guide flow path 606 and to which winning port the guide flow path 607 enters. Further, a member such as a nail capable of changing the flow direction of the ball may be provided downstream of the guide flow path 606 or the guide flow path 607 so that the winning opening into which any ball enters becomes more random. . Accordingly, when the sphere flows into the storage device 600, it is possible to more interestingly observe the whereabouts of the sphere until the sphere enters any of the winning openings. In addition, by providing nails or the like, it is possible to set a ball entrance through which a clerk in the hall can easily enter a ball. Therefore, the exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the side of the hall.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, a route when the player ejects a ball to the right side of the game board 13 (when hitting right) will be described. First, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a portion of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the upstream side of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 10, the flow path (path) on the right side of the game board 13 is provided with a normal entrance 67 at its upper part. As described above, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the lottery for the normal symbol is executed. Then, when the normal symbol hits, in the second symbol display device 83, after the variation effect for showing the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is executed, the "○" symbol indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol is displayed. Then, based on the display of the "○" symbol on the second symbol display device 83, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second inlet 640 provided downstream of the ordinary inlet 67 is It is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds×1 time, or 1 second×2 times). While the electric accessory 640 is open, the right-handed ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. As mentioned above, during the probable change of the special symbol, or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened, and the opening period of the electric accessory becomes long, so The ball easily enters the 2 entrance port 640. Therefore, by performing a right-handed stroke, it is possible to receive a lottery for special symbols without reducing the number of balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a part of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the downstream side of the second entrance 640 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. A first variable winning device 65 is provided downstream of the entrance of the storage device 600, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65. (See FIG. 11). That is, among the spheres that have flowed down to the downstream of the path (flow path) on the right side by the player making a right hit, the sphere that has flowed down to the downstream without entering (entering) the storage device 600 is the first ball. It flows down toward the 1 variable winning device 65. Further, the balls that flow down toward the first variable winning device 65 and do not enter the first specific winning port 65a flow down toward the second variable winning device 650.

  In this way, the player can make the ball flow down toward the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 simply by making a right hit. Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), the player can make a ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a by only making a right hit, and a large amount of You can win prize balls. In addition, a part of the spheres aimed at the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a enters the storage device 600. Then, as described above, in the special game state (big hit state), most of the balls that have entered the storage device 600 enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (see FIG. 9B). ), the player can obtain more prize balls during the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy the game with a big hit, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 12 to 16, specific operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 will be described. First, FIG. 12 is a view showing the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be openable in the front direction when viewed from the front. By opening the first specific winning opening 65a, the game ball flowing down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 is ready to enter the first specific winning opening 65a. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a has 1 to 11 rounds in the special game state (big hit state) and 13 to 15 rounds for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls). It will be released). Then, when a ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a, 15 prize balls are paid out for each ball entered. Therefore, the player can obtain a large amount of prize balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 12B, the second specific winning opening 650 of the second variable winning device 650 can be buried inside the game board 13 by sliding toward the inner side in the front view. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the upper part of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the game balls flowing down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 are ready to enter. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period in 12 rounds of the special game state (big hit state) (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). Then, when a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, 15 prize balls are paid out for one ball entered. Therefore, the player can obtain a large amount of prize balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation of the ball that has flown down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 by right hitting and has reached the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. First, FIG. 13(a) is a diagram when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a closed, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. Since it is impossible to win, it falls into the space on the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 13A). Then, the ball that has dropped to the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a flows down the flow path provided below the first specific winning opening 65a. Since the flow path below the first specific winning opening 65a is inclined toward the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball flows down toward the second specific winning opening 650a.

  On the other hand, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a opened, as shown in FIG. 13(b), the ball is placed on the extension line of the flow path where the ball has flowed down. The opening portion of the 1 specific winning opening 65a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. As shown in FIG. 13B, a ball discharge port 65c for discharging the balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the first variable winning device 65. By entering the ball into the ball discharge port 65c, the winning of the ball is detected, the prize ball is paid out, and the ball entered from the first specific winning port 65a into the first variable winning device 65. Can be discharged. In addition, since the bottom surface portion 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is inclined toward the ball outlet 65c, all balls that enter the first specific winning port 65a enter the ball outlet 65c. You can make it a ball. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the operation of the ball that has flown down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 by right hitting and has reached the second specific winning port 650a will be described. First, FIG. 14A is a diagram when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a closed, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Since it is impossible to win, it flows down the upper part of the second specific winning port 650a and drops to the left side of the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14(a)). Then, the ball that has dropped to the left of the second specific winning opening 650a flows down to the outlet 66 (see FIG. 2) provided to the left of the second specific winning opening 650.

  On the other hand, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a opened, as shown in FIG. 2 The opening portion of the specific winning opening 650a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. As shown in FIG. 14B, a ball discharge port 650c for discharging a ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650. By entering the ball into the ball outlet 650c, the winning of the ball is detected, the prize ball is paid out, and the ball entered from the second specific winning port 650a into the second variable winning device 650. Can be discharged. Since the bottom surface part 650b of the second variable winning device 650 is inclined toward the ball outlet 650c, all the balls that enter the second specific winning port 650a enter the ball outlet 650c. You can make it a ball. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a structure downstream of the ball discharge port 650c of the second variable winning device 650 will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the special gaming state (big hit state), when the ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650, After the jackpot is finished, the special symbol is configured to shift to a probability changing state. The probability variation ball inlet 654 is provided in one of the two channels (the guide channel 652 and the guide channel 653) provided downstream of the ball outlet 650c (the guide channel 652). Has been. A flow path switching valve 650d for setting a flow path through which the sphere flows down is provided at the upper ends of the two flow paths. The flow passage switching valve 650d is provided to close one of the two flow passages so that the sphere cannot move, and open the other flow passage so that the sphere can move. Has been. The flow path switching valve 650d can be rotated about the switching shaft 650e as a rotation axis by driving the flow path solenoid 611 (see FIG. 17). The layout can be switched.

  15(a) and 15(b) are diagrams showing the operation of the sphere for each arrangement of the flow path switching valve 650d. First, FIG. 15A is a diagram showing a case where the flow passage switching valve 650d is arranged to close the guide flow passage 652. In the case of the arrangement in which the guide passage 652 is closed, the sphere that has entered the sphere discharge port 650c is blocked by the passage switching valve 650d and cannot proceed to the guide passage 652. Therefore, the sphere advances to the guide channel 653 (see FIG. 15A). A ball entrance 655 is usually provided downstream of the guide flow path 653. That is, while the arrangement shown in FIG. 15A is set, the ball cannot enter the certainty variation ball entrance 654. In the present embodiment, the flow path switching valve 650d is configured to be arranged as shown in FIG. 15A by turning off the flow path solenoid 611.

  On the other hand, FIG. 15B is a diagram showing a case where the flow path switching valve 650d is arranged to close the guide flow path 653. This arrangement can be realized by turning on (exciting) the flow path solenoid 611. In the case of the arrangement in which the guide passage 653 is closed, the sphere that has entered the sphere outlet 650c can proceed to the guide passage 652 without being blocked by the passage switching valve 650d. Therefore, the sphere advances to the guide flow path 653, and enters the certainty change entrance 654 provided downstream thereof.

  By entering the ball into the probability variation entrance ball opening 654, the special symbol is set to transition to the probability variation state at the end of the jackpot (at the start of the ending effect). Further, when the 12th round in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is finished, a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the game state after the jackpot is finished is executed in the subsequent rounds. That is, if the ball has entered the probability variation entrance ball opening 654 in the 12th round, in the 13th to 15th rounds, the display effect that suggests that the special symbol shifts to the probability variation state is the third symbol display device 81. Executed in. On the other hand, in the 12th round, if the ball has not entered the probability variation ball entrance 654, in the 13th to 15th rounds, the display effect suggesting that the normal symbol shifts to the time saving state is the third symbol display device 81. Executed in. In this way, by setting the round in which the large 2 specific winning opening 650a is opened to be the 12th round, a sufficient period for executing the suggestive production that suggests the gaming state after the completion of the jackpot is secured in the remaining rounds of the jackpot. be able to.

  In addition, as described above, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the entrance of the storage device 600, and therefore the ball to the storage device 600 is provided. The easier it is for the ball to flow in, the more difficult it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650. If it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the certainty variation ball entrance 654 in the 12th round of the big hit B. On the contrary, the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600, the easier it is for the second variable winning device 650 to reach the second variable winning device 650. Become. Therefore, by adjusting the ease with which the balls flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to change the rate of entering the positive variation ball entrance 654. Here, as a method of adjusting the easiness of flowing into the storage device 600, for example, adjusting a nail (see FIG. 11) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 can be mentioned. That is, as the two nails provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 are adjusted so that they approach each other, it becomes more difficult for the sphere to pass between these two nails, and thus it becomes more difficult for the sphere to flow into the storage device 600. . Therefore, in the 12 rounds of the big hit B, the ball easily enters the probability variation ball opening 654, and thus it is possible to easily shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol. On the other hand, as the two nails provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 are adjusted so as to move away from each other, the ball easily passes between the two nails, and thus the ball easily flows into the storage device 600. . Therefore, in the 12th round of the big hit B, the sphere easily flows into the probability variation entry ball opening 654, and thus it is difficult to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided at the entrance of the storage device 600, it is possible to change the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 (proportion of the state of change in the special symbol), so that the pachinko machine can be operated according to the business policy of each hall. The specifications of the machine 10 can be changed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation of the flow path switching valve 650d has the same pattern regardless of the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is different between the big hit A and the big hit B. As a result, the big hit B is configured to be easier for the ball to enter the certainty variation entrance ball opening 654 than the big hit A in the special game state (big hit state). The relationship between the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d and the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a will be described with reference to the subsequent FIG.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the passage switching valve 650d in the 12th round of the big hit A. The upper graph of FIG. 16(a) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (whether it is open or closed), and FIG. The lower diagram is a diagram showing the timing change of the flow passage switching valve 650d (whether the guide flow passage 652 on the left side downstream of the ball discharge port 650c is opened or the guide flow passage 653 on the right side is opened). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the 12th round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time is reached. When (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, the closed state is maintained until 7 seconds elapse from the start of the 12th round, and is set to the open state based on the elapse of 7 seconds. This open state continues until the end of the 12th round. Specifically, 10 balls are inserted into the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, or set to the open state until 30 seconds elapse from the start of the 12th round. To be done. Then, when the 12th round is finished, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. This closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next big round reaches 12 rounds.

  Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so as to close the guide flow path 653 provided on the right side thereof and allow the ball to flow down the left guide flow path 652 (FIG. 15). (See (b)). This state continues for 6.5 seconds after the 12th round is started, and based on the elapse of 6.5 seconds, the flow path switching valve 650d switches in the opposite direction. That is, the guide flow passage 652 is closed by the flow passage switching valve 650d, and the sphere is allowed to flow down the guide flow passage 653 provided on the right side of the flow passage switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15(a)). Since this switching operation ends in a period of 0.5 seconds or less, the flow path can be switched before the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened.

  Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the flow path switching valve 650d is maintained in that state (a state in which a ball can flow down the guide flow path 653). The state in which the sphere can flow down the guide flow path 653 is a big hit next, and continues until 11 rounds are completed. Then, based on the fact that 11 rounds are completed and the interval period of 3 seconds is reached, a state is set in which the sphere can flow down the guide flow path 652 (the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on). That is, most of the time the player is playing the game, the ball is allowed to pass through the guide flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d, and is provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d. The state in which the sphere can pass through the guide flow path 652 is limited to the interval period (3 seconds) set before the start of 12 rounds to 6.5 seconds after the start of 12 rounds. Only the period (9.5 seconds). Therefore, even if a fraudulent act of entering the ball into the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is performed in a state other than the 12th round of the special game state, the ball enters the positive variation entrance 654. Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the sphere, it is possible to prevent (suppress) illegally acquiring the probability variation state of the special symbol.

  The timing of switching the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the guide flow path 652 is switched to the open state at the start of the 12th round, or in the middle of the interval period set after the end of the 11th round (for example, after the interval starts). It may be configured to switch over (when 0.5 seconds has elapsed). As a result, the period in which the guide flow path 652 is opened can be shortened, so that the ball is illegally entered into the second variable winning device 650 while the second specific winning port 650a is closed. Even if it is made possible, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the certainty change entrance ball opening 654. That is, fraud can be prevented.

  Thus, in the 12th round of the big hit A, the period in which the guide flow passage 652 provided on the left side of the flow passage switching valve 650d is opened, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened. The opening pattern of the second specific winning a prize mouth (second large opening mouth) 650a is set so that it almost does not overlap with the period of time being played (only for 0.2 seconds immediately after 12 rounds are started). Therefore, in many cases of the big hit A, since the ball does not enter the probability variation ball entrance 654 during the special game state (during the big hit), it is difficult to set the special symbol to the probability variation state after the big hit ends.

  It should be noted that the reason why the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened within 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12th round is to make it difficult to understand that the jackpot A is immediately after the start of the 12th round. Is. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16( b ), in the jackpot B in which it is easy to enter the ball into the probability variation entrance 654, the second specific winning opening (the second large opening opening) is started immediately after the start of the 12th round. ) 650a is opened. Therefore, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are expected to be the jackpot B of this time by sharing the operation of the second specific winning opening (second big opening mouth) 650a immediately after the start of the 12th round. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16( b ), a timing change between the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650 a and the passage switching valve 650 d in the 12th round of the big hit B will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 16(b) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (whether it is open or closed), and FIG. The lower diagram is a diagram showing the timing change of the flow passage switching valve 650d (whether the guide flow passage 652 on the left side downstream of the ball discharge port 650c is opened or the guide flow passage 653 on the right side is opened). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the 12th round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set to the open state. The open state is maintained until 5 seconds elapse from the start of the 12th round, and the closed state is set based on the elapse of 5 seconds. Even if 10 balls enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a before 5 seconds elapse, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a Will be closed. This closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next big round reaches 12 rounds.

  Further, as described above, the flow passage switching valve 650d is set to perform the same operation as the big hit A in the 12th round of the big hit B. That is, based on the start of the interval period set at the end of the eleventh round, the guide flow passage 653 provided on the right side of the flow passage switching valve 650d is closed so that the ball can flow down the left guide flow passage 652. (See FIG. 15B). Then, when 6.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, the flow path switching valve 650d switches in the opposite direction. That is, the guide flow passage 652 is closed by the flow passage switching valve 650d, and the sphere is allowed to flow down the guide flow passage 653 provided on the right side of the flow passage switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15(a)). Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the flow path switching valve 650d is maintained in that state (a state in which a sphere can flow down the guide flow path 653).

  As described above, in the 12th round of the big hit B, the period in which the guide flow passage 652 provided on the left side of the flow passage switching valve 650d is opened and the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a are opened. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set so as to overlap with the maximum period for 5 seconds. Therefore, in many cases of the big hit B, it is possible to put the ball into the certainty change entrance ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the big hit), so that the special symbol is set to the certain change state after the big hit ends. It will be easier.

  The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to this. The pattern may be arbitrarily set as long as it is possible to set a pattern in which a ball is hard to enter. Further, the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to the form of the present embodiment, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the balls can flow down the guide flow path 653 at the start of the 12th round (see FIG. 15A), and a predetermined time (for example, 6. The passage switching valve 650d may be set (see FIG. 15B) so that the sphere can flow down the guide passage 652 after 5 seconds).

Further, the number of rounds for opening the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to the 12th round, and may be set to any round. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured to be opened in a plurality of rounds, for example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the fifteenth round. It may be set to. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of causing the ball to enter the probability variation entrance ball opening 654, so that after the jackpot B ends, the special symbol can be more easily changed to the probability variation state. Therefore, although the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be inserted into the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, which reduces the motivation of the player for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first inlet 64.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 601, 602, 650a and the outlets 603a to 603c are guided to an unillustrated ball discharge path through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102 or the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box Cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 17). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, by the MPU 201, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device. Run.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, and a second per random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. Although the details will be described later together with the description of the first per random number counter C1, the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is one of the determination values defined in the per first random number table 202a. When it matches with, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18B) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is the big hit type. , And the special symbol is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first entrance 64) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49". Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of the big hit A, most of the period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round is the induction provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d. The flow path 653 is configured to be open (see FIG. 16A). Therefore, it becomes difficult to let the sphere flow down to the guide flow passage 652 provided on the left side of the flow passage switching valve 650d, so that the sphere is moved to the positive variation ball inlet 654 provided downstream of the guide flow passage 652. It becomes difficult to enter the ball. That is, in the case of the big hit A, after the big hit ends, it becomes difficult to shift to the special variation state of the special symbol.

  Further, the jackpot B is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "50 to 99" (see 202b2 of FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of the big hit B, all of the period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round is the induction provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d. It is configured so as to overlap with the period when the flow channel 652 is open (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened, the ball can be inserted into the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and the flow path switching valve 650d The sphere can be made to flow down to the guide flow channel 652 provided on the left side of the. Then, as described above, the positive variation inlet port 654 is provided downstream of the guide flow channel 652. Therefore, when it becomes the big hit B, after the big hit ends, it becomes easy to shift to the probability changing state of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the case where the special symbol 2 is drawn in the lottery (lottery based on the entry into the second entrance 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, The jackpot A is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 18B). In addition, the big hit B is associated and defined in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20 to 99". That is, in comparison with a case where the special symbol 1 is selected by a lottery, when the special symbol 2 is selected by a lottery, the number of determination values for the jackpot B is large. Therefore, the big hit B is more likely to be a big win when the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery.

  As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol is hit It is set to be long (1 second×2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second entrance 640, it is easy to perform the lottery for the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and when it is a big hit, the special symbol is likely to become a big hit B, and the special symbol is changed after the big hit. Since the jackpot B which tends to be in a state is easily repeated, the player can easily obtain a large amount of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The second random number table 202c (see FIG. 18(c)) is a data table in which normal symbol hit determination values are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is stipulated as the judgment value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C). Also, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, as a judgment value for hitting the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4, which is obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67, and the second per random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a hit.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In the main control device 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first per random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a second entered ball corresponding to winning in the first entrance port 64, which is composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning of the mouth 640 is provided respectively, and in each of these areas, at the timing of entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. In addition, the respective values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is normally filled with a sphere. The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the ball entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the per first random number counter C1 is When it matches the value of the random number which is a big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of being a low probability state of a special symbol), and at a high probability of a high probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol than at the time of that low probability (special. It is divided into two types, ie, a period for which the symbol has a high probability state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, if the special symbol is in the probability changing state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is "0 to 9". If it is determined and any one of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 399", the determination value that is a big hit is 10 of "0 to 9", so it is a big hit of the special symbol during the probability change of the special symbol. The probability of becoming is 1/40 (10/400). If the special symbol is in the low probability state, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is "200", and if "200", it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. The possible value of the first random number counter C1 is 400 of "0 to 399", and the judgment value that is a big hit is only one of "200", so the special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol The probability of a big hit is 1/400.

  In the present embodiment, a big hit random number value stored in the low-probability first random number table and a big random number value stored in the high-probability first random number table. Then, the random numbers that are big jackpots are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random number value for jackpot regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random number value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be apt to be fraudulently assigned. On the other hand, like the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value to be a big hit is changed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each of the timer interrupt processes in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the time when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, the special symbol 1 is selected by lottery, and in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is any of "0 to 49" is "big hit A". In addition, the special design 1 becomes a big hit by lottery, and the big hit type when the random number value is any of "50 to 99" is "big hit B". Further, the special symbol 2 is selected by lottery, and in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is any of "0 to 19" is "big hit A". Further, the special symbol 2 is selected by lottery, and the jackpot type when the random number value is any of "20 to 99" is "jackpot B".

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are two types, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and one type may be provided, or two or more types may be provided. Further, in the case where a big hit is obtained by the lottery for the special symbol 1 and a big hit is obtained by the lottery for the special symbol 2, the same big hit type is selected with the same value of the first hit type counter C2. You may. With this configuration, the amount of data in the first type selection table 202b can be reduced, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 as described above. ing.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "variation (for long time)", "variation (for short time)", "variation normal reach", and "variation superreach" are defined as variation patterns for deviation. , "Normal reach" types and "Super reach" types are defined as variation patterns for jackpots. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. , Is stored in the ordinary symbol storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number which is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined as the hit of the normal symbol. Further, the second random number table 202c is for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) (see 202c1 of FIG. 18C), and a hit of a normal symbol from the low probability. High probability at high probability (period of time saving state of normal symbols, and period of probability variation state of special symbols) (see 202c2 of FIG. 18(c)) and divided into two types and included in each The number of random numbers to be a big hit is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers to be a hit, at low probability of normal symbols (normal state of normal symbols) and at high probability of normal symbols (time saving state of ordinary symbols), the probability of winning Is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 18(c), at a low probability of a normal symbol, there are 24 random number values for winning the regular symbol, and the range is “5 to 28” (202c1 in FIG. 18(c)). reference). In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, while the total number of random number values is 240, the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the sphere passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired second per-random number counter C4 is within the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) The symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is opened for "0.2 seconds×1 time", but is released. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of the ordinary symbol (during the time reduction of the ordinary symbol, and during the probability change of the special symbol), there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5-204". . These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds→3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is "1 second x 2 times". However, the opening time and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the value of this counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 34) when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 33). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Details of various flags and counters stored in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. RAM203, as shown in FIG. 20, special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved sphere Number counter 203e, normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, action counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, probability variation valid flag 203o , A probability change valid timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, a time saving medium counter 203r, and a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a first entrance entrance. The respective values of the first per random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2, which are acquired based on winning in 64, are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the reserved 4th area, the areas having the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second entrance 640 are stored respectively. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storing area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding sphere storing area 203b, has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth Area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). The vacant areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 202b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while maintaining the winning order. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  Incidentally, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the case of the winning stored in another reserved area The shift processing of packing the data of No. 1 into the reserved area having the area number smaller by 1 is performed. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, the variable display of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting prize) (the first symbol) It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the three-symbol display device 81 up to four times. This special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time the sphere enters the first ball inlet 64 and the number of spheres of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 One is added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 26).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding sphere number command (see S211 in FIG. 26, S405 in FIG. 28). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the holding ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball count counter 203d is changed. The value of the sphere itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual sphere of the variable display held by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, it can be corrected by the command of the number of reserved balls to be received next.

  Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 every time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the holding sphere number pattern (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding sphere number notified by the display holding sphere number command.

  The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d in that the number of held spheres held is stored by winning in the second ball entrance 640. Since they are different, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is the maximum number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the normal ball entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 30).

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S705 of FIG. 31). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (FIG. 31). S703: No).

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is a probability variation state of a special symbol (during a probability variation of a special symbol). If the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is a probability variation state of the special symbol, and if it is OFF, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, when the probability variation setting flag 203h, which will be described later, is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, this probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (see S1304 in FIG. 37). In addition, the probability variation flag 203g is a big hit due to the special symbol lottery, and is set to OFF when the start of the big hit is set. In the initialized state (that is, the state in which the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed), the probability variation flag 203g is reset to off, and normal power failure occurs. In this case, the state immediately before the power cutoff is configured to be backed up.

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the probability variation gaming state is determined by whether or not the game ball has entered the certainty variation entrance ball 654 during the special gaming state (big hit state). .. When a game ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 654, the game ball is detected by a probability variation switch (not shown), and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to ON (see S1305 in FIG. 37). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to OFF in the initialized state.

  If the probability variation setting flag 202h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch has been passed before the power is cut off, and if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag is passed, the probability variation setting flag 203h is determined. May be configured to be officially turned on and returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation switch has been passed before the power is cut off can be determined based on whether the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an illegality in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch in one round during the big hit state (the 12th round of the big hit in the present embodiment). It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have flowed into the inside of the second variable winning a prize device 650 have been discharged by the total of the probability variation passage counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203q described later. This probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch is passed (S1411 in FIG. 38). In addition, after performing a process of determining whether or not the number of game balls that have flowed into the second variable winning device 650 and the number of discharged balls match, the initial value is reset to "0" (FIG. 39). S1511). The value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, its value is reset to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j, in each round in the jackpot game, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second winning port of the second variable winning device 650). This is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the large opening 650a. Specifically, based on the fact that a winning ball (not shown) provided in each of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a detects the entry of a ball, it is incremented by 1 and updated. (S1403 of FIG. 38). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (the value of the winning quantity counter 203j). ) And the number of discharged sheets (the total value of the discharged number counter 203q and the probability variation passage counter 203i) match, and then it is reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to 0.

  As described above, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, only the first specific winning opening (first large opening opening) 65a is opened, so in each of the above rounds, the winning number counter 203j is substantially Specifically, the number of balls that enter the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is counted. On the other hand, in the twelfth round, since only the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened, in the twelfth round, the winning number counter 203j is substantially the second specific winning opening (second The number of balls entering the large opening 650a is counted.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered either the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, the winning is achieved. Although it is configured to add 1 to the value of the number counter 203j, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are respectively entered. A separate counter may be provided to count the number of spheres.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the elapsed time after the guide flow passage 652 provided on the left side of the flow passage switching valve 650d is set to the open state (see FIG. 15B). . That is, the passage counter 611 is set to ON, and the elapsed time after the ball is set into the state where the ball can enter the probability variation ball opening 654 is counted (counted) by the operation counter 203k. In the pachinko machine 10, the passage solenoid 611 is turned on (excited) to turn the passage switching valve 650d clockwise around the switching shaft 650e as a rotation axis based on the completion of 11 rounds of the jackpot. The guide channel 652 is opened.

  In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to a period in which the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excited) is set at the end of the eleventh round. That is, a counter value corresponding to an interval period of 3 seconds before the start of the 12th round and a total of 9.5 seconds of 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round is set. On the other hand, in the process of S1409 of the winning process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off. The value of the operation counter 203k is backed up even if the power is cut off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to 0 which is an initial value.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in one round. It has been set to the closed state from. When the remaining sphere timer flag 203m is set to ON, the remaining sphere timer 203n described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 39). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the game balls that have flowed into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 has elapsed.

  The remaining ball timer 203n closes the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a after completion of one preset round (1 to 11 rounds, 13 to 15 rounds), or the second. It is necessary for the game ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged when the specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (12 rounds). This is a counter for determining whether time has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the game balls that have won the first variable winning device 81 are discharged is 2 seconds, and thus corresponds to 3 seconds (2 seconds + 1 second) with a 1 second margin added. The counter value is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n. When the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is updated and reaches the upper limit (3 seconds), the first variable winning device 65 (1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds) or the second variable winning device 650. It is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes for (12 rounds) and the number of discharged prizes match (S1507 of FIG. 39). Then, when it is determined that the winning number and the discharging number do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly inform that the ball clogging has occurred inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, the ball is left in the second variable winning device 650 in the 12 rounds of jackpot, and a shock or the like is given at the start timing of the next 12 rounds of jackpot to let the ball enter the certainty variation ball entrance 654. It can suppress cheating.

  If the number of winning coins does not match the number of ejected coins, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting is made even if the ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 654. The flag 203h may not be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being illegally given.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is confirmed that either the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is switched from the open state to the closed state. When detected, the remaining ball timer 203n has started updating the counter value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, separate counters may be provided for the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

  The probability variation effective flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the game ball when the game ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 654 after the flow path solenoid 611 is set to off. Is. When the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to ON, the sphere that has flown into the guide channel 652 (see FIG. 15B) is determined to be the probability variation ball because of the flow channel solenoid 611 being ON. It is shown that it is less than the time required to enter the mouth 654. That is, it indicates that the ball entering the certainty variation ball entrance 654 is a normal operation.

  The probability variation valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability variation validity flag 203o is set to ON. The probability variation effective timer 203p can determine the period required to normally enter the probability variation entry ball opening 654 after the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off. In the present embodiment, the time required for the sphere that has flowed into the guide flow path 652 to enter the certainty variation entry ball opening 654 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds added with a 0.2 second margin. If the ball enters the probability variation entrance slot 654 after the lapse of 1.2 seconds, it is highly likely that some fraudulent act has been performed, so the probability variation setting flag 203h is controlled not to be updated. ..

  As a result, in the state where the flow passage switching valve 650d closes the guide flow passage 652 (the state in which the sphere is not guided to the positive variation ball opening 654), the ball enters the positive variation ball opening 654 or the positive variation ball. From the downstream of the mouth 654, push up the game ball with a piano wire or the like to pass through the probability variation entrance ball opening 654, or erroneously detect that a ball has entered the probability variation entrance ball opening 654 by radio waves, etc. Can be suppressed.

  The discharged number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in one round. The first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are each provided with a ball discharge port switch (not shown) for detecting the discharge of a ball. The ejected number counter 203q increments the value by 1 each time the ball ejection switch detects ejection of a ball (see S1503 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, after it is determined whether the number of balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 and the number of discharged balls match, the value of the discharged number counter 203q is the initial value. Is reset to 0 (S1511 in FIG. 39).

  The time saving counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The time saving medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the big hit (see S1307 in FIG. 37). That is, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation game state is not set after the jackpot game, a time saving state of 100 normal symbols is given.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, etc. are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

  The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (complete loss, out-of-reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the judgment, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

  Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, the winning information storage area 223a, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, the fluctuation start flag 223d, and the stop type selection flag 223e. At least a probability variation state flag 223f, a time saving state counter 223g, a big hit medium flag 223h, and an allowable time counter 223i are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result or the like of the reserved balls before the start of variation.

  The special symbol 1 reservation sphere number counter 223b, similarly to the special symbol 1 reservation sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of balls to be held in the variable display is added due to a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), or in the main controller 110, a variable display in a special symbol. When the number of reserved balls is executed and is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command, The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere number counter 223b (see S1908 in FIG. 43). In this way, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b is used to display the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding sphere number command, the value of the holding sphere number indicated by the command, that is, the holding sphere for the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c stores the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b on the basis of the holding sphere number command output from the main control unit 110 to the number of holding spheres corresponding to the second special symbol. However, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 43), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 43). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 43), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2007 in FIG. 47). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (the big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The probability variation state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probability variation state of the special symbol. If the probability variation state flag 223f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state of the special symbol, and if it is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. The probability variation state flag 223f is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). Depending on the state of the probability variation state flag 223f, it is determined whether or not the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5(a)) displayed in the special symbol probability change state, or the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5(b)). Or whether to display.

  The time saving state counter 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the time saving state counter 223g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if it is off, it is in the normal state of the normal symbol (low probability state). The time saving state counter 223g is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). According to the state of the time saving state counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the present time is the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5(a)) displayed in the time saving state of the normal symbol, or the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5(b)). It is determined whether or not is displayed.

  The jackpot flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the special gaming state (big hit state). If this big hit flag 223h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state (big hit state), and if it is off, a state other than the special game state (big hit state) (probably changed state of special symbol, normal) Indicates either the time saving state of the design or the normal state). This mid-big hit flag 223h is set to ON when the opening command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1914 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to ON when the special game state (big hit state) is started. On the other hand, the jackpot flag 223h is set to OFF when the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to OFF when the special game state (big hit state) ends. A corresponding effect is set according to the state of the big hitting flag 223h. More specifically, it is determined whether to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6A) displayed in the special game state (big hit state), or the left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A). (See) is displayed or not.

  The allowable time counter 223i is configured such that the sphere that has flown into the guide passage 606 or the guide passage 607 immediately before the state of the storage valve 607a is switched to any of the inlets (the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602). It is a counter for counting the time until the ball is entered (ball throwing time). By counting the ball removal period, when the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is more accurately determined whether or not the entering ball is a normal operation. be able to. The permissible time counter 233i is set with a counter value corresponding to 1 second each time an opening command or an ending command is received (see S1914 and S1917 in FIG. 43). Also, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 42), is decremented by one each time (see S2015 in FIG. 47).

  As described above, when the storage valve 607a is closed, a ball enters the general winning opening 602 provided downstream of the storage valve 607a, or to the general winning opening 601 when the storage valve 607a is opened. A warning image (see FIG. 7(b)) is displayed when the sphere enters. However, when the sphere flows into the guide flow path 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning opening 602 after the storage valve 607a switches to the closed state. There is a case. Similarly, when the sphere flows into the guide flow path 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a is switched from the closed state to the open state, the sphere enters the general winning opening 601 after the storage valve 607a is switched to the open state. It may be a ball. In order to treat these as a normal ball entry (not display a warning image), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 607a is switched, a predetermined period (1 second) is set for the allowable time counter 233i. Set the corresponding counter value. Then, until the one second set as the counter value elapses, when the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is determined that the operation is normal (no warning image is displayed). Is configured.

  The winning number counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of times a ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in a big hit. The value of the prize number counter 223j is reset to 0 at the start of the big hit, and the value is set to 1 each time the prize information command corresponding to the ball to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is received in the big hit. Are added one by one (see S1944 in FIG. 45). As described above, in the present embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 6A). The winning number counter 223j is referred to in order to accurately update the number of winnings displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 43) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) Control) and notice production.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot of a special symbol is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is used as a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply device 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Note that, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to its nature, the NAND flash memory 234a has a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or uses the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to specify the data in one bank while the other bank is used. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 is first stored after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. As a result, the display control device 114 can be put into a state in which various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be set as appropriate according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to “0000H” by hardware and also designates the address “0000H” indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address “0000H” is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, not all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the address designation to the data output. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 designates the address "0000H" and then the instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start up the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  By the way, the boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed so as to be transferred to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234d1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a in accordance with the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a is transferred. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) executed after the boot process by the boot program (see S2201 in FIG. 49) stored in the program storage area 233a is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset, and the remaining boot programs are Even if stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small-capacity NOR ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time can be suppressed. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) transmitted from the MPU 231, and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays the image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until displaying some image on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 gives an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data source size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to the various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is stored.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and at power-on the main image area 235a, rear image area 235c, character pattern area. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f being provided, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on variation image that displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by the variation effect when the entry into the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2103 and S2104 in FIG. 48).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image on the third symbol display device. 81 to display.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control unit 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 which is the variation start instruction command, the display control unit 114 causes the power-on main image to be displayed. On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and alternately. Then, from the variation pattern command for display and the stop type command for display transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed in the main controller 110 is selected. Judgment the result, if it is "a big hit of the special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after stopping the fluctuating effect, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is stopped after the fluctuating effect. Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts its operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation is being performed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from being deteriorated.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and the entrance to the first entrance ball 64 or the second entrance 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn by using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the power-on variation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The MPU 231 gives an instruction to the image controller 237 so as to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, so the power-on is performed. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, the city, the sea, the sky, etc. are displayed. A right-hand navigation image (see FIG. 5A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as rear images.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, and therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 is used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as main symbols without numbers from "0" to "9", main symbols consisting of rear symbols such as a wooden box, characters such as rear symbols and planers, furoshiki, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after one variable effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without the number as the third symbol is displayed in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately even if the NAND ROM flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and includes at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data necessary for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and therefore the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image of one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame of the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately and designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. 223i, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. When all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110, and, for example, a variable effect and an opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is a big hit A and a big hit B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a that are normally closed are opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of notifying the player of the end of the special game state (big hit state).

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed after one variable effect was stopped. That is, the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall related person can recognize that the game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address representing a time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) As the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters, a boy image, a character used for various effects such as characters, and the like is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the semitransparent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image. This rear surface type displays one of the rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected from the player (one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”) or the rear surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

  When it is specified by this rear surface type to display any of the rear surfaces A to C, the MPU 231 specifies the rear surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the rear surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface image to be displayed is specified based on the back surface type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back side type and the range of the back side image corresponding to the back side type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is the drawing of the image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time since the display of the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position according to the back surface type (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed one before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd design is given a unique number, the variation design in the previous variation effect and the stop design according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are the 3rd design. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before is displayed. Even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted by switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is being performed this time, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing processing for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. ..

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, when the effect image is diversified, Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the presentation mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be realized can be realized for the first time based on the fact that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table is associated with an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data which means that is defined (corresponds to the address “0002H” in FIG. 23).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

  It should be noted that, as in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. At the same time, transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is stored in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is turned on in the main process (see FIG. 48) executed (see S2105 in FIG. 48). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3705 in FIG. 59(b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 50B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2408 of FIG. 50(b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 50B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 50(b) S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 59A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 59B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, in which the instruction contents of the image drawing for is written is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 specifies the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. The image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. For specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (see FIG. )), the pointer update processing (see S3305 in FIG. 58) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list described later. (See FIG. 24), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before drawing of a predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Here, details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 24, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, (Pattern 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,...), number of retained balls symbol 1, number of retained balls symbol 2,..., error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information specified by the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of another image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays a hold sphere count symbol). And detailed warning information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing the image for one frame based on the image and the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an error, and the detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) in the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball number pattern 1, reserved ball number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e includes transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. )), the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 each time (see S3307 in FIG. 56). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processing that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 60). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 60). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands an image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process for expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and the image is displayed to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 50B) is executed (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 25 to 39. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through with the passage of the ball in the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. Gate passing processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, respectively. After the through-gate passage processing is executed, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 with the touch sensor 51a, and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch a sphere when the launch of the sphere is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed at 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) is being displayed, and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e which shows the value of reservation sphere number command (special figure 2 reservation sphere number command) is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e are extracted from the holding ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) Is acquired (S208), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). By the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) is decremented by 1 (S210). , A special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) changed by calculation is set a holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and in the case of a special symbol big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37. If the jackpot B is a big hit, the red LED is turned on, and if the jackpot is off, the green LED is turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

  After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot for the special symbol (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening the specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the jackpot start is set (S218). The open scenario specifically indicates the setting of the open pattern of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. That is, in the first to eleventh rounds and the thirteenth to the fifteenth rounds, the first specific winning opening (first opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). In this way, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set to be opened in a pattern according to the big hit type (see FIG. 16) in the 12th round. When the process of S218 ends, the notification counter corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S219), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, if the result of this lottery is out (S216: No),
It is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203r is 1 or more (S220), and when it is determined that the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S220: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203r is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S221), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 hold sphere storage area 203b, a lottery for "special symbol jackpot" or "out of special symbol" (judgment determination) is performed, and first It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. , The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302), and if it is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the high probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained from the first hit random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 defined in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is equal to the random number value to be the hit. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have the same determination value as a jackpot, but depending on whether the lottery is for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2. Different random number values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value that is determined to be out of the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have the same determination value as the jackpot, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 The number of determination values that are a big hit may be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big jackpots.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not on (that is, it is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability game state), Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value for the special symbol big hit, one of "200" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value for this hit match, the special symbol big hit It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  And the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304, it is determined whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). , A display mode at the time of a big hit showing a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and a special symbol of two types (big hit) Of A and jackpot B), the jackpot type is determined.

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Note that, as described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

  The variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, "variation (for long time)", "variation (for short time)", "variation normal reach", Various "outside super reach" and "outside special reach" are stipulated. In addition, as variation patterns for both jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of "common normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are defined, and various variation patterns for "big reach B" include "special reach". The "variable normal reach" types, "shared super reach" types, and "shared special reach" types are stipulated as the variation patterns for both common and out-of-range.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, front/rear outreach, reach other than front/rear outreach, or complete outreach is set.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 34), these commands are sent to the voice lamp controller 113. Sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. , Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process of the values when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is 4 If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold The value (N1) of the sphere counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the number of reserved balls command is set in the process of S405, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. , The special symbol 1 holding sphere storing area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in each process of S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. The respective processes of S407 to S412 are different only in that a process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball entrance 640 is executed, and other processes are different from the respective processes of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When each processing of S407 to S412 is completed, the prefetch processing is executed (S413), and this processing is completed.

  Next, the prefetch processing (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this prefetching process (S413). The prefetching process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 28).

  In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), and either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is determined. However, if there is no new winning (S501: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), whether the game state at the start of fluctuation is the probability change state of the special symbol or not. It is determined (S502) and if the special symbol is in the probable variation state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the special variation state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is S505. Transition to. In the process of S505, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which is the determination result of the big hit, is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. It is included during the operation. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hitting (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and when it is determined that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is (S608: Yes), the present is now the jackpot of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not it is in progress (S609). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37, and the big symbol of the special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) is being displayed, and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. If the result of determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is to make it easier for the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state). That is, if it is easy to hit the normal symbol, the ball hit to the right easily enters the second winning opening 640, and thus the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. And the ball becomes hard to reach. Therefore, during the special gaming state (during the big hit state), the probability of hitting a normal symbol is prevented from increasing, and the ball is configured to easily reach the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. There is.

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not during the special symbol big hit, and since the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is acquired by the process of S607. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", Normally it is determined that the design is off (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low value. Based on the second random number table for probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 determines whether or not it is a hit of the normal symbol (S612), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the processing of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be lit up as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, when it hits the ordinary symbol, as in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, The number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so the second entrance The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set. The time is set to 0.2 seconds, the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device The variation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal time saving state of the symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 is extremely long, which is "0.2 seconds x 1 → 1 second x 2", the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the variation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is missed and the display mode is set by the processing in S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol (this time lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. A determination is made (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S625, the opening/closing of the electric accessory is opened when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 25), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through-gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through-gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball does not pass through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, the ball normally passes through the ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the number of reserved balls counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the empty holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the first area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait until the sub-side control device (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) becomes operable, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off was not normally completed, the processing is also shifted to S912 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S911, S911) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is opened for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S911, S912) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). . In the RAM initialization processing (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is performed, the storage valve 607a is set to be closed (S913), and the process proceeds to S914.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S914. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S914, a command (state command) for notifying the game state at the time of power restoration is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S914). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in a probability changing state, whether or not it is a time saving state of a normal symbol, the number of times of saving and saving of a normal symbol, and the like. A state command is generated according to the value of the hour/hour counter 203r and the state of the probability variation flag 203g, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can match the recognition of the game state. Therefore, even though the special symbol is in a low probability state, the right-hand navigation (see FIG. 5(a)) is displayed, or conversely, the player is in a state where the special symbol is in the probable change state, It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed when the right-handed is performed. That is, it is possible to match the game state with the effect to be executed.

  When the process of S914 ends, a production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions (S915). Then, the interrupt is permitted (S916), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved symbol number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) and the start winning process (see FIG. 28) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the Jackpot control for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a of the second variable winning device 650. Processing is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, according to the opening scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) for each round of the jackpot state, the opening of the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a, And set the closure. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, the opening/closing control of the electric auditors is started when the opening/closing control start of the electric auditors is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30). The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main processing is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, in the first symbol display device 37, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ends. The variation display being executed is ended, and in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37. Display (lighting display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( (Lit display).

  Next, based on the stored winning detection information, a winning information command setting process for notifying the voice lamp controller 113 of the winning information is executed (S1008). Based on the prize information command set by the prize information command setting process (S1008), the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a defect in the storage valve 607a. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the player is performing an irregular game (left-handed during a big hit state, left-handed in a special variation state of special symbols, etc.).

  When the process of S1008 ends, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 and 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the processing of S1009, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 32 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1014). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), the access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the endless loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  Note that the processing of S1009 is at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the start-up processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing malfunction or runaway of the main control device 110.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 34), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the first specific winning a prize. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, if the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102).

  The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the opening command for display, the opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1102 ends, next, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 is set to open (S1103), and the present process ends. As described above, by opening the storage valve 607a, the balls that have entered the storage device 600 can flow down the guide flow path 607, so that the number of prize balls to be paid out is large (15). It becomes possible to enter a ball into 602 (see FIG. 9B).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, in the special game state, aiming at the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a in order to win the prize ball. A part of the filled sphere enters the storage device 600. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to the prize ball based on the ball entering the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, a general winning provided in the storage device 600. It is possible to make the player obtain a prize ball based on the entrance into the mouth (high-value winning hole) 602. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained from the start to the end of the jackpot can be increased, so that the player can enjoy playing the jackpot more enjoyably. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the jackpot is finished, a specially changed state of the special symbol or a time saving state of the ordinary symbol is given. As described above, in these states, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so the player tries to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by right-handing. Yes (try to win the special symbol 2 lottery). Thereby, in many cases, the sphere can be flowed into the storage device 600 before the next big hit is started. Then, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state, so that the balls are stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a until the next big hit. Therefore, when the next big hit occurs and the storage valve 607a is opened, the stored balls flow down to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. That is, the player can obtain a large amount (15) of prize balls immediately after the jackpot is started. Therefore, in a situation in which the jackpot is won but the balls are exhausted, it is possible to secure the balls to play the jackpot game without newly requesting to lend the balls.

  In the process of S1101, if the special symbol big hit is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol big hit is in progress (S1104). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37, and the big symbol of the special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) is being displayed, and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1104, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1104: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S1104 that the special symbol is in a big hit (S1104: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation for setting the operations of the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, the flow path switching valve 650d, etc. The setting process is executed (S1105), and this process ends.

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process (S1105) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the jackpot operation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the newly-started jackpot is the 12th round (S1201), and it is not the 12th round (that is, 1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds). (S1201: No), the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that it is the twelfth round (S1201: Yes), the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a according to the jackpot type is read (S1203). Accordingly, in the case of the big hit A, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16A is executed, and in the case of the big hit B, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16B is executed. Next, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid 611 is set (S1202). That is, it is set so that the guiding flow path 652 is closed 6.5 seconds after the 12th round is started. Next, the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a read by the processing of S1203 is set (S1205), and the processing proceeds to S1206.

  In the process of S1206 executed after the process of S1202 or S1205 is finished, a round number command indicating a newly started round is set (S1206), and the process is finished. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends midway. Such problems can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), is it the operation timing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path solenoid 611? It is determined (S1107). When it is determined that it is the operation timing in the process of S1107 (S1107: Yes), the corresponding solenoid is set to ON (S1108).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1108). Specifically, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed based on the completion of 15th round which is the final round of the big hit, and the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. When the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) for discharging the balls that have flowed into the interior of the game has elapsed, it is determined that the ending effect start timing. When it is determined by the process of S1108 that it is the ending effect start timing (S1108: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1109), and the present process is ended.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (S1110). In the ending process (S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set (S1301). The ending command set here is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp control in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1301 is completed, next, the storage valve 607a that was set to the open state at the start of the jackpot is set to the closed state (S1302). As described above, the closed state of the storage valve 607a continues until the next big hit. As a result, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), even if a ball is made to flow into the storage device 600, it is blocked by the storage valve 607a, so that the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is obtained. The ball cannot be made to flow down. That is, since the balls enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of prize balls, the merit of putting the balls into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state (normal game state), by aiming at the storage device 600 at all times, an irregular game method in which the number of balls is increased only by paying out the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is fundamental. In a state other than the special game state (big jackpot state), the lottery for the special symbol can be performed to expect the jackpot to be played.

  As described above, the storage device 600 is configured such that one ball enters approximately three right-handed balls. The number of prize balls paid out when the player enters the general prize hole (small value prize hole) 601 is three. That is, even if the player hits the ball right in the normal state, it is difficult to draw the special symbol, and it is also impossible to increase the number of balls by paying out based on the winning of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. This eliminates the merit of hitting right in the normal state, and allows the player to play a game aiming for a big hit by lottery of special symbols.

  Also, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), a part of the ball that has been right-handed enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. In the time saving state (that is, in a state where the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 provided on the right path of the game board 13 is easily opened), the ball holding is further improved by right-handing. Can be made Therefore, even if the special symbol is changed to a certain state or the normal symbol becomes a time saving state and the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, the number of balls held is gradually reduced, and it is in an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the player cannot feel it. Therefore, in the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the player can continue the game without reducing the balls.

  It should be noted that the number of prize balls for the balls to enter the general prize hole (small value prize hole) 601 may be reduced (for example, the number of prize balls may be one). With this, in the probability changing state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, it is possible to more reliably prevent the payout amount from becoming too large and the number of balls to be held being excessive. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall. In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, and in the normal state of the ordinary symbol (that is, the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640), the merit of right-handing can be further reduced.

  When the process of S1302 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1303). Since it means that the player has entered the ball, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1304). As a result, after the jackpot, the special symbol shifts to the probability changing state. After the processing of S1304, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF (S1305), the status command including the information indicating that the probability variation status of the special symbol is set is set (S1306), and this processing ends. ..

  On the other hand, in the process of S1303, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1303: No), it means that the ball has not entered the probability variation entrance port 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot. In order to set the time saving period of 100 times the normal symbol after the jackpot, 100 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203r (S1307). Then, a state command including information indicating that the time saving state has been set is set (S1308), and this processing ends. The status command set in the process of S1306 or S1308 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. That is, the timing at which the probability variation flag 203g is turned on can be matched regardless of the timing at which the ball enters the probability variation entry ball opening 654. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probability variation game state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the ball can be thrown into the probability variation entrance ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot state), the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is finished. During the state), it is possible to make an interest in whether or not a ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 654.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then a ball is thrown into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a (winning) or a certain change A winning process is executed to monitor the winning (winning) of the ball into the ball entrance 654 (S1111). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (S1111).

  In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the round game is a set period (round valid period) (S1401). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a period from setting the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered either the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a ( S1402). In the processing of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403). , And the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: No), the processing of S1403 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1404. And transition.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a that is set to the open state is closed. Is set (S1406). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it is determined that it is during the ball removal time for discharging the balls remaining inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. it can.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) which is a period until each round of the jackpot is finished. It is determined whether or not (second) has elapsed (S1405). In the process of S1405, when it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1406. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the motion counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408), and when it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes), The value of the motion counter 203k is updated by subtracting 1 (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not the player has entered the probability variation entrance 654 (whether or not the probability variation switch (not shown) has passed) (S1410). ). When it is determined that the sphere has passed the probability variation switch (S1410: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1411), and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412). The process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that the sphere does not pass through the probability change switch (S1410: No), the processes of S1411 and S1412 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1413.

  In the processing of S1413 executed after the processing of S1410 or S1412, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413), and when it is determined that it is not 0 (S1413: No), this processing is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1413, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413: Yes), the flow passage solenoid 611 is set to OFF to close the guide flow passage 652 (S1414), and the positive change effective. The flag 203o is set to ON (S1415), and this processing ends. The probability variation valid flag 203o is set to ON in the process of S1415, so that the sphere remaining in the guidance flow channel 652 remains the probability variation switch even after the flow channel switching valve 650d is switched and the guidance flow channel 652 is closed. When passing, the probability variation setting flag 203h can be set to ON (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit).

  In the process of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1416). Then, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203o is not on (that is, it is off) (S1416: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1416: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p (S1417). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S1418), and when the value is determined to be the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation valid The flag 203o is set to off (S1419). Thereby, even if the passage of the probability variation switch is detected, the value of the probability variation setting flag 203h is controlled not to be updated. As described above, when the passage of the probability variation switch is detected after the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p reaches the upper limit value, there is a high possibility that the detection is due to some dishonest act. Therefore, by turning off the probability variation valid flag 203o, updating of the probability variation setting flag 203h is prohibited, and fraud is suppressed.

  When the process of S1419 ends, then the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S1420), and the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value (less than the upper limit value) (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1410 described above.

  As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variation switch, and thus the probability variation state of the special symbol can be set in consideration of the time of the ball brush. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time in which passage of the probability variation switch is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being illegally passed through the probability variation switch and to be provided with the probability variation state of the special symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1111) is executed, then, an abnormal process for detecting an abnormality that occurs during the special gaming state (big hit state) is executed (S1112), and this process is ended. Here, the details of the abnormality processing (S1112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112).

  In the abnormality processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1501), and if it is determined that the round is not in the valid period (S1501: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1501: Yes), whether or not the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch provided in the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650. It is determined (S1502). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (S1502: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed the ball outlet switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504), and when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1504: No), this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball is out of the ball, and the remaining ball timer 203n that counts the ball out period is incremented by one. And update (S1505). Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n after the update is the upper limit value (that is, whether 3 seconds have elapsed since the closing of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a was set). However, if it is determined that the upper limit value is not reached (3 seconds have not elapsed) (S1506: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1505, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of discharged balls (the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203q) is It is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes (the value of the winning number counter 203j) matches (S1507).

  In the process of S1507, when it is determined that the number of discharged balls and the number of winning balls are the same (S1507: Yes), the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of discharged balls and the number of winning balls do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the error display (for example, the character of the winning number mismatch error is displayed) is set, and the output of the error signal is set to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the first variable winning device 65 and prevent the game ball from passing through the probability variation switch.

  In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1510). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203q, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1511), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the winning information command setting process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. As described above, the prize information command setting process (S1008) is a process for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the passing state of a ball to various prize openings (ball entrances).

  In the prize information command setting process, first, the prize detection information stored in the switch reading process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is read (S1601). Then, it is determined whether or not there is new winning detection information (whether there is a new winning for any of the entrances) (S1602), and if there is no new winning detection information (S1603), it remains as it is. This process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that new winning detection information is present (S1602: Yes), the winning entrance (winning opening) in which the winning (winning) is detected according to the new winning detection information. The winning information command including the information of is set (S1603). In addition, this winning information command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, and each winning opening, out opening, and the like are associated with each bit of 2 bytes. Then, the bit corresponding to the winning opening (winning entrance) that has detected the winning (winning) of the ball is set to 1, and the bit corresponding to the winning opening (winning entrance) in which the ball is not entered is 0. After being set, it is output as a winning information command. When the process of S1603 is completed, the saved winning detection information is cleared (S1604), and this process is completed.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a defect in the intellectual storage device 600, whether the player is playing an irregular game, or the like, in accordance with the prize information command. Then, when a defect or the like has occurred, a display error command corresponding to the type of the defect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display error command, the error is notified in the third symbol display device 81.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47. The processes of the MPU 221 are roughly classified into a startup process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the startup process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 41, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1701). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1816 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing (see FIG. 42). ) Is started during the execution of () is determined (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1813 in FIG. 42), the power-off process of S1816 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1816 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1702: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off in S1816 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1706. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power shutdown). Then, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1516 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1702: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1816, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1704, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, and it is confirmed whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1706). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

  In the process of S1708, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1816 is executed (see S1815 in FIG. 42). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1816 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1708 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1816 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and then the interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing the commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the startup process of this time is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and therefore the process of S1704 to S1706 is performed. This is a case where processing has been reached or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1709, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1710, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710). Next, the probability variation state flag 223f and the probability variation state counter 223g are updated according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S1711), interrupt permission is set (S1712), and the main processing is performed. Transition. By updating the probability variation state flag 223f and the probability variation state counter 223g based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1709 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1704 when the processing of S1704 is passed through the processing of S1704 to the processing of S1708. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started, or since the process of S1801 this time has been executed (S1801), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1811 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1810. In the process of S1801, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1802 to S1810, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S1811, and the variable display setting process of S1812 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1811 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1812 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. On the basis of the above, it is possible to make the setting regarding the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1812 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the power-on notification process is not performed and the process proceeds to S1805.

  In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number of holding balls counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring/production process corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed by monitoring the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1808), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1809, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed on the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S1809 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1811). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the process proceeds to S1812. In the process of S1812, the variable display setting process is executed (S1812). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variable display setting process ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1813). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1815), and the power-off process is executed (S1816). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1817), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information about the occurrence of power failure is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1814), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1814: No), the process returns to S1801 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1814: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the command determination processing (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1811). This command determination processing (S1811) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. This is processing for.

  In the command determination process, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1901). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1903). Return to main processing. The fluctuation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1907). When the reserved ball count command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball count command is the special map 1 reserved ball count command or the special map 2 reserved ball count command. , The value included in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of times N1 the variable display is held in the special symbol variable display), or the special symbol 2 holding ball of the main control device 110 The value of the number counter 203e (the number N2 of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). In addition, in the processing of S1908, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c that have been updated are set to the display holding sphere number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the respective values. After the processing of S1908 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640 (start prize), or when the special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time the start winning is detected, or every time the special symbol is selected, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the process of S1908. The value of the number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved sphere counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of the detection of the start winning or the lottery of the special symbol. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the process of S1908 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1907, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1907: No), it is then determined whether the status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1909). Then, when the status command is received (S1909: Yes), the probability variation status flag 203f and the time saving status counter 203g are updated according to the gaming status notified by the status command (S1910), and this processing ends. .

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1909, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1909: No), it is then determined whether the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1911). When the winning information command is received (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning is a normal winning based on the winning information command, and if there is a possibility of malfunction or fraud, an error is notified. The error notification process for executing is executed (S1912), and this process is ended.

  on the other hand. In the processing of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command is not received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether the opening command is received (S1913), and if the opening command is received ( (S1913: Yes), the jackpot flag 223h is set to ON, and the counter value (1000) corresponding to 1 second is set to the value of the allowable time counter 223i (S1914). Then, the opening command for display is set (S1915), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an opening effect for notifying the start of the big hit.

  In the processing of S1913, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), it is then determined whether the ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1916). When it is determined that the ending command has been received in the process of S1916 (S1916: Yes), the big hit medium flag 223h is set to OFF, and the counter value corresponding to the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 1 second (1000). Is set (S1917), the ending command for display is set (S1918), and this processing ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an ending effect for notifying the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1916, if the ending command has not been received (S1911: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed (S1919). ), and returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed controlled. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the details of the error notification process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, this error notification process is a process for notifying an error when there is a possibility of malfunction or fraud. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this error notification processing (S1912).

  In the error notification process (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 223h is ON (S1931), and if it is ON (S1931: Yes), the winning information notified by the received winning information command is included. It is determined whether or not the winning information for the first entrance 64 is included (S1932). Then, when it is determined that the winning information for the first entrance 64 is included (S1932: Yes), the player left-hands while the jackpot is in effect, resulting in the first entrance 64. Means that a ball has entered. That is, the player is performing a game method (how to hit) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a despite the special game state (big hit state). Means that the person is losing. Therefore, in order to allow the player to win the prize ball in the special game state (big hit state), the display error command corresponding to the left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7A) is set (S1933), and the processing is performed. To S1934.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, the left strike warning image (FIG. 7A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display rear image change command. This left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A) can prompt the player who is left-handed in the special game state (big hit state) to make a right-handed hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing, and to obtain the prize ball more reliably.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1932, when it is determined that the winning information command does not include the winning information corresponding to the entry into the first entrance 64 (S1932: No), the processing of S1933 is skipped and the processing is executed. To S1934.

  In the process of S1934, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1934), and if the counter value is 0 (S1934: Yes), a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a during the big hit. If there is a hit, the hit notification processing is executed (S1935), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1934: No), the pitching period (1 second) after the storage valve 607a is set to the open state is set. Since it means that the time has not elapsed, the process of S1935 is skipped and this process is ended. That is, when a sphere that has flown in (progressed) into the guide flow path 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a is opened enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 during the pitching period, there is a problem. It is prevented from being judged.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1931, when it is determined that the mid-big hit flag 223h is not on (off) (S1931: No), it is determined whether the value of the allowable time counter 233i is 0 (S1936), When it is determined to be 0 (S1936: Yes), in the normal time (either the specially changed state of the special symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol, or the normal state), the storage valve 607a is informed when a malfunction occurs. The normal notification processing for performing the above is executed (S1937), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1936: No), the ball is blown after the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state based on the end of the big hit. Since it means that the period (1 second) has not elapsed, the process of S1937 is skipped, and this process is ended. That is, when a ball that has flown (progressed) into the guide flow path 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a is closed enters the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 during the pitching period, there is a problem. It is prevented from being judged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the hit notification processing (S1935) for giving notification when a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a during a big hit will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the hit notification processing (S1935).

  In the winning notification process (S1935), first, in the winning information command determined to be received in the process of S1911 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43), the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is entered. It is determined whether or not the corresponding winning information is included (S1941). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1941: Yes), even during the big hit when the storage valve 607a is supposed to be opened. Regardless, it means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided downstream of the guide flow path 606. That is, the storage valve 607a is no longer opened due to a failure of the storage valve 607a, and the state in which the sphere is stored above the storage valve 607a continues, and as a result, the sphere is guided to the guide flow path 606. There is a nature. Therefore, in this case, the display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1942), and this processing is ended.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7(b)) for notifying that the storage valve 607a is defective in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display error command is displayed. Is displayed.

  Although the sphere that has flowed into the guide flow path 606 may also enter the out port 603a arranged on the left side of the general winning opening 601 in the storage device 600, The corresponding winning information is not a target for determining whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because a small percentage of the spheres that flow down to the outlet 603a out of the spheres that flow into the guide flow path 606, most of them enter the general winning a prize (small value winning a prize) 601 and the big hit. This is because a large number of spheres flow into the storage device 600, so that it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a defect has occurred by monitoring the general winning a prize opening (small value winning a prize opening) 601. In addition, by determining only the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, it is not necessary to perform the processing of determining whether or not the player has entered the out opening 603a. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the processing of S1941, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1941: No), then the received winning information command is It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry into the winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included (S1943), and the winning corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 If the information is included (S1943: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the winning number counter 223j (S1944). Then, in order to update the image in the big hit in accordance with the value of the updated winning number counter 233j, the display rear image change command is set (S1945).

  The display rear image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. , To the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, the display content of the winning number display area MA in the third symbol display device 81 is updated by receiving this display back image change command. More specifically, after the image in which the number of times the player has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (the number of EXTRA BONUS) shown in FIG. 6B is displayed for a certain period of time, the image is updated. The image shown in FIG. 6(a) corresponding to the number of incoming balls afterward is displayed. By displaying the number of winnings for the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the jackpot in the winning number display area MA, it is possible to hit the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a in the big hit. Apart from this, the player can be made aware of the number of times the player has won the prize ball. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the number of times of entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 will increase. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 604a when the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included. However, the display error command may be set even when the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the entry into the outlet 603a. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and surely determine that a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

  Next, referring to FIG. 46, in order to notify when a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a in a normal time (either a special variation state of a special symbol, a time saving state of a normal symbol, or a normal state). The normal notification process will be described. In this normal time notification process (S1937), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation state flag 223f is on (S1951), and if it is determined not to be on (S1951), the current state is not the special symbol probability variation state (S1951). Since it means a low probability state of the special symbol), it is then determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952). In the process of S1952, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is 0 (S1952: No), it is neither the probability variation state of the special symbol at present nor the time saving state of the normal symbol (which is the normal state). means.

  In this case, in order to determine whether or not the player is making a right hit, and whether or not there is a problem in the operation of the storage valve 607a, first, the general winning a prize (large value It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the winning in the winning opening) 602 is included (S1953). When it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the winning in the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1953: Yes), the ball is not in the special gaming state (big hit state). Is flowing downstream from the position where it should be closed by the storage valve 607a. That is, it is highly possible that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed or that the player has entered the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by an illegal method. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1954), and this processing is ended.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7(b)) for notifying that the storage valve 607a is defective in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display error command is displayed. Is displayed.

  It should be noted that the spheres that have flown into the guide flow path 607 while the storage valve 607a is still open due to a malfunction are the outlets 603b arranged on the left and right of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. , 603c may be entered, but the winning information corresponding to the entry into the outlets 603b, 603c is not a target for determining whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because a small percentage of the spheres that flow down to the outlets 603b and 603c out of the spheres that flow into the guide flow path 607, and most of the spheres enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. This is because it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a defect has occurred by monitoring the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. Further, by determining only the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, it is not necessary to perform the processing of determining whether or not the player has entered the out outlets 603b and 603c. Since it improves, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In addition, in the processing of S1953, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included in the winning information command (S1953: No), then the general winning is performed. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry into the mouth (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955), and if it is determined that the winning information is not included, this processing is ended as it is. ..

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955: Yes), in normal time (probably changed state of special symbol, It means that the player is making a right-handed stroke, regardless of whether the symbol is in a time-saving state or in a normal state. That is, it means that it is difficult for the player to enter the ball into the second entrance 640, and the player is playing the game by a game method in which the chance of receiving the lottery for the special symbol is small. Therefore, in this case, by displaying a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) that prompts the player to aim the first entrance 64 by left-handedly and play the game, It is possible to prevent the person from losing and receive a lottery for the special symbol 1.

  When it is determined in the processing of S1951 that the probability variation state flag 223f is ON (S1951: Yes), or when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 in the processing of S1952 (S1952: Yes), It is determined whether or not the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to a ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (S1957). Then, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1957: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1957, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the winning in the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included (S1957: Yes), it is not the special gaming state (big hit state). Nevertheless, it means that the ball is flowing down to the downstream side of the storage valve 607a. That is, it is possible that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed or the player illegally put the ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with the storage valve 607a closed. high. Therefore, in this case, the display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1958), and this processing is ended.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7(b)) for notifying that the storage valve 607a is defective in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display error command is displayed. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine that a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 604a when the entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included. However, the display error command may be set even when the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to a ball entering the outlets 603b and 603c. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and surely determine that a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1812). This fluctuation display setting process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S2006 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then, in the processing of S1903 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 43), the fluctuation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2004). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is used so that the variation display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2005). In the process of S2005, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a to the execution area side is performed. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area→execution area, second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2006.

  In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2006: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus S2007 to S2013. The respective processes up to are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2007), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43), The stop type in the fluctuating effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2008), and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is used as it is for the fluctuating effect in the third symbol display device 81. It is set as a stop type (S2008). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2009). In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variable effect is controlled.

  When the process of S2009 ends, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223g is greater than 0 (S2010: No), and when it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S2010: No), the process proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is larger than 0 (S2010: Yes), first, the value of the time saving state counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S2011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 203g after the subtraction is 0 (S2012), and when it is determined to be 0 (S2012), the time saving state of the normal symbol is changed to the normal state of the normal symbol (low. Since it means that the back image has been switched to the probability state), a back image change command for switching to the back image corresponding to the normal state is set (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2014.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2012, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is not 0 (S2012: No), it means that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, so the back surface corresponding to the time saving state of the normal symbol No need to change from image. Therefore, in this case, the process of S2013 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2014.

  The back image displayed during the time saving state is specifically the back image on which the right-hand navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the big hit ends, it is switched to the rear surface type in which the right hit navigation is displayed regardless of the big hit type. Then, when the time saving state of the normal symbol is finished, the right-side navigation is switched to the rear image for the normal state in which the navigation is not displayed. In addition, if the special symbol probability change state after the jackpot is over, the probability change state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot, so the right-handed navigation is not changed from the rear surface type.

  In the process of S2014, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is larger than 0 (S2014), and when it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S2014: Yes), the value of the allowable time counter 223i is set to 1 Subtracting and updating (S2015), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is 0 (S2014: No), the process of S2015 is skipped and this process is ended. By the processes of S2014 and S2015, the value of the allowable time counter 223i can be updated periodically.

  In the present embodiment, the probability change state of the special symbol and the rear face type set in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol are common, but different rear face types may be displayed. As a result, a wide variety of effects can be realized. Further, the remaining time saving period may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the time saving state counter 203g. This allows the player to easily recognize the remaining time saving period.

  In the present embodiment, the allowable time counter 223h is updated in the variable display setting process (S1812), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the update may be performed in the processing (sound editing/output processing, liquid crystal effect execution management processing, etc.) executed every 1 ms in the main processing (see FIG. 42). This allows the allowable time counter 223h to be updated regularly.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 61. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to “0000H” according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  If all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address designated by the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released, so that the NOR type ROM operates at high speed. Since the memory can read data, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2101), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2101) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring and storing to the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2201). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2202). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2201.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2202, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2202, subsequently, according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2203). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing required for the boot processing (S2204), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2101 in FIG. 48). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2102 of FIG. 48) (S2205), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2201), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the work storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 49, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be processed subsequent to the process of S1902. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2203 to S2205 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2201 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, by this, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2201. Alternatively, the processing of S2203 to S2205 may be executed after repeating the processing a plurality of times including the processing of S2202.

  As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2203 to S2205 without performing the processes of S2201 and S2202. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is completed, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2102). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233 and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, immediately after the power is turned on, by checking whether the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 is It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2103). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, it transfers transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2103, then the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2104). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller stores image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2104, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2105). Accordingly, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 59(a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 59A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), the simple command determination process (see FIG. 50) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) is drawn. 50(b) S2408) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 50B S2409) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, like the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on variation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a hall person, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player stays resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without any fear that the operation is stopped.

  Further, also in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without any problem when the power is turned on. That is, it is possible to immediately check that the operation check efficiency is not deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  In the display controller 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball (start prize) in the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When it is received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation is performed. You can direct. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple change effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that the main image continues to be displayed at power-on time after power-on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2105, the interrupt permission is set (S2106), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set in the process of S2106, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2301), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 50B is a flow chart showing this V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer storing the image information being displayed in response to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 50B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so not the power-on image but the normal effect image is the third design. A command determination process (S2402) is executed to display on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S2403) is executed.

  In the command determination processing (S2402), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 milliseconds. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2403), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2402) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.

  After the display setting process is executed, next, a task process is executed (S2404). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2403) or the simple display setting process (S2409). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, a transfer setting process is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously operated. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2404), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405). 24, and sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As the counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, out-of-front reach, reach other than out-of-front reach, complete) The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to (off, chance) are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2408) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2409) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2404.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2402) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 51, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502), and then the command The type of each unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2503).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2504), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2504: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2505), the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2601).

  Here, since the determination of the start of variation is always made in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display variation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination processing is performed. When executing, it is not possible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is erroneously displayed. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation control having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variation display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2601 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the process of S2601 is turned on, and other variations are performed. The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2603). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S2603, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2604), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2605). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2606), the fluctuation pattern command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2605 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in step S3, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 and the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S2604 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2504, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2506), If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2507) and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, details of the stop type command process (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside reach, complete disconnection, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. (S2701), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S2702).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. Is set (S2703), and this processing ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is described. In the above-described task process (S2404), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is identified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2703, and the identification thereof is performed. The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

  It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of the fluctuation at a time of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2701, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2702.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" is displayed, and the player may confuse the pachinko machine 10 with "a special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the "special symbol big hit", the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, which can please the player.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2506, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2508), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S2508: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to S2501.

  Details of the opening command process (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. The opening command process is a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the processing of S2801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2805), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, and therefore the read speed is slow, so that the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is effected. It takes a long time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the newly started round number is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the timing at which the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is finished, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will be generated and the player may feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped, and may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the timing when all the round effects (for 15 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81 are completed, When the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the ending command for display, a lot of waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. This may cause the player to feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped, and may cause the player to feel discomfort.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the end of the jackpot variation display on the third symbol display device 81. The control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is finished on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds). ) When it ends, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation is stopped, and there is no discomfort. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the process of S2508, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2510), and the display is performed. If there is a use round number command (S2510: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2511), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2511) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S2901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S2902).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2904). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are both set to OFF (S2905), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2510, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2512), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S2512: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2513), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, details of the ending command processing (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process is a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the displaying ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3002).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3001, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3004). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are both set to OFF (S3006), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2512, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2514), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S2514: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the back image change command process (S2515) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The back image change command process is a process for executing a process corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3603) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back images corresponding to other back image types are turned on. The determination flag is set to OFF (S3102), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3101 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set by the process of S3102. . If the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back surface image determination flag set in the processing of S3102 is used. The RAM type in which the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than two back image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract any one back surface image change command and turn on the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2514, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2516), and there is an error command. If (S2516: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. 55(b). FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command process is to execute a process corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S3202), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3201, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S3202, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S2902 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly understand the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2516 that there is no error command (S2516: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2518), and the process returns to S2501.

  In the processing of S2501 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes). ), and the processes of S2502 to S2518 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2501 to S2518 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2501 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52A) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 52B), which are the processings corresponding to the respective commands, The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 52A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2601. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2602, a process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58, details of the above-described display setting process (S2403) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S3301), and if the new command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S3301: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S3302 to S3304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3302), and then S3303 to S3304. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process of.

  In the process of S3303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is ON (S3303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3304).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations that are set to ON The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3401).

  In task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary to draw the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, etc. for each sprite. Various parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3304) or in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3303: No), the process proceeds to S3305.

  In S3305, pointer update processing is executed (S3305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3501). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3501, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S3502). As a result, if it is End information (S3502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d past the address at which the actual data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demo display data table (S3503), and if it is the demo display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data table buffer is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3505), and this processing is finished and displayed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3506). ), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the display setting processing. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, for example, when the variable display data table is set, the end address of the immediately preceding address in which the End information is written is written. Since the drawing content is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S3502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3502: No), this processing is terminated and returns to the display setting processing.

  Here, returning to FIG. 56, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task process, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content developed in the process of S3306 together with the warning image previously developed, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). When the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S3309).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is ON (S3309: Yes), the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d because the finalized display effect has not yet been produced and the finalized display effect is to be produced. The data is set (S3310), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3311). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S3314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the last stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2404), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the variation was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3309, if the confirmed display flag is not on but on (S3309: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S3316). If the demo display flag is off (S3316: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. 233d (S3317) and then Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3321), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, after the fixed display effect is finished, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3316, if the demo display flag is on (S3316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is ended as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2409) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuating effect by the power-on fluctuation image is finished, the power-on fluctuation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that defines display in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2405) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3602), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Have been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3602) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not been transferred is given to the image controller 237 (S3701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3701: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S3702). In the process of S3702, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S3702 that the transfer processing is not completed (S3702: No), the image controller 237 is continuously performing the image transfer processing, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3702: Yes), the process moves to S3703. Also, as a result of the processing of S3701, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the processing proceeds to S3703.

  In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3703). A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data should be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S3703 (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2408 of FIG. 50B) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 of FIG. 50B). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) (see S3601: No in FIG. 59A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose reading speed is slow at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3603) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3305) of the previously executed display setting process (S2403). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3802), and if it is transfer data information (S3802: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address), and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3803, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3804), and the process proceeds to step S3805.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S3802 (S3802: No), the processes of S3803 and S3804 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3806).

  In the process of S3806, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, and when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S3806 that the transfer processing is not completed (S3806: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to S3807. Further, as a result of the process of S3805, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3805: No), the process proceeds to S3807.

  In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807). If the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), image data to be transferred is present. Is turned off (S3808), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S3807: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S3809). If the rear image change flag is not on but on (S3809: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set off (S3810), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3811). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image indicated by the back image discrimination flag, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. The head address is acquired (S3812), and the process proceeds to S3813.

  In the processing of S3813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The determination in the processing of S3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. It is determined that the image is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is “OFF”, it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3813 (S3813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3813, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3814). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of a sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S3814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  In this way, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d should be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, details of the above-described drawing process (S2406) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated (S3901). That is, in the process of S3901, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2404). A parameter required for the sprite determined in the task processing is associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side in the image for one frame to the front side, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the detailed drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting them in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3903). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 on the basis of the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 50B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, a frame buffer that develops an image for one frame and a frame buffer that reads out image information for one frame are replaced by one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) are provided as winning openings that are opened in the special gaming state (big hit state). ) Is provided, and one of the winning openings is opened in accordance with the number of jackpots. Each of these two types of winning holes is configured as a winning hole through which a large amount (15) of winning balls are paid out when the balls enter. Further, the two types of winning openings (the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a) are both provided in the right path (flow path) of the game board 13. With this, the ball can be entered even if any of the winning openings are opened by merely hitting the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (right hitting) during the special game state (big hit state). Therefore, the number of prize balls to be paid out in the special game state (big hit state) can be made less likely to be influenced by the skill of the player, so that even a beginner player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) among the paths (flow paths) provided on the right side of the game board 13. A storage device 600 having a plurality of winning openings is provided on the upstream side. This storage device 600 is configured so that when the player hits the ball to the right, a part of the struck ball can flow into the inside thereof, and the spilled ball can be transferred to a different winning opening. A plurality of flow paths are provided to allow the liquid to flow. Specifically, the number of prize balls is compared with the guide flow path 606 for flowing the balls down to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 where the number of winning balls is relatively small (the number of winning balls is three). A guide flow path 607 is provided for allowing the balls to flow down to a large number of general prize holes (15 prize balls) (general value prize hole) 602. Since the number of award balls that can be acquired can be varied depending on the type of the guiding flow path that flows down, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the number of flow paths through which the ball flows down to the player is reduced. The type can be observed with interest.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the storage that can close the guide flow path 607 for flowing the balls down to the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 having a relatively large number of winning balls (15 winning balls). A valve 607a is provided in the guide passage 607. The storage valve 607a is set to the open state during the special game state (during the big hit state), and is set to the closed state during the other game states. In addition, the game balls that have flowed into the storage device 600 are basically arranged in such a manner that the guide flow passages 607 are easier to flow into the guide flow passages 607 than the guide flow passages 606 (FIG. 9 ( See b)). Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to being able to obtain a prize ball by throwing the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, it is provided downstream of the guide flow path 607. The prize ball can be obtained by inserting the ball into the general prize hole (large value prize hole) 602. The storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, and the player only hits the right with the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. This is because it is possible to enter a ball into any of the storage device 600. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, and the merit of the player due to the big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy the game with a big hit, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to win, and if the lottery result is a winning lottery result, a specific winning opening is opened and the winning opening is changed to that specific winning opening. There is one that gives a large amount of prize balls based on the ball entering (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-129177). In this conventional game machine, in addition to a specific winning opening, a plurality of winning openings are provided, and by adhering the specific winning opening and other winning openings, There is a structure in which a ball shot aiming at can enter a specific winning opening and another winning opening. Here, as one of the occasions when a specific number of balls enter the specific winning opening, it is common to control to close the specific winning opening, so the number of winning balls for the specific winning opening The number of prize balls that a player can win in a hit increases as the balls enter the other winning openings before the number becomes a specific number. Therefore, since the number of prize balls per hit can be increased by adjoining a specific prize hole and another prize hole, the player's expectation for the hit can be further improved.

  However, in a conventional game machine, there is a case where an irregular game method of winning a prize ball by hitting a ball aiming at another prize hole adjacent to a specific prize hole is performed even in a state other than a win. It was

  On the other hand, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the guide passage 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a. In this state, since one sphere can be stored in the space formed by the upper portion of the storage valve 607a and the upstream portion of the guide flow path 607, the storage device 600 is first closed after the storage valve 607a is closed. The sphere that has flowed into the interior of is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a. Then, when the sphere flows into the storage device 600 in a state where the sphere is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, the flow direction is changed by colliding with the stored sphere, and as a result, the sphere moves to the guide flow path 602. It becomes easier to flow down (see FIG. 9(b)). Therefore, even if a ball is thrown into the storage device 600 in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the ball easily enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with few prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the merit of putting the ball into the storage device 600. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, by constantly aiming at the storage device 600, an irregular game method of increasing the number of balls by only paying out the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is not fundamentally established, and the special In a state other than the gaming state (big jackpot state), a lottery for special symbols can be performed to expect a big jackpot to be played.

  It should be noted that the storage device 600 is configured such that one ball enters into approximately three right-handed balls. The number of prize balls paid out when the player enters the general prize hole (small value prize hole) 601 is three. In other words, even if the player hits right in a gaming state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), it is difficult for the special symbols to be drawn, and the payout is based on the entry into the general winning a prize (small value winning a prize) 601. You cannot increase the number of spheres by. This eliminates the merit of hitting right in the normal state, and allows the player to play a game aiming for a big hit by lottery of special symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the guide flow path 606 enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 and the ball flowing down the guide flow path 607 enters the general entering entrance 602. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a publicly known clune means having a plurality of winning openings is provided on the downstream side of each guiding flow path, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning openings into which the winning balls are entered. Good. As a result, even if the prize flow path 606 flows down, it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls by entering the prize hole with a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be interestingly watched until the ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters one of the winning openings. Therefore, when a ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a closes the guide passage 607 so that the sphere can be stored on the way of the guide passage 607. However, for example, an electromagnet or the like is used to guide the guide passage. You may comprise so that a sphere may be stored on the way of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction flow path 607, and magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than the special game state (during the big hit state). As a result, the sphere that first flows into the guide flow path 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the sphere can be stopped (the sphere is stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact. Further, in this case, the width of the guide passage 607 is widened (for example, in FIG. 8, the branch member 604 and the storage valve 607a are deleted), and the guide passage 605 of the guide passage 607 is removed. The electromagnet may be embedded only in the portion directly below, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 may be provided directly below the portion in which the electromagnet is embedded. Further, when there is a sphere that has been pulled down by the electromagnet and has stopped flowing down, the stopped sphere and another sphere come into contact with the electromagnet portion and the downflow direction is changed, so that the electromagnet is not embedded. The part may be made to flow down, and may be made to flow down in a direction different from that of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. Then, the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 may be arranged below the portion of the guide passage 607 where the electromagnet is not embedded. As a result, the branch member 604 can be eliminated, and the number of parts of the storage device 600 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a is one, but the number is not limited to this, and two or more balls may be stored. Furthermore, when a plurality of balls are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or may be arranged side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the sphere can be stored above the storage valve 607a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be provided at the upper end portion of the guide passage 607, and when the storage valve 607a is closed, the sphere may be prevented from flowing into the guide passage 607. With the configuration in which the balls are not stored, the balls can be discharged without remaining inside the storage device 600 even if the ball is hit right in a state other than the special game state (big hit state).

  In particular, in the first embodiment, the second entrance port 640 is easily opened in a high probability state of a special symbol given after the end of a big jackpot or in a time saving state of a normal symbol. In addition, in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the starting winning prize to the second entrance 640), compared to the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the starting prize to the first entrance 64), the game The jackpot B that is advantageous to the player is likely to occur. Therefore, when the jackpot is over, the player hits the ball to the second ball entrance 640 by right-handed hitting. Therefore, for example, when the time saving period of the normal symbol ends, the sphere is stored in the storage device 600 with a high probability. This may cause the player to feel that the ball has been damaged. On the other hand, by providing the storage valve 607a at the upper end of the guide flow path 607 and not storing the balls in the storage device 600, the player can feel that the balls have been used up without waste. .. Therefore, the player can be satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning openings (small value winning openings) 601, 602 and the outlets 603a to 603c are provided inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second winning opening 640 may be arranged at a position where the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is provided. That is, in the first embodiment, the second entrance 640 provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 is moved to the inside of the storage device 600. May be. Further, in this case, as the opening condition of the storage valve 607a, for example, the storage valve 607a is configured to be opened when the special symbol lottery is executed 1000 times without the big hit after the big hit ends. May be.

  Accordingly, when the special symbol lottery is executed 1000 times after the jackpot is over, the ball can be inserted into the second entrance 640 by making a right hit, so the special symbol 2 The lottery can be executed. In the first embodiment described above, the number of prize balls to be paid out when entering the second entrance 640 is five, but in the case of this modified example, three payouts are made. It should be configured so that That is, the number of balls that can be entered into the storage device 600 when hitting to the right is one in three, so by performing right hitting after the storage valve 607a is opened, It is possible to enter into the second entrance 640 at a rate of 1 out of 3 balls. That is, it is possible to receive the lottery for the special symbol 2 while maintaining the ball. With such a configuration, even if the special symbol lottery is repeated without being a jackpot (so-called, even if a big humor has occurred), the storage valve 607a is expected to be opened and the game is played. Can be done. Therefore, even if the period in which the big hit is not extended, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained. It should be noted that by increasing the number of prize balls to be paid out when entering the second entrance 640 (for example, 10), after the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball is only hit right and then You may comprise so that it may increase. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the merit in the case where the special symbol lottery is missed 1000 times or more in a row. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, let's hope that it will be a big jackpot again with a small number of special symbol lottery, and if you continue to miss the special symbol lottery, continue to miss the special symbol lottery 1000 times or more in a row I can make you wish. Furthermore, after opening the storage valve 607a, the number of balls increases by just making a right hit, so by continuing to miss the special symbol lottery, the player can hold the ball in the payout to the second entrance 640. It can be hoped that the condition that keeps increasing continues for a long time. Therefore, depending on the number of times the special symbol is drawn, it is possible to hope that the special symbol will be a big hit, or to continue to be out of the special symbol lottery, and thus provide the player with novel game playability. You can

  In this embodiment, in the storage device 600, only one storage valve 604a is provided, but a plurality of storage valves 604a may be provided. Specifically, the downstream side of the guide passage 606 may be configured to branch in two directions, and one passage may be provided with a storage valve that is opened only during the special game state (during the big hit state). That is, the same structure as the guide flow paths 606 and 607 and the branch member 604 may be further provided on the downstream side of the guide flow path 606. Then, a general winning opening with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15) is provided downstream of the flow path on which the storage valve is provided, and a small number of prize balls is provided in the flow path without the storage valve (for example, 15). (3) General prize holes may be provided. With this configuration, since a larger number of balls can be stored in the storage device 600, the special game state (big hit state) is started, and each storage valve is opened to store. The balls that have been played can be made to flow down to the general winning opening with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15). Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit. Further, instead of providing a plurality of storage valves inside the storage device 600, a plurality of storage devices 600 may be provided in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. Also in the case of such a configuration, as in the case of providing a plurality of storage valves, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the storage device 600 is provided downstream of the second ball inlet 640, and the first variable winning device is provided downstream of the storage device 600. 65 is provided, and the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65, but the present invention is not limited to this arrangement and may be any arrangement. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 may be arranged upstream of the second ball entrance 640. In the arrangement of the first embodiment described above, in the special game state (big hit state), the ball launched to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650 is the second winning opening first. Although it may be difficult to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, it may be difficult to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. By arranging on the upstream side, it is possible to smoothly obtain the prize ball during the special game state (during the big hit state).

  Further, by arranging the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a on the upstream side, by arranging on the upstream side of the storage device 600, during the special game state (during the big hit state), the storage device It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the ball enters about 600 and becomes hard to reach the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, each round in the special game state (during the big hit state) can be progressed more smoothly.

  In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second specific entrance 640 are provided as entrances that trigger a lottery for special symbols, but either one may be omitted. For example, the second ball entrance 640 may be eliminated and the electric accessory 640 may be provided to the first ball entrance 64. This reduces the merit of hitting the ball to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), so that the ball is shot aiming at the storage device 600. It is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the typical game method.

  In the present embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), when a ball flows into (fills into) the storage device 600, a large number of prize balls to be paid out enter a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. In addition to this, in one special game state (big hit state), in addition to this, the number of balls that entered the general entrance 602 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured to do so. As a result, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to winning a prize ball by winning the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, how much extra balls are obtained It is possible to let the player recognize whether or not the game has been completed. Therefore, it is possible to make more players think that more balls are to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602, and thus it is possible to set a target for the number of entered balls. The number of winnings to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 does not necessarily have to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a dedicated display device may be separately provided. Thereby, in the third symbol display device 81, the effect during the big hit state can be executed in a wider display area.

  In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a, and the ball entering (winning) the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the same number as the prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entering (general winning) the general prize hole (high value prize hole) 602 are the same (15). , But is not limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entering (general winning) the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is changed to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. The number may be smaller than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on entering (winning) balls (for example, to be 10). As a result, even if the balls just flow into the storage device 600 as a result of the deviation of the traveling direction of the balls in the special game state (big hit state), the disadvantage against the hole can be reduced.

  Contrary to the above, the number of prize balls to be paid out on the basis of the balls entering (general winning) the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is determined by the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening. The number of prize balls may be greater than the number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls enter (win) the prize opening 650a. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a is 10, and the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters (wins) 602 may be set to 15. This makes it possible to increase the profit that the player can enjoy by causing the balls to flow into the storage device 600 in the special game state (big hit state), so that the player's interest in the big hit game can be further improved. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is opened based on the start of the big hit, and the storage valve 607a is closed based on the end of the big hit. Is not limited to this. The opening may be set to be opened for a shorter period than that of the present embodiment, or the open state and the closed state may be repeated a plurality of times in a big hit. For example, the storage valve 607a may be opened based on the interval period set between the jackpot rounds, and the storage valve 607a may be closed based on the end of the interval period. By limiting the period in which the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state) to the interval period, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot being too large. That is, it is possible to prevent variations in the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in one big hit, so that it is possible to easily predict the sales of the pachinko machine 10. Further, by opening the storage valve 607a during the interval period, it is provided on the right side of the game board 13 in the interval period (that is, the state where the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a are closed). A part of the sphere that has reached the downstream side of the path (flow path) can flow into the storage device 600. That is, even during the interval period, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by inserting the ball into the general winning opening 602. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls from being wasted even during the interval period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is configured to be closed at the start of the jackpot ending effect, but it may be configured to be closed at the end of the ending effect. This allows a part of the balls remaining on the board at the start of the ending effect to flow into the storage device 600. That is, it is possible to win the prize ball by inserting the ball into the general winning opening 602 during the ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted during the ending production. Further, the storage valve 607a is kept open until a fixed period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the ending effect is finished, and the storage valve 607a is closed after a fixed period (for example, 5 seconds) passes. It may be configured to switch to the state. This allows a part of the balls remaining on the board at the end of the ending effect to flow into the storage device 600. That is, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by inserting the ball into the general winning opening 602 after the ending effect is finished. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted after the ending effect is finished.

  In addition, the storage valve 607a is opened when a game state different from the special game state (big hit state) is set, and the storage valve 607a is opened when the set game state is changed to another game state. May be closed. For example, you may comprise so that the storage valve 607a may be opened in the period when the probability change state of a special symbol is set. As a result, in the probability change state of the special symbol, while receiving the lottery of the special symbol 2 which tends to be a big hit B by right-handing, a ball to the general prize hole (large value prize hole) 602 with a large number of prize balls to be paid out. Can be entered. Therefore, the probability change state of the special symbol can be made more advantageous to the player. Further, the storage valve 607a may be opened when the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Basically, the time saving state of the normal symbol is a state where there is little merit to the player as compared with the probability changing state of the special symbol, but the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened during the time saving state of the normal symbol. For example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the normal symbol is in a time saving state.

  Further, instead of switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, or in addition to switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, of the storage valve 607a at any timing of the player. The state may be switched. This allows each player to play a game in the state of the storage valve 607a according to his/her taste.

  In the present embodiment, the outlet is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the outlet, a prize opening for paying out prize balls may be provided. Further, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls enter each prize hole may be different. More specifically, for example, six prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603a, ten prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603b, and prize balls are replaced in place of the out port 603c. However, 12 prize holes may be provided. As a result, it is possible to more interestingly observe when the sphere flows down the guide flow path 606 and to which winning port the guide flow path 607 enters. Further, a member such as a nail capable of changing the flow direction of the ball may be provided downstream of the guide flow path 606 or the guide flow path 607 so that the winning opening into which any ball enters becomes more random. . Accordingly, when the sphere flows into the storage device 600, it is possible to more interestingly observe the whereabouts of the sphere until the sphere enters any of the winning openings. In addition, by providing nails or the like, it is possible to set a ball entrance through which a clerk in the hall can easily enter a ball. Therefore, the exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the side of the hall.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls the opening and closing of the storage valve 607a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 may control the storage valve 607a. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 607a may be controlled to switch to the open state when the opening command is received from the main control device 110, and may be controlled to switch to the closed state when the ending command is received. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, the main process relating to the game, the selection process of the variation effect, the lottery process of the special symbol, etc. can be executed without delay.

  In this embodiment, the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state) in the special game state (big hit state), and the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (stored state) in states other than the special game state (big hit state). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 604a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, or the like. Further, the switching may be performed based on the result of the lottery that is performed regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage 607a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and a lottery is executed once a minute to determine whether to switch to the open state (released state). Good. When the lottery is won, the storage valve 607a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the ball can be flown into the storage device 600 with the storage valve 607a set in the open state (released state) by winning the lottery, the ball is transferred to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. Since it is possible to enter the game, it is possible to allow the player to play the game with the expectation that more lottery will be won. Further, the clerk in the hall may adjust the lottery probability of the lottery whether or not to set the storage valve 607a to the open state (released state). As a result, when the player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict a table having a good lottery probability and perform the machine selection. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit when setting the lottery probability of the hole, so that the interest of the player can be improved at the stage of selecting a machine before starting the game. ..

  In the present embodiment, according to the jackpot type, a jackpot (jackpot B) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at a timing at which it is easy to enter the probability variation entrance 654 in the 12th round of the jackpot, and the probability variation entrance. The jackpot 654 is provided with a jackpot (jackpot A) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at a timing when it is difficult to enter the ball, but depending on the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot, which one It may be configured to indicate whether it is a jackpot type. For example, in each round of 1 to 11 rounds of jackpots, an effect of fighting a ally of justice and a monster may be performed. Then, if the teammate of justice wins by the 11th round, the jackpot B is notified, and if the teammate of justice is defeated, the jackpot A may be reported. That is, when the teammate of justice wins, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a chance to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol. This makes it possible for the player to more interestingly observe the result of the effect performed in the jackpot.

  In addition, there are variations in the effect contents, and the expectation that a teammate of justice wins is high (it is easy to select in the case of jackpot B) and the possibility that the teammate of justice is defeated (in the case of jackpot A) (Easy to be selected for) production contents may be provided. For example, if a ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special move, or if the ally of justice avoids the attack of the enemy, the odds of winning are increased, and the attack of the ally of justice is missed, It may be configured so that it is more likely to be defeated when the enemy attacks with a special move. As a result, not only the result of whether or not a ally of justice wins, but the result can be predicted by the flow of the performance until the victory or defeat. Therefore, the interest of the player in the jackpot game can be improved.

  It should be noted that the content of the performance performed up to the 11th round is not limited to the above-described performance in which the ally of justice and the monster fight each other, and an advantageous jackpot B and a jackpot A that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot B can be suggested. Any form may be used. For example, the boy character 710 may perform a search for a treasure, and if the treasure can be found by the 11th round, the jackpot B may be notified. It may be configured to display an effect of eating a large amount of food and notify that the jackpot B is a big hit when the food provided is completely exhausted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 600 having a peculiar structure which is not mounted in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the game play related to the storage device 600 is provided. You may stay. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and the conditions under which the storage valve 607a is opened, the merits when opened and the disadvantages when the ball is hit to the right in the closed state. You may comprise so that the image (explanatory image) explaining may be displayed. This allows the player to easily understand the playability. Further, the back side type in which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back side type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who is accustomed to the game on the pachinko machine 10 and who fully understands the playability can change to the rear type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a normal state of a normal symbol), right-handing is performed, and when it is detected that a ball has entered the storage device 600, a right-handing warning image is detected. (See FIG. 5B) is displayed, but the right-handed warning image may not be displayed under a predetermined condition. For example, if the player is hitting the ball to the right while the balls are not stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, a right-handed warning image is displayed until the balls are stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a (FIG. 5(b)). It may be configured not to display (see). By keeping the balls in the upper part of the storage valve 607a in the normal state, a special symbol is subsequently hit, and when the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state), the upper part of the storage valve 607a It is possible to immediately enter the balls stored in the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. Therefore, the ball paid out by having entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 can be used as a ball used in the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the player has run out of balls despite the jackpot, it is possible to play the jackpot game without renting a new ball.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 76. In the above-described first embodiment, the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, and is provided inside the storing device 600 in the special game state (big hit state). It is configured such that a prize ball can be obtained by throwing the ball into the general prize hole (large value prize hole) 602. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the balls are paid out to the storage device 600 in addition to being paid out by putting the balls into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. The prize balls were paid out by entering the balls. As a result, more prize balls are paid out in the jackpot, which further enhances the player's interest in the jackpot game.

  In addition, in the first embodiment, in a state (normal gaming state) other than the special game state (big hit state), by closing the upstream of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 with the storage valve 607a, the ball Is configured so that it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the balls can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a. Then, in the normal gaming state, when there is a ball stored inside the storage device 600, the stored ball and another ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 can interfere (contact) with each other. Was configured as. Then, when interference (contact) with the stored sphere occurs, the direction in which the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 600 flows down is the direction of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of winning balls. It was configured to change to (direction of the guide flow path 606). As a result, in the normal game state, by hitting the ball to the right with the aim of winning the general winning a prize (high value winning a prize) 602 of the storage device 600, it is an anomalous attempt to increase the number of balls held without going through a big hit. It was configured so that the game method could not be fundamentally established.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600 in the first embodiment. Then, whether or not the balls are stored in the storage device 700 can be switched by the operation of the player. Further, when the sphere is stored in the storage device 700, two flow paths through which the sphere can flow down are provided, and depending on the downflow speed and the approach angle of the sphere that has flown into the storage device 700, the adjustment degree of the nail, and the like. The spheres can flow into either of the flow paths.

  Further, in the second embodiment, a winning opening that is easy to enter when the balls are not stored (a state where the storage valve 704a is open) and two flow paths that are easy to flow when the balls are stored in the storage valve 704a. Each of the two types of winning openings provided on the downstream side of is different in the number of prize balls to be paid out. That is, when the balls are stored in the storage valve 704a, one of the two types of prize holes that can be won is a prize hole with a large number of prize balls to be paid out, and the other is a prize hole with a small number of prize balls to be paid out. It is configured as follows. Further, the winning opening through which the ball can be won in the state where the storage valve 704a is opened is configured to be in the middle of the above-mentioned two kinds of payout numbers. That is, switching between a state in which the player can enter a winning opening with a large number of prize balls and a winning hole with a small number of prize balls, and a state in which the average payout can be stably received by causing the balls to flow into the storage device 700. You can Therefore, according to the player's preference, it is possible to switch the playability when the ball is flown into the storage device 700, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in structure is that the arrangement of the first variable winning device 65 is below the first ball entrance 64. 2 The variable winning device 650 is abolished, the storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600, and the release button 800 for changing the state of the storage valve 704a to the open state by the operation of the player is provided. Is performed, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes the configuration. Part of the processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. is there. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 62, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64. Then, the second variable winning device 650 provided on the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 in the first embodiment is abolished. The first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is configured to be opened in all rounds of jackpots. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the ball can be inserted into the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a by performing left-handed hitting.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided on the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. In this storage device 700, the number of nails around the entrance is smaller than that around the entrance of the storage device 600 of the first embodiment, and the ratio of the balls flowing in when hitting to the right is the storage device of the first embodiment. It is configured to be less than 600 (for example, 1 out of 10 balls). Details of the storage device 700 in the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66.

  Next, an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 shows an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the probability changing state of the special symbol, or the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (the period in which the player does not lose even if he/she strikes right). It is a figure. FIG. 63(a) shows the display content when the release button 800 is not pressed (the storage valve 704a is not opened), and FIG. 63(b) is the release button 800 is pressed. The display content in the state (state in which the storage valve 704a is opened) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 63A, when the release button 800 has not been pressed (operated) by the player, the boy character 710 (FIG. 5 (FIG. 5(A)) in the small area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds is displayed. Instead of Ds2 in a)), the words "Press the button to open the gate!" are displayed. By displaying this character, it is possible to set the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 to the open state by pressing the release button 800 (button) for the player. It can be easily recognized. The display contents in the display areas other than the small area Ds2 are the same as the probability changing state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63(b), when the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, the word "gate opening" is displayed in the small area Ds2. Thereby, it can be easily recognized that the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 is in the open state.

  Next, details of the storage device 700 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. First, FIG. 64 is a front view of the storage device 700 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the storage device 700 is provided with a guide flow path 707 for flowing down the spheres that have flowed in from the upper part, and three flow paths are provided on the downstream side of the guide flow path 707. (The downstream of the guide flow path 707 is branched in three directions). Specifically, the guiding flow path 706 for flowing down the inflowing sphere in the lower left direction in front view, the guiding flow path 704 for flowing in the lower direction in front view, and the lower flow direction in the lower right direction in front view. And a guide channel 708 for As shown in FIG. 64, since the nail 709a and the nail 709b are provided on the downstream side of the guide passage 705, the sphere is on the right side or the left side while flowing down the guide passage 705. Even in this case, the downward direction of the sphere can be corrected toward the center by passing between the nails 709a and 709b. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide flow passage 705 is likely to flow into the guide flow passage 704 provided on the center side downstream of the guide flow passage 705.

  A general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out (for example, 6) is provided downstream of the guide flow path 706. Further, downstream of the guide flow path 704, there is a general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 (for example, three) having a smaller number of prize balls to be paid out than the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702. It is provided. Further, as the entrances other than the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, there are out openings 703a to 703e in which the winning balls are not paid out even if the balls enter. It is provided. When the ball flows down the guide flow path 708, the game ball flowing down the guide flow path 708 enters the out opening (small value prize opening) 703d or the out opening (small value prize opening) 703e. In addition, there is no merit to the player. A ball that has flowed down the guide flow path 706 but has not entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703a or the out opening 703b. To be done. A ball that has flowed down the guide flow path 704 but has not entered the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703b or the out opening 703c. To be done. These outlets 703a to 703c prevent (suppress) the balls from accumulating below the storage device 700 and reliably discharge the balls even if the balls move irregularly due to vibration or the like. You can

  A storage valve 704a is provided in the guide passage 704. Similar to the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a closes the guide flow path 704 to store one sphere that has flowed into the storage device 700 after the closing in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a. be able to. The storage valve 704a is different from the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment in that the closed state can be released (set to the open state) by the operation of the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) by the player. Has been done. When the balls are stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704, the flow direction is changed by the impact of the balls that flow into the storage device 700 and interfere (contact) with the stored balls. This change (switching) in the flow direction will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an orbit (downward direction) of a sphere that flows down (enters) into the storage device 700 while the storage valve 704a is closed. First, with reference to FIG. 65( a ), a case will be described in which a sphere that interferes (contacts) with a stored sphere repels to the left in front view due to the impact of interference.

  As shown in FIG. 65(a), when the sphere that has flown into (entered into) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the sphere stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a and repels to the left in the front view, The sphere flows into the guide channel 706 and flows down the guide channel 706. Here, since the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is provided in the downstream of the guide flow path 706, a relatively large amount of spheres enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702. (For example, 6) prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when the ball repels to the right, it is advantageous for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65B, a case will be described in which a sphere that interferes (contacts) with a stored sphere repels to the right side in front view due to the impact of interference. As shown in FIG. 65(b), when the sphere that has flown into (stored in) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the sphere stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a and repels in the right direction when viewed from the front, The sphere flows into the guide channel 708 and flows down the guide channel 708. Here, since the outlets (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guide flow path 708, the ball enters either of the outlets. That is, when the ball repels to the right in the front view, the prize ball is not paid out, and there is no merit for the player.

  As described above, in the state in which the storage valve 704a is closed, the number of prize balls (game value) obtained by the player varies depending on the direction in which the ball that has flown (entered) into the storage device 700 repels. Therefore, when a sphere flows into (enters) the storage device 700, it is expected that the sphere will repel in the left direction when viewed from the front due to interference (contact) with the sphere stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a. A game can be played. That is, the downward direction (repulsion direction) of the ball that has flown into (stored in) the storage device 700 can be more interestingly confirmed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, the direction in which the ball easily repels changes depending on the momentum of the ball, the angle of the ball entering the storage device 700, and the degree of adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, so the ball easily repels to the guide flow path 706 to the player. Can be devised how to hit. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when selecting the pachinko machine 10 for playing a game, the pachinko machine 10 in which a ball easily enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is selected by taking into account the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b. You can Therefore, at the stage of selecting the pachinko machine 10 before starting the game, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of finding the pachinko machine 10 that is likely to be advantageous to himself.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an operation will be described in the case where a sphere flows into (enters) the storage device 700 while the storage valve 704a is set to the open state. When the sphere flows into the storage device 700, the sphere first flows down the guide flow path 705. Since the nail 709a and the nail 709b are provided on the left and right sides of the downstream of the guide flow passage 705 (see FIG. 66), the ball is on the right side or the left side while flowing down the guide flow passage 705. Even in this case, the downward direction of the sphere can be corrected toward the center by passing between the nails 709a and 709b. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide flow channel 705 flows into the guide flow channel 704 provided on the central side on the downstream side of the guide flow channel 705.

  When the storage valve 704a is opened, the sphere can flow down the guide flow passage 704. Therefore, the sphere flowing into the guide flow passage 704 flows down the guide flow passage 704 to the general winning opening (medium). Value winning prize) 701. As a result, the number of prize balls (three, for example) smaller than the number of prize balls for entering the general prize hole (high value prize hole) 702 is paid out.

  As described above, in the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the ball that has flown into the storage device 700 enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. That is, the flow-down direction does not change due to repulsion and flows into the guide passage 706 and the guide passage 708. That is, instead of being unable to put the ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, which has a large number of winning balls, the ball enters the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. It doesn't happen that you lose the prize ball. Therefore, when a ball is thrown into the storage device 700, it is possible to stably obtain a prize ball, which makes the player feel secure.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) to set the storage valve 704a in the open state while the operation is performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that a ball will enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. The state (there is a high gambling state in which there is a possibility that many prize balls may be obtained, but there is a possibility that no prize balls may be obtained). In addition, by setting the storage valve 704a in the open state, the ball that has flown into the storage device 700 can be inserted into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (a small amount, but stable. It is possible to obtain a prize ball). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated. You can play games.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. The electrical configuration of the second embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the first embodiment in that the prescribed content of the first random number table 202b of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is changed, and the configuration of the RAM 203 is one. Partly changed, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control unit 110, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is partially changed. They differ in points. The other electrical configuration is the same as the electrical configuration in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input/output port 205. The release button 800 is arranged at a position (for example, around the frame button 22) where the player can arbitrarily press (operate). When the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, a signal (press detection signal) for notifying the MPU 201 that pressing has been detected is output to the input/output port 205. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 controls the storage device solenoid 610 so as to open the storage valve 704a based on the press detection signal. That is, the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, like the first hit type selection table 202b in the first embodiment.

  In the first hit type selection table 202b in the present embodiment, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with each jackpot type only. That is, unlike the first embodiment, regardless of whether the special symbol 1 is a big hit or the special symbol 2 is a big hit, the same value for the same first hit type counter C2 is the same. The jackpot type is associated.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68A, the jackpot C is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being “0 to 49” (FIG. 68(a). ) 202b1)). In addition, this jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds. Further, after the jackpot C is finished, a time saving state of a normal symbol is added as an added value (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a time saving state of a normal symbol is transferred). Further, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol given after the end of the jackpot C is continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

  On the other hand, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”, the big hit D is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 68A). The jackpot D is a jackpot in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds. In addition, after the jackpot D, the special symbol probability change state of the special symbol is added as an added value (transition to the special symbol probability change state). In addition, the probability variation state of the special symbol which is given after the end of the big hit D continues until the next big hit.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot is finished is predetermined according to the jackpot type that is won. That is, a more general configuration is adopted than the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Along with this, in the second embodiment, the specified content of the first hit type selection table 202b is changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68(b), the specified contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment has a probability variation setting flag 203h, a probability variation passage counter 203i, a winning number counter 203j, an operation counter 203k, and a remaining ball, which are provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The timer flag 203m, the remaining ball timer 203n, the probability variation valid flag 203o, the probability variation valid timer 203p, and the discharge number counter 203q are deleted. This is because these configurations are provided in connection with determining whether or not to shift to the probability changing state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over in the second specific winning device 650. In other words, in the present embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, the gaming state to be set at the end of jackpot is set in advance, and whether to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol during the special gaming state (during the jackpot) Since no determination is made, it is not necessary to use each of the above configurations in this embodiment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is provided with a release flag 203s. This release flag 203s indicates whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 to set the storage valve 704a in the open state (whether or not the state in which the balls can be stored above the storage valve 704a has been released). Or)). The release flag 203s is set to ON when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state (see S4008 in FIG. 71). On the other hand, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is set to off (see S4004 in FIG. 71).

  Next, returning to FIG. 67, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the RAM 223 in the present embodiment, the winning number counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment is abolished, and the storage state flag 223k and the flow-down time counter 223k are added. There is.

  The storage state flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to the open (release) state. When the storage state flag 223k is turned on, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is closed and the ball can be stored above the storage valve 704a. On the other hand, if the storage state flag 223k is off, the storage valve 704a is set to the open (release) state, which indicates that the ball can flow down the guide flow path 704. The storage state flag 223k is updated every time a storage state command is received from the main controller 110 to a value corresponding to the storage state indicated by the command (see S1922 in FIG. 72). The voice lamp control device 113 determines the setting of the storage valve 704a based on the storage state flag 223k, and determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the storage valve 704a.

  The downflow time counter 223k is a ball entrance (general winning opening 701, general winning opening 701, general winning a prize, which is a ball that has flown into the guiding channel 704, the guiding channel 706, or the guiding channel 708 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 704a. It is a counter for counting the time (ball throwing time) until the player enters the mouth 702, the outlet 703d, or the outlet 703e). By counting the ball-balding period, a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or an out opening (small value winning) When a ball enters the winning hole) 703e, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the ball is a normal operation. This downflow time counter 233k is set with a counter value corresponding to 1 second each time a storage state command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1923 in FIG. 72). Further, it is decremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 42) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

  In the present embodiment, in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, a ball enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the storage valve 704a, or the storage valve 704a is opened. In the state, when the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e, a warning image (Fig. 7 ( b)) is displayed. However, if the sphere flows into the guide flow path 704 immediately before the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, the sphere is switched to the closed state after the storage valve 704a is switched to the general winning opening (medium value). In some cases, the player may enter the winning opening 701. Similarly, when the sphere flows into the guide flow passage 706 or the guide flow passage 708 immediately before the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state, the sphere is generally formed after the storage valve 704a is switched to the open state. The player may enter the winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e. In order to treat these as a normal ball entry (not display a warning image), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched, a predetermined period (1 second) is set for the downflow time counter 233k. Set the corresponding counter value. Then, until the one second set as the counter value has elapsed, the ball is a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or It is configured to determine that the operation is normal (not display a warning image) when the ball enters the out mouth (small value winning mouth) 703e.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the second embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. In this embodiment, the content of the main process (see FIG. 69) is changed from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, only various kinds of processing executed in this main processing (see FIG. 69) will be described, and detailed description of the other processing that has not been changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 69, a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this main processing. Similar to the first embodiment, the main processing of the game is executed in this main processing.

  In the main process (see FIG. 69) of the present embodiment, the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) is used instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in contrast to the main process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 34). The difference is that is executed. Another difference is that the storage control process (S1022) for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a is executed after the second symbol display update process (S1007) is completed. Another difference is that error command processing 2 (S1023) is executed instead of the error command processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the big hit control process 2 (S1021). This jackpot control processing 2 (S1021) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special game state (big hit state), execution of various effects according to the jackpot, This is a process for opening or closing the 1 specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a.

  Of the jackpot control processing 2 (S1021), in each processing of S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109, S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 2 of this embodiment, the process of S1103 (the process of setting the opening of the storage valve) in the first embodiment is omitted. In the second embodiment, since the player sets the storage valve 704a to the open state based on the operation of the release button 800, the state of the storage valve 704a regardless of whether it is the special game state (big hit state) or not. This is due to the switching.

  In addition, in the jackpot control process 2 in the present embodiment, when it is determined by the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set. The release is set (S1121), the round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1122), and this processing is ended. The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123). ). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, or the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. When a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) are won after opening, the closing condition is determined to be satisfied.

  In the process of S1123, when it is determined that the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened. This is closed (S1124), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1123: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1109). Specifically, when 15 rounds of the special game state (big hit state) are finished, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

  In the processing of S1109, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1109: Yes), first, the ending command is set (S1125). The ending command set here is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp control in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1125 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the big hit of this time is the big hit D (probable variation big hit) (S1126), and when it is determined that it is not the big hit D (that is, the big hit C) (S1126: No), 100 is set to the value of the hour/hour counter 203r (S1127), and this processing is ended. By setting 100 to the hour saving medium counter 203r, it is possible to shorten the time period of ordinary symbols until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the jackpot is over.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1126, when it is determined that the big hit this time is the big hit D (probability variation big hit), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in order to give the probability variation state of the special symbol after the big hit ends ( (S1128), this process ends. In the processing of S1109, if it is not the ending start timing (S1109: No), this processing is ended. That is, the winning process (S1111, see FIG. 38) and the abnormality process (S1112, see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are not executed in the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment.

  By making the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) different from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment as described above, only one winning opening is provided during the jackpot. The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine in which the state after the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type (that is, a more general pachinko machine).

  Next, the storage control process (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this storage control process (S1022). This storage control process (S1022) is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a, as described above.

  In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether or not the release flag 203s is on (S4001), and when it is determined to be on (S4001: Yes), the storage valve 704a is opened (the storage device 700). Since it means that the state in which the balls can be stored has been released), it is then determined whether or not the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player (S4002). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

  In the processing of S4002, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 has been detected (that is, the pressing detection signal has been detected) (S4002: Yes), in order to keep the storage valve 704a in the open state, This processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S4002: No), the storage valve for the storage device is closed to close the storage valve 704a. The solenoid 610 is turned off (S4003). Then, in order to indicate that the closing of the storage valve 704a is set, the release flag 203s is set to OFF (S4004), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the closed state. Therefore, the storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4005), and this processing is ended.

  The storage state mand set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the display rear image change command for setting the rear surface type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image changing command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63(a), it is set in a mode in which the text "Open the gate when the button is pressed!" is displayed in the small area Ds2. This allows the player to easily recognize that the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state by pressing the release button 800.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4001, when it is determined that the release flag 203s is off (S4001: No), the storage valve 704a is closed (the storage device 700 is set to a state capable of storing balls). Means that the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player (S4006). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

  In the processing of S4006, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S4006: No), the storage valve 704a is kept closed. In order to keep it, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is detected) (S4006: Yes), the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on to open the storage valve 704a. (S4007). Then, in order to indicate that the storage valve 704a is set to be opened, the release flag 203s is set to ON (S4008), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the opened state. Therefore, the storage state command corresponding to the open state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4009), and this processing is ended.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the release state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear type corresponding to the release state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image changing command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63(b), it is set in a mode in which the character "gate opening" is displayed in the small area Ds2. This allows the player to easily recognize that the storage valve 704a is in the open state.

  By executing this storage control process, opening or closing of the storage valve 704a can be set in accordance with the operation status of the release button 800. As a result, by storing the balls in the upper part of the storage valve 704a at any timing of the player, either the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out winning openings (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. It is possible to switch between a state in which a crab ball enters and a state in which a ball that has flown (entered) into the storage device 700 flows down toward a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the content of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) is partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. In the following, only the command determination process (see FIG. 72) will be described, and detailed description of the other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing (1811) in this embodiment. In this command determination process, in each of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919, the same process as each of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment is performed. Executed respectively.

  Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the winning information command is received in the process of S1911 (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a malfunction such as a failure in the storage valve 704a. Then, a warning process is performed to give a warning when a defect has occurred (S1921), and this process is terminated.

  Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command is not received in the process of S1916 (S1916: No), whether or not the storage state command is received is then determined. It is determined (S1922). If it is determined that the storage state command has been received (S1922: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is updated according to the state of the storage valve 704a notified by the storage state command (S1923). Specifically, when the closed state (storage state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a, the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the open state (released state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a. In this case, the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF. In addition, when the storage state flag 223k is updated, the rear surface image (see FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b)) corresponding to the storage state after the update is also set to display the third symbol display device 81. Update the content.

  When the process of S1923 ends, a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the downflow time counter 223l (S1924), and this process ends. It is possible to accurately determine whether or not there is a defect in the storage valve 704a by using the ball-blanking time set for the downflow time counter 223l. In addition, in the process of S1922, when it is determined that the storage state command is not received (S1922: No), the process proceeds to S1919.

  As described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the release state command or the closed state command from the main control device 110. A command for causing the display control device 114 can be set. This allows the player to easily recognize the state of the storage valve 704a.

  Next, the warning process (S1921) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 73. As described above, this warning process (S1921) is a process for determining whether or not there is a malfunction such as a failure in the storage valve 704a, and issuing a warning when a malfunction occurs.

  In the warning process (S1921), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S4101), and if it is on (S4101: Yes), then the value of the downflow time counter 223l is 0. It is determined whether or not (S4102). Then, when it is determined that the value of the downflow time counter 223l is 0 (S4102: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state), and the pitching period has elapsed. Therefore, in the closed state (storage state) of the storage valve 704a, a storage time notification process for reporting a defect is executed (S4103), and the present process is ended. Further, when it is determined that the value of the downflow time counter 223l is not 0 in the process of S4102 (S4102: No), it means that the current ball-bulging period is due to the storage valve 704a being set to the closed state. Therefore, the process of S4103 is skipped, and the present process is terminated.

  Here, the details of the storage time notification process (S4103) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the storage time notification process (S4103), first, it is determined whether or not the notified prize information command includes prize information corresponding to the entrance to the general prize hole (medium value prize hole) 701 (S4201), If the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium-valued winning opening) 701 is not included (S4201: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 is included (S4201: Yes), the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state). Regardless, it means that the ball flows down to the downstream of the storage valve 704a and enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. That is, it means that the storage valve 704a is not normally closed even though the storage valve 704a is set to be closed. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to a malfunction of the storage valve 704a is set (S4202). , This process ends.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7(b)) for notifying that the storage valve 704a is defective in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display error command is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7(b)), it is possible to easily let the player or the store clerk in the hall notice the occurrence of the problem, so that the problem can be promptly resolved.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the process of S4101, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S4101: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the downflow time counter 223l is 0 (S4104), When it is determined that it is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4104: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the downflow time counter 223l is 0 (S4104: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), and the ball-blanking period has elapsed. Therefore, when the storage valve 704a is in the open state (released state), a release-time notification process for reporting a defect is executed (S4105), and this process ends. This cancellation notification process (S4105) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the cancellation notification process (S4105). In the notification process at the time of cancellation (S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the received winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 (S4301). If the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 is included (S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4301, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is not included (S4301: No), then the winning information command It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entrance to the mouths (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e is included (S4302), and the entrance to the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e is performed. If the winning information to be paid is not included (S4302: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  In the processing of S4302, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out mouth (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is included (S4302: Yes), the processing proceeds to S4303. If the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 (S4301: Yes), or out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e In the process of S4303 that is executed when the winning information corresponding to the winning is included (S4302: Yes), the display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 704a is set (S4303), and this process is executed. finish. When the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), the sphere that has flown into the storage device 700 flows down the guide flow path 704, so a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 or an out The reason why the balls enter the mouths (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e is that the storage valve 704a is likely not normally opened.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7(b)) for notifying that the storage valve 704a is defective in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display error command is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7(b)), it is possible to easily let the player or the store clerk in the hall notice the occurrence of the problem, so that the problem can be promptly resolved.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with the storage device 700 capable of storing balls inside. The storage device 700 is provided with a plurality of flow paths (induction flow paths 704, 706, 708) inside thereof, and is configured to allow the balls to flow down to different ball entrances. A storage valve 704a capable of closing the flow passage is provided in the guide flow passage 704. When the guiding flow path 704 is closed by the storage valve 704a, one ball can be stored (held) in the upper part thereof.

  Further, in the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the sphere that has flown into the storage device 700 flows down the guide flow channel 704 (compared to the guide flow channel 706 and the guide flow channel 708, the flow path to the guide flow channel 704). Since it is configured such that the spheres can easily flow in, the spheres can be inserted into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the guide flow path 704. Therefore, by causing the balls to flow into the storage device 700, it is possible to stably receive the payout of the prize balls based on the entrance into the general prize opening (medium value prize opening) 701.

  On the other hand, in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed and the sphere is stored above the storage valve 704a, the sphere that has flowed into the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the stored sphere, so that the guide flow path 706, Alternatively, it repels in either direction of the guide flow path 708. That is, either the general winning opening (large-value winning opening) 702 or the outlets (small-value winning opening) 703d or 703e where the winning balls are not paid out due to the repulsion of the flowing direction and thus the number of winning prize balls is large. Enter the crab. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a holding device for temporarily holding a ball that has been hit on the game board. Among these conventional game machines, there is a game machine in which the held balls can be discharged to the game board by the operation of the player and entered into a predetermined winning opening provided in the traveling direction ( For example, JP-A-2003-190443).

  However, in the conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player because the balls released by using the holding device are only put into a predetermined winning port.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) to set the storage valve 704a in the open state while the operation is performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that a ball will enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. The state (there is a high gambling state in which there is a possibility that many prize balls may be obtained, but there is a possibility that no prize balls may be obtained). In addition, by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state, the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 can be inserted into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (a small amount, but stable. It is possible to obtain a prize ball). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, so that each player selects the playability that suits his or her taste. You can play games. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a can be switched by the release button 800 at any timing of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, or the like. This allows each player to start the game while the storage valve 704a is in a state suitable for his or her taste. Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of the lottery that is performed regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and a lottery is performed once a minute to switch to the open state (released state). May be.

  When the lottery is won, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the balls can easily enter the outlets (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e with the storage valve 704a closed due to the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, the balls are stored by lottery. A game can be played in the expectation that the valve 704a will be opened. On the other hand, when it is easy for the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 with the storage valve 704a closed due to the adjustment state of the nails 709a and 709b, the lottery continues to be missed. A game can be played in the expectation that the storage valve 704a continues to be closed. Further, the clerk in the hall may adjust the lottery probability of the lottery whether or not to set the storage valve 607a to the open state (released state). As a result, when the player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict a table having a good lottery probability and perform the machine selection. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit when setting the lottery probability of the hole, so that the interest of the player can be improved at the stage of selecting the machine before starting the game. .

  In the present embodiment, there are two types of flow passages, the guide flow passage 706 and the guide flow passage 708, through which the balls can flow when the storage valve 704a is closed, but the flow passages are not limited to this. More flow paths and winning openings may be provided. Further, it is possible to give more variations to the number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls enter the respective winning openings. This makes it possible to increase the randomness of the number of prize balls that can be acquired when the storage valve 704a is closed, so that the player can more interestingly observe the flow-down direction of the balls that have entered the storage device 700. Can be made.

  Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of flow paths through which the balls can flow when the storage valve 704a is opened. And, when flowing down through each flow path, a different number of prize balls may be provided for each of the ball entrances. As a result, even when the storage valve 704a is opened, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be randomized. Can be observed more interestingly.

  In the present embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the second entrance 640, but the arrangement may be reversed. By providing the storage device 700 on the upstream side, it is possible to make it easier for the balls to flow into the storage device 700.

  In the present embodiment, only the first specific winning opening 65a is provided as the winning opening opened in the special game state (big hit state), but a plurality of winning openings may be provided as in the first embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only while the release button 800 is being pressed (operated), but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during the predetermined period in which the storage valve 704a is opened. This eliminates the need to continue pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (storage state) and the open state (released state) may be switched. With such a configuration, since the release button 800 only needs to be operated when it is desired to switch the state, the number of times the player operates can be reduced. Further, contrary to the release button 800, an operation means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating may be provided. Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, each player can be made to select a game characteristic that suits his or her taste.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed in text on the small area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds, but the mode of notifying the player of the state of the storage valve 704a is limited to this. Not a thing. For example, depending on the state of the storage valve 704a, either a real image of the storage valve 704a in the open state or a real image of the closed valve may be displayed. Further, the display showing the state of the storage valve 704a may be displayed in a display area other than the small area Ds2. Further, in the present embodiment, the display showing the state of the storage valve 704a is configured to be displayed as the rear image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that it may display on the front side rather than a 3rd design. Further, the aspect of the third symbol may be changed according to the state of the storage valve 704a, and the state of the storage valve 704a may be recognized according to the aspect of the third symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 may control the storage valve 704a. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 704a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when the release state command is received from the main control device 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when the closed state command is received. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, the main process relating to the game, the selection process of the variation effect, the lottery process of the special symbol, etc. can be executed without delay.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 700 having a peculiar structure which is not mounted in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the playability of the storage device 700 is provided. You may stay. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 700 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (explanatory image) for explaining the conditions under which the storage valve 704a is opened and the merits and demerits of opening the storage valve 704a is displayed. It may be configured as follows. This allows the player to easily understand the playability. Further, the back side type in which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back side type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who has become accustomed to the game on the pachinko machine 10 and who fully understands the playability can change to the rear type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the front surface of the first winning opening 64 so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by left-handing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, like the first embodiment, the first specific winning port 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700. As a result, the ball can be made to flow into the first specific winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 only by performing a right hit in the special game state (big hit state), and thus the prize ball in the special game state (big hit state) You can do more. Therefore, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the sphere stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a and the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 interfere (contact) with each other, the flow path through which the newly flowing sphere flows down is It was configured to be random. That is, in a state where the spheres are stored above the storage valve 704a, the ratio of the spheres newly flowing into the storage device 700 to the guide flow passage 706 and the guide flow passage 708 is substantially the same. Although configured, it is not limited to this. For example, the width of the storage valve 704a is widened (for example, as 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere) so that the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a is located on the right side in front view or the left side on front view. It may be configured to obtain. When the sphere is arranged on the upper side of the storage valve 704a to the left in the front view, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 easily collides with the right side surface of the stored sphere. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is easily repelled to the right side in front view, and the sphere easily flows down the guide flow path 708. As described above, since the outlets (small-value winning holes) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guide flow path 708, the player cannot obtain a prize ball (which is disadvantageous to the player). .. On the other hand, when the ball is arranged on the right side in the front view in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 easily collides with the left side surface of the stored ball. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is easily repelled to the left side in front view, and the sphere easily flows down the guide flow path 706. As described above, since the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the guide flow path 708, the player can obtain a relatively large amount of prize balls (advantageous for the player. Will be). As described above, by arranging the balls stored above the storage valve 704a, it is possible to form a state advantageous to the player and a state disadvantageous to the player, so that the storage valve 704a is closed when the storage valve 704a is closed. You can be aware of the arrangement of the balls stored in the upper part of the. Therefore, if the arrangement of the balls is unfavorable (that is, if the balls are stored to the left in the front view), the release button 800 is pressed (operated) to open (release) the storage valve 704a. it can. Also, if the arrangement of the balls is advantageous (that is, if the balls are stored to the right in the front view), it is possible to make the player want to continue the game while maintaining the arrangement of the balls. .. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of determining whether or not to press the release button 800 according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85. In the above-described first embodiment, the state of the second specific winning opening 650a (open state or closed state) and the state of the storage valve 607a provided in the storage device 600 (open state or closed state) are independent of each other. In the privilege game state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is always controlled to be in the open state, while the second specific winning opening 650a is in a predetermined period in 12 rounds (see FIG. 16). The open state is set only during the open period defined for each jackpot type). Further, two kinds of flow paths (a guide flow path 652 and a guide flow path 653) are provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and only when a sphere flows down the guide flow path 652, the guide It was configured to be able to enter the positive variation ball inlet 654 provided on the downstream side of the flow path 652. That is, even if a ball hits the second specific winning opening 650a during the big hit, the ball does not flow down the guide flow path 652 so that the special symbol does not shift to the probability changing state after the big hit ends. It was

  On the other hand, in this modification, the slide member 900 is used instead of the member for opening and closing the second specific winning opening 650a and the storage valve 607a of the first embodiment, and the second specific winning opening 650a and the storage. The state of the device 600 is configured to be switchable. That is, one member is configured to be able to perform the opening/closing operation of the second specific winning opening 650a and the opening/closing control of the guide passage 607 in the storage device 600, and are configured to switch the states in cooperation with each other. That is, when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, the guide flow path 607 (general winning opening 602) is also opened, and when the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, the guiding flow path 607 (general winning opening 602) is opened. ) Is also configured to be closed. When configured in this manner, the second specific winning opening 650a, the general winning opening 602 (that is, the winning opening opened by the slide member 900 during the big hit) together, the winning opening for obtaining the prize ball during the big hit. Can be treated as

  Further, only the guide passage 652 leading to the certainty variation entrance 654 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the passage switching valve 650d, the guide passage 653, and the normal entrance 655 are provided. Has been abolished. That is, if the ball can be inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a, the special symbol is configured to shift to the probability changing state after the jackpot is over. Also, the winning opening to be opened in the 12th round is changed according to the jackpot type. That is, in the 12th round, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are set to the open state (V route open big hit), and the first identification in all the rounds of the big winning. The jackpot 65a is set to be in an open state (the second specific winning port 650a and the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 are not opened during the jackpot) and a jackpot (V route closed jackpot) is provided. Has been.

  Along with these changes from the first embodiment, the ending conditions for each round of jackpots are also changed. Specifically, in the first to eleventh rounds and the thirteenth to fifteenth rounds of jackpots, balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. Is changed to 10 in total, or when 30 seconds have passed from the start of the round, the round game is finished (the first specific winning opening 65a is closed). In the 12th round, the total number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is 10 or the round. When 30 seconds have passed from the start of the round game, the round game is finished (the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 are closed).

  The point that the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that it is a member for switching the state of the second specific winning port 650a (closing portion 910). The member for switching the state of the guide flow path 607 (the ball storage section 920) and the member (slide member 900) are configured by one member, and the ball is paid out when the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls to be played is changed to 3 (15 in the first embodiment), the content of the ROM 202 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. For other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 76, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, an example of an image (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the 12th round of the V route opening jackpot (jackpot F). explain. As shown in FIG. 76, when 12 rounds of the V route open jackpot (jackpot F) are reached, the word "ROUND 12" is displayed in the display area 714 for displaying the number of rounds. Further, a display area 717 for notifying that the second specific winning port 650a has been opened is formed on the upper center of the third symbol display device 81 as viewed from the front. In this display area 717, the characters "CHANCE!!" and the character "probably changing route open!!" are displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol shifts to the probability changing state of the special symbol after the jackpot is finished by inserting the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a. Note that other display contents of the boy character 710 and the like are the same as the display contents displayed on the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6A), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the configuration on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, on the downstream side of the route (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, a storage device 600, a first variable winning device 65, and a second device as in the first embodiment. A variable winning device 650 is provided. In addition, a member for opening or closing the second specific winning port 650a of the second variable winning device 650 (closing part 910) and a member for opening or closing the flow path of the storage device 600 (ball storing part 920). Are arranged in a straight line. Although details will be described later, this is because the closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 are both part of the slide member.

  Further, nails 921a and 921b are provided at the entrance of the storage device 600. The clerk of the hall can adjust the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600 by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b before the opening of the hall, for example. By changing the ratio of the balls that flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to change the number of balls that enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600 in the 12th round of the jackpot. it can. Therefore, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball hit by the right hitting can easily flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to increase the prize balls that the player can obtain in the jackpot. Therefore, the player's expectation for the jackpot game can be further improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  On the contrary, when it is made difficult for the ball to flow into the storage device 600 by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, the first specific winning opening 65a provided downstream of the storage device 600 and the second The number of balls that reach the specific winning opening 650a can be increased. Therefore, the jackpot can be digested more quickly. Further, in the 12th round, since it is easy to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, when the jackpot F is achieved, it is possible to easily transition to the state where the special symbol is changed. Therefore, the jackpots are more likely to continue in a short period of time, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The configuration for adjusting the ease with which the balls flow into the storage device 600 (the ease with which the balls enter the second specific winning opening 650a) is not limited to nails. For example, a windmill may be provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 so that the ease of rotation can be adjusted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a slide member 900 including the above-described closing portion 910 and sphere storing portion 920 in its configuration will be described. 78(a) and 78(b) are cross-sectional views of the gaming board 13 taken along the line LXXVIIb-LXXVIIb in FIG. 77. Here, the slide member 900 is configured to be slidable to the back side or the front side in front view with respect to the game board 13, and the second identification is performed by sliding the displacement to the front side in the front view. The winning opening 650a and the guide passage 607 can be closed. On the other hand, by slidingly displacing the slide member 900 toward the inner side with respect to the game board 13, the second specific winning port 650a and the guide passage 607 can be opened.

  FIG. 78(a) is a diagram when viewed from above the game board 13 when the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide passage 607 are closed by the slide members 900, respectively. On the other hand, FIG. 78(b) is a diagram when viewed from above the game board 13 when the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide flow path 607 are opened.

  As shown in FIG. 78( a ), the slide member 900 has a shape in which a substantially rectangular shaped closing portion 910 and a spherical storage portion 920 are respectively projected from the right end portion and the left end portion of the substantially rectangular base portion 930 (substantially “ U-shaped”). The closing part 910 and the ball storing part 920 are projected to the front side of the game board 13 or buried in the back side of the game board 13 through the opening parts 940a and 940b formed in the base plate 60, respectively. can do.

  In the state where the slide member 900 is slid and displaced toward the front side in front view, as shown in FIG. 78(a), since the upper portion of the second specific winning port 650a is closed by the closing part 910, the sphere is changed to the second variable position. It becomes impossible to enter the inside of the winning device 650. Similarly, since the guide flow path 607 is closed by the sphere reservoir 920, the sphere can be put into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the guiding flow path 607. become unable.

  As shown in FIG. 78(b), when the slide member 900 is slid and displaced to the inner side of the game board 13, the upper part of the second variable winning a prize device 650 is opened and the guide passage 607 is also opened. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right, the ball goes to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 provided on the downstream side of the guide flow path 607 and the second specific winning opening 650a provided on the downstream side of the storage device 600. Can be entered.

  As described above, in this modification, the switching of the state of the second specific winning port 650a and the switching of the state of the guide flow path 607 can be realized only by the slide member 900. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the second specific winning port 650 and the storage valve 607a are separately controlled as in the first embodiment. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processing in the game such as lottery for special symbols and determination of variation time, if the processing speed decreases due to an increase in processing load, The impact on the game will increase. On the other hand, in this modification, since the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, the first hit type selection table 202b in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. 79. As described above, in the present modified example, when the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball always enters the certainty variation entrance 654. Then, as jackpot types, a jackpot in which the second specific winning opening 650 is opened in the twelfth round and a jackpot in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in the twelfth round are provided.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, the jackpot E (V route closing jackpot) is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 from 0 to 49 (see 202b1 in FIG. 79). This jackpot E (V route closed jackpot) is a jackpot to which a special game state of 15 rounds is given, and in each round of the jackpot, the first specific winning opening 65a has a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse, or a ball is hit). It is a jackpot that is opened until 10 balls are entered. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), it is not possible to put the ball into the positive variation ball entrance 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650, so the time saving state of the normal symbol is 100 after the big hit ends. Will be given once.

  On the other hand, the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 from 50 to 99 (see 202b2 in FIG. 79). This jackpot F is a jackpot to which a special game state of 15 rounds is given, and in the 12 rounds of jackpot, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are a predetermined time (30 seconds elapse). Or until 10 balls have been entered, and in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 650a has reached a predetermined time (30 seconds has elapsed, or 10 balls have entered). It is a jackpot that is released until you hit the ball. In the jackpot F, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the twelfth round, so if the ball can be put into the second specific winning opening 650a in the twelfth round, the special symbol is changed after the jackpot. Is given. On the other hand, in the twelfth round, if the ball is not hit to the right, or even if it is hit to the right, a ball just enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and as a result, the ball goes to the second specific winning opening 650a. If 12 rounds are finished without entering the ball, 100 times the time saving state of the normal symbol is given after the jackpot F is over.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. In this embodiment, the content of the main process (see FIG. 34) is changed from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, the big hit control process 3 (see FIG. 80) is executed instead of the big hit control process (see FIG. 35) executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the first embodiment. ing. In the following, only the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) will be described, and detailed description of the other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 80, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the big hit control process 3 (S1031). The big hit control process 3 is a process of setting the opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a for each round of the big hit state.

  In each of the jackpot control processing 3, S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112, S1101, S1102, S1104 executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. , S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112 are executed. Further, in the big hit control process 3 (S1031), the respective processes of S1103, S1107, and S1108 that were executed in the big hit control process (FIG. 35) in the first embodiment are abolished.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). Instead of this, the jackpot operation setting process 2 is executed (S1121), and this process is terminated. Details of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) will be described with reference to FIG. 81.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the big hit operation setting process 2 (S1121) described above. This jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) is a process for setting the state (open state or closed state) of the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a.

In each of the jackpot operation setting processing 2 (S1121), each processing of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 is the same as each processing of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 in the jackpot operation setting processing (see FIG. 36) of the first embodiment. The process of is executed.
In addition, in the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) in the present modification, when it is determined that it is the 12th round in the process of S1201 (S1201: Yes), the jackpot type of this time is jackpot F (V route open). It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (S1211).

  When it is determined in the process of S1211 that the jackpot is not the jackpot F (S1211: No), it means that the jackpot E is the jackpot E in which the first specific winning opening (first big opening opening) 65a is opened in all rounds of the jackpot. The opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big jackpot F in the processing of S1211, (S1211: Yes), it is the jackpot type that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round. The opening of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set (S1203). As described above, the closing part 910 that closes the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is the same member as the ball storage part 920 that closes the guide flow path 607 of the lottery device 600. Of the slide member 900, and the closing portion 910 and the ball storing portion 920 are slidably displaced in conjunction with each other. Therefore, by setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a in the process of S1203, the guide flow path 607 inside the storage device 600 is also opened (that is, the general winning opening 602 is also opened). ).

  After setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by the processing of S1203, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a , And the guidance flow path 607 is set to the open state (released state), the storage state command corresponding to the open state (released state) is set to notify the voice lamp control device 114 (S1212). , And the process proceeds to S1206. The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage state command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage state command. When the display control device 114 receives the display rear image change command, the display area 717 is generated in the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "CHANGE!!" and "probably changing route open!" Is displayed (see FIG. 76). By displaying these characters, it is possible to make the player easily recognize that it is a chance to shift to the special variation state of the special symbol.

  If the special symbol shifts to the probability changing state, the jackpot is likely to be again the jackpot in a short period after the jackpot is finished, which is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, in the 12th round of the jackpot F, the player can be more seriously aimed at the second specific winning opening 650a and hit a ball. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the big hit becomes a mere work for obtaining the prize ball, and to enjoy the game during the special game state (during the big hit state).

  As described above, the proportion of the balls that reach the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a among the right-handed balls is determined by the nails 921a, 921b (provided at the entrance of the storage device 600). It can be varied by adjusting (see FIG. 77). For example, by adjusting the nail 921a to open to the right in the front view or adjusting the nail 921b to open to the left in the front view (opening the nail), the ball hit to the right flows further into the storage device 600. Easier to do. Therefore, the ratio of the balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is relatively low. That is, the more the nails 921a and 921b are opened, the more difficult it is for a ball to enter the second specific winning port 650a in the 12th round of the big hit F. Further, if 10 balls enter the general prize opening (high value prize opening) 602 without being able to enter the second specific prize opening 650, the 12th round ends. . Therefore, it becomes difficult for the special symbol to shift to the probability changing state. When the balls easily flow into the storage device 600, the balls easily enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, which has a larger number of prize balls than the second specific winning opening 650a. (See FIG. 9B). As a result, the player can obtain a large amount of prize balls, and thus the player's interest in winning the jackpot can be improved.

  Here, in many cases, the player makes a right hit at the first specific winning opening 65a in the 1st to 11th rounds, so that the player is arranged downstream of the route (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. The sphere also flows into the storage device 600 provided. Therefore, by the time the 12th round starts, one sphere has been stored in the upper part of the sphere storage unit 920. Therefore, when the 12th round is started and the slide member 900 is slid and displaced to open the upper portion of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, the balls stored in the upper portion of the ball storing portion 920 are transferred to the general winning opening. (Large-value winning opening) Flows down to 602. As a result, among the balls that have hit the right side in the twelfth round, nine balls are actually moved to the second specific winning opening 650a before entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. If the ball cannot be entered, the 12th round will end.

  On the other hand, adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that they are close to each other (closing the nails) makes it difficult for the right-handed ball to flow into the storage device 600. Therefore, the proportion of the balls that reach the second specific winning port 650 is relatively high, so that it is easy to put the ball into the second specific winning port 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F. Therefore, it becomes easy to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over. As a result, the jackpot F is likely to be another jackpot again in a short period after the end of the jackpot F, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In this way, by changing the easiness of the ball to enter the storage device 600 when the ball is hit to the right, the second ball entrance 650a provided downstream of the inlet part of the storage device 600 is changed. You can change the ease of entering the ball. Therefore, the clerk in the hall can change the playability when the jackpot F is achieved, simply by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. In other words, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the game playability that easily shifts to a specially changed state of the special symbol, and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is easy to enter, 12 It is easy to get a lot of prize balls in the round, but it is possible to switch to a game property in which it is difficult to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall.

  Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109 of the jackpot control process 3, if it is determined that it is not the ending effect start timing (S1109: No), then the winning process (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. ), the winning process 2 is executed (S1122), and the process proceeds to S1112. Details of the winning process 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the winning process 2 (S1122) executed by the MPU 201 in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the present modification. Of the prize winning process 2 (S1122), the respective processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 are the same as the respective processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 in the winning process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment. The processing of is executed.

  In the winning process 3 (S1122) of this modified example, the value of the winning number counter 203j becomes 10 or more in the process of S1404 (that is, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, the second specifying). When it is determined that the total number of winnings in the winning opening (second large opening) 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is 10 or more) (S1404: Yes), or round time When it is determined that (30 seconds from the start of the round) has elapsed (S1405: Yes), any winning opening (first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a or second specified opening) The winning opening closing process for setting the closing of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602) is executed (S1431), and the process proceeds to S1408. The winning opening closing process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the winning opening closing process (S1431). The winning opening closing process (S1431) is a process of setting the closing of the winning opening when the conditions for closing the winning opening are satisfied in each round of the jackpot.

  In the winning opening closing process (S1431), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the 12th round (S4401). If it is not the 12th round (S4401: No), it means that the winning opening currently open is the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. The one large opening 65a is set to be closed (S4402), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the present is the 12th round (S4401), the winning jacks that are open are different rounds depending on the jackpot type. It is determined whether or not it is an open jackpot (S4403). When it is determined that the jackpot is not the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) (that is, the jackpot is E (V route closed jackpot)) (S4403: No), the winning opening that is currently open is the first specific winning opening ( This means that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set to be closed (S4402), and the present processing is executed. finish.

  In the processing of S4403, when it is determined that the big hit of this time is the big hit F (V route open big hit) (S4403: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second big opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round. It means that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are currently open. Therefore, in this case, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are set to be closed (S4404), and the second specific winning opening (second large opening). In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the mouth 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are closed, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state (storage state) is set ( (S4405), and ends this processing.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage state command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage state command. When the display control device 114 receives the display back image change command, the display area 717 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is erased. This allows the player to easily recognize that the chance to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol has ended.

  By executing the winning opening closing process (S1431), the opened winning opening can be closed accurately.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the processing content of the command determination processing is partially changed from the command determination processing (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. More specifically, in order to execute the process for receiving the storage state command output from the main control device 110 in the jackpot, each of S1921 to S1923 in the command determination process (see FIG. 69) of the second embodiment. Execute the process. Since the processing content itself is the same as the command determination processing (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the command determination processing in this modification is configured to execute the error notification processing 2 (S1971) instead of the error notification processing (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. This error notification process 2 (S1971) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the error notification processing 2 (S1971) described above. In the error notification process 2 (S1971), in each process of S1931 to S1934, S1936, and S1937, the same process as the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment is executed. Further, in the error notification process 2 (S1971) in the present modification, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 in the process of S1934 (S1981), the hit notification process in the first embodiment (FIG. 45). Instead of (see), hit notification processing 2 is executed (S1981), and this processing ends. This hit notification processing 2 (S1981) is processing for notifying when a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a during a big hit, as in the hit notification processing (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment. Is.

  Next, the hit notification process 2 (S1981) described above will be described with reference to FIG. In the hit notification process 2 (S1981), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991). In the process of S1991, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is ON (S1991: Yes), it is then determined whether the value of the downflow time counter 223l is 0 (S1992), and the counter value is 0. If not (S1992), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1992, when it is determined that the value of the downflow time counter 223l is 0 (S1992: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state), and the ball-blanking period elapses. Since it means that the winning information is included, it is determined whether or not the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the winning in the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (S1993).

  Then, when it is determined that the entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1993: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the entry information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1993: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state). However, it means that the ball is flowing down to the downstream of the storage valve 607a. Therefore, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1994), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1991, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (off) (S1991: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the downflow time counter 223l is 0 (S1995). ). Then, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 (S1995: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is turned on in the process of S1995 (S1995: Yes), then the received prize information command is entered into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the sphere is included (S1996). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1996: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  In the process of S1996, if the winning information corresponding to the ball to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1996: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state). That is, it means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though the pitching period has passed. That is, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally opened, the process proceeds to S1994 in order to notify the malfunction of the storage valve 607a.

  By this hit notification process 2 (S1981), when a malfunction occurs in the operation of the storage valve 607a, the malfunction can be promptly notified, so that the malfunction can be promptly resolved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the first embodiment, the slide member 900 is used to open/close the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the guiding flow path in the storage device 600. The opening/closing operation of 607 can be performed at the same time. That is, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is configured as one of the winning openings for obtaining a prize ball during a big hit.

  Since the switching of the state of the second specific winning opening 650a and the switching of the state of the guide flow channel 607 can be realized only by slidingly displacing the slide member 900, like the first embodiment, the second specific winning port 650a can be realized. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are separately controlled. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 executes important processing in the game, such as lottery for special symbols and determination of variation time, if the processing speed decreases due to an increase in processing load, The impact on the game will increase. On the other hand, in this modification, since the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

  In addition, in the present modification, only the certainty variation entrance port 654 is provided inside the second variable winning a prize device 650, and the ball that has flowed into the inside of the second variable winning award device 650 always enters the certain variation entrance ball port 654. It is configured to be a sphere. Thereby, if the ball can be inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to realize a simple game property in which the special symbol shifts to the probability changing state after the jackpot is over. Therefore, since it becomes easier for the player to understand whether or not the special symbol shifts to the probability changing state, it is possible to provide a game feature that even a beginner can enjoy. Further, since the flow path switching valve 650d, the guide flow path 653, and the normal ball entrance 655, which are provided inside the second variable winning a prize apparatus 650 in the first embodiment, are eliminated, the second variable winning a prize apparatus 650. The structure of can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present modification, by adjusting the ratio of the balls that flow into the storage device 600 among the balls that have been hit to the right, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b (see FIG. 77) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600. It is configured to be variable.

  Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is drawn based on whether or not a game ball is won at a starting winning port, and whether or not a transition to a probability variation state is drawn separately There is a lottery. As a result, it is possible to prevent the winning from being a mere work for getting a lot of balls, and to make the player playing the winning game with a sense of expectation for shifting to the probability variation state, thereby improving the player's interest in the game. I am trying.

  Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a predetermined area that allows the game ball to enter only during the hit, and the probability variation state after hitting by entering the game ball into the predetermined area There is one that shifts to (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-180999).

  However, in the conventional game machine, the rate of the game ball entering the predetermined area during hitting is preset for each model, so in order to make the rate of transition to the probability variation state different, There was no choice but to introduce a different model. In other words, in the conventional game machine, there is no degree of freedom in the rate of transition to the probability fluctuation state, and it is difficult to flexibly deal with different business policies for each hall. Therefore, a more versatile gaming machine has been demanded.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, the ease with which the balls enter the storage device 600 when right-handing is performed can be easily changed by adjusting the degree of adjustment of the nails 921a and 921b. Is configured. This makes it possible to change the ease of entering the second entrance 650a provided downstream of the entrance of the storage device 600. Therefore, the clerk in the hall can change the playability when the jackpot F is achieved, simply by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the game is easy to shift to the special symbol probability change state, and it is easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 and special. It is possible to switch the game nature that makes it difficult to shift to the probability change state of the symbol. Therefore, since the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall, versatility can be improved.

  In this modified example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is configured to be opened for a maximum of 5 seconds in 12 rounds of jackpot F, but the opening time may be set arbitrarily. For example, by setting the opening time to 10 seconds, it is possible to make it easier for a ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, it becomes easy to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. The opening time may be set to 2 seconds, for example. By shortening the opening time, various striking methods are performed in order to enter the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a within a limited time, and the pachinko machine 10 in which the nails 921a and 921b are further closed. Can be selected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be absorbed in the game.

  In the present modification, the entrance of the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the second specific winning opening 650a, and the ease of entering the storage device 600 can be varied by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. However, the configuration for varying the ratio of the balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is not limited to this. For example, instead of the storage device 600, an out-out port or a winning port through which a prize ball is paid out by a ball entering may be provided. And the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth 650a may be constituted so that an open/closed state may be switched by a single member. Even with such a configuration, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b to change the ease of entering the out mouth or the winning opening, the ratio of the balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a can be changed. Can be made. Further, since the structure can be simplified by replacing the storage device 600 with an outlet or a winning opening, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, the easiness of flowing into the storage device 600 does not necessarily need to be adjustable. That is, instead of the nails 921a and 921b, a columnar member fixed to the board surface may be provided. As a result, it is possible to make it impossible for the hole side to adjust whether or not the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F, so that the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Even if the ball is not thrown, it is possible to prevent the discouragement of the discouragement from heading to the hole. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling distrust of the hall.

  In the present modified example, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are configured to be opened in the 12th round of the jackpot F, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be opened in the first round. With this, it is possible to determine early whether or not to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind in the subsequent special game state (big hit state). The second specific winning opening 650a may be opened in the 15th round. As a result, since it is not decided until the 15th round which is the final round whether or not to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol, the player's expectation for the probability variation state of the special symbol can be maintained longer. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the big hit game. In addition, for example, when the big hit F is reached, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 may be continuously opened in a plurality of rounds. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be opened in the 12th and 13th rounds. As a result, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage section 920 by the end of the 11th round enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the 12th round, and in the 13th round, the ball storing section. There may be no sphere above 920. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of causing the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a.

  In this modification, as in the first embodiment, only one sphere can be stored inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of spheres can be stored. For example, four balls may be stored above the ball storage unit 920. In this case, the ending condition of the 12th round is changed, and the 12th round is ended when, for example, a total of 5 balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening 602. It may be configured to. In the first to eleventh rounds of jackpots, a game is played by trying to enter the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a by right-handing, so in many cases, the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage section 920 before the start of the twelve rounds. The upper limit number (4) is stored. That is, since the 12 rounds are started and the sphere storage section 920 is opened, the 4 stored balls flow into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 all at once. Then, four balls have entered the specific winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a, second specific winning opening 650a, and general winning opening 602). Therefore, one more ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 to complete 12 rounds (a total of five balls are the second specific winning opening). 650a or the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602) is the situation, so the opportunity to enter the second specific winning opening 650a can be limited to one ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more nervous and play the game for 12 rounds. In addition, in the first to eleventh rounds of the jackpot, hoping that the spheres do not flow into the storage device 600 as much as possible (that is, the number of spheres stored in the upper part of the sphere storage unit 920 is not the upper limit number of four balls and 12 You can play jackpot games while hoping to reach the round. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while giving a sense of tension even during the big hit, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the big hit from being just a work for obtaining a prize ball, and the big hit game of the player. You can improve your interest.

  In addition, the number of balls that enter the specific winning opening, which is the condition for ending the 12th round, and the upper limit of the number of balls that can be stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the condition for ending 12 rounds may be equal to or less than the number of spheres that can be stored in the upper portion of the sphere storage unit 920. As a result, it is possible to more strongly hope that the balls will not be stored inside the storage device 600 by the start of the 12th round, and to play the game. Conversely, the upper limit number of spheres that can be stored in the sphere storage unit 920 may be reduced. As a result, even if the upper limit number of balls has been stored in the upper part of the ball storage unit 920 by the start of the 12th round, it is possible to provide the second specific winning port 650a with multiple opportunities to enter the ball in the 12th round. You can Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In this modification, in the twelfth round of the big hit F, the effect image shown in FIG. 76 is displayed when the ball storage 920 is opened, but the effect during the big hit is limited to this. is not. For example, the jackpot E or the jackpot F may be notified according to the result of the effect executed by the 11th round of the jackpot. More specifically, for example, in each of the first to eleventh rounds, an effect in which a ally of justice and a monster fight may be performed. Then, if the ally of justice wins by the 11th round, the jackpot F is notified, and if the ally of justice is defeated, the jackpot E may be notified. That is, when the teammate of justice wins, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so that the player can recognize that it is a chance to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make the player observe the result of the effect performed in the jackpot more interestingly.

  In addition, there is a variation in the effect contents, and the expectation that a teammate of justice will win (it is easy to select in case of big hit F) and the possibility that the teammate of justice will be defeated (in case of big hit E) The content of the effect may be provided. For example, if a ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special move, or if the ally of justice avoids the attack of the enemy, the odds of winning are increased, and the attack of the ally of justice is missed, It may be configured so that it is more likely to be defeated when the enemy attacks with a special move. As a result, not only the result of whether or not a ally of justice wins, but the result can be predicted by the flow of the production until winning or losing. Therefore, the interest of the player in the jackpot game can be improved.

  It should be noted that the content of the effect performed up to the 11th round is not limited to the above-described effect of fighting a ally of justice and a monster, and an advantageous jackpot F and a jackpot E, which is disadvantageous to the jackpot F, can be suggested. Any form may be used. For example, the boy character 710 may perform a search for a treasure, and if the treasure can be found by the 11th round, the jackpot F may be notified. It may be configured to display the effect of eating a large amount of food and notify that the jackpot is a big hit F when the food provided is completely exhausted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 600 having a peculiar structure which is not mounted in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the game play related to the storage device 600 is provided. You may stay. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and the conditions under which the storage valve 607a is opened, the merits when opened and the disadvantages when the ball is hit to the right in the closed state. You may comprise so that the image (explanatory image) explaining may be displayed. This allows the player to easily understand the playability. Further, the back side type in which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back side type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who is accustomed to the game on the pachinko machine 10 and who fully understands the playability can change to the rear type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In this modification, both the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are treated as winning openings for obtaining a jackpot of a big hit. The winning hole) 602 may be treated as a normal winning hole. In other words, as a termination condition for each round of jackpots, each round of jackpots ends when 10 or more balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. It may be configured such that the number of balls entered into the winning opening 602 is not involved. As a result, the more the ball hits the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the 12 rounds of big hits, the more profitable the player can be, which further enhances the player's interest in the game.

  In this modified example, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the spheres can easily flow into the storage device 600, it is configured that it is difficult for the spheres to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, and the storage device 600 is stored. By adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball does not easily flow in, the ball is configured to easily enter the second specific winning port 650a. That is, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, it was configured to be able to change the rate of transition to the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot, but to change the rate of transition to the probability variation state of the special symbol. The method is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600 constant, inside the second variable winning device 650, a positive variation ball inlet 654 and a normal ball inlet 655 are provided as in the first embodiment. It may be configured. Then, the clerk in the hall may be configured to adjust the ratio of the balls that have flowed into the second variable winning device 650 to the positive variation ball entrance 654 and the normal ball entrance 655. More specifically, for example, the second variable winning a prize device 650 in the present modification is replaced with the second variable award winning device 650 (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment, and then the flow path switching valve 650d and the switching. The shaft 650e and abolished. Then, for example, a nail may be struck at the branch position between the guide flow passage 652 and the guide flow passage 653 (that is, above the location where the switching shaft 650e was provided in the first embodiment). Further, the position at which the nail is hit may be, for example, a distance above the position where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15), for example, a distance about the radius of the sphere. In other words, it may be a position where the sphere that has flowed down the guide flow channel 651 may come into contact (collision) and a position where the sphere can flow down to the guide flow channel 652 and the guide flow channel 653. With this configuration, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the right, the game ball that has flowed down the guide flow path 651 easily comes into contact (collision) with the left side surface of the nail. Therefore, the ball tends to be repelled to the left in the front view. Therefore, the sphere easily flows into the guide flow channel 652 provided on the left side in front view downstream of the second variable winning device 650, and thus the sphere easily enters the certainty variation ball entrance 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right, the special symbol can be easily changed to a certain state after the jackpot. On the contrary, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning a prize device 650 is adjusted to the left, the game ball flowing down the guide flow path 651 easily comes into contact (collision) with the right side surface of the nail, so that the ball is in front. It tends to be repelled in the right direction. Therefore, the sphere easily flows into the guide flow path 653 provided on the left side in front view downstream of the second variable winning device 650, and thus the sphere easily enters the certainty variation ball entrance 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right, it is possible to make it difficult for the special symbol to be changed to a certain state after the jackpot is over. In this way, by making it possible to adjust the ease of entering the probability variation entrance 654, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be varied according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, it is possible to provide the playability corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

  Further, as another specific example configured to be able to change the rate of transition to the special variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, instead of the nails 921a and 921b in the present modification, the inlet portion of the storage device 600 is in an open state. A variable member for switching between the closed state and the closed state may be provided. The variable member may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state while the power is on. In this case, after fixing the length of one cycle composed of the open state and the closed state (for example, 3 seconds), the period set to the open state and the period set to the closed state The ratio may be adjusted so that the holes can be adjusted. More specifically, for example, an operation means such as a DIP switch that can be set in a plurality of states is provided. Then, for example, when the state of the switch indicates (00000000B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is configured not to be closed. That is, since the entrance is always open, the game ball is set to a state in which it easily flows into the storage device 600. Then, if the state of the switch indicates (11111111B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is always set to the closed state. That is, in the jackpot, there is no ball that flows into the storage device 600, and the state is set such that the ball easily flows into the second specific winning port 650a. Then, when the dip switch is in another state (00000001B to 11111110B), the period in which the dip switch is in the closed state may be extended as going from (00000000B) to (11111111B). That is, it may be configured such that the ball is more likely to enter the second specific winning opening 650a as it goes to (11111111B), and the probability variation state of the special symbol is easily set after the jackpot is over. If configured in this way, the hole in which you want to use the pachinko machine 10 as a gaming machine that is unlikely to be in a sudden change state of the special symbol is, for example, a closed state of 0.5 seconds for the variable member and 2.5 seconds for the variable member. The DIP switch settings may be adjusted so that the open state is repeated. On the other hand, the hole that wants to use the pachinko machine 10 as a game machine having a game property that is likely to be in a state where the special symbol is likely to change, for example, the variable member repeats a closed state for 2.5 seconds and an open state for 0.5 seconds. Adjust the DIP switch setting. As a result, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be varied according to the business policy of the hall, so that it is possible to provide highly versatile game play corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 94. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the guide passage 704 provided inside the storage device 700 can be closed by the storage valve 704a, and one ball can be stored above the storage valve 704a in the closed state. Was configured. Then, in a state where the balls are stored, it becomes easy for the balls to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (small value winning openings) 703d, 703e with a lot of prize balls to be paid out. With the configuration, when the storage valve 704a is opened, the balls are easily introduced into the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 in which the number of prize balls to be paid out is small. The storage valve 704a is basically set to a closed state, and is configured to be opened when the player operates the release button 800. In other words, if the storage valve 704a is closed, there is a possibility that a ball will enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e (prize). There is a possibility that a large number of balls will be obtained, but there is a possibility that no prize balls will be obtained. A state in which a ball can be inserted into the mouth (medium-value winning hole) 701 (a small amount, but a stable winning ball can be obtained). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, so that each player selects the playability that suits his or her taste. It was configured to be able to play games.

  On the other hand, in this modification, a maximum of two spheres can be stored inside the storage device 700. In addition, when the storage valve 704a is closed, depending on the arrangement of the stored balls, it is easy for the balls to enter the ball (it is easy to enter the general winning port 702 or the out port). Is it easier to sphere) is configured to change. That is, when the storage valve 704a is closed, by confirming the arrangement of the stored balls, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. Is configured to be able to.

  The only difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in structure is the difference in the internal structure of the storage device 700. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, the second embodiment will be described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the second embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 86, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification. As shown in FIG. 86, also in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the path provided on the right side of the game board 13. As described above, in this modified example, a maximum of two spheres can be stored inside the storage device 700. Details of the storage device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example in which the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 is closed and two balls are stored. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modified example, the storage valve 704a is inclined downward in the front right direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, most of the spheres that first flow into the guide passage 704 with the storage valve 704a closed are stationary in a state of being biased to the right side of the guide passage 704 due to the inclination of the storage valve 704a. Further, as shown in FIG. 87, the upper portion of the storage valve 704a in the guide passage 704 is longer than that in the second embodiment. Further, the guide flow channel 704 is not wide enough to have two balls arranged side by side. For this reason, when one sphere is stored in the guide flow path 704 to the right and another sphere flows into the guide flow path 704, in many cases, a new sphere is newly added to the upper left side of the previously stored sphere. Is stored (a new sphere is stored between the previously stored sphere and the inner wall portion on the left side of the guide flow path 704).

  In the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 87 (the first stored sphere is on the right side and the second stored sphere is on the left side, respectively), the spheres that have flowed into the storage device 700 after that are It becomes easy to collide with the right side surface of the second stored sphere. Therefore, the sphere that has flown into the storage device 700 changes its traveling direction to the right due to the impact of the collision (contact) with the stored sphere. That is, the sphere flows into the guide passage 708 and enters the out port (small value winning opening) 703d or 703e.

  As described above, in the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 87, even if the sphere can be made to flow into the storage device 700, the sphere enters the outlets (small value winning openings) 703d, 703e. The player cannot get the prize ball because the ball is thrown. That is, the storage state shown in FIG. 87 is in a disadvantageous state for the player.

  A ball entrance sensor 704b is provided on the upper left side of the storage valve 704a in the guide flow path 704 to detect the ball when the ball exists on the front side in front view. The ball placement sensor 704b can determine the placement of the ball. More specifically, when the incoming ball sensor 704b continuously detects the sphere for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), it is determined that the arrangement is as shown in FIG. By determining whether or not the arrangement is as shown in FIG. 87, an image prompting the player to press the release button 800 when a certain period of time has elapsed since the arrangement of FIG. 87 has been reached (see FIG. 89). ) Can be displayed. As a result, the disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the balls flowing into the storage device 700 are likely to enter the outlets (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e for a long time continues, which is disadvantageous to the player. It can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, another example in which two spheres are stored will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 88, the game sphere that first flows into the guide passage 704 with the storage valve 704a closed is stored to the left of the guide passage 704 and is the second guide passage. The sphere that has flowed into the flow path 704 is stored to the right of the guide flow path 704. In the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 88, the sphere that has flown into the storage device 700 after that easily collides (contacts) with the left side surface of the second stored sphere. Therefore, the falling direction of the balls that have collided (contacted) with the stored balls is likely to change to the left, so that the number of prize balls to be paid out that flow down the guidance flow path 706 is large (generally 6 payouts). It becomes easy to enter the winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

  In this way, in the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 88, the balls are made to flow into the storage device 700, so that the balls easily enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. , It is in an advantageous state for a player who can expect to win a prize ball every time a ball flows in.

  Since the storage valve 704a is inclined downward to the lower right, the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is harder to realize than the storage state shown in FIG. 87. For example, when two spheres flow into the guide passage 704 almost simultaneously after the storage valve 704a is closed, or when the sphere that first reaches the storage valve 704a is the storage valve 704a or the guide passage 704. This can be realized, for example, when the second sphere flows into the guide flow path 704 while colliding with the inner wall portion and repulsing in the upper left direction.

  Most of the cases where the storage valve 704a is closed are in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, but also in this modification, the storage valve 704a can be opened by operating the release button 800 as in the second embodiment. .. That is, it is possible to reset the storage state and store the spheres in the storage device 700 in the expectation that the storage state shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with the goal of bringing the player into the storage state shown in FIG. 88, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, when the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is realized, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment, and to continue winning the ball into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. You can have a sense of expectation that you can get a lot of balls.

  Further, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement is shifted from the ball entrance sensor 704b (the ball is not arranged to block the front side of the ball entrance sensor 704b), so that even if the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 continues for a long time. It is possible to prevent (suppress) displaying an image (see FIG. 89) that prompts the player to press the release button 800. Therefore, the advantageous state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 can be continued for a longer time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, an image (indication display image) prompting the user to press the release button 800 will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an image (indication display image) prompting the user to press the release button 800. This suggestion display image is an image displayed when it is determined that the arrangement, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for a certain time (1 minute), as shown in FIG. More specifically, when the ball input sensor 704b continuously detects a ball for 1 minute, it is determined that the ball is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. 87, and the suggestion display image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 89, when the display of the suggestion display image is set, the character “Unfavorable arrangement” is displayed in the small area Ds2. By displaying this character, the arrangement shown in FIG. 89 for the player is an arrangement that is unfavorable to the player (the arrangement in which the balls flowing into the storage device 700 are guided to the outlets 703d and 703e). Can be made aware of that. In addition, below the character “Disadvantageous arrangement”, the character “Press the button to reset the arrangement!!” is displayed. By displaying this character, it is possible to let the player recognize that the disadvantageous state can be eliminated by pressing (operating) the release button 800.

  As described above, in the present modified example, the player is informed of the disadvantageous arrangement by the suggestion display image, and the depression (operation) of the release button 800 prompts the elimination of the disadvantageous arrangement, and the advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88). A game can be played aiming at becoming the arrangement shown in which the ball is guided to the general winning opening 702). Therefore, the player can be actively participated in the game.

  In this embodiment, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed when a long time (1 minute) has passed while the player is in a disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87). Instead of this, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be switched to an open state (released state). That is, when the sphere sensor 704b continuously detects a sphere for a fixed time (for example, 1 minute), it is determined that the sphere is stored in an unfavorable state, and the arrangement of the spheres stored in the storage device 700 is reset. For this purpose, the storage valve 704a may be opened. Thereby, even a beginner who does not fully understand the mechanism of the storage device 700 can suppress playing a game for a long time without noticing a disadvantageous state.

  In this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to open when the ball sensor 704b continuously detects a ball for 1 minute, but the arrangement of FIG. 87 is reset (the storage valve 704a is opened). The time up to () is not limited to this, and may be set arbitrarily. By shortening the time (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to shorten the period in which the player is in a disadvantageous state. Further, by increasing the time (for example, 5 minutes), it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the suggestion display image is displayed. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification will be described. The electrical configuration of the modified example of the second embodiment is that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed from that of the electrical configuration of the second embodiment, and that of the voice lamp control device 113. The difference is that a ball entrance sensor 228 is electrically connected to the input/output port 225. The other electrical configuration is the same as the electrical configuration in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, the RAM 223 in the modified example of the second embodiment has at least a disadvantage time counter 223m and a suggestion display flag 223n.

  The disadvantage time counter 223m is a counter used for determining the elapsed time after the player is placed at a disadvantage (a state where the ball is guided to the outlets 703d and 703e) shown in FIG. 87. The value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is incremented by 1 each time the ball sensor 228 detects a ball (S4503 in FIG. 92). Further, when the ball is not detected by the ball entrance sensor 228 in the state where the counter value is added (the state of a value larger than 0), it is reset to 0 (S4508 in FIG. 92). In this modification, when it is determined that the player is in an unfavorable arrangement (a state in which the ball is guided to the outlets 703d and 703e) shown in FIG. 87 based on the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m, Control is performed so that the above-described suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed.

  The suggestion display flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed. If this suggestion display flag 223n is on, it indicates that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is being displayed, and if it is off, that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not being displayed. Showing. This suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON when the display of the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is set (see S4506 in FIG. 92). On the other hand, when the storage state command indicating that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state) is received, it is set to off (see S4607 in FIG. 94).

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the second embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 91, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described.

  Of the main processing (see FIG. 92) in this modification, in each processing of S1801 to S1817, the same processing as each processing of S1801 to S1817 in the second embodiment is executed. Further, in the main process (see FIG. 92) in this modified example, when the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1810) is completed, then a cancellation suggestion display process for displaying the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is executed ( (S1821), and the process proceeds to S1811. Details of the cancellation suggestion display process (S1821) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the cancellation suggestion display process (S1821). In this cancellation suggestion display processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball entrance sensor 228 is on (S4501), and if it is determined that it is on (S4501: Yes), then the suggestion display flag 223n is on. It is determined whether there is any (S4502). If the suggestion display flag 223n is on (S4502: Yes), the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is already being displayed, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not to display the suggestion display image. This process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the suggestion display flag 223n is off (S4502: No), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m (S4503), and the disadvantage time after the update. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223m is larger than 60000 (S4504). Here, the disadvantage time counter 223m is updated by 1 (every 1 ms) each time the main processing (see FIG. 91) is performed, so the counter value 60000 corresponds to 1 minute.

  In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is 60000 or less (S4504: No), this process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is larger than 60000 (S4504: Yes), a suggestion for informing the player that a long time (1 minute) has elapsed after the disadvantageous arrangement is made. A display rear image change command for displaying a display is set (S4505), the suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON (S4506), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if the ball entrance sensor 228 determines that the ball is not detected (the ball entrance sensor is off) (S4501: No), there is no disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87). Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S4507). As a result of the determination in S4507, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S4507: Yes), the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4508), and the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is 0 (S4507: No), the disadvantage time counter 223m has already been initialized and there is no need to initialize it again, so the process of S4508 is skipped. Then, this processing is finished.

  By executing this cancellation suggestion display process (S1821), the player may play the game for a long time while the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 remains unfavorable to the player (see FIG. 87). Can be prevented.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device according to the modification of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. Of the command determination processing, in each processing of S1901 to S1919 and S1921, the same processing as each of the processing of S1901 to S1919 and S1921 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment is executed. .. Further, in the command determination process according to the present modification, in the process of S1921, when it is determined that the storage state command is received from the main control device 110 (S1921: Yes), an image corresponding to the received storage state command is displayed. The storage state command process is executed (S1929), and this process is terminated.

  Details of this storage state command processing (S1929) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this storage state command processing (S1929). In the storage state command processing (S1929), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state command has notified that the storage valve 704a has been switched to the closed state (storage state) (S4601). Then, when it is determined that it is notified that the state has been switched to the closed state (stored state) (S4601: Yes), then the image corresponding to the closed state (see FIG. 63(a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A display rear image change command for display is set (S4602), and the storage state flag 223k is set to ON to indicate that the storage valve 704a is in the closed state (S4603), and the process proceeds to S4604. And transition.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, when it is determined that the notification of the storage state command is not the closed state (storage state) (it is notified that the state is switched to the open state (released state)) (S4601: No) , Next, the display rear image change command for displaying the image (see FIG. 63(b)) corresponding to the open state (released state) on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4605), and the storage valve The storage state flag 223k is set to OFF to indicate that the current state of 704a is the open state (release state) (S4606). Then, to indicate that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed, the suggestion display flag 223n is set to OFF (S4607), and the process proceeds to S4604.

  In the process of S4603 or S4604 that is executed after the process of S4607, in order to determine whether or not it is a pitching period from the switching of the storage valve 704a to the pitching of the ball, the downflow time counter 223l is checked. A counter value corresponding to 1 second is set (S4604), and this processing ends. By executing this storage state command process (S1931), the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be appropriately updated in association with the state of the storage valve 704a notified from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the second embodiment is configured so that two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Further, as the storage state when the balls are stored inside, at least the storage state shown in FIG. 87 and the storage state shown in FIG. 88 can be taken. In these storage states, the ball entrance into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 is likely to enter is different. Moreover, since the inside of the storage device 700 is configured to be visible to the player, the storage state can be easily visually determined. Therefore, the player can select whether or not it is better to reset the storage state by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state once.

  Further, an advantageous storage state (a storage state in which a ball easily enters the general winning opening 701 shown in FIG. 88) and a disadvantageous storage state (a storage state in which a ball easily enters the out opening shown in FIG. 87) By providing and, the game can be played in the expectation that it will be in an advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88). And, even if it becomes a disadvantageous storage state (see FIG. 87), the storage state is reset by opening the storage valve 704a, and again aims at an advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88). Can be done. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment due to the advantageous storage state, and to win a lot of prize balls by continuing to enter the balls into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. You can have a sense of anticipation for what you can do.

  Although the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification is configured to store two balls inside the storage device 700, the present invention is not limited to this, and may have an internal structure capable of storing three or more balls. . In this case, if the ball entrance sensor 228 is provided near the upper end of the guide flow path 704 on the left side, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in a disadvantageous arrangement in which it is guided to the out port.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, by providing the ball entrance sensor 228 near the upper end of the guide flow path 704 to the left, is the arrangement of the balls stored inside the storage device 700 a disadvantageous arrangement for the player? Although it is configured to be able to determine whether or not it is, the mounting position of the ball entrance sensor 228 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged near the upper end of the guide flow path 704 to the right. That is, when the balls stored in the storage device 700 have the arrangement shown in FIG. 87, the stored balls are not detected by the ball entrance sensor 228, but in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, The incoming ball sensor 228 may be arranged so that the upper ball of the stored balls is detected by the incoming ball sensor 228. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball is arranged so as to easily enter the general winning opening 702 (see FIG. 88). Therefore, based on the detection result of the ball entrance sensor 228, for example, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball entrance sensor 228 for 5 seconds or more, it can be determined that the ball is stationary in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88. . Therefore, based on the fact that the stored balls shown in FIG. 88 have an advantageous arrangement for the player, the fact that the current state is advantageous for the player is notified. You can As a method of informing, for example, in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81, the characters "in the advantageous arrangement" and the characters "right hitting a big chance!" are displayed. You may. This allows the player to easily recognize that the present state is advantageous, so that the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by mistake to cause the balls stored in the storage device 700 to flow down. It is possible to suppress the occurrence (reset of advantageous arrangement).

  Further, the number of ball entrance sensors 228 is not limited to one, and a plurality of ball entrance sensors 228 may be provided. More specifically, for example, the ball entrance sensors 228 may be provided near the upper end of the guide flow path 704 on the right side and on the left side, respectively. As a result, when the sensor provided on the left side continuously detects the sphere for, for example, 5 seconds, it can be determined that the sensor is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. Further, when the sensor provided on the right side continues to detect a sphere for, for example, 5 seconds, it can be determined that the arrangement is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88. Therefore, in the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 (arrangement that is disadvantageous to the player in which the ball is guided to the outlets 703d and 703e), the game is displayed by displaying the above-mentioned suggestion display image (see FIG. 89). Persons can be encouraged to reset the unfavorable arrangement. Further, in the case of the arrangement of FIG. 88 (arrangement advantageous to the player in which the ball is guided to the general winning opening 702), an image notifying that the arrangement is advantageous to the player (for example, “advantageous” By displaying the image "displayed in the small area Ds2" with the characters "arranged" and the character "right hitting a big chance!", it is possible to recognize that it is in an advantageous state, and to play the game. Motivation can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to incline in the lower right direction, but the inclination may be reversed. As a result, a storage state that is advantageous for the player (see FIG. 88) is easily realized, and the player can be more positively aimed at the storage device 700 to hit a ball. Further, the inclination formed by the storage valve 704a may be eliminated. This makes it possible to completely randomize the advantageous storage state or the disadvantageous storage state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification, the trigger for opening the storage valve 704a is only the pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but other triggers may be provided. For example, the storage valve 704a may be set to an open state during a big hit, or the storage state may be reset periodically. If the player is completely entrusted with the opportunity to reset the storage state, once the advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88) is reached, the game is continued while maintaining the storage state, and the hole is unsuccessful. It may be profitable. On the other hand, if the storage state is reset periodically, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the advantageous storage state from continuing for a long time, so that it is possible to prevent disadvantages for the holes.

  In this modification, the state of the storage valve 704a is switched based on the pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, or the like. This allows each player to start the game while the storage valve 704a is in a state suitable for his or her taste.

  Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of the lottery that is performed regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and a lottery is performed once a minute to switch to the open state (released state). May be. When the lottery is won, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. Thereby, when the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is a disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the balls are easily guided to the outlets (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e, the lottery is won. By doing so, a game can be played in the hope that the storage valve 704a will be opened. On the other hand, when the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88) in which the balls are easily guided to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 (see FIG. 88), the storage valve 704a is opened. You can play the game in the hope that you will continue to miss the lottery. Therefore, since different lottery results can be expected depending on the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, novel game play can be provided. Further, the clerk of the hall or the like may adjust the lottery probability of the lottery whether or not to set the storage valve 704a in the open state (released state). As a result, when the player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict a table having a good lottery probability and perform the machine selection. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit when setting the lottery probability of the hole, so that the interest of the player can be improved at the stage of selecting the machine before starting the game. .

  In this modified example, since the storage device 700 having a peculiar structure which is not mounted on a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the game property related to the storage device 700 may be provided. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear surface image, and an image (explanatory image) for explaining conditions under which the storage valve 704a is opened, merits and demerits of being opened is displayed. It may be configured to. This allows the player to easily understand the playability. Further, the back side type in which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back side type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who has become accustomed to the game on the pachinko machine 10 and who fully understands the playability can change to the rear type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only while the release button 800 is being pressed (operated), but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during the predetermined period in which the storage valve 704a is opened. This eliminates the need to continue pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (storage state) and the open state (released state) may be switched. With such a configuration, since the release button 800 only needs to be operated when it is desired to switch the state, the number of times the player operates can be reduced. Further, contrary to the release button 800, an operation means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating may be provided. Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, each player can be made to select a game characteristic that suits his or her taste.

  In the present modified example, when a certain time (1 minute) has elapsed after the player is placed at a disadvantageous position shown in FIG. 87, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to release it to the player. Although it is configured to prompt the user to press (operate) the button 800, the method of pressing (operating) the release button 800 is not limited to this. For example, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 may be configured as one body (that is, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 are combined into one operation button, and the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113 are integrated. May be electrically connected to each other). Then, when it is determined that the ball sensor 704b has continuously detected the ball for a certain period (1 minute) or more (that is, the arrangement is unfavorable to the player shown in FIG. 87), the frame button 22 is pressed. It may be configured such that the variation type in which the effect is developed can be easily selected. Accordingly, when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) to develop the effect, the storage valve 704a can be simultaneously set to the open state (released state). In general, since the player observes the result of the fluctuating effect informing whether or not it is a big hit most interestingly, when the fluctuating effect in which the effect is developed by pressing the frame button 22 is executed, the frame button 22 is surely pressed. It is possible for the player to recognize that the player is being urged. Therefore, the disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87) can be reset more reliably.

  In this modification, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the first winning opening 64 in a front view so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by left-handed hitting. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, like the first embodiment, the first specific winning port 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700. As a result, the ball can be made to flow into the first specific winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 only by performing a right hit in the special game state (big hit state), and thus the prize ball in the special game state (big hit state) You can do more. Therefore, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 and the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 are provided by slidingly moving to the front side in front view and the back side in front view. Although the flow path is closed and the sphere can be stored above the flow path, the operation of the storage valve is not limited to this. For example, in the closed state, the storage valve is configured to stand upright with respect to the inner wall portion of the flow channel to close the flow channel, and in the open state, the storage valve collapses in the downstream direction of the flow channel. The flow path may be configured so that spheres can pass through. Further, the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a do not need to completely close the guide flow passage 607 and the guide flow passage 704, respectively. For example, in a state where the width of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is shortened and the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a protrudes to the front side in front view, a state in which the guide passage 607 or the guide passage 704 is partially opened is You may comprise so that it may become. Further, the widths of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a may be set so that the width of the open portion is equal to or smaller than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the price of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. Further, when the guide flow channel 607 and the guide flow channel 704 are set to the open state (released state) by the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, the guide flow channel 607 and the guide flow channel 704 do not have to be completely opened. . That is, a part of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be in a state of protruding into the guide flow passage 607 or the guide flow passage 704. In addition, the width of the open portion of the guide channel 607 or the guide channel 704 may be set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the operating range between the open state and the closed state of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be narrowed, so that the power consumed for switching the states of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. it can. Further, if the width of the open portion is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, although the inflowing sphere may come into contact with the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a to reduce the flow down momentum, the sphere eventually flows down. (It can be made hard to be stored (held) at the positions of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a). Therefore, even with this configuration, the same operation as that of each of the above-described embodiments can be realized. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the sphere can be stored on the guide flow channel 607 and the guide flow channel 704 and a state in which the sphere flowing into the guide flow channel 607 and the guide flow channel 704 flows down to the downstream side. .

  In each of the above-described embodiments, both ends of the respective ball entrances provided in the storage devices are out ports, but the out ports at both ends may be omitted. Even if the out port is abolished and the inner wall is used, the ball can enter the other entrance port. Further, by eliminating the outlets at both ends, the storage device can be made more compact.

  In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of outlets are provided inside the storage device, but instead of the outlets provided inside the storage device, an outlet 66 provided below the game board 13 in front view. (See FIG. 2) It is also possible to use a flow path that allows the sphere to flow down to. As a result, only one out port can be provided, and therefore it is sufficient to detect only the number of balls that have entered the out port 66 in order to grasp the number of discharged balls. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of detection switches for detecting the entry of a ball, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve are one ball (the first embodiment, the modified example of the first embodiment, and the second embodiment), or the two balls (the modified example of the second embodiment). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to store three or more spheres. Furthermore, when a plurality of balls are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or may be arranged side by side. In this case, the number of balls stored above the storage valve may be configured to be countable. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, five balls can be stored above the storage valve 607a, and the storage valve 607a may be opened when the fifth ball is stored. .. As a result, immediately after the storage valve 607a is opened, five balls flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 all at once, so that a large amount (5×15) of winning balls are paid out in a short time. Can be received. Therefore, it is possible to make the player want to store the balls inside the storage device 600, and thus the player's motivation for the game can be increased.

  In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be closed while the power is cut off. That is, when the shutoff of the power supply is detected, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, and when the power is turned on, the state of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a at the time of power shutoff is restored. May be. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress an illegality in which a ball is thrown into the storage device 600 or the storage device 700 while the power is cut off, and a prize ball is immediately acquired when the power is restored.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the ball entrance (prize entrance) into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters is fixed by the guide flow path through which the ball flows down (that is, the arrangement of each ball entrance). Was fixed), but is not limited to this. For example, the position of the entrance may be changed regularly or randomly. More specifically, a known clune or the like may be disposed on the bottom surface of the storage device, and each winning port (ball entry port) may be annularly provided on the clune. Then, by rotating the clune, the winning opening (ball entrance) into which the balls flowing down the respective guide channels flow may be given randomness. This allows the player to watch the ball entrance into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device is interesting. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the inside of the storage device is configured to be visible, but it may be configured to make it difficult to view the inside of the storage device from the front.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls opening and closing of the storage valve, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 may control the storage valve. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, the main process relating to the game, the selection process of the variation effect, the lottery process of the special symbol, etc. can be executed without delay.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when a ball enters each entrance (prize), the number of prize balls according to the type of entrance (prize) is paid out. , But is not limited to this. For example, it is applied to a type of pachinko machine that does not receive a prize ball as a game value such as an enclosed pachinko machine. It may be configured to increase the balance.

  All or part of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. May be implemented as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Give a prize ball to a ball that has entered the holding device at the time of a big hit)
A specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball down the first flow path can enter, and A specific privilege granting unit for granting a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entering unit; The first distribution state in which the game spheres that have flowed into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path in comparison with the first distribution state. And a setting means capable of setting the flow path distribution means that can be changed to a distribution status and the status of the flow path distribution means to at least the first distribution status and the second distribution status according to the gaming status. A game machine A1 characterized by.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that conducts a lottery as to whether or not a game ball is won based on winning a specific winning opening. In addition to a specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided for paying out the winning ball when the ball wins. This conventional type gaming machine is capable of changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the direction in which the player shoots the game balls, by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning hole. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

  However, since the number of prize balls that can be won by winning is generally larger than the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize hole, the player usually decides whether or not he or she wins. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. In other words, it was common for a player to keep hitting a game ball in the same direction until a hit. Therefore, when the player hits a ball in the same direction, the ball may continue to win the same winning opening, and the number of prize balls to be paid out may be scarce. That is, the game may be monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the specific flow path is branched into the first flow path and the second flow path. When the game ball flows down the second channel based on the game ball entering the ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first channel can enter. A specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the above is granted by the predetermined privilege granting means. The first distribution state in which the game spheres flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path as compared to the first distribution state. The flow path distribution means can be changed. The state of the flow path distribution means is changed to at least a first distribution state and a second distribution state by the setting means according to the game state.

  As a result, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, it becomes easy to give a specific privilege by the game balls flowing into the specific flow path, and the game is set to the second distribution state. In the state, it becomes difficult to give a specific privilege. Therefore, even if the player hits the game ball toward the specific flow path, the privilege to be given can be changed according to the game state, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine A1, a normal ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and a predetermined ball based on the game ball entering the normal ball entering means. A gaming machine A2 comprising: a gaming value imparting means for imparting a gaming value, wherein the specific privilege imparting means imparts a gaming value higher than the predetermined gaming value as the specific privilege.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are produced. That is, the normal ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and based on the game ball entering the normal ball entering means, a predetermined value is given by the game value adding means. A game value is given. By the specific privilege granting means, a gaming value higher than a predetermined gaming value is granted as the specific privilege.

  As a result, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, a larger number of games are played when the game balls flow into the specific flow path, as compared with the gaming state set to the second distribution state. It's easier to get value. Therefore, it is possible to change the game value given according to the game state, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a game in which the game state is advantageous to the player based on the lottery result of the lottery means being a specific lottery result And a game state setting means for setting the state, wherein the setting means sets the state of the flow path distributing means to the first distribution state based on the setting to the privilege game state by the game state setting means. A gaming machine A3 characterized by being set to.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the lottery means executes the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is advantageous to the player by the game state setting means on the basis that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result. Is set to. Based on the fact that the gaming state setting means has set the privilege gaming state, the state of the flow channel sorting means is set to the first sorting state by the setting means.

  As a result, when the gaming state is set to the special gaming state, the special gaming state is advantageous to the player, and more gaming value is given by the game balls flowing into the specific flow path. It is easy to be done. Therefore, the privilege game state can be made more advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's expectation of the bonus game state.

  In the gaming machine A3, a variable ball entering means capable of changing between a first ball entering state in which a game ball can enter and a second ball entering state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter in comparison with the first ball entering state. Based on that the special value imparting means for imparting a specific game value based on the fact that a game ball enters the variable admission means, and the privilege game state set by the game state setting means A gaming machine A4 comprising: a variable control means for varying the variable ball entering means to the first ball entering state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable ball entering means is changed to a first ball entering state in which the game ball can enter and a second ball entering state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first ball entering state, and the variable A specific game value is added by the specific value adding means based on the game ball entering the ball entering means. Based on the fact that the game state setting means sets the privilege game state, the variable control means changes the variable ball entering means to the first ball entering state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  As a result, the game ball can enter the variable ball entering means in the privilege game state, so that a specific game value can be obtained by aiming the ball at the variable ball entering means. Therefore, in the privilege game state, it is possible to make the player obtain more game value, and thus it is possible to further increase the player's expectation of the privilege game state.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the game value giving means gives a predetermined amount of game medium as the predetermined game value when a game ball enters the normal entering means. The gaming machine A5, wherein the specific privilege granting unit grants a game medium in an amount larger than the predetermined amount as the specific privilege when a game ball enters the ball entering unit.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effect is produced. That is, when the game ball enters the normal ball entering means, the game value giving means gives a predetermined amount of game medium as a predetermined game value. When the game ball enters the ball entering means, the specific privilege granting means grants an amount of game medium larger than a predetermined amount as the specific privilege.

  As a result, the player can play the game with the provided game medium, so that the game can be played longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the variable control means sets the variable ball entry means from the second ball entry state to the first ball entry state based on the fact that the game state setting means sets the privilege game state. Is changed to a predetermined number of times, and the game state setting means sets the game state different from the privilege game state based on the variable control means being changed the predetermined number of times by the variable control means. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable ball entering means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second ball entering state to the first ball entering state by the variable control means based on the fact that the game state setting means sets the privilege game state. Based on the variable control means changing the variable ball entering means a predetermined number of times, the game state setting means sets a game state different from the privilege game state.

  As a result, in the one privilege game state, the player is given a chance to enter the ball into the variable ball entering means a predetermined number of times, so that the player can obtain more specific game value. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further increase the player's expectation of the bonus game state.

  In any of the gaming machines A4 to A6, the specific value giving means gives a specific amount of game medium as the specific game value, and the gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A4 to A6, a specific amount of game medium is added as a specific game value by the specific value adding means. Can be played. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game for a longer period of time, which has the effect of improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  In any one of the game machines A4 to A7, a guide flow path that can guide a game ball to the specific flow path is provided, and the variable ball entering means is the specific flow of the game balls flowing into the guide flow path. A gaming machine A8, which is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has not flowed into the road can enter.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A4 to A7, the gaming sphere is guided to the specific flow path by the guiding flow path, and to the specific flow path of the game balls flowing into the guiding flow path. Since the variable ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball that did not flow can enter, the player simply hits the game ball into the guide channel in the special game state, and the specific channel and variable ball A sphere can be flowed into the means. Therefore, in the privilege game state, it is possible to obtain a specific privilege and a specific game value, so that the merit of the player in the privilege game state can be increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further increase the player's expectation of the bonus game state.

  In any of the game machines A4 to A8, a counting means for counting the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means is provided, and the variable control means has at least a predetermined number of the number counted by the counting means. Based on that, the variable ball entering means is changed to the second ball entering state, and the game state setting means, when a specific condition is satisfied in the privilege game state, the bonus game The setting means sets the gaming state different from the state, and the setting means sets the flow path sorting means to the flow passage sorting means for at least a predetermined period from the setting of the privilege gaming state to the establishment of the specific condition. A gaming machine A9, which is set to one distribution state.

  According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A4 to A8, the following effect is produced. That is, the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means is counted by the counting means. At least when the number counted by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the variable ball entering means is changed to the second ball entering state by the variable control means. When the specific condition is established in the privilege game state, the game state setting means sets a game state different from the privilege game state. The flow path distributing means is set to the first distributing state by the setting means at least for a predetermined period from the setting of the privilege game state to the establishment of the specific condition.

  As a result, the opportunity for the player to obtain a specific game value can be limited until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to play a game during the privilege game state in the hope that more game balls will flow into the specific flow path before the predetermined number is reached and the specific privilege is given more times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in the bonus game state of the player.

  In any of the gaming machines A3 to A9, a ball detection unit that detects that a game ball has entered the normal ball input unit, and the normal ball input unit during the privilege game state by the ball detection unit. A gaming machine A10, further comprising: an informing unit that executes a predetermined informing when it is detected that the game ball has entered.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A3 to A9, the fact that the game ball has entered the normal ball entering means is detected by the ball entering detecting means, and the ball entering detecting means detects the privilege game. When it is detected that the game ball has entered the normal ball entering means during the state, a predetermined notification is executed by the informing means, so that the flow path allocating means is set despite the privilege game state being set. When a defect that is not set in the first distribution state occurs, the defect can be made known to a player or a store clerk by a predetermined notification. Therefore, there is an effect that the defect can be promptly resolved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the first flow path is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is more likely to flow in than the second flow path, The flow path distribution means opens the first flow path in the first distribution state and closes the first flow path in the second distribution state, and the second flow path is the first flow path. A gaming machine A11, which is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided while the flow path is closed.

  According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A1 to A10, the following effect is obtained. That is, the first flow path is provided at a position where the game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path are more likely to flow in than the second flow path. The first flow path is opened by the flow path distribution means in the first distribution state, and the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state. The second flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided while the first flow path is closed.

  As a result, it is possible to change the flow path through which the game spheres flowing into the specific flow path flow down depending on whether or not the first flow path is closed. Therefore, even if the player continuously hits the game ball toward the specific flow path, the specific privilege may or may not be granted, which can prevent the game from becoming monotonous. .

  In the gaming machine A11, the flow path distributing means is capable of holding up to a predetermined upper limit number of game balls upstream of the closed position when the first flow path is closed in the second distributed state. Yes, the second flow path makes contact with the held game ball and the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path. The gaming machine A12 is provided at a position where the inflow is facilitated based on a change in the downflow direction.

  According to the gaming machine A12, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A11. That is, when the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state, the flow path distribution means holds the game balls up to the predetermined upper limit number upstream of the closed position. Based on the fact that in the state where a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game ball and the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path come into contact with each other and the flow direction changes. The second flow path is provided at a position where it easily flows in.

  As a result, even if the game ball is continuously launched toward the specific flow path, the specific privilege may or may not be granted, so that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous. is there.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, it is provided with display means for displaying an image and display control means for controlling the display means to display an image according to the state of the flow path distributing means. Characteristic game machine A13.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the display control means controls the display means to display an image corresponding to the state of the flow path distributing means. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the flow path distributing means.

  In the gaming machine A13, the display control means sets the specific value when the game ball flows into the specific flow path based on the setting means setting the flow path distribution means to the first distribution state. An amusement machine A14, which displays an image indicating that a privilege is easily awarded.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A13, the flow path sorting means is set to the first sorting state by the setting means, and is specified when the game ball flows into the specific flow path. An image indicating that the privilege is easily given is displayed by the display control means. As a result, even if the player is a beginner, it is possible to easily understand the merits when the game ball flows into the specific flow path.

<Characteristic B group> (Switches the flow paths of other balls with the balls held in the holding device)
A specific flow path branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path are provided at a position where the game ball can enter. There is a first entering means, a first giving means for giving a first game value based on a game ball entering the first entering means, and a game flowing down the second flow path. Second ball entering means provided at a position where the ball can enter, and the first game provided by the first providing means based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A second giving means for giving a second game value different from a value, a first position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the first flow path on the first flow path, and a first position thereof. The variable means that can change the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path to the second position that is difficult to be held on the first flow path in comparison with the position, and the variable means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A switching unit for switching from the first position to the second position is provided, and the variable unit holds the game ball, and thereby easily guides the game ball to the second flow path by the held game ball. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that conducts a lottery as to whether or not a game ball is won based on winning a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, there is known one having a plurality of winning openings through which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins. This conventional type gaming machine is capable of changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the direction in which the player shoots the game balls, by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning hole. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

  However, since the number of prize balls that can be won by winning is generally larger than the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize hole, the player usually decides whether or not he or she wins. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. In other words, it was common for a player to keep hitting a game ball in the same direction until a hit. Therefore, when the player hits the ball in the same direction, the ball may continue to win the same winning opening, and the number of prize balls to be paid out may be scarcely changed. That is, the game may be monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the specific flow path is branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least the first flow path and the second flow path. The first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the first ball is first entered by the first giving means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. The game value of is added. Further, the second ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the first ball providing means causes the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. A second game value different from the first game value given is given by the second giving means. A first position at which at least one game ball that has flowed into the first flow path can be held on the first flow path, and a game ball that has flowed into the first flow path in comparison with the first position is on the first flow path. The variable means is changed to the second position which is difficult to hold. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Here, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the held game ball easily guides the game ball to the second flow path.

  As a result, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the specific flow path, the game ball entering the specific flow path enters depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be changed to the first game value and the second game value depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first game value given by the first giving means has a higher game value than the second game value given by the second giving means. A gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first game value given by the first giving means is constituted so that the game value is larger than the second game value given by the second giving means, and therefore, to the player. It is possible to make the player feel that he or she wants the game ball to flow into the specific flow path when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a lottery result by the lottery means are set to a privilege game state advantageous to a player based on a specific lottery result. A variable state ball that can be varied between a game state setting means, a first ball state in which a game ball can enter, and a second ball state in which a game ball is hard to enter in comparison with the first ball state. Means, a specific value giving means for giving a specific game value based on a game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and based on being set to the privilege game state by the game state setting means And variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the switching means is set to the privilege game state by the game state setting means. Based on this, the game machine B3 is characterized in that the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position.

  According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effect is achieved. That is, the lottery means executes the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is advantageous to the player by the game state setting means on the basis that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result. Is set to. The variable ball entering means is changed to the first ball entering state in which the game ball can enter and the second ball entering state in which the game ball is hard to enter in comparison with the first ball entering state, and the variable ball entering. A specific game value is imparted by the specific value imparting means based on the game ball entering the means. Based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means, the variable ball entering means is changed to the first ball entering state by the variable control means until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  As a result, in addition to the fact that the player can obtain a specific game value by entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means in the privilege game state, the game ball can enter the first ball entering means. The player can obtain the first game value. Therefore, it is possible to increase the merit of the player in the privilege game state, and it is possible to further increase the player's expectation of the privilege game state.

  In the gaming machine B3, a guide flow path that can guide a game ball to the specific flow path is provided, and the variable ball entering means is a game ball that flows down the guide flow path without flowing into the specific flow path. A gaming machine B4, which is provided at a position where a ball can enter.

  According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the game ball is guided to the specific flow path by the guide flow path. The variable ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed down the guide channel without flowing into the specific channel can enter.

  As a result, the player can cause the ball to flow into the specific flow path and the variable ball entering means only by launching the game ball into the guide flow path in the privilege game state. Therefore, in the privilege game state, the first game value and the specific game value can be acquired, and the merit of the player in the privilege game state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further increase the player's expectation of the bonus game state.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a third flow path, which is one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path, and a game ball that flows down the third flow path are in a position where the game ball can enter. On the basis of the provided third ball entering means and the game ball entering the third ball entering means, a third game value different from the second game value given by the second giving means is provided. A third imparting means for imparting a gaming value is provided, and the varying means retains a gaming ball to cause the gaming ball held by the gaming ball to the second flow path and the third flow path. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being easy to guide.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are achieved. The third flow path is provided as one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path. A third ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter the ball. Based on the game ball entering the third ball entering means, a third game value different from the second game value provided by the second giving means is given by the third giving means. When the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is guided to the second flow path and the third flow path by the held game ball.

  As a result, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball that has flown into the specific flow path can enter both the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means. Become. That is, since the player can acquire one of the second game value and the third game value having different game values, the game value acquired by the player can be randomized. .. On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the second position, the first sphere is given the first game value by the game sphere flowing into the specific flow path entering the first sphere. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the gaming value acquired by the player. Therefore, different playability can be realized depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5, the third game value given by the third giving means has a higher game value than the first game value given by the first giving means. A gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the third gaming value given by the third giving means has a greater gaming value than the first gaming value given by the first giving means. Since it is configured as described above, it can be expected that the game ball flows down the third flow path while the game ball is held by the variable means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interestingly observe the traveling direction of the game ball flowing into the specific flow path, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, when the variable means holds the game ball on the first flow path, the game ball that has flowed into at least the specific flow path is arranged as the held game ball in the second flow path. It is possible to hold by a first disposition that is easily guided to the flow channel and a second disposition that is easily guided to the third flow channel as compared to the first disposition. A gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5 or B6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the game sphere is held on the first flow path by the variable means, at least the game sphere that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided to the second flow path as the arrangement of the held game sphere. The first arrangement and the second arrangement that facilitates guiding to the third flow path as compared to the first arrangement are held.

  This has the effect of allowing the player to determine the flow path in which the game balls are likely to flow simply by confirming the arrangement of the game balls.

  In the gaming machine B7, a determination unit that determines whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable unit is the first arrangement, and a performance that executes a specific effect indicating the determination result by the determination unit. A gaming machine B8, characterized in that it comprises an executing means.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are produced. That is, since the discriminating means discriminates whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the changing means is the first arrangement, and the specific effect showing the discrimination result by the discriminating means is executed by the effect executing means. There is an effect that the player can more easily discriminate the flow path into which the game ball easily flows.

  Any one of the gaming machines B5 to B8 is provided with an adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls flowing into the specific flow path into the second flow path and the third flow path. A gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, the ratio of the gaming balls flowing into the specific flow passage into the second flow passage and the third flow passage is respectively adjusted by the adjusting means. Since the adjustment is made, it is possible to make the gaming machine to which the second privilege is easily given or the gaming machine to which the third privilege is easily given depending on the business policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily adjusted according to the business policy of each hall.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, an operation means operable by a player and a detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means are provided, and the switching means allows the operation means to operate the operation means. A gaming machine B10, wherein the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position based on detection.

  The gaming machine B10 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B9. That is, the operation on the operation means is detected by the detection means. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the operation of the operating means being detected by the detecting means.

  As a result, it is possible for the player to switch whether or not the game ball flowing down to the specific flow path is flown down to the first ball entering means, so that each player suits his or her own taste. The effect is that it can be set to a state.

  The gaming machine B11 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, wherein the variable means is capable of holding only one gaming ball on the first flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, only one gaming ball is held on the first flow path by the varying means, so that the varying means is in the first position. Therefore, when the player quits the game, the game balls remaining on the first flow path can be minimized by being held by the variable means. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he/she has lost the game when he/she leaves the game.

<Characteristic C group> (The probability change rate is changed by adjusting the ratio of balls entering the holding device)
A first flow path provided with a specific flow path at least branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter. Means, a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit based on a game ball entering the first entering means, and a game ball flowing down the second flow path. A second privilege different from the first privilege is granted based on the second ball entering means provided at a position where the player can enter the ball and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A second privilege giving means capable of adjusting, and an adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls flowing down the specific flow path into the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively. A gaming machine C1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that conducts a lottery as to whether or not a game ball is won based on winning a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, there is known one having a plurality of winning openings through which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins. This conventional type gaming machine is capable of changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the direction in which the player shoots the game balls, by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning hole. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

  However, since the number of prize balls that can be won by winning is generally larger than the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize hole, the player usually decides whether or not he or she wins. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. In other words, it was common for a player to keep hitting a game ball in the same direction until a hit. Therefore, when a player plays a game on the same type of gaming machine, as long as he or she hits the ball in the same direction, the ball will continue to win the same winning opening, and the number of prize balls to be paid out will be scarce. There were cases. That is, the game may be monotonous.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the specific flow path is branched into the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game ball can flow. A first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, the first privilege granting means determines The privilege of 1 is granted. Different from the first privilege, based on the fact that the second ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. The second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means. The adjusting means adjusts the ratio of the game balls flowing down the specific flow path into the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means.

  Thus, by adjusting the adjusting means, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy to be given the first privilege or the gaming machine easily to be given the second privilege. Therefore, even with the same model, different game play can be realized by changing the adjustment degree by the adjusting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine C1, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a bonus game for giving a favorable privilege game to a player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. The assigning means, the first lottery state in which the lottery result by the lottery means has a high probability of becoming the specific lottery result, and the second lottery state in which the probability of having the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. A settable lottery state setting means, wherein the first privilege granting means controls the first lottery state setting means to set the first lottery state as the first privilege. Gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the game is played. A privilege game that is advantageous to a person is granted by the privilege game granting means. The lottery state setting means sets the first lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result of the lottery means being the specific lottery result is high, and the second lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result being the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. . The first privilege granting means controls the first benefit so that the first benefit status is set by the lottery status setting means.

  Thereby, the easiness of shifting to the first lottery state can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, according to the business policy of the hall, the first lottery state is easily set and the game playability is easily set to the privilege game state, or the first lottery state is hard to be set and the second benefit is easily given. You can adjust what you do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can adapt to the business policy of each hall.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second privilege granting means grants a predetermined amount of game medium as the second privilege, the gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second privilege granting means grants a predetermined amount of game media as a second privilege, so that it is easy to grant a predetermined amount of game media. Can be adjusted by adjusting means. Therefore, depending on the business policy of the hall, it is possible to adjust whether the game property is such that a predetermined amount of game medium is easily provided or the first benefit is easily provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can adapt to the business policy of each hall.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, a first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entering means, and a second position where the game ball does not easily enter the ball entering means as compared to the first position Variable means for changing the position, and variable control means for changing the variable means to the first position based on the privilege game being given by the privilege game giving means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C4 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are produced. That is, it is variable by the variable means between the first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entering means and the second position where the game ball does not easily enter the ball entering means as compared to the first position. To be done. On the basis of the bonus game being given by the bonus game giving means, the variable means is changed to the first position by the variable control means until the predetermined condition is satisfied.

  As a result, the first privilege is easily granted in the privilege game state, so that it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the privilege game.

  In the gaming machine C4, the variable control means changes the variable means to the second position at least based on a lapse of a predetermined time after the variable means is changed to the first position. A gaming machine C5 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, at least the variable means is moved to the second position by the variable control means based on the lapse of a predetermined time after the variable means is changed to the first position. Since it is variable, the opportunity for the player to obtain the first privilege can be limited until the predetermined time elapses. Therefore, since the scarcity value of the first privilege can be increased, the importance of the adjustment by the adjusting means can be increased. Therefore, when the player selects a gaming machine to play a game, the player can select the gaming machine in consideration of the degree of adjustment of the adjusting means, so that it is possible to provide the enjoyment of selecting the gaming machine. ..

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific game value is given based on a game ball entering, and a specific game value based on the game ball entering. And a small value entering means for giving a small game value, the second flow path, a specific path for flowing down the game ball to the specific entering means, and the small value entering means It is branched into a low-value flow path to be flowed down, and at least a first variable position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the specific flow path on the specific flow path, and a first variable position thereof. A gaming machine C6, which is provided with a position varying means that is capable of varying a gaming ball that has flowed into the specific flow path by comparison with a second variable position that is difficult to be held on the specific flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific gaming value is given based on the gaming ball entering the specific ball entering means, and the gaming machine enters the low value ball entering means. A game value less than a specific game value is given based on the ball. The second flow path is branched into a specific flow path that causes the game ball to flow down to the specific entrance means and a small value flow path that causes the low value entrance means to flow down. A first variable position that can hold at least one game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path on the specific flow path, and a game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path in comparison with the first variable position is held on the specific flow path. The position changing means is changed to the second variable position which is hard to be operated.

  As a result, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball that has flown into the second flow path in accordance with the variable position of the position changing means enters the ball entering means. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be changed according to the variable position of the position changing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine C6, holding control means for controlling the position changing means to be changed to the second variable position on the basis of the bonus game being given by the bonus game giving means, the specific flow path Is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path is more likely to flow in than the low-value flow path, and the position varying means holds the game ball by holding it. A gaming machine C7, which facilitates guiding the gaming ball to the low-value flow path by the playing gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6. That is, the position changing means is changed to the second variable position by the holding control means on the basis of the bonus game being given by the bonus game giving means. The specific flow path is arranged at a position where the game balls that have flowed into the second flow path are more likely to flow than the low-value flow path. When the game ball is held by the position changing means, the held game ball guides the game ball to the low-value flow path.

  Thereby, it is possible to change the ball entry means into which the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path enters according to the variable position of the position changing means and whether or not the game ball is held by the position changing means. .. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be changed according to the variable position of the position changing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  Any one of the gaming machines C6 to C8, wherein the varying means and the position varying means are constituted by one member.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, the variable means and the position varying means are constituted by one member, so the position and position of the varying means can be varied by one control. The position of the means can be switched at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the adjusting means increases the ratio of the game ball flowing down to the specific flow path into the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters the second entering ball. The rate of flowing into the ball means is decreased, and the rate of entering the game ball into the second ball entering means is increased when the ratio of the game ball flowing into the first ball entering means is decreased. A gaming machine C10 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, when the ratio of the gaming balls flowing down to the specific flow path into the first flow path is increased by the adjusting means, the game is played. The rate at which the spheres flow into the second flow path is reduced. Further, when the ratio of the game ball flowing down to the specific flow path into the first flow path is reduced by the adjusting means, the ratio of the game ball flowing into the second flow path is increased.

  As a result, there is an effect that the game ball can be made to more easily flow into the flow path on the side where the ratio is increased.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through an actuation port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
601 General winning a prize hole (normal winning means)
602 General prize hole (ball entry means)
606 Induction channel (second channel)
607 Induction channel (first channel)
607a Storage valve (flow path distribution means)
701 General winning a prize hole (normal winning means)
702 General prize hole (ball entry means)
704 induction channel (first channel)
704a Storage valve (flow path distribution means)
708 second flow path (guide flow path)
S218 Game state setting means S305 Lottery means S1103 Setting means S1302 Setting means S4003, S4007 Setting means

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball is won based on winning a specific winning opening. In addition to a specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided for paying out the winning ball when the ball wins. In this conventional game machine, by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning hole, it is possible to change the number of prize balls obtainable according to the direction in which the player shoots the game balls. is there.

JP 2001-129177 A

However, there is a possibility that Yu technique becomes monotonous.

The present invention has been made to solve the above illustrated problem or the like, and aims to provide a game machine that can prevent the game becomes monotonous.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided in a position where a game ball shot in a specific direction can enter, and a first variable state in which the game ball can enter, and By the variable ball entering means which can be changed to the second variable state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first variable state, the determining means for performing the determination based on the satisfaction of the determination condition, and the determination by the determining means. A variable game executing means for executing a variable game in which the variable ball entering means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second variable state to the first variable state based on a result of a specific determination, and the specific direction. The specific flow path is provided at a position where the game spheres fired at can flow down, the first ball entering means provided at a position where the game spheres flowing into the specific flow path can enter, and the specific flow Based on the fact that the game ball that has flowed into the road is provided at a position where the game ball can enter, and the second ball means that is different from the first ball means and that the game ball has entered the first ball means, The privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, and the game ball flowing into the specific flow path are the first ball entering. A first state that makes it easier to enter the means, and a second state that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the first state, and a variable means that is changeable. The variable means is changed to the first state while the variable ball entering means is being changed to the second variable state during execution of the variable game, and the variable ball entering means is the first variable. It is configured such that it can be changed to the second state while being changed to the state .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the game ball shot in the specific direction is provided at a position where the game ball can enter, and the game ball can enter the first variable state and the first variable state. Also, the variable ball entering means that can be changed to the second variable state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, the judging means that executes the judgment based on the establishment of the judging condition, and the specific judgment result by the judgment by the judging means. Based on that, the variable ball entering means executes a variable game in which the second variable state is changed a predetermined number of times from the second variable state to the first variable state, and a game shot in the specific direction. A specific flow path provided at a position where the ball can flow down, a game entering the specific flow path, a first ball entering means provided at a position where the ball can enter, and a game flowed into the specific flow path. The second ball is provided at a position where the ball can enter, and the second ball is different from the first ball, and the second ball is based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first ball. The privilege granting means for granting a specific privilege that is more advantageous to the player than when the game ball enters the means, and the game ball flowing into the specific flow path enter the first ball entering means. A variable state means is provided which can be changed to a first state which is easy to do and a second state where the game ball is easier to enter the second ball entering means than the first state. During the execution of the variable game, the variable ball entering means is changed to the first state while the variable ball entering means is changed to the second variable state, and the variable ball entering means is changed to the first variable state. The second state can be changed during the operation .

Thus, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the Yu technique becomes monotonous.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the figure which showed typically the area division setting and effective line setting of a display screen, (b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen where right-handed navigation was displayed, and (b) is a figure which illustrated a display screen where a right-handed warning image was displayed. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen in a big hit, and (b) is a figure which illustrated the display screen when a ball hits a big value winning hole during a big hit. (A), (b) is a figure which illustrated the display screen in which the warning image was displayed. It is a front view of a storage device. (A) is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the sphere which flowed into the storage device when the storage valve was closed, and (b) was flowed into the storage device when the storage valve was opened. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of a sphere. It is a diagram showing the upstream side of the path provided on the right side of the game board. It is a diagram showing the downstream side of the path provided on the right side of the game board. (A) is a figure which shows the state by which the 1st specific winning opening was opened, and (b) is a figure which shows the state by which the 2nd specific winning opening was opened. (A) is a figure which shows the path|route of the sphere in the state where the 1st specific winning opening was closed, and (b) is a figure which shows the path of the sphere in the state where the 1st specific winning opening is opened. (A) is a figure which shows the path|route of the sphere in the state where the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth was closed, and (b) is a figure which shows the path|route of a sphere in the state which the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth is open. (A) is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the sphere which entered into the 2nd variable winning a prize device in the state where the probability variation entrance is closed, and (b) is a probability variation entrance being opened. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the ball which entered into the 2nd variable winning device in the state which is. (A) is a figure which shows the timekeeping change of the state of the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth and the state of the flow path in a 2nd variable winning device in the 12th round of jackpot B, (b) is 12 of jackpot B. It is a figure which shows the timekeeping change of the state of the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth and the state of the flow path in a 2nd variable winning a prize device in the round. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a ROM in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the special jackpot type It is a figure and (c) is a mimetic diagram showing typically correspondence relation with the 2nd random number counter C4 and the hit in a normal design. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in a main control apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the transfer data table typically. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the drawing list typically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol change processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control control equipment. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-reading process performed by MPU in a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows a through gate passage processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the starting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process performed by MPU in a main controller. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot operation setting processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ending process performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a winning process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flow chart which shows abnormal processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart showing a winning command setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is the flowchart which showed the starting-up process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a command determination process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing an error notification process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a hit time notification process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a normal time notification process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by an MPU in the voice lamp control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a boot process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a stop type command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing an opening command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a round number command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. 7 is a flowchart showing an ending command process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a back image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing an error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a display setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a pointer update process executed by an MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. 7 is a flowchart showing a normal image transfer setting process executed by an MPU in the display control device. 7 is a flowchart showing a drawing process executed by an MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the second embodiment. (A) is a figure which illustrated the display screen when the storage valve of 2nd Embodiment is closed, (b) shows the display screen when the storage valve of 2nd Embodiment is open. It is the figure illustrated. It is a front view of the storage device in a 2nd embodiment. (A) is the figure which illustrated the case where the sphere which flowed into the storage device was guided to the high value winning a prize mouth when the storage valve in 2nd Embodiment was closed, (b) is a figure It is the figure which illustrated the case where the sphere which flowed into the storage device is guided to the small value winning a prize mouth when the storage valve in 2 embodiment is closed. It is the figure which illustrated the advancing direction of the sphere which flowed into the storage device when the storage valve in a 2nd embodiment is opened. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the regulation content of the 1st hit type selection table in 2nd Embodiment, (b) is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. is there. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 2 performed by MPU in the main controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows storage control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the warning process performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process at the time of storage performed by MPU in the audio|voice lamp control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the notification process at the time of cancellation performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in 2nd Embodiment. It is the figure which illustrated the display screen during the big hit in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the downstream side among the paths provided in the right side of the game board in the modification of 1st Embodiment. (A) is a plan view of a storage device and a second variable winning device in a state where a slide member of a modified example of the first embodiment is projected to the front side in front view, and (b) is a modification of the first embodiment. It is a top view of a storage device and a 2nd variable winning a prize device in the state where the slide member of an example was embedded in the back side at the front. It is a figure showing the regulation contents of the 1st hit classification selection table in the modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot control process 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows jackpot operation setting processing 2 performed by MPU in a main control unit in a modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows winning processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control unit in the modification of the first embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a winning opening closing processing performed by MPU in a main control unit in a modification of a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the error notification process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the time notification process 2 performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the modification of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the sphere which flowed into the inside of a storage device in the state where the sphere stored in the storage device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment was in a disadvantageous position for the player. It is a figure which shows the advancing direction of the sphere which flowed into the inside of a storage device in the state which the sphere stored in the storage device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment had become advantageous arrangement for a player. It is a figure which shows the suggestion display image displayed on the display screen in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the cancellation|release suggestion display process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio lamp control device in the modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the storage state command process performed by MPU in the audio lamp controller in the modification of 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 having an outer shell formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as that of the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 that is openably and closably supported. To support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinge 18 serves as an opening/closing shaft. The frame 12 is supported to be openable and closable toward the front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (gaming ball) flows down in front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In addition, in the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 17) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side provided with the hinges 19 is used as an opening/closing shaft. The lower plate unit 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported to be openable and closable toward the front side. Note that the locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with a decorative resin component, an electrical component, or the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass plates is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  An upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in the front frame 14 in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface protruding to the front side, and prize balls, rental balls and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball introduced into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 17) by the inclination. A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or when changing the effect contents of the super reach. It

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means perform a change control of the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect effect during the game. On the periphery of the window portion 14c, electric decoration portions 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as a production lamp such as a jackpot lamp, and when the jackpot or the reach production is performed, the illumination parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is provided and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying during payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs is provided.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illumination section 32 on the right side so that the rear surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a small window 35 is formed. The certificate or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to a region around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to bring out more glitter.

  A ball rental operating unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation unit 40 is operated in a state where banknotes, cards, etc. are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount as a number as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a loan ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the loan ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. To be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted in the card unit. It should be noted that the ball rental operation unit 40 is not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without a card unit, but in this case, the ball rental operation unit 40 is used. It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to share a pachinko machine using a card unit with a cash machine.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a central portion of the lower plate unit 15 in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is provided.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) by a change in electric resistance is built in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the rotation operation amount, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength (firing strength) corresponding to, and thereby the ball is driven in front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

  At the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball-pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens, and The sphere spontaneously falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state in which a box (generally referred to as “thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a wind turbine (the movable member 310 is shown, and others are shown). In addition to the rails 61, 62, the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the normal winning opening (not shown). (Through gate) 67, a variable display device unit 80, a storage device 600, and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the front surface side of the base plate 60 on the rear surface side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650, the variable display device unit 80, and the storage device 600 are router-processed base plates 60. It is arranged in the through-hole formed in and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  On the front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted, and inside the outer rail 62, a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in step 1 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), so that the front of the game board 13 has a ball. A game area where a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is provided and fired). The area where the sphere flows down).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 17) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion of FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61 to prevent the situation where the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 returns to the ball guide passage again. To be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (the upper right portion in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a momentum higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 69 to generate momentum. Is attenuated and bounces back toward the center. In addition, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed by forming an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery of special symbols (first symbols) is carried out by the fact that there is a winning in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, and the ball is the normal entrance 67. When passing, a lottery for normal symbols (second symbol) is performed. In the lottery of the special symbol which is performed for the first entrance 64 and the entry into the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is done, the jackpot type is also determined. For convenience of explanation, the lottery for the special symbol that is performed for entering the first inlet 64 will be referred to as “lottery for the special symbol 1”, and will be performed for entering the second inlet 640. The lottery of the special symbol that is called is referred to as "lottery of the special symbol 2."

  When the special symbol jackpot hits, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a that is normally closed is kept for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse). Alternatively, the operation of opening 10 balls is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). More specifically, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or until 10 balls are won), 12 In the round, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, so that a larger amount of winning balls than normal is paid out.

  In addition, inside the second variable winning device 650, there are two types of ball entrances (probably variable ball entrance 654 and normal ball entrance) for determining the added value after the jackpot that is given after the special game state is over. Mouth 655) is provided (see FIG. 15). Although details will be described later, when a ball enters the probability variation entrance 654 in the special game state, a “high probability state of special symbol” is added as an added value after the jackpot is over. On the other hand, if the ball does not enter the probability variation entrance 654 even during the special game state, a “normal symbol time saving state” is given as an added value after the jackpot. In addition, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, two types of "jackpot A" and "jackpot B" are provided (see FIG. 18(b)). Although the details will be described later, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is configured differently depending on the type of jackpot, and the ease with which the ball enters the certainty variation entrance 654 is different.

  When the special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has passed, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entrances depends on the type of entrance. Each is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also on the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first ball entrance 64 (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1), or the number of reserved balls for the second ball entrance 640 (special If the number of reserved balls of the symbol 2) remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed and a variable display according to the lottery is started. In addition, when the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the normal entrance 67, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol is hit. When the normal pattern hits, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second entrance 640. It becomes easy. That is, when the normal symbol hits, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

  Further, when the normal symbol (second symbol) is selected, the variable symbol of the normal symbol is started to be displayed on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) elapses, The ordinary symbol showing the lottery result is stopped and displayed. When the ball normally passes through the ball entrance 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is determined by the first symbol display device 37. While being displayed, it is also shown on the second symbol holding lamp 84. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal entrance 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. Be started.

  In both cases of "big hit A" and "big hit B", the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 15 rounds (15R big hit). In addition, in the special game state, when the ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 654, as a value added after the jackpot ends, the pachinko machine 10 has a high special symbol from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. Transition to the stochastic state (during the change of special symbols). On the other hand, in the special game state, if the ball does not enter the probability variation entrance 654 even once, as a value added after the jackpot, until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the jackpot In the meantime, it shifts to the time saving state of ordinary symbols. In addition, when it shifts to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the jackpot ends, it also shifts to the low probability state of the special symbol. The low probability state of this special symbol continues until the next big hit. In addition, as will be described later in detail, in the “big hit B”, compared to the “big hit A”, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the certain variation entrance ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the big hit state). That is, since the “big hit B” is more likely to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol after the big hit ends, it becomes easier to become the big hit again at a short interval after the end of the big hit. Therefore, the "big hit B" is a big hit that is more advantageous to the player than the "big hit A".

  Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot is finished, that is, when the probability is changing (probably changing), in other words, to a special game state. It is a game state that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol in the present embodiment (during the change of the special symbol) includes the state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is increased and the ball easily wins the second entrance 640. . On the other hand, the "low probability state of the special symbol" refers to a time when the special symbol is not in the probability change, and the jackpot probability is a normal state, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than during the probability change of the special symbol. Further, the time saving state of the normal symbol (during time saving) refers to a state of the game in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily wins the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, the normal state is a state of the game that is neither during the probability change of the special symbol nor during the time saving of the normal symbol (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) is increased).

  During the probability change of the special symbol, or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, not only the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is increased, but also the time for which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened is changed, which is the normal state. A longer time is set compared to. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), a ball is won in the second entrance 640, as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy to do. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the ball enters the second ball inlet 640 easily. That is, the lottery for special symbols is facilitated.

  In addition, during the sudden change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640, or in addition to changing the opening time. The number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a in the case of hitting a normal symbol may be increased more than in the normal state. Further, during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol (the second symbol) is not changed, and the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened, and At least one of the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be changed. In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened are not changed, and the normal symbol ( You may comprise so that only the winning probability of (2nd pattern) may be improved compared with the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, when the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the special game state, the probability variation state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot, but is not limited to this. You may limit the number of times. Specifically, for example, from the end of the special game state until the special symbol lottery is finished 10 times, the special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is given, and after the special symbol lottery is finished 10 times May be configured to be set to a normal state. Further, the number of times the special symbol is in the probability changing state is not limited to 10 times, and may be arbitrarily set. Similarly, in the present embodiment, when the ball does not enter the probability variation entrance 654 in the special game state, the special symbol lottery is configured to be in a time saving state until the lottery is completed 100 times. However, the time saving period of the normal symbol is not limited to 100 times, and may be arbitrarily set.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side in the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2) A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 is a display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate whether or not the lottery for the special symbol, which is performed in association with the entry into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (starting winning), is being executed by a lighting state. By performing a variable display, as a stop symbol after the fluctuation ends, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by a lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entrance 64 Among them, the number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed yet, is indicated by a lighting state.

  If the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry The number of balls is reserved up to four times for each type of entrance, and the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In addition, in the present embodiment, each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reservations is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (e.g., 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit and an error. The LEDs 37a are configured so that the light emission colors of the respective LEDs (for example, red, green, and blue) are different, and by the combination of the light emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs (high probability state of special symbols) Or, it is possible to display normal patterns such as reduced working hours. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and when it is a big hit, it corresponds to the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B). A special design (first design) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are provided in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the center of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed on the first symbol display device 37 by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 17 ), for example, upper, middle, and lower. Three symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), these third symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like this. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the game state accompanied by the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 17) is performed on the first symbol display device 37, the first symbol display The display is decorative according to the display of the device 37. Instead of the liquid crystal display, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 7. First, FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. Yes, FIG.4(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

  The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9". Each main symbol is formed by attaching numbers from "0" to "9" on the rear symbol made of a wooden box, of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) are attached to the front of the wooden box with attached designs simulating characters such as plane, furoshiki, and helmet. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached design, and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached design.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 17) described later is a big hit, the variable display in which the same main symbol is aligned is performed. , The jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the variable display in which the same main symbols are not arranged is displayed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit A", a variable display in which the main symbols to which the even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are arranged is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of "big hit B", the main number to which any one of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including an odd number is added A variable display in which the symbols are arranged is displayed. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is out of alignment, a variable display in which the main symbols having the same number are not arranged is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower parts, and the lower 2/3 is the main display area Dm in which the third symbol is variably displayed, other than that. The upper third ⅓ is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, center, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed on the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers, and the variable symbols are scrolled from the top to the bottom for periodical display. In particular, in the left symbol column Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol column Z2 and the right symbol column Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and in each game, the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol column Z1, the right symbol column Z3, and the middle symbol column Z2. Is displayed. If the combination of the jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols in the present embodiment) is arranged on the activated line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

  On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is horizontally provided above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have entered the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the notice effect image.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a moving image is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, which suggests to the player that the jackpot is in a state where it is easier to make a transition to the big hit than usual. In the small area Ds2 in the center, usually, a predetermined character 710 (in this embodiment, a boy with a hachimaki) performs a predetermined motion, sometimes performs a special motion different from the predetermined motion, or another character A notice production is performed by appearing.

  On the other hand, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), The number of entered balls is respectively reserved up to 4 times, and the reserved number of balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved sphere number pattern is displayed for each one reserved sphere number, and the number of reserved spheres is displayed according to the number of displayed reserve sphere number patterns. That is, when one reserved sphere number design is displayed in the small area Ds1, it is indicated that the number of reserved spheres is one sphere, and when four reserved sphere number designs are displayed, the number of reserved spheres is It shows that it is four balls. If the number of reserved balls is not displayed in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, there is no reserved ball. In addition, FIG. 4B is an example in the case where the number of reserved balls corresponding to the balls entering the first ball entrance 64 is four. When a holding ball corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 occurs, a holding ball number design of a mode different from the holding ball number design displayed in the small area Ds1 of FIG. 4A is displayed. To be done. As a result, the player can easily determine the number of reserved balls corresponding to the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 and the number of reserved balls corresponding to the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. You can check.

  In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of reserved balls is limited to four. However, the number may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is a number on a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls for the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5(a), a display (right-hand navigation) that prompts the third symbol display device 81 to launch a ball aiming at a path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 is displayed. The display contents when they occur will be described.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is changed to a certain state or when the normal symbol is shortened, so the ball is moved to the right side of the game board 13. By hitting (right hitting), it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second entrance 640. In addition, as will be described later in detail, when the jackpot is achieved by the special symbol lottery (lottery of the special symbol 2) performed based on the fact that the ball enters the second inlet port 640, the first inlet port 64 Compared to the case where the special symbol is drawn based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball (lottery of the special symbol 1), a "big hit B" is likely to occur. Therefore, in the probability change state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot or in the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is advantageous for the player to execute the right stroke. In other words, even if the special symbol is changed to a certain state or the normal symbol is set to the time saving state, the player cannot enter the ball into the second entrance 640 unless he/she hits it right. The player will not be able to fully receive the benefits of the probability change state of the symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the probability change state of the special symbol or the time saving state of the normal symbol, the player displays the image (right-hand navigation) illustrated in FIG. It is configured so that the benefits of being in a time-saving state with normal patterns can be reliably obtained.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5A, in the right-hand navigation, a character "Aim at the right" is displayed in the small area Ds3 in the sub-display area Ds, and a rightward direction is displayed above and below the character. Three arrows are displayed. By displaying these characters and the arrow, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible to surely make the player obtain the benefit of the probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol.

  Next, an example of the warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The warning image illustrated in FIG. 5B is a right-handed stroke even though the player should not hit the ball (right-handed) to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. It is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined to be executed. More specifically, in a normal state (a state in which the special symbol is neither the probability changing state nor the normal symbol time saving state), it is displayed when it is determined that the player is making a right hit.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled so as not to be easily opened in a normal state (even if the ball is hit to the right, it is difficult to make the ball enter the second entrance 640). For this reason, if the player hits the ball right in the normal state, the chance of receiving the special symbol lottery decreases as compared with the case where the player hits the ball with the left ball hitting the first entrance 64. That is, if the player hits the ball right in the normal state, it is less likely to be a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying the right-handed warning image and urging the player to left-handedly, the player can be prevented (suppressed) from being lost.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5B, when it is determined that the player is right-handing in the normal state, “warning” is given to the entire small display area Ds (small areas Ds1 to Ds3). And the characters "please play with the left hand!!" By displaying these characters, it is possible to make the player notice that the player should not hit the right hand (should do the left hand). In addition, the clerk in the hall also confirms whether or not there is a right-handed warning screen (see FIG. 5B) to check whether or not there is a player executing an irregular game method of right-handed in a normal state. It can be easily identified.

  As a method of determining whether or not the ball is hitting to the right, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) into which the ball may flow when the ball is hit to the right. . More specifically, when a ball enters any of the general winning openings 601 and 602 or the outlets 603a to 603c provided inside the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) (at each entrance) When it is determined that the ball has passed the provided ball input switch), it is determined that the player is making a right hit.

  Here, the storage device 600 (see FIG. 8) is in a state in which it is easy to let the ball flow down to the general winning opening 601 (see FIG. 9A) and the ball is flowing down to the general winning opening 602, depending on the gaming state. It is set to two types of states, that is, an easy state (see FIG. 9B). Then, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state) (probably changed state of special symbol, time saving state of normal symbol, normal state), it is set to a state in which the ball easily flows down to the general winning opening 601. This general winning opening 601 is a winning opening in which the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is entered is smaller than that of the general winning opening 602 (for example, three). Therefore, even if the player hits the ball to the right in the normal state, there is little merit to put the ball into the storage device 600 (the number of balls to be held cannot be increased). That is, when right-handedness is executed in the normal state, the frequency of receiving the special symbol lottery decreases, and the number of balls held also decreases, so that the player is disadvantageous. Therefore, in order to prevent the player from continuing to play the game method that is disadvantageous to him (the game method of right-handing in the normal state), a right-handing warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed. Is configured.

  It should be noted that, as a judgment factor of whether or not to display the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B), not only the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 which is easy to win in the normal state but also the winning The presence or absence of a ball entering the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 or the like, which is difficult to play, is also determined because the possibility of illegal playing is taken into consideration. That is, in the normal state, by continuously illegally entering balls into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, which has a large number of winning prize balls (for example, 15 payouts), without a big hit. There is a possibility that an illegal game method for obtaining a large amount of prize balls will be performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has won (genuine) a general winning a prize (high value winning a prize) 602 in a normal state, the player is left-handed (right). A right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) that prompts (not to hit) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress illegal games.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that the ball has entered any of the respective entrances (general winning openings 601 and 602 and out openings 603a to 603c) provided in the storage device 600 in the normal state. In addition, the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), when it is detected that a ball has won (entered) a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with a lot of prize balls to be paid out, an illegal game is detected. A right-handed warning image may be displayed when it is determined that the warning is performed. As a result, the clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed warning image. In addition, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), if it is detected that a ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, it is illegally performed on the hall computer. It may be configured to output a signal indicating. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility that fraud is being made, and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where the fraudulent activity is being made.

  In the present embodiment, the player makes a right hit based on the detection of a ball entering each of the ball entrances (general winning openings 601, 602, out entrances 603a to 603c) provided inside the storage device 600. Although it is determined that the right stroke is performed, the method for determining whether or not the right stroke is performed is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine that the ball is hitting to the right when the ball normally passes through the ball entrance (through gate) 67, or a path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. A well-known sensor capable of detecting the passage of the ball may be provided above, and when the passage of the ball is detected by the sensor, it may be determined that the player is making a right hit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6, an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the special game state (during the big hit state) will be described. FIG. 6A is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the third round of the jackpot. As shown in the figure, when the jackpot is hit, for example, an image in which the boy character 710 discovers a treasure box 715 filled with treasures is displayed. This treasure suggests a large number of prize balls that the player obtains in the special game state (big hit state). By this display, the joy of winning the prize ball can be amplified, so that the player can be satisfied with the fact that the jackpot has been won. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In the upper left portion of the third symbol display device 81, a display area 714 for displaying the current round number is provided. In the example of FIG. 6A, the characters “ROUND 3” are displayed in the display area 714. By confirming this display, the player can recognize that the present is the third round of the big hit. Therefore, the player can easily recognize the number of remaining rounds of the jackpot.

  Further, in the upper right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a right-handed navigation image is displayed as in the probability changing state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol. That is, the character "Aim for the right!!" is displayed in the small area Ds3, and rightward arrows are displayed above and below the character. By displaying this right-handed navigation image, the player is made to recognize that the ball should be launched to the route (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 during the special game state (during the big hit state). be able to. If left hitting is performed despite the special game state (big hit state), it is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 and is opened in the special game state (big hit state). It becomes impossible to make a ball enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, it becomes impossible to obtain a large amount of prize balls, and the player loses money. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6A) is displayed even in the special game state (big hit state) to urge the player to make a right-handed hit. Thereby, the player is configured to win a prize ball in a big hit.

  In addition, in the lower right portion of the third symbol display device 81, a winning number display area MA for displaying the number of winnings (balls) to the general winning opening 602 is formed. As shown in 6(a), for example, the characters “EXTRA BONUS×10” are displayed in the winning number display area MA. The word "EXTRA BONUS" means that a prize ball is obtained by a method different from that obtained by inserting the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. ing. Specifically, it means obtaining a prize ball by inserting the ball into the general winning opening 602. In addition, the character “×10” indicates the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 in the jackpot. In the example of FIG. 6A, it means that the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 ten times in the first to third rounds.

  Further, a schematic diagram of the storage device 600 is displayed above the character string “EXTRA BONUS×10”, and a character string “EXTRA BONUS gate is open” is displayed above the character string. This allows the player to easily recognize that the storage valve 604a is set to the open state (released state). In addition, in the schematic view of the storage device 600 displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a balloon in which the character "Aim!" is written is displayed at the position of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. .. By this balloon, it is possible to let the player recognize that it is advantageous (a large amount of prize balls can be obtained) when the balls are inserted into the general winning opening 602.

  In addition, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing display contents when a ball enters the general winning opening 602 in the special game state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 6( b ), when a ball hitting the general winning opening 602 is detected during a big hit, the letters “GET” are displayed in the portion where the schematic view of the storage device 600 is displayed. At the same time, an image in which a ball enters is displayed at a location corresponding to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the schematic view of the storage device 600. Further, in the winning number display area MA, the display content is changed from “EXTRA BONUS×10” to “EXTRA BONUS×11”. Thereby, the player can easily recognize that the prize ball has been obtained by the ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602.

  In this way, by displaying the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening 602 during the big hit, the winning balls are provided separately from the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a in the big hit. It is possible to make the player recognize the number of times the player has won. Therefore, a game can be played in expectation that the number of times of "EXTRA BONUS" (the number of times of entering the general winning opening 602) will increase. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, various warning images will be described with reference to FIG. 7. First, FIG. 7A is a diagram showing an example of a left-handing warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when left-handing is performed in the special game state (big hit state). As shown in FIG. 7A, when it is determined that the player is left-handed, a large display area 716 for displaying a warning is formed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. Further, in the large display area, the character "warning" is displayed in a large size, and the character "Attack the attacker by hitting right!" is displayed below the character "warning". By displaying these characters in the large display area, it is possible to make the player recognize that the current game method (left hitting) is an incorrect game method. Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), it is possible to surely make the player obtain a large amount of prize balls.

  The determination as to whether or not the player is left-handed is made by determining whether or not a ball has entered the first entrance 64. That is, by determining that the ball has entered the first ball inlet 64 during the special game state (during the big hit state), it is determined that the player is left-handed, and a left-handed warning image ( Control is performed so as to display (see FIG. 7A).

  In the present embodiment, the left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7A) is displayed when a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a passage sensor that detects passage of a sphere is provided on a path (flow path) provided on the left side of the game board 13, and a left-handed warning image (when a passage of the sphere is detected by the sensor during a big hit) You may comprise so that FIG.7(a) may be displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 7B, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the storage device 600 is, for example, when a ball is detected in a general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 or a special playing status (big hit) despite the special playing status (big hit status). If a ball is detected in the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, it is judged that an abnormality has occurred and a warning image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 7B, when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the storage device 600, the word “warning” is displayed in large size in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, at the bottom of the screen, the words "Please call the gate error staff" are displayed. Since these characters allow the player to determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to promptly request a clerk or the like in the hall for repair or the like.

  In addition, when the ball is fixed to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, which has a large number of prize balls always paid out, by illegally changing the wiring, etc. The clerk can determine the possibility of misconduct simply by checking the warning image (see FIG. 7B). Therefore, by fixing the ball to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in a state where it is easy to enter, and striking the ball toward the storage device 600, an attempt is made to suppress fraudulent acts of increasing the ball without going through the jackpot. be able to.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. The second symbol display device displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. A variable display in which the lights are alternately turned on for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the second symbol on the second symbol display device. In addition, as a result of the winning lottery, if it is out, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variable display of the third symbol on the second symbol display device.

  The pachinko machine 10 has a predetermined electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped by a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol "○"). It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a time.

  The time required for variable display of the second symbol (fluctuation time) is set so that the special symbol is changing during probability, or the normal symbol is shorter than the normal state when the gaming state is in the normal state. As a result, during the probability change of the special symbol, and during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol) can be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, the chances of winning the normal symbol are increased, so that the player can be given many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second entrance 640. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol, and during the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to make a state in which the ball can easily win the second ball entrance 640.

  In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol, or during the time saving of the normal symbol, the winning probability is increased, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a and the number of times of opening are increased, or the like, to the second entrance 640. When the ball is in a state of easy winning, the time required for variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or during the time saving of the normal symbol, and the hit probability of the regular symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state. Alternatively, the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a for one normal symbol hit may be constant regardless of the game state.

  The normal ball entrance 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls launched on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down on the right side of the game board can pass through. ing. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, a normal symbol (second symbol) is hit and a lottery is performed. After the winning lottery, a variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out. For example, the symbol "x" is displayed as the variable display stop symbol.

  The number of times the ball has passed through the normal entrance 67 is held up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also lit up. .. Four second design holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third design display device 81.

  The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. Alternatively, a part of the device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for passage of the ball through the normal entrance 67 is not limited to 4 times, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). .. Moreover, the number of the normal entrance 67 is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal entrance 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, but may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball wins the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller is caused by the turning on of the first winning hole switch. 110 (see FIG. 17) is a big hit lottery, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, to the right of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front (below the normal entrance 67), a second entrance 640 through which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning hole switch. The main control unit 110 (see FIG. 17) is used to perform a big hit lottery, and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  Further, each of the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 is also one of the prize holes from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the ball wins. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second ball entrance 640 are configured to be the same. However, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball is won in the second ball entrance 640 may be different numbers. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won in the first ball entrance 64 is set to 3, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second ball entrance 640 is set to be 5. Good.

  An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for a ball to enter the second ball entrance 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is performed by the passage of the ball to the normal entrance 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. (Enlarged state), and the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640.

  As mentioned above, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol is higher than in the normal state, and the time required to display the variation of the ordinary symbol is short, so the variation of the ordinary symbol In the display, the symbol "○" is easily displayed. Therefore, the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the normal symbol, the time for which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer than that in the normal state. Therefore, during the probability change of the special symbol and the time saving of the normal symbol, it is possible to make a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second ball entrance 640 as compared with the normal state. On the other hand, the first ball entrance 64 does not have an electric accessory as provided in the second ball entrance 640, and the ball is always ready for winning.

  Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball is won at the first ball entrance 64 and when the ball is won at the second ball entrance 640. is there. However, as a type of jackpot that is selected when a jackpot is hit, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot B) that makes it easier to put a ball into the certainty variation entrance ball 654 during the special game state is the second entrance 640 The case where the ball wins is set higher than the case where the ball wins the first ball entrance 64.

  In the normal operation, the electric accessory that accompanies the second entrance 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win a prize in the second entrance 640. Therefore, the first entrance without the electric accessory is provided. A ball is fired toward the mouth 64 so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left hitting”), and a lot of chances for a big hit lottery are obtained by winning a prize in the first ball entrance 64. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a big hit.

  On the other hand, during the sudden change of the special symbol or during the shortening of the time period of the ordinary symbol, by passing the ball through the normal entrance 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is easily opened, and the second entrance Since it is in a state that it is easy to win the ball entrance 640, the ball is shot toward the second entrance 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right hit”), and the normal entry It is advantageous for the player to pass the ball 67 to open the electric accessory and aim to win the jackpot B by winning the second ball 640.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the special symbol is in the process of being changed, the normal symbol is being saved, or the normal state), the game is played. The person can change the way of shooting the ball into "left hit" and "right hit". Therefore, it is possible to change the way the ball is hit for the player, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A first variable winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first ball inlet 64 (lower left side of the second ball inlet 640), and a horizontally elongated rectangular first specific winning port is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. (Large opening) 65a is provided. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot in the special symbol lottery performed due to the winning of the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the jackpot is stopped. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the big hit is notified. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, the first specific winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

  The first specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening/closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a can be repeated at most 14 times (14 rounds). More specifically, the opening and closing operation of the first specific winning opening 65a is executed in the special game state 1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds. The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of award balls than usual in order to give a game value (game value). Is done.

  The first variable winning device 65 is, specifically, a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the first specific winning port 65a, and a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis ( (Not shown). The first specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot be won or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower side of the front face to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily wins the first specific winning opening 65a. It operates so that the closed state and the closed state of are alternately repeated.

  A second variable winning device 650 is provided on the lower left side of the first variable winning device 65, and a second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a having a horizontally long rectangular shape is provided above the second variable winning device 650. . The opening/closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 650a forms a closed state that prevents the ball from entering the second variable winning device 650 by projecting to the front side in front view (see FIG. 14(a)). ). On the other hand, when a special design lottery results in a big hit, and in the 12th round, the opening/closing plate that covers the second specific winning opening 650a slides toward the back side in front view, and is buried in the back side of the game board 13, so that the ball comes first. An open state in which a ball can be entered into the 2-variable winning device 650 is formed (see FIG. 14B).

  As described above, based on the fact that the ball that has entered the second specific winning port 650a in the special game state (big hit) enters the certainty variation ball port 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650. , After the jackpot is over, it shifts to a special symbol probability change state. On the other hand, if the balls do not enter the second specific winning opening 650a in the special game state, or if they enter the second specific winning opening 650a, all the balls enter the normal winning opening 655. If you do, shift to the time saving state of the normal symbol after the jackpot.

  The special game state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. In addition to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, other winning openings may be provided as winning openings opened in the special gaming state. On the contrary, the winning opening may be only the first specific winning opening 65a. Further, the arrangement position is not limited to the arrangement of the present embodiment, and it may be arranged at any position.

  A storage device 600 is provided on the right side of the first variable winning device 65. The storage device 600 is provided with a plurality of ball entrances (general winning openings 601 and 602 and out entrances 603a to 603c) therein, and causes the entered balls to flow down to any of the entrances. be able to. Further, the storage device 600 can store only one ball that has entered the inside (stop the flow down). Further, this storage device 600 is covered by a transparent cover body on the front side in front view, and to which entrance port the ball that the player has flown (entered) into the storage device 600 enters. Is configured so that it can be easily confirmed. Details of the storage device 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an outline of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 8, the storage device 600 is configured so that a sphere can enter the inside thereof via the guide flow path 605. It should be noted that the storage device 600 is configured such that when the player hits the ball to the right, one ball enters approximately three of the hit balls. The balls that have not entered the guiding flow path 605 travel along the upper left side of the storage device 600 and flow down toward the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. That is, in the special game state, a part of the ball shot by the player toward the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a enters the storage device 600 via the guide flow path 605. Is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 8, inside the storage device 600, two types of flow paths branched by the branch member 604 are provided downstream of the guide flow path 605. Specifically, inside the storage device 600, a guide flow path 606 is provided on the left side in front view. Most of the spheres that have flowed down the guide flow path 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided on the downstream side. This general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is provided with a detection switch 601a (not shown) that can detect that a ball has entered (passed). When the detection switch 601a detects that a ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, three prize balls are paid out. It should be noted that, to the left and right of this general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, balls that have not flown into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though they flow down the guide flow path 606 are discharged. Out outlets 603a and 603b are provided. By these outlets, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the accumulation of the spheres inside the storage device 600, and reliably discharge the spheres flowing down the guide flow path 606. Further, like the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, detection switches 603a1 and 603b1 (not shown) are provided at these outlets 603a and 603b, respectively. With these detection switches 603a1 and 603b1, the number of discharged balls can be accurately determined.

  Inside the storage device 600, a guide flow path 607 through which a sphere can flow is provided on the right side in front view. Most of the game balls flowing down the guide flow path 607 enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 provided on the downstream side. The general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is provided with a detection switch 602a (not shown) that can detect that a ball has entered (passed). When it is detected by the detection switch 602a that a ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, 15 prize balls are paid out. That is, more prize balls can be obtained when the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 than when the ball enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. it can. Outlet openings 603b and 603c are provided on the left and right sides of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, respectively. These outlets prevent (suppress) the balls that have not entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 from accumulating inside the storage device 600, and prevent the balls that have flowed down the guide flow path 607. It can be reliably discharged. Further, similarly to the outlets 603a and 603b, the outlet 603c is provided with a detection switch 603c1 (not shown). The detection switch 603c1 can accurately determine the number of discharged balls.

  Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special game state (big hit state) is set, it is set to a state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. In a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the state is set so that it is easy to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. That is, in the special game state, a large amount of prize balls are obtained by opening the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, and in addition to the general winning opening (large value winning) in the storage device 600. It is configured such that a prize ball can be obtained by winning the ball in the mouth 602. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, and the merit of the player due to the big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy the game with a big hit, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, which has a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out, is closed by the storage valve 607a, and the number of award balls to be paid out relatively. Balls are set in a state where it is easy for a ball to enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of points. That is, in a state other than the special game state, since there is little merit to insert the ball into the storage device 600, even in a state other than the special game state, by always aiming at the storage device 600, a large amount of payout is to be paid. An irregular game method can be prevented (suppressed). As described above, the storage device 600 is configured such that one ball enters approximately three right-handed balls. The number of prize balls paid out when the player enters the general prize hole (small value prize hole) 601 is three. That is, even if the player hits the ball right in the normal state, it is difficult to draw a special symbol, and it is not possible to increase the number of balls by paying out based on the winning of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. Therefore, in the normal state, the player can be made to want to hit left.

  A storage valve 607a is provided in the guide passage 607. The storage valve 607a can block the guide passage 607 by protruding toward the front side in front view, and can prevent the flow of the sphere that has proceeded to the guide passage 607. That is, the ball can be stopped (the ball is stored) at the upper part of the storage valve 607a. The storage valve 607a is configured to be driven by a storage device solenoid 610 (see FIG. 17). More specifically, by driving the storage device solenoid 610, a state in which the storage valve 607a projects toward the front side in the front view (a state in which the guide flow channel 607 is blocked) and a state in which the storage valve 607a moves toward the rear side in the front view. It is configured to be able to switch to a buried state (a state in which a sphere can flow down the guide flow channel 607). The sphere stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a is prevented (suppressed) from flowing out to the guide flow passage 606 side by being surrounded by the inner wall of the guide flow passage 607 and the branch member 604. . That is, the protrusion 604a provided on the branching member 604 is set sufficiently high so that the balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a do not flow out.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the operation of the ball that has entered the storage device 600 will be described for each of the two possible states of the storage valve 607a described above. FIG. 9A is a diagram showing an operation of a ball that has entered the storage device 600 in a state where the storage valve 607a is projected to the front side, and FIG. It is a figure which shows operation|movement of the sphere which entered the storage device 600 in the state where it was buried in.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the lower end of the guide flow channel 605 has a half or more overlap with the upper end of the guide flow channel 607. On the other hand, the upper end portion of the guide flow passage 606 is located on the left side of the central axis 605a of the guide flow passage 605, and almost does not overlap the lower end portion of the guide flow passage 605. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide flow path 605 easily advances to the guide flow path 607.

  The sphere that has proceeded to the guide flow path 607 is prevented from flowing down by the storage valve 607a, and stops at the upper part of the storage valve 607a (the sphere is stored). Then, in a state where the sphere is stopped at the upper part of the storage valve 607a (the sphere is stored), when another sphere newly flows down the guiding flow channel 605, the new flowing down the guiding flow channel 605. The sphere that has come into contact with the sphere stored on the storage valve 607a makes contact (interference). Due to this contact (interference), the trajectory (downward direction) of the sphere newly flowing down the guide flow channel 605 is changed.

  Since the guide flow passage 607 is provided on the slightly right side of the guide flow passage 605 (see FIG. 9A), the sphere stored on the storage valve 607a is newly added to the guide flow passage 605. In most cases, it is stopping on the right side of the ball flowing down. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing down the guide flow path 605 collides with the left side of the sphere stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, and repels to the left side in front view. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing down the guide flow path 605 advances to the guide flow path 606 provided on the left side in front view. As described above, most of the balls that have flowed down the guide flow path 606 enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a relatively small number of prize balls to be paid out (the number of prize balls is 3). That is, in the state where the storage valve 607a projects toward the front side in front view and the sphere cannot flow down the guide flow channel 607 (the state where the guide flow channel 607 is closed), most of the balls that have entered the storage device 600 are generally. The player enters the winning opening (small value winning opening) 601.

  On the other hand, when the storage valve 607a is buried in the back side of the front view (see FIG. 9(b)), there is nothing that hinders the flow of the sphere that has proceeded to the guide channel 607, so the guide channel 607 is not present. The sphere that has proceeded to flows down the guide flow path 607 as it is, and enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. As described above, the general winning opening (large-value winning opening) 602 has a relatively large number (15) of winning prize balls to be paid out, and therefore has many advantages for the player to win the prize.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that the ball can flow down the guide flow path 607 (see FIG. 9B) when a big hit occurs. Therefore, in the special game state, by hitting the ball to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a by hitting the right, a large amount of prize balls are obtained, and in addition, hitting by hitting the right. A prize ball can be obtained by a part of the formed ball winning the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be acquired in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, so that the merit of the player due to the big hit can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy the game with a big hit, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, as described above, in the states other than the special game state (big hit state), the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, which has a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out, is closed by the storage valve 607a and is relatively paid out. The state is set such that the balls can easily enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of prize balls. That is, in a state other than the special game state, there is little merit to put the ball into the storage device 600. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, by always aiming at the storage device 600, a large amount of payout is to be paid. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the playing method.

  In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the guide flow path 606 enters the general winning opening (small value prize opening) 601, and the ball flowing down the guide flow path 607 enters the general winning entrance 602. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a known clune means having a plurality of winning openings is provided on the downstream side of each of the guide channels, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning openings to be entered. Good. As a result, even if the prize flow path 606 flows down, it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls by entering the prize hole with a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be interestingly watched until the ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters one of the winning openings. Therefore, when the ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a closes the guide passage 607 so that the sphere can be stored on the way of the guide passage 607. However, for example, an electromagnet or the like is used to guide the guide passage. You may comprise so that a sphere may be stored on the way of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction flow path 607, and magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than the special game state (during the big hit state). As a result, the sphere that first flows into the guide flow path 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the sphere can be stopped (the sphere is stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a is one, but the number is not limited to this, and two or more balls may be stored. Furthermore, when a plurality of balls are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or may be arranged side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the outlet is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the outlet, a prize opening for paying out prize balls may be provided. Further, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls enter each prize hole may be different. More specifically, for example, six prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603a, ten prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603b, and prize balls are replaced in place of the out port 603c. However, 12 prize holes may be provided. As a result, it is possible to more interestingly observe when the sphere flows down the guide flow path 606 and to which winning port the guide flow path 607 enters. Further, a member such as a nail capable of changing the flow direction of the ball may be provided downstream of the guide flow path 606 or the guide flow path 607 so that the winning opening into which any ball enters becomes more random. . Accordingly, when the sphere flows into the storage device 600, it is possible to more interestingly observe the whereabouts of the sphere until the sphere enters any of the winning openings. In addition, by providing nails or the like, it is possible to set a ball entrance through which a clerk in the hall can easily enter a ball. Therefore, the exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the side of the hall.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the route when the player ejects the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (when right hitting) will be described. First, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a part of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the upstream side of the storage device 600. As shown in FIG. 10, the flow path (path) on the right side of the game board 13 is provided with a normal entrance 67 at its upper part. As described above, when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, the lottery for the normal symbol is executed. Then, when the normal symbol hits, in the second symbol display device 83, after the variation effect for showing the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is executed, the "○" symbol indicating the hit of the ordinary symbol is displayed. Then, based on the display of the "○" symbol on the second symbol display device 83, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second inlet 640 provided downstream of the ordinary inlet 67 is It is opened for a predetermined period (0.2 seconds×1 time, or 1 second×2 times). While the electric accessory 640 is open, the right-handed ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640. As mentioned above, during the probability change of the special symbol, or during the time saving of the ordinary symbol, the probability of hitting the ordinary symbol increases, the variation time of the ordinary symbol becomes shorter, and the opening period of the electric accessory becomes longer. The ball easily enters the 2 entrance port 640. Therefore, by performing a right strike, it is possible to receive a lottery for special symbols without reducing the number of balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11, a part of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 on the downstream side of the second entrance 640 will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, a storage device 600 is provided downstream of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Further, a first variable winning device 65 is provided downstream of the entrance of the storage device 600, and a second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65. (See FIG. 11). That is, among the spheres that have flowed down to the downstream of the path (flow path) on the right side by the player making a right hit, the sphere that has flowed down to the downstream without entering (entering) the storage device 600 is the first ball. It flows down toward the 1 variable winning device 65. Further, the balls that flow down toward the first variable winning device 65 and do not enter the first specific winning port 65a flow down toward the second variable winning device 650.

  In this way, the player can make the ball flow down toward the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 simply by making a right hit. Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), the player can make a ball into the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a by only making a right hit, and a large amount of You can win prize balls. In addition, a part of the spheres aimed at the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a enters the storage device 600. Then, as described above, in the special game state (big hit state), most of the balls that have entered the storage device 600 enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (see FIG. 9B). ), the player can obtain more prize balls during the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy the game with a big hit, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 12 to FIG. 16, specific operations of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 will be described. First, FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, the first specific winning port 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be openable in the front direction when viewed from the front. By opening the first specific winning opening 65a, the game ball flowing down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 is ready to enter the first specific winning opening 65a. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a has 1 to 11 rounds in the special game state (big hit state) and 13 to 15 rounds for a predetermined period (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls). It will be released). Then, when a ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a, 15 prize balls are paid out for each ball entered. Therefore, the player can obtain a large amount of prize balls.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 12B, the second specific winning opening 650 of the second variable winning device 650 can be buried inside the game board 13 by sliding toward the inner side in the front view. It is configured to be possible. As a result, the upper part of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, and the game balls flowing down the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 are ready to enter. As described above, the first specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period in 12 rounds of the special game state (big hit state) (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). Then, when a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, 15 prize balls are paid out for one ball entered. Therefore, the player can obtain a large amount of prize balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation of the ball that has flown down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 by right hitting and has reached the first specific winning opening 65a will be described. First, FIG. 13(a) is a diagram when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a in a state where the first specific winning opening 65a is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a closed, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. Since it is impossible to win, it falls into the space on the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a (see FIG. 13A). Then, the ball that has dropped to the front side of the first specific winning opening 65a flows down the flow path provided below the first specific winning opening 65a. Since the flow path below the first specific winning opening 65a is inclined toward the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball flows down toward the second specific winning opening 650a.

  On the other hand, when the ball reaches the first specific winning opening 65a with the first specific winning opening 65a opened, as shown in FIG. The opening portion of the 1 specific winning opening 65a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a. As shown in FIG. 13B, a ball discharge port 65c for discharging a ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the first variable winning device 65. By entering the ball into the ball discharge port 65c, the winning of the ball is detected, the prize ball is paid out, and the ball entered from the first specific winning port 65a into the first variable winning device 65. Can be discharged. In addition, since the bottom surface portion 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is inclined toward the ball outlet 65c, all the balls that enter the first specific winning port 65a enter the ball outlet 65c. You can make it a ball. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

Next, with reference to FIG. 14, the operation of the ball that has flown down the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 by right hitting and has reached the second specific winning port 650a will be described. First, FIG. 14A is a diagram when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a in a state where the second specific winning opening 650a is closed.

  As shown in FIG. 14A, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a closed, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Since it is not possible, the coin flows down the upper part of the second specific winning port 650a and drops to the left side of the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 14(a)). Then, the ball that has dropped to the left of the second specific winning opening 650a flows down to the outlet 66 (see FIG. 2) provided to the left of the second specific winning opening 650.

  On the other hand, when the ball reaches the second specific winning opening 650a with the second specific winning opening 650a opened, as shown in FIG. 2 The opening portion of the specific winning opening 650a is located. Therefore, the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. As shown in FIG. 14B, a ball discharge port 650c for discharging a ball to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650. By entering the ball into the ball outlet 650c, the winning of the ball is detected, the prize ball is paid out, and the ball entered from the second specific winning port 650a into the second variable winning device 650. Can be discharged. Since the bottom surface part 650b of the second variable winning device 650 is inclined toward the ball outlet 650c, all the balls that enter the second specific winning port 650a enter the ball outlet 650c. You can make it a ball. Therefore, all the balls can be reliably discharged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a structure downstream of the ball discharge port 650c of the second variable winning device 650 will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the special gaming state (big hit state), when the ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650, After the jackpot is finished, the special symbol is configured to shift to a probability changing state. The probability variation ball inlet 654 is provided in one of the two channels (the guide channel 652 and the guide channel 653) provided downstream of the ball outlet 650c (the guide channel 652). Has been. A flow path switching valve 650d for setting a flow path through which the sphere flows down is provided at the upper ends of the two flow paths. The flow passage switching valve 650d is provided to close one of the two flow passages so that the sphere cannot move, and open the other flow passage so that the sphere can move. Has been. The flow path switching valve 650d can be rotated about the switching shaft 650e as a rotation axis by driving the flow path solenoid 611 (see FIG. 17). The layout can be switched.

  15(a) and 15(b) are diagrams showing the operation of the sphere for each arrangement of the flow path switching valve 650d. First, FIG. 15A is a diagram showing a case where the flow passage switching valve 650d is arranged to close the guide flow passage 652. In the case of the arrangement in which the guide passage 652 is closed, the sphere that has entered the sphere discharge port 650c is blocked by the passage switching valve 650d and cannot proceed to the guide passage 652. Therefore, the sphere advances to the guide channel 653 (see FIG. 15A). A ball entrance 655 is usually provided downstream of the guide flow path 653. That is, while the arrangement shown in FIG. 15A is set, the ball cannot enter the certainty variation ball entrance 654. In the present embodiment, the flow path switching valve 650d is configured to be arranged as shown in FIG. 15A by turning off the flow path solenoid 611.

  On the other hand, FIG. 15B is a diagram showing a case where the flow passage switching valve 650d is arranged to close the guide flow passage 653. This arrangement can be realized by turning on (exciting) the flow path solenoid 611. In the case of the arrangement in which the guide passage 653 is closed, the sphere that has entered the sphere outlet 650c can proceed to the guide passage 652 without being blocked by the passage switching valve 650d. Therefore, the sphere advances to the guide flow path 653, and enters the positive variation ball entrance 654 provided downstream thereof.

  By entering the ball into the probability variation entrance ball opening 654, the special symbol is set to transition to the probability variation state at the end of the jackpot (at the start of the ending effect). Further, when the 12th round in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened is finished, a suggestion effect for suggesting to the player the game state after the jackpot is finished is executed in the subsequent rounds. That is, if the ball has entered the probability variation entrance ball opening 654 in the 12th round, in the 13th to 15th rounds, the display effect that suggests that the special symbol shifts to the probability variation state is the third symbol display device 81. Executed in. On the other hand, in the 12th round, if the ball has not entered the probability variation ball entrance 654, in the 13th to 15th rounds, the display effect suggesting that the normal symbol shifts to the time saving state is the third symbol display device 81. Executed in. In this way, by setting the round in which the large 2 specific winning opening 650a is opened to be the 12th round, a sufficient period for executing the suggestive production that suggests the gaming state after the completion of the jackpot is secured in the remaining rounds of the jackpot. be able to.

  In addition, as described above, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the entrance of the storage device 600, and therefore the ball to the storage device 600 is provided. The easier it is for the ball to flow in, the more difficult it is for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650. If it becomes difficult for the ball to reach the second variable winning device 650, it becomes difficult for the ball to enter the certainty variation ball entrance 654 in the 12th round of the big hit B. On the contrary, the more difficult it is for the ball to flow into the storage device 600, the easier it is for the second variable winning device 650 to reach the second variable winning device 650. Become. Therefore, by adjusting the ease with which the balls flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to change the rate of entering the positive variation ball entrance 654. Here, as a method of adjusting the easiness of flowing into the storage device 600, for example, adjusting a nail (see FIG. 11) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600 can be mentioned. That is, as the two nails provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 are adjusted so that they approach each other, it becomes more difficult for the sphere to pass between these two nails, and thus it becomes more difficult for the sphere to flow into the storage device 600. . Therefore, in the 12 rounds of the big hit B, the ball easily enters the probability variation ball opening 654, and thus it is possible to easily shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol. On the other hand, as the two nails provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 are adjusted so as to move away from each other, the ball easily passes between the two nails, and thus the ball easily flows into the storage device 600. . Therefore, in the 12th round of the big hit B, the sphere easily flows into the probability variation entry ball opening 654, and thus it is difficult to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided at the entrance of the storage device 600, it is possible to change the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 (proportion of the state of change in the special symbol), so that the pachinko machine can be operated according to the business policy of each hall. The specifications of the machine 10 can be changed.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the operation of the flow path switching valve 650d has the same pattern regardless of the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a is different between the big hit A and the big hit B. As a result, the big hit B is configured to be easier for the ball to enter the certainty variation entrance ball opening 654 than the big hit A in the special game state (big hit state). The relationship between the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d and the opening pattern of the second specific winning opening 650a will be described with reference to the subsequent FIG.

  FIG. 16A is a diagram showing a time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the passage switching valve 650d in the 12th round of the big hit A. The upper graph of FIG. 16(a) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (whether it is open or closed), and FIG. The lower diagram is a diagram showing the timing change of the flow passage switching valve 650d (whether the guide flow passage 652 on the left side downstream of the ball discharge port 650c is opened or the guide flow passage 653 on the right side is opened). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the 12th round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds), and the predetermined time is reached. When (for example, 0.2 seconds) has elapsed, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. Then, the closed state is maintained until 7 seconds elapse from the start of the 12th round, and the open state is set based on the elapse of 7 seconds. This open state continues until the 12th round ends. Specifically, 10 balls are inserted into the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, or set to an open state until 30 seconds elapse from the start of the 12th round. To be done. Then, when the 12th round is finished, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed. This closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next big round reaches 12 rounds.

  Further, in the 12th round of the jackpot A, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so as to close the guide flow path 653 provided on the right side thereof and allow the ball to flow down the left guide flow path 652 (FIG. 15). (See (b)). This state continues for 6.5 seconds after the 12th round is started, and based on the elapse of 6.5 seconds, the flow path switching valve 650d switches in the opposite direction. That is, the guide flow passage 652 is closed by the flow passage switching valve 650d, and the sphere is allowed to flow down the guide flow passage 653 provided on the right side of the flow passage switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15(a)). Since this switching operation ends in a period of 0.5 seconds or less, the flow path can be switched before the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened.

  Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the flow path switching valve 650d is maintained in that state (a state in which a ball can flow down the guide flow path 653). The state in which the sphere can flow down the guide flow path 653 is a big hit next, and continues until 11 rounds are completed. Then, based on the fact that 11 rounds are completed and the interval period of 3 seconds is reached, a state is set in which the sphere can flow down the guide flow path 652 (the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on). That is, most of the time the player is playing the game, the ball is allowed to pass through the guide flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d, and is provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d. The state in which the sphere can pass through the guide flow path 652 is limited to the interval period (3 seconds) set before the start of 12 rounds to 6.5 seconds after the start of 12 rounds. Only the period (9.5 seconds). Therefore, even if a fraudulent act of entering the ball into the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is performed in a state other than the 12th round of the special game state, the ball enters the positive variation entrance 654. Since it is possible to prevent (suppress) the sphere, it is possible to prevent (suppress) illegally acquiring the probability variation state of the special symbol.

  The timing of switching the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that the guide flow path 652 is switched to the open state at the start of the 12th round, or in the middle of the interval period set after the end of the 11th round (for example, after the interval starts). It may be configured to switch over (when 0.5 seconds has elapsed). As a result, the period in which the guide flow path 652 is opened can be shortened, so that the ball is illegally entered into the second variable winning device 650 while the second specific winning port 650a is closed. Even if it is made possible, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the ball from entering the certainty change entrance ball opening 654. That is, fraud can be prevented.

  Thus, in the 12th round of the big hit A, the period in which the guide flow passage 652 provided on the left side of the flow passage switching valve 650d is opened, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened. The opening pattern of the second specific winning a prize mouth (second large opening mouth) 650a is set so that it almost does not overlap with the period of time being played (only for 0.2 seconds immediately after 12 rounds are started). Therefore, in many cases of the big hit A, since the ball does not enter the probability variation ball entrance 654 during the special game state (during the big hit), it is difficult to set the special symbol to the probability variation state after the big hit ends.

  It should be noted that the reason why the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened within 0.2 seconds immediately after the start of the 12th round is to make it difficult to understand that the jackpot A is immediately after the start of the 12th round. Is. Although details will be described later with reference to FIG. 16( b ), in the jackpot B in which it is easy to enter the ball into the probability variation entrance 654, the second specific winning opening (the second large opening opening) is started immediately after the start of the 12th round. ) 650a is opened. Therefore, the jackpot A and the jackpot B are expected to be the jackpot B of this time by sharing the operation of the second specific winning opening (second big opening mouth) 650a immediately after the start of the 12th round. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 16( b ), a timing change between the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650 a and the passage switching valve 650 d in the 12th round of the big hit B will be described. The upper graph of FIG. 16(b) shows the time change of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (whether it is open or closed), and FIG. The lower diagram is a diagram showing the timing change of the flow passage switching valve 650d (whether the guide flow passage 652 on the left side downstream of the ball discharge port 650c is opened or the guide flow passage 653 on the right side is opened). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 16B, when the 12th round is started, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set to the open state. The open state is maintained until 5 seconds elapse from the start of the 12th round, and the closed state is set based on the elapse of 5 seconds. Even if 10 balls enter the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a before 5 seconds elapse, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is Will be closed. This closed state continues until the special game state (big hit state) ends and the next big round reaches 12 rounds.

  Further, as described above, the flow passage switching valve 650d is set to perform the same operation as the big hit A in the 12th round of the big hit B. That is, based on the start of the interval period set at the end of the eleventh round, the guide flow path 653 provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d is closed so that the ball can flow down the left guide flow path 652. (See FIG. 15B). Then, when 6.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the 12th round, the flow path switching valve 650d switches in the opposite direction. That is, the guide flow passage 652 is closed by the flow passage switching valve 650d, and the sphere is allowed to flow down the guide flow passage 653 provided on the right side of the flow passage switching valve 650d (see FIG. 15(a)). Then, after the direction of the flow path switching valve 650d is switched, the flow path switching valve 650d is maintained in that state (a state in which a ball can flow down the guide flow path 653).

  As described above, in the 12th round of the jackpot B, the period in which the guide flow passage 652 provided on the left side of the flow passage switching valve 650d is opened, and the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a are opened. The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set so as to overlap with the maximum period for 5 seconds. Therefore, in many cases of the big hit B, the ball can be put into the certainty change-in ball entrance 654 during the special game state (during the big hit), so that the special symbol is set to the certainty change state after the big hit ends. It will be easier.

  The opening pattern of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to this. The pattern may be arbitrarily set as long as it is possible to set a pattern in which a ball is hard to enter. Further, the switching pattern of the flow path switching valve 650d is not limited to the form of the present embodiment, and can be set arbitrarily. For example, the flow path switching valve 650d is set so that the balls can flow down the guide flow path 653 at the start of the 12th round (see FIG. 15A), and a predetermined time (for example, 6. The passage switching valve 650d may be set (see FIG. 15B) so that the sphere can flow down the guide passage 652 after 5 seconds).

Further, the number of rounds for opening the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is not limited to the 12th round, and may be set to any round. Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured to be opened in a plurality of rounds, for example, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a may be opened in the first round and the fifteenth round. It may be set to. As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of causing the ball to enter the probability variation entrance ball opening 654, so that after the jackpot B ends, the special symbol can be more easily changed to the probability variation state. Therefore, although the jackpot B is won, the ball cannot be inserted into the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, which reduces the motivation of the player for the game. It can be prevented (suppressed).

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description will be continued. A sticking space K1 for sticking a stamp or an identification label is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the sticker or the like stuck to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharging path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first outlet 71 is arranged below the first inlet 64.

  Further, the game board 13 is provided with an outlet 66. Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 601, 602, 650a and the outlets 603a to 603c are guided to an unillustrated ball discharge path through the outlet 66. On the game board 13, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a payout unit 93 as a unit. Also, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generating circuit and the like are installed as needed.

  The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 each include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

  Further, in the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (payout controller 111 and launch controller 112), a box base and a box cover are connected in an unopenable manner by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to extend over the box base and the box cover. The seal sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box side are closed. Cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing sticker, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

  The payout unit 93 is located at the uppermost part of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream side of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 17). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and the required number of balls is paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 17). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. In addition to a certain RAM 203, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are built in. In the main controller 110, by the MPU 201, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, the setting of the display on the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device. Run.

  Note that various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device only in one direction.

  First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18A, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as a part of the above-mentioned fixed value data, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, and a second per random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

  The first hit random number table 202a (not shown) is a data table in which a big hit determination value of a first hit random number counter C1 described later is stored. The details will be described later together with the description of the first per random number counter C1, but the value of the first per random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning is one of the determination values defined in the per first random number table 202a. When it matches with, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 18B) is a data table in which the judgment values for determining the big hit type are stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is the big hit type. , And the special symbol is defined in association with the type of entrance that triggered the lottery. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the starting winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on entering the first entrance 64) is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49". Is defined in association with the jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of the big hit A, most of the period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round is the induction provided on the right side of the flow path switching valve 650d. The flow path 653 is configured to be open (see FIG. 16A). Therefore, it becomes difficult to let the sphere flow down to the guide flow passage 652 provided on the left side of the flow passage switching valve 650d, so that the sphere is moved to the positive variation ball inlet 654 provided downstream of the guide flow passage 652. It becomes difficult to enter the ball. That is, in the case of the big hit A, after the big hit ends, it becomes difficult to shift to the special variation state of the special symbol.

  Further, the jackpot B is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "50 to 99" (see 202b2 of FIG. 18B). As described above, in the case of the big hit B, all of the period in which the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened in the 12th round is the induction provided on the left side of the flow path switching valve 650d. It is configured so as to overlap with the period when the flow channel 652 is open (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, while the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened, the ball can be inserted into the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, and the flow path switching valve 650d The sphere can be made to flow down to the guide flow channel 652 provided on the left side of the. Then, as described above, the positive variation inlet port 654 is provided downstream of the guide flow channel 652. Therefore, when it becomes the big hit B, after the big hit ends, it becomes easy to shift to the probability changing state of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the entry into the second entry slot 640), the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, The jackpot A is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 18B). Further, the jackpot B is defined in association with the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20 to 99”. That is, compared to the case where the special design 1 lottery results in a big hit, when the special design 2 lottery results in a big hit, the number of determination values for the big hit B increases. Therefore, the big hit B is more likely to be a big hit when the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery.

  As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is increased, the variation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when the ordinary symbol is hit It is set to be long (1 second×2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to enter the ball into the second entrance 640, it is easy to perform the lottery for the special symbol 2. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probability change state of the special symbol, the special symbol is likely to be a big hit, and when it is a big hit, the special symbol is likely to become a big hit B, and the special symbol is changed after the big hit. Since the jackpot B which tends to be in a state is easily repeated, the player can easily obtain a large amount of prize balls. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while strongly expecting the player to make a transition to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The second random number table 202c (see FIG. 18(c)) is a data table in which normal symbol hit determination values are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5-28" is stipulated as the judgment value for hitting the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C). Also, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, as a judgment value for hitting the normal symbol, "5-204" is defined (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4, which is obtained based on the ball passing through the normal entrance 67, and the second per random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a hit.

  The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (not shown) is a data table in which the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In the main control device 110, special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37, display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and display setting in the third symbol display device 81. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 19, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters, lottery for special symbols, lottery for ordinary symbols, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37, setting of display on the second symbol display device 83, and setting of display on the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 to perform the above.

  In order to select the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first per random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the, the stop type selection counter C3 used to select the stop type out of the special symbol, and the first initial value random number used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1. A counter CINI1 and a fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting a fluctuation pattern are used. Moreover, the random number counter C4 per second is used for the lottery of the normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for the initial value setting of the second per random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

  For example, each counter is updated at an interval of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a second entered ball corresponding to winning in the first entrance port 64, which is composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas) Special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning in the mouth 640 is provided respectively, and in each of these areas, at the timing of entering the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Together, the respective values of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and each of these areas is normally filled with spheres. The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored at the timing of passing through the ball entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399). It is configured to return to. Particularly, when the first per random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the per first random number counter C1.

  Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

  The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. Then, it is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Then, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit of the special symbol is set by the first per random number table 202a (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the per first random number counter C1 is When it matches the value of the random number which is a big hit set by the first hit random number table 202a, it is determined as a big hit of the special symbol. Further, the first random number table 202a is for a low probability of a special symbol (a period of being a low probability state of a special symbol), and at a high probability of a high probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol than at the time of that low probability (special. It is divided into two types, ie, a period for which the symbol has a high probability state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently. In this way, by changing the number of random numbers to be a jackpot, the probability of a jackpot is changed between when the special symbol has a low probability and when the special symbol has a high probability.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) determined to be a hit in each gaming state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, if the special symbol is in the probability changing state, in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which value of the first random number counter C1 acquired is "0 to 9". If it is determined and any one of "0 to 9", it is determined to be a big hit. Among the 400 possible values of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 399", the determination value that is a big hit is 10 of "0 to 9", so it is a big hit of the special symbol during the probability change of the special symbol. The probability of becoming is 1/40 (10/400). If the special symbol is in the low probability state, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first hit random number counter C1 is "200", and if "200", it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit. The possible value of the first random number counter C1 is 400 of "0 to 399", and the judgment value that is a big hit is only one of "200", so the special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol The probability of a big hit is 1/400.

  In the present embodiment, a big hit random number value stored in the low-probability first random number table and a big random number value stored in the high-probability first random number table. Then, the random numbers that are big jackpots are set so that the values do not overlap. Here, if there is a value that is always used as a random number value for jackpot regardless of the status of the pachinko machine 10, there is a risk that the random number value will be input from the outside and the jackpot will be apt to be fraudulently assigned. On the other hand, like the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability state of a special symbol or a low probability state of a special symbol), the random number value to be a big hit is changed. By doing so, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value that is a big hit for the special symbol, and thus it is possible to suppress fraud.

  The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol is a big hit, and increments one by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). After reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99), it returns to 0. The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, updated regularly (once in each of the timer interrupt processes in the present embodiment), and the special symbol 1 in the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a.

  Here, the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol If it is a random number that is off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the time when the special symbol is off.

  On the other hand, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on 37 is a special symbol big hit time. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a.

  Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, the special symbol 1 is selected by lottery, and in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is any of "0 to 49" is "big hit A". In addition, the special design 1 becomes a big hit by lottery, and the big hit type when the random number value is any of "50 to 99" is "big hit B". Further, the special symbol 2 is selected by lottery, and in the first hit type counter C2, the big hit type when the random number value is any of "0 to 19" is "big hit A". In addition, the special design 2 is a big hit by lottery, and the big hit type when the random number value is any of "20 to 99" is "big hit B".

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the types of jackpots are two types, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and one type may be provided, or two or more types may be provided. In addition, in the case where a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 1 and a big hit by the lottery of the special symbol 2, the same big hit type is selected with the same value of the first hit type counter C2. You may. With this configuration, the amount of data in the first type selection table 202b can be reduced, so that the capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

  The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines a rough display mode such as so-called short time out, long time out, normal reach, super reach, and the like. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the detailed symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once every time a main process (see FIG. 34) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. The variation pattern selection table 202d that stores a random number value that determines one variation time of the symbol variation from the value of the variation type counter CS1 (random number value) is provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 as described above. ing.

  In the variation pattern selection table 202d, for example, "variation (for long time)", "variation (for short time)", "variation normal reach", and "variation superreach" are defined as variation patterns for deviation. , "Normal reach" types and "Super reach" types are defined as variation patterns for jackpots. Then, from the various fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern table, a fluctuation pattern is selected according to the predicted lottery result and the predicted stop type (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

  The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second per random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second per random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically for each timer interrupt process, and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. , Is stored in the ordinary symbol storage area 203c of the RAM 203.

  Then, the value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is set by the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 18C) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number which is the hit set by the second hit random number table 202c, it is determined as the hit of the normal symbol. Further, the second random number table 202c is for a low probability of a normal symbol (a period in which the normal symbol is in a normal state) (see 202c1 of FIG. 18C), and a hit of a normal symbol from the low probability. High probability at high probability (period of time saving state of normal symbols, and period of probability variation state of special symbols) (see 202c2 of FIG. 18(c)) and divided into two types and included in each The number of random numbers to be a big hit is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers to be a hit, at low probability of normal symbols (normal state of normal symbols) and at high probability of normal symbols (time saving state of ordinary symbols), the probability of winning Is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 18(c), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random number values that hit the normal symbol, and the range is "5-28" (202c1 in FIG. 18(c)). reference). In this way, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 24, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/10".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 28”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds×1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a is released for "0.2 seconds×1 time", but is released. The time and the number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened for “0.5 seconds×2 times”.

  On the other hand, when there is a high probability of the ordinary symbol (during the time reduction of the ordinary symbol, and during the probability change of the special symbol), there are 200 random numbers that are the jackpots of the ordinary symbol, and the range is "5-204". . These random number values are stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C). In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random number values is 240, and the total number of random number values that are jackpots is 200. Therefore, the probability of being a jackpot of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

  When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second per-random number counter C4 is in the range of “5 to 204”, it is determined as a win, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 ends, the stop symbol (the second symbol) ), the symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened "1 second x 2 times". In this way, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as “30 seconds→3 seconds” as compared with the time of low probability of the ordinary symbol, and the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is further shortened. Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol hits, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is "1 second x 2 times". However, the opening time and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, “3 seconds×3 times” may be opened.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value=0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

  In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are performed according to the value of this counter or the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result on the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 stores a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I/O, etc. And a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

  It should be noted that the RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and data can be retained (backup) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

  When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer at the time of the power shutdown (including the occurrence of a power failure. The same applies to the following) and the value of each register. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on by eliminating power failure. The same applies to the following), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is returned to the state before power-off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 34) when the power is shut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is performed by the startup process when the power is turned on (see FIG. 33). The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to, the NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) as the power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Details of various flags and counters stored in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. RAM203, as shown in FIG. 20, special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c, special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d, special symbol 2 reserved sphere Number counter 203e, ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, probability variation setting flag 203h, probability variation passage counter 203i, winning number counter 203j, operation counter 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, probability variation valid flag 203o , A probability change valid timer 203p, a discharge number counter 203q, a time saving medium counter 203r, and a memory area 203z.

  The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area), and each of these areas has a first entrance entrance. The respective values of the first per random number counter C1 and the first per type counter C2, which are acquired based on winning in 64, are stored.

  More specifically, each value of the counters C1 to C3 is acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64 (start prize), and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first). Among the vacant areas from the 1st area to the reserved 4th area, the areas having smaller area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the reserved first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main controller 110, when the special symbols are selected by lottery, the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a are transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for special symbols is performed.

  When data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process of packing the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding second area to holding fourth area) into the holding area having the smaller area number by one (holding first area to holding third area) Done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a, data is shifted only for reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a only in that the counter values acquired for winning the second entrance 640 are stored respectively. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  The normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c, like the special symbol 1 holding sphere storing area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding sphere storing area 203b, has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth Area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

  More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). The vacant areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, like the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 202b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while maintaining the winning order. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  After that, in the main control device 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the reserved first area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is made.

  Incidentally, when the data is shifted from the reserved first area to the execution area, the reserved first area becomes empty, so that the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, like the case of the winning stored in another reserved area The shift processing of packing the data of No. 1 into the reserved area having the area number smaller by 1 is performed. Further, the data shift is also performed only for the reserved area in which the winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is a variable display of the first special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first entry port 64 (starting winning) (the first symbol). It is a counter that counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display performed on the three-symbol display device 81 up to a maximum of four times. This special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, the initial value is set to zero, each time a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 and the number of holding balls of variable display increases, up to a maximum value of 4 One is added (see S404 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 26).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variable display in the special symbol 1) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding sphere number command (see S211 in FIG. 26, S405 in FIG. 28). ). The reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the voice lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 holds the variable display held in the main control device 110 by the holding ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball count counter 203d is changed. The value of the sphere itself can be acquired. As a result, the number of spheres of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is actually held by the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, it can be corrected by the reserved ball number command received next.

  Note that the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the number of holding balls command, and the display holding device for notifying the number of holding balls to the display control device 114 every time the number of holding balls changes. Send the ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the holding sphere number pattern (holding symbol) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the holding sphere number notified by the display holding sphere number command.

  The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e is different from the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d in that the number of held spheres held is stored by winning in the second ball entrance 640. Since they are different, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is the maximum number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the sphere in the normal ball entrance 67. It is a counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and every time the ball passes through the normal entrance 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4. (See S704 in FIG. 31). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 30).

  When the ball passes through the normal entrance 67, if the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the ordinary symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c (S705 of FIG. 31). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (FIG. 31). S703: No).

  The probability variation flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current game state is a probability variation state of the special symbol (during the probability variation of the special symbol). If the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON, it indicates that the game state is a probability variation state of the special symbol, and if it is OFF, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, when the probability variation setting flag 203h described later is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game, this probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (see S1304 in FIG. 37). In addition, the probability variation flag 203g is a big hit by a lottery for special symbols, and is set to OFF when the start of the big hit is set. It should be noted that in the initialized state (that is, the state in which the pachinko machine 10 is powered on with the RAM erase switch 122 pressed down), the probability variation flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power shutdown occurs. In this case, the state immediately before the power interruption occurs is backed up.

  The probability variation setting flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the game state to the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the game state is set to the probability variation game state is determined by whether or not the game ball has entered the probability variation entry ball opening 654 during the special game state (big hit state). . When a game ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 654, the game ball is detected by a probability variation switch (not shown), and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412 in FIG. 38). On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF based on the probability variation flag 203g being set to ON (see S1305 in FIG. 37). The probability variation setting flag 203h is backed up when the power is turned off, and is set to the state immediately before the power is turned off when the power is restored (when the power is turned on). Further, it is set to OFF in the initialized state.

  If the probability variation setting flag 202h is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the probability variation switch has been passed before the power is cut off, and if it is determined that the probability variation setting flag is passed, the probability variation setting flag 203h is determined. May be configured to be officially turned on and returned. In this case, the determination as to whether or not the probability variation switch has been passed before the power is cut off can be determined based on whether the probability variation passage counter 203i, which will be described later, has a value greater than zero. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce damage to the amusement store side by discriminating an illegality in which only the probability variation setting flag 203h is rewritten to be on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation passage counter 203i is a counter for counting the number of game balls that have passed through the probability variation switch in one round in the jackpot state (in the present embodiment, the 12th round of the jackpot). In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not all the game balls that have flowed into the inside of the second variable winning a prize device 650 have been discharged by the total of the probability variation passage counter 203i and a discharge number counter 203q described later. This probability variation passage counter 203i is incremented by 1 and updated when the probability variation switch is passed (S1411 in FIG. 38). In addition, after the process of determining whether or not the number of game balls that have flowed into the second variable winning device 650 matches the number of discharged balls, the initial value is reset to "0" (FIG. 39). S1511). The value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is backed up when the power is cut off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, its value is reset to 0.

  The winning number counter 203j, in each round in the jackpot game, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second winning port of the second variable winning device 650). This is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the large opening 650a. Specifically, based on the fact that a winning ball (not shown) provided in each of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a detects the entry of a ball, it is incremented by 1 and updated. (S1403 of FIG. 38). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings in the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a (the value of the winning quantity counter 203j). ) And the number of discharged sheets (the total value of the discharged number counter 203q and the probability variation passage counter 203i) match, and then it is reset to the initial value “0”. The value of the winning number counter 203j is backed up when the power is turned off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to 0.

  As described above, in the first to eleventh rounds and the thirteenth to fifteenth rounds, only the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened. Specifically, the number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is counted. On the other hand, in the twelfth round, only the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened. The number of balls entering the large opening 650a is counted.

  In the present embodiment, when it is detected that a ball has entered either the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a, the winning is achieved. Although it is configured to add 1 to the value of the number counter 203j, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are respectively entered. A separate counter may be provided to count the number of spheres.

  The operation counter 203k is a counter for measuring (counting) the elapsed time after the guide flow passage 652 provided on the left side of the flow passage switching valve 650d is set to the open state (see FIG. 15B). . That is, the passage counter 611 is turned on, and the elapsed time after the ball is set in the state where the ball can enter the certainty variation ball inlet 654 is counted (counted) by the operation counter 203k. In the pachinko machine 10, the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excited) to rotate the flow path switching valve 650d clockwise around the switching shaft 650e as a rotation axis based on the completion of 11 rounds of the jackpot. The guide channel 652 is opened.

  In the operation counter 203k, a counter value corresponding to a period in which the flow path solenoid 611 is turned on (excited) is set at the end of the eleventh round. That is, a counter value corresponding to an interval period of 3 seconds before the start of the 12th round and a total of 9.5 seconds of 6.5 seconds after the start of the 12th round is set. On the other hand, in the process of S1409 of the winning process (see FIG. 38) executed by the MPU 2011 of the main controller 110, the value is decremented by 1 and updated. Further, based on the fact that the value of the operation counter 203k is determined to be 0, the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off. The value of the operation counter 203k is backed up even if the power is cut off. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is reset to 0 which is an initial value.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag indicating that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a are closed in one round. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is opened in one round. It has been set to the closed state from. When the remaining sphere timer flag 203m is set to ON, the remaining sphere timer 203n described later is incremented by 1 and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 39). The remaining ball timer 203n is a counter for determining the time after the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed, This is a counter for determining whether or not the time required for discharging the game balls that have flowed into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 has elapsed.

  The remaining ball timer 203n closes the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a after completion of one preset round (1 to 11 rounds, 13 to 15 rounds), or the second. It is necessary for the game ball that has flowed into the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to be discharged when the specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is closed (12 rounds). This is a counter for determining whether time has elapsed. In the present embodiment, the time required until the game balls that have won the first variable winning device 81 are discharged is 2 seconds, and thus corresponds to 3 seconds (2 seconds + 1 second) with a 1 second margin added. The counter value is set as the upper limit value of the remaining ball timer 203n. When the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is updated and reaches the upper limit (3 seconds), the first variable winning device 65 (1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds) or the second variable winning device 650. It is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes for (12 rounds) and the number of discharged prizes match (S1507 of FIG. 39). Then, when it is determined that the winning number and the discharging number do not match, an error command is set and the fact is notified. Therefore, it is possible to promptly inform that the ball clogging has occurred inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. Therefore, the ball is left in the second variable winning device 650 in the 12 rounds of jackpot, and a shock or the like is given at the start timing of the next 12 rounds of jackpot to let the ball enter the certainty variation ball entrance 654. It can suppress cheating.

  If the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting is made even if the ball enters the probability variation entrance slot 654. The flag 203h may not be set to ON. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the probability variation gaming state from being illegally given.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, either the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is switched from the open state to the closed state. When detected, the remaining ball timer 203n has started updating the counter value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, separate counters may be provided for the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

  The probability variation effective flag 203o is a flag for determining whether or not to validate the game ball when the game ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 654 after the flow path solenoid 611 is set to off. Is. When the probability variation valid flag 203o is set to ON, the sphere that has flown into the guide channel 652 (see FIG. 15B) is determined to be the probability variation ball because of the flow channel solenoid 611 being ON. It is shown that it is less than the time required to enter the mouth 654. That is, it indicates that the ball entering the certainty variation ball entrance 654 is a normal operation.

  The probability variation valid timer 203p is a counter for counting the time after the above-mentioned probability variation validity flag 203o is set to ON. The probability variation effective timer 203p can determine the period required to normally enter the probability variation entry ball opening 654 after the flow path solenoid 611 is turned off. In the present embodiment, the time required for the sphere that has flowed into the guide flow path 652 to enter the certainty variation entry ball opening 654 is 1 second. The upper limit value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is set to a counter value corresponding to 1.2 seconds added with a 0.2 second margin. If the ball enters the probability variation entrance slot 654 after the lapse of 1.2 seconds, it is highly likely that some fraudulent act has been performed, so the probability variation setting flag 203h is controlled not to be updated. ..

  As a result, in the state where the flow passage switching valve 650d closes the guide flow passage 652 (the state in which the sphere is not guided to the positive variation ball opening 654), the ball enters the positive variation ball opening 654 or the positive variation ball. From the downstream of the mouth 654, push up the game ball with a piano wire or the like to pass through the probability variation entrance ball opening 654, or erroneously detect that a ball has entered the probability variation entrance ball opening 654 by radio waves, etc. Can be suppressed.

  The discharged number counter 203q is a counter for counting the number of balls discharged from the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 in one round. The first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are each provided with a ball discharge port switch (not shown) for detecting the discharge of a ball. The ejected number counter 203q increments the value by 1 each time the ball ejection switch detects ejection of a ball (see S1503 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, after it is determined whether the number of balls that have entered the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 and the number of discharged balls match, the value of the discharged number counter 203q is the initial value. Is reset to 0 (S1511 in FIG. 39).

  The time saving counter 203r is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The time saving medium counter 203r is set to 100 when the probability variation setting flag is off at the end of the big hit (see S1307 in FIG. 37). That is, in the present embodiment, when the probability variation game state is not set after the jackpot game, the time saving state of 100 normal symbols is given.

  In the other memory area 203z, other data necessary for the game, a counter, a flag, etc. are set (stored).

  Returning to FIG. 17, the description will be continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input/output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol holding lamp 84, the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a is an axis. Is connected to a solenoid 209 including a large opening solenoid for driving to open and close to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory, and the MPU 201 sends various command and control signals to them via an input/output port 205. To send.

  Further, the input/output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including a switch group, a sensor group, and the like (not shown) and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115, and the MPU 201 is output from the various switches 208. Various processing is executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory and the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , I/O and the like are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the firing controller 112, etc. are connected to the input/output port 215. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not to the main control device 110.

  The firing control device 112 controls the ball firing unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 issues an instruction to fire a sphere, the sphere launching unit 112a has a launching strength corresponding to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet, which are not shown, and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, the touch handle 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated) on condition that the operation handle is not operated. The firing solenoid is excited according to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice in a voice output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs a light and a light in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) 227, and produces a variation (variation). It is for controlling the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and notice production. The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221 and fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

  An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed or at the time of super reach. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 or the situation of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and controls the display of the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control for displaying an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay is performed.

  The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and other various data and programs necessary for controlling the game.

  In the variation pattern selection table 222a, variation patterns of each variation pattern type (complete out-of-reach, out-of-reach, various types of reach, etc.) are set in counter values for selecting an unillustrated variation pattern. The voice lamp control device 113 selects a detailed fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110, the result of the judgment, and the acquired counter value for selection. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly adhering to rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode and the like from being frequently displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired early.

  Further, in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113, the winning information storage area 223a, the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b, the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c, the fluctuation start flag 223d, and the stop type selection flag 223e. At least a probability variation state flag 223f, a time saving state counter 223g, a big hit medium flag 223h, and an allowable time counter 223i are provided.

  The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and winning information is stored in each of these areas. Based on the information stored in the winning information storage area 223a, the voice lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result or the like of the reserved balls before the start of variation.

  The special symbol 1 reservation sphere number counter 223b, similarly to the special symbol 1 reservation sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110, the variable effect (variation display) performed on the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (the number of waiting times) of the variable effect pending in the main control device 110 up to a maximum of four times. That is, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the holding ball number command output from the main controller 110.

  As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b manages the holding ball number. It has become.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of balls to be held in the variable display is added by entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning), or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is displayed. When the number of holding balls is subtracted by executing, the holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 is acquired from the holding ball number command. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved sphere number counter 223b (see S1908 in FIG. 43). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b is updated according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so the special symbol 1 holding ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

  The value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b is used to display the reserved sphere number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b in response to receiving the holding ball number command, and also stores the special symbol 1 holding ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  In the display control device 114, when receiving this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the holding ball for the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that several symbols are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b is changed in value in synchronization with the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed in synchronization with the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of holding balls whose variable display is held.

  The special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c stores the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b on the basis of the holding sphere number command output from the main control unit 110 to the number of holding spheres corresponding to the second special symbol. However, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1902 in FIG. 43), and is turned off when the fluctuation display is set on the third symbol display device 81. (See S1902 in FIG. 43). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S1905 in FIG. 43), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2007 in FIG. 47). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (a big hit type in the case of a big hit) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The probability variation state flag 223f is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probability variation state of the special symbol. If the probability variation state flag 223f is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is a probability variation state of the special symbol, and if it is off, it is a low probability state of the special symbol. The probability variation state flag 223f is updated in accordance with the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). Depending on the state of the probability variation state flag 223f, it is determined whether or not the current state is the probability variation state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5(a)) displayed in the special symbol probability change state, or the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5(b)). Or whether to display.

  The time saving state counter 223g is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a time saving state of a normal symbol. If the time saving state counter 223g is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and if it is off, it is in the normal state of the normal symbol (low probability state). The time saving state counter 223g is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main controller 110 (see S1711 in FIG. 41 and S1910 in FIG. 43). According to the state of the time saving state counter 223g, it is determined whether or not the present time is the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 5(a)) displayed in the time saving state of the normal symbol, or the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5(b)). It is determined whether or not is displayed.

  The jackpot flag 223h is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the special gaming state (jackpot state). If this jackpot flag 223h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special game state (big hit state), and if it is off, a state other than the special game state (big hit state) (probably changed state of special symbols, normal) Indicates either the time saving state of the design or the normal state). This big hit flag 223h is set to ON when an opening command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1914 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to ON when the special game state (big hit state) is started. On the other hand, the jackpot flag 223h is set to OFF when the ending command is received from the main control device 110 (see S1917 in FIG. 43). That is, it is set to off when the special game state (big hit state) ends. A corresponding effect is set according to the state of the big hitting flag 223h. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 6A) displayed in the special game state (big hit state), or the left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A). (See) is displayed or not.

  The allowable time counter 223i is configured such that the sphere that has flown into the guide passage 606 or the guide passage 607 immediately before the state of the storage valve 607a is switched to any of the inlets (the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602). It is a counter for counting the time until the ball is entered (ball throwing time). By counting the ball removal period, when the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is more accurately determined whether or not the entering ball is a normal operation. be able to. The permissible time counter 233i is set with a counter value corresponding to 1 second each time an opening command or an ending command is received (see S1914 and S1917 in FIG. 43). Also, the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47), which is one of the main processes (see FIG. 42), is decremented by one each time (see S2015 in FIG. 47).

  As described above, when the storage valve 607a is closed, a ball enters the general winning opening 602 provided downstream of the storage valve 607a, or to the general winning opening 601 when the storage valve 607a is opened. A warning image (see FIG. 7(b)) is displayed when the sphere enters. However, when the sphere flows into the guide flow path 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a switches from the open state to the closed state, the ball enters the general winning opening 602 after the storage valve 607a switches to the closed state. There is a case. Similarly, when the sphere flows into the guide flow path 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a is switched from the closed state to the open state, the sphere enters the general winning opening 601 after the storage valve 607a is switched to the open state. It may be a ball. In order to treat these as a normal ball entry (not display a warning image), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 607a is switched, a predetermined period (1 second) is set for the allowable time counter 233i. Set the corresponding counter value. Then, until the one second set as the counter value elapses, when the ball enters the general winning opening 601 or the general winning opening 602, it is determined that the operation is normal (no warning image is displayed). Is configured.

  The winning number counter 223j is a counter for counting the number of times a ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in a big hit. The value of the prize number counter 223j is reset to 0 at the start of the big hit, and the value is set to 1 each time the prize information command corresponding to the ball to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is received in the big hit. Are added one by one (see S1944 in FIG. 45). As described above, in the present embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), the number of times the ball has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is configured to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See FIG. 6A). The winning number counter 223j is referred to in order to accurately update the number of winnings displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing the command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 43) of the voice lamp processing device 113 is executed, the first stored command is read out from the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area, and the command determination processing causes The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variable display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 (fluctuation) (Direction) and notice production are controlled.

  The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erase switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 V AC supplied from the outside, and 12 V voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, and motors, A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like as necessary.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22V. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs the voltage of 5 V which is the drive voltage of the control system for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of DC stable 24 V becomes less than 22 V. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data, and the payout controller 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The input side of the input port 238 is connected to the output side of the audio lamp controller 113, and the output side of the input port 238 is connected to the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. . The resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and the output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or the number of prize balls paid out in one special symbol jackpot is different. Since there are models having completely the same specifications, the display control device 114 is a common component to reduce the cost.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the power is turned on (including power recovery from a power failure. The same applies hereinafter), the MPU 231 can be reset by the power supply device 115. When the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is released. Is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Note that, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. Instead of storing the data, the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of achieving a large capacity with a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the character ROM 234 stores the control program and the like, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data consecutively arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is designated for reading the data of the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading out data that is not continuous, it takes a long time each time the data is read out. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow reading speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the commands constituting the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. To store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as will be described later, and data can be read and written at high speed, so that the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, it is possible to maintain high processing performance in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed in the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after releasing the system reset via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

  Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2 and further store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, the control program and the fixed value data are provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and, for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, in the NAND flash memory 234a, due to its nature, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data has been written) occur during data writing, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and reads and writes data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Convert the data address of.

  The ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 to generate various images.

  Further, since the ROM controller 234b analyzes a defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data block, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 cause the NAND flash memory 234a to have different defective data. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the block address position. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

  The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b includes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the designated address. Data is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, data for one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside or uses the MPU 231 or the image controller 237, for example, while using the other bank while keeping the data set in one bank. One page of data including data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is set to the other. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely small capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. In the NOR ROM 234d, among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, a program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 is first stored after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes the boot program after the system reset is released. This allows the display control device 114 to be in a state where various controls can be executed. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in the boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. It should be noted that the number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is set appropriately according to the specifications of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and also designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and adds the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. Specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address designated by the bus line 240 is the address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d, selects from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, all the control programs are not stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, but a predetermined number of commands from the first command to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that, in reading the data of the first page, it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data. There's a problem.

  When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. In this case, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address “0000H” from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after releasing the system reset in the boot program are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” in a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The fixed value data (for example, a display data table and a transfer data table described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b or the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. A predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a different bank from the buffer RAM 234c.

  Since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. The transfer program can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c again is unnecessary, and the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a in the program storage area 233a is transferred. It is programmed to set the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a causes the first predetermined storage area of the program storage area 233a. It is set to the address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various kinds of processing are executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount. It is programmed so as to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control programs are stored in the second program storage. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as the second predetermined address, an initialization process (see S2202 in FIG. 49) executed after the boot process (see S2201 in FIG. 49) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is completely executed by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

  Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and by using the third symbol display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

  As described above, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later transmitted from the MPU 231 and selects one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. While developing the image drawn in the buffer, by outputting the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing processing of the image for one frame and the display processing of the image for one frame for the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment). Parallel processing in.

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image previously developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in accordance with the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and gives the image controller 237 a drawing instruction. Therefore, the image controller 237 causes the image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored according to a new drawing instruction.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data necessary for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

  Here, the NAND flash memory facilitates increasing the capacity of the ROM, but has a slower reading speed than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Is configured. Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws an image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of images that are frequently displayed, and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 needs to draw from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed is used. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, it is possible to immediately draw the image and display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a configured by an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The MPU 231 gives an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237 according to a transfer instruction or transfer data information of a drawing list, and the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (final address of storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating which of the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 is to be transferred), and the start of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data source size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads out one block of data from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a. The image data stored in the RAM is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred to the storage source end address.

  As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. You can Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing processing, and as a result, the image drawing and the image drawing are performed by a necessary time. It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being delayed.

  Further, since the image controller 237 transfers the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and the third symbol display. The unused period for the display process on the device 81 can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during power-on, and at power-on the main image area 235a, rear image area 235c, character pattern area. In addition to 235e and an error message image area 235f being provided, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 from the time the power is turned on until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on variation image that displays a lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a variation effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2103 and S2104 in FIG. 48).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235b immediately after power-on. Then, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image on the third symbol display device. 81 to display.

  At this time, when the display variation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the variation start command, the display control device 114 causes the power-on main image On the display screen of, the power-on fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position toward the screen, and the power-on fluctuation image of the "x" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol, the fluctuation period. Display alternately and repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main control device 110, the lottery performed in the main control device 110 Judgment the result, if it is "a big hit of the special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after stopping the fluctuating effect, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is stopped after the fluctuating effect. Display for a certain period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instruct to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, a player or a person related to the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without any anxiety that the operation has stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. You can

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts its operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It is possible to immediately confirm that the operation is being performed, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from being deteriorated.

  Further, when the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player starts the game, and the entrance to the first entrance ball 64 or the second entrance 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, and the power-on variation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed on the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the variation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the power-on variation effect image is already resident in the power-on variation image area 235b, so the power-on is performed. When a ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 21, the description will be continued. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, the city, the sea, the sky, etc. are displayed. A right-hand navigation image (see FIG. 5A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as rear images.

  The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, the image data corresponding to the above-mentioned ten types of main symbols (see FIG. 4) with the numbers “0” to “9” being the third symbols are resident. As a result, when performing the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, and therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 is used. The variation production can be started quickly. Therefore, after the occurrence of the ball entering the first ball entrance 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, although the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state that is not performed.

  In addition, in the third symbol area 235d, as main symbols without numbers from "0" to "9", main symbols consisting of rear symbols such as a wooden box, characters such as rear symbols and planers, furoshiki, helmets, etc. The image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after one variable effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without the number as the third symbol is displayed in the demonstration effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and display control is performed by resident data corresponding to these characters in the character symbol area 235e. When changing the character design based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but rather in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading the image data that is resident in advance. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the character design can be changed immediately even if the NAND ROM flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

  The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control device 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even when the voice lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives the error command, it is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error from the viewpoints of preventing the player from cheating and protecting the player against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since image data corresponding to various error messages are previously resident in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114, based on the received error command, displays the error message of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance in the image area 235f, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. Accordingly, since it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234, even when the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after the error command is received. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated at any time, and includes at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

  The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

  Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 outputs the image data necessary for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area in which the image data is stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234 and transfers the read image data to the designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The image data transfer instruction is performed by the MPU 231 including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list that instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction simply by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, and therefore the processing load can be reduced.

  The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes the image of one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 into either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame of the frame buffer. While developing the image, while the image is being developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and together with the drive signal, to the third symbol display device 81. Then, by transmitting the image information, the process for displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  In this way, by providing the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as the frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer, and at the same time It is possible to read out the image for one frame previously developed from the other frame buffer and display the read image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are the drawing processing of the image for one frame. The MPU 231 alternately and designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds to complete.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. 223i, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in this program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control program stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81. By using, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table that describes the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one presentation displayed by the table and a transfer data table which defines transfer timing.

  These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. When all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 thereafter controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device. Using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

  Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110, and, for example, a variable effect and an opening effect. Display data tables corresponding to the round effect, ending effect, and demonstration effect are prepared.

  The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the fluctuating effect is started, if the stop type of the fluctuating effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the disengagement is finally stopped and displayed, while the stop type of the fluctuating effect is a big hit A and a big hit B. If either of the above, the stop symbols shown for each jackpot are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 is now in a special game state and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a that are normally closed are opened. The round effect is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player of notifying the player of the end of the special game state (big hit state).

  As described above, the demonstration effect is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variable effect due to the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after one variable effect is stopped. That is, the third symbol, which is the main symbol to which the numbers “0” to “9” are not added, is stopped and displayed, and only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the hall related person can recognize that the game is not being performed on the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to each of the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. As for the variable display data table which is the display data table for the variable effect, if there are 32 variable effect patterns to be set, one table for each variable effect pattern, 32 tables in total are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to an address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which an image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit. This is a detailed definition of the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame.

  For the drawing content, the type of the sprite is defined for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, and the semi-transparency are determined according to the type of the sprite. Drawing information for drawing the sprite on the third symbol display device 81, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

  The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 which should display the sprite. The magnifying power is information for designating a magnifying power with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the magnifying power. If the enlargement ratio is greater than 100%, the sprite is displayed in a larger size than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α blending information is information for identifying a known α blending coefficient used when performing a superimposing process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when the designated sprite is drawn.

  In the variable display data table, as one frame of drawing content defined corresponding to each address, one rear image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) And light in the image Drawing information for each sprite such as an effect that expresses the insertion of characters and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters is defined for each address. It should be noted that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the contents to be displayed in that frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the semitransparent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are set with respect to the passage of time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back surface type which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image. This rear surface type displays one of the rear surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected from the player (one of the “town stage”, the “empty stage”, and the “island stage”) or the rear surface A to Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, the back surface type also includes information that specifies which back surface image is to be displayed when specifying that a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as a drawing target. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified in accordance with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

  In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which only the back side type is defined as the drawing content of the back side image in the display data table, but instead of this, the back side type and the range of the back side image corresponding to the back side type The position information indicating whether or not should be displayed may be defined. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back surface image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time after the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 was displaying the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time after the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is the drawing of the image based on the information and the display data table indicating the elapsed time since the display of the back surface image in the range corresponding to the initial position according to the back surface type (or the third symbol display device 81). Display) may be any of the information indicating the elapsed time from the start of the display, and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back surface type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time after the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of the information indicating the elapsed time.

  The third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...) Has the symbol type offset information as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the variation until a predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Enter the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped with the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since each 3rd design is given a unique number, the variation design in the previous variation effect and the stop design according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110 are the 3rd design. It is possible to easily identify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information by managing the number attached to the symbol and displaying the offset information by the difference between the numbers assigned to the respective third symbols.

  Further, in the symbol offset information, the predetermined symbol is changed from the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect performed this time, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed. The time is set to be displayed. While the third symbol is being displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player, so during that time, the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one symbol offset information before is displayed. Even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted by switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variable effect that is being performed this time, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" that is the start address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22) is the data table. The “End” information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the rendering mode to be defined in the display data table. Is listed.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp controller 113 based on a command from the main controller 110 and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing processing for one frame is completed, and next, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, An image content to be drawn is specified and a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing content is specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, according to the command (for example, the display variation pattern command) transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110, or the like, The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231. ..

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated each time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, like a conventional pachinko machine, when the effect image is diversified, Since a large load is applied to the start-up and execution of a complicated and enormous program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, which may limit the diversification of controllable effect images. there were. On the other hand, in the present pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Further, as described above, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. It is possible to create, because in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting winning. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display content cannot be predicted because the display content changes on the spot based on the user's operation. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared for each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time on the basis that the pachinko machine 10 is a configuration that determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, it is resident in the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table. Transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the general-purpose video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal-use video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

  The transfer data table is associated with an address specified in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) at which transfer is to be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data table is set, and the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in the transfer data table in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data which means that is defined (corresponds to the address “0002H” in FIG. 23).

  The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address. Is included.

  It should be noted that, as in the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the last address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 23, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address “0000H” in which the “Start” information is described and the address in which the “End” information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table. Is listed.

  When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d to create a drawing list (see FIG. 24) described later. At the same time, the transfer data information of the predetermined sprite image data to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the created drawing list. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 23, when the pointer 233f becomes “0001H” or “0097H”, the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined at the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added to the drawing list and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, so it is determined that there is no transfer target image data for which transfer should be started, and it is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

  Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process.

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, When a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 displays the display data according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Therefore, the sprite image data used in the display data table is The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer target image data to be transferred at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image) on the third symbol display device 81. This simple image display flag 233c is provided after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , MPU 231 is turned on in the main process (see FIG. 48) executed (see S2105 in FIG. 48). Then, by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, when all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3705 in FIG. 59(b)).

  The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S2401 in FIG. 50B), and When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2408 of FIG. 50(b)) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 50B) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 50(b) S2409) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is performed so that various images are displayed in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed.

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S3601 in FIG. 59A), and the simple image display flag 233c is ON. Has resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 59B) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) for transferring the image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 24), which will be described later, in which the instruction contents of the image drawing for is written is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is displayed for each frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) describing the drawing instruction contents is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Is a buffer for storing. When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing Null data, which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  Then, the MPU 231 specifies the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f by one. If so (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 24) that describes the image drawing instruction content for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Accordingly, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when a predetermined sprite is drawn according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in this transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233f is an address at which the corresponding drawing content or the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is to be acquired from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in each of the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V-interruption process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interruption signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (see FIG. )), the pointer update processing (see S3305 in FIG. 58) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the drawing list described later. (See FIG. 24), transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite at which transfer should be started is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add information to the created drawing list.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Further, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. The image data which is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to read the image required for display from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transfer it to the normal video RAM 236. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructing 237.

  Here, details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 24, the back image used in the image of one frame, the third symbol (symbol 1, Design, 2,...), effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), character (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved ball count symbol 1, Reserved ball count symbol 2,..., Error For each sprite such as (pattern), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  In the detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite, information indicating a RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the magnification ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing is performed, composite processing with other sprites is performed according to α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to color information, and filtering processing is performed according to the information specified by the filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c designated by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 draws the content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of another image to be drawn (for example, a hold number that displays a hold sphere count symbol). And detailed warning information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing the image for one frame based on the image and the warning image for notifying the occurrence of an error, and the detailed information for each sprite. Create a drawing list by rearranging.

  Here, of the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. Is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 is dependent on the sprite type. Then, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  In addition, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) in the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the rearmost side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image of one frame, and draws detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Effect (effect 1, effect 2,...), Character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2,..., Reserved sphere number pattern 1, reserved sphere number pattern 2,..., Error pattern).

  The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

  When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e has transfer data information at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 acquires the transfer data information (the character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and the storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 displays an image from a predetermined area (area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets the time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 (see FIG. )), the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 each time (see S3307 in FIG. 56). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs it in accordance with the end of the effect. Performs various processes that should be performed.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i indicates that the image data corresponding to each sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S2102 in FIG. 48) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to “off” indicating that the storage states for all the sprites are not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 231. Be seen. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to "ON" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. In addition, the image data of other sprites that are to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as the one sprite are always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, the storage state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

  Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S3813 in FIG. 60). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the transfer target sprite is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S3814 in FIG. 60). The image controller 237 is caused to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is “ON”, the corresponding image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress the wasteful transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and it is possible to reduce the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c) (hereinafter, referred to as “drawing target buffer”). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information on the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

  As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process for developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information that has already been developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and the image is displayed to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when it is "1", it is set to "0". Done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. The drawing process is executed every time the drawing process (see FIG. 50B) is executed (see S3902 in FIG. 61).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of 1 is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. It

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. It After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating and designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 25 to 39. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, a main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and a timer that is started regularly (in this embodiment, at an interval of 2 msec). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of description, first, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described, and then the startup process. The main processing will be described.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a regular process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, a process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110 are read, the states of the switches are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first random type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, each of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 is incremented by 1, and the counter values thereof are maximum values (in the present embodiment, When each reaches 399, 99, 239), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203.

  Next, in addition to the processing for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the starting winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) to the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 26 to 28.

  After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through with the passage of the ball in the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. Gate passing processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31, respectively. After the through-gate passage processing is executed, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing that should be executed periodically is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. Note that the firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a and that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of firing. The main control unit 110 instructs the firing control unit 112 to launch a sphere when the sphere launch is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device. This is processing for controlling the variable display of the third symbol and the like performed at 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S201). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) is being displayed, and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  If the special symbol is not a big hit (S201: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 203e (holding number N2 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205), and is changed by calculation. The special symbol 2 reservation sphere number counter 203e which shows the value of reservation sphere number command (special figure 2 reservation sphere number command) is set (S206). The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e are extracted from the holding ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the RAM 223. The special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere number counter 223c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 reserved sphere number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

  On the other hand, in the process of S204, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e (N2) is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) Is acquired (S208), it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). By the processing of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d (N1) is decremented by 1 (S210). , A special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d value (N1) changed by calculation is set a holding sphere number command (special figure 1 holding sphere number command) (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved sphere number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process proceeds to S213.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. Yes (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time If has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the variable time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start processing is executed, based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b, the special symbol lottery is performed. Be seen. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit according to the value of the first random number counter C1, and in the case of a special symbol big hit, depending on the value of the first hit type counter C2. The jackpot A or the jackpot B is determined.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of the big hit A, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37. If the jackpot B is a big hit, the red LED is turned on, and if the jackpot is off, the green LED is turned on. It should be noted that the display of each LED is turned off when the next change display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the change is stopped.

  After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (this lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit (S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a jackpot for the special symbol (S216: Yes), a scenario for opening the specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the jackpot start is set (S218). The open scenario specifically indicates the setting of the open pattern of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a. That is, in the first to eleventh rounds and the thirteenth to the fifteenth rounds, the first specific winning opening (first opening) 65a is opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won). In this way, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set to be opened in a pattern according to the big hit type (see FIG. 16) in the 12th round. When the process of S218 ends, the notification counter corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S219), and the present process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, if the result of this lottery is out (S216: No),
It is determined whether or not the value of the hour/hour counter 203r is 1 or more (S220), and when it is determined that the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0) (S220: No), this process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving medium counter 203r is 1 or more (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving medium counter 203r is decremented by 1 (S221), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and special Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding sphere storage area 203b, a lottery for "special symbol jackpot" or "out of special symbol" (judgment determination) is performed, and firstly It is a process for determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol fluctuation start process, first, the first random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere storage area 203b. , The respective values of the stop type selection counter C3 and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S301).

  Next, it is determined whether the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302), and if it is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the high probability Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol jackpot is obtained from the first hit random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number values of 10 defined in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers "0 to 9" are set as the random numbers to be the big hits of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is equal to the random number value to be the hit. If you do, it is determined to be a jackpot of special symbols. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have the same determination value as a jackpot, but depending on whether the lottery is for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2. Different random number values may be used. With this configuration, the random number value that is determined to be out of the first special symbol is configured to be determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the big hit bias can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 have the same determination value as the jackpot, but the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 The number of determination values that are a big hit may be different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the jackpot probability different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher jackpot probability, the player Can make you expect big jackpots.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not on (that is, it is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol (low probability game state), Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability time, a lottery result of whether or not a special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As the random number value for the special symbol big hit, one of "200" is set, and when the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number value for this hit match, the special symbol big hit It is determined that When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S305.

  And the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S303 or S304, it is determined whether it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). , A display mode at the time of a big hit showing a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and a special symbol of two types (big hit) Of A and jackpot B), the jackpot type is determined.

  In the process of S306, the display mode (the lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B). Further, in order to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type on the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third until the big hit symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81. The variation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Note that, as described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

  The variation patterns defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, "variation (for long time)", "variation (for short time)", "variation normal reach", Various "outside super reach" and "outside special reach" are stipulated. In addition, as variation patterns for both jackpot A and jackpot B, various types of "common normal reach", "shared super reach", and "shared special reach" are defined, and various variation patterns for "big reach B" include "special reach". The "variable normal reach" types, "shared super reach" types, and "shared special reach" types are stipulated as the variation patterns for both common and out-of-range.

  On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S305: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the deviation symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, front/rear outreach, reach other than front/rear outreach, or complete outreach is set.

  Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 obtained in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, the stop type is set. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", reach other than front and rear deviation is set, and "98" is set. , 99”, the front/rear outreach is set.

  Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the variation time of the third symbol until the symbol stops in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the variation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. To decide.

  When the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the processing of S307 or the processing of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 34), these commands are sent to the voice lamp controller 113. Sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 28, the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the starting winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and it is determined whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. , Is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a holding process of the values when there is a start winning.

  When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere number counter 203d (holding number N1 of variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S403).

  Then, whether there is no prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) is 4 If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold The value (N1) of the sphere counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The number of reserved balls command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) described later executed by the MPU 201. , To the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and the extracted value is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

  After the number of reserved balls command is set in the process of S405, the values of the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are set. , The special symbol 1 holding sphere storing area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored in the first area of the empty holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area) (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in each process of S407 to S412, the same process as each process of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. The respective processes of S407 to S412 are different only in that a process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball entrance 640 is executed, and other processes are different from the respective processes of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When each processing of S407 to S412 is completed, the prefetch processing is executed (S413), and this processing is completed.

  Next, the prefetch processing (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the prefetching process (S413). The prefetching process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 28).

  In this prefetching process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501), and either the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is determined. However, if there is no new winning (S501: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), whether the game state at the start of fluctuation is the probability change state of the special symbol or not. It is determined (S502) and if the special symbol is in the probable variation state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process proceeds to S505.

  In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the special variation state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is obtained based on the first random number table for low probability (S504), and the process is S505. Transition to. In the process of S505, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which is the determination result of the big hit, is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30, a normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed on the second symbol display device 83 and the second entrance 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, now, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting (S601). As the normal symbol (second symbol) is hitting, the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is being displayed on the second symbol display device 83. It is included during the operation. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is being hit (S601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, if the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not hitting (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device. If the display mode of is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (holding number M of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value (M) of the normal symbol holding sphere number counter 203f (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the processing of S606, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved sphere storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the holding first area→execution area, the holding second area→holding first area, the holding third area→holding second area, the holding fourth area→holding third area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding sphere storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and when it is determined that the time saving state of the ordinary symbol is (S608: Yes), the present is now the jackpot of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not it is in progress (S609). As the big hit of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37, and the big symbol of the special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) is being displayed, and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. If the result of determination is that the special symbol is a big hit (S609: Yes), the process proceeds to S611. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, the lottery of the ordinary symbol is less likely to hit. This is to make it easier for the ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, during the special gaming state). That is, if it is easy to hit the normal symbol, the ball hit to the right easily enters the second winning opening 640, and thus the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. And the ball becomes hard to reach. Therefore, during the special gaming state (during the big hit state), the probability of hitting a normal symbol is prevented from increasing, and the ball is configured to easily reach the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. There is.

  In the process of S609, if it is not during the special symbol big hit (S609: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not during the special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, so is acquired by the process of S607. Based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", Normally it is determined that the design is off (see 202c2 in FIG. 18C).

  In the process of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S607 and the low value. Based on the second random number table for probability, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is won is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", It is usually determined that the design is off (see 202c1 in FIG. 18C).

  Next, the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S610 or S611 determines whether or not it is a hit of the normal symbol (S612), and when it is determined that it is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S612: Yes) , The display mode at the time of winning is set (S613). In the processing of S613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "○" is set to be lit up as the stop symbol (second symbol).

  Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (S614: Yes), the present is now a big hit of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not (S615). As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S615: Yes), the process proceeds to S617. In the present embodiment, during the big hit of the special symbol, in order to suppress the ball from entering the second entrance 640 as much as possible, when it hits the ordinary symbol, as in the low probability state of the ordinary symbol, The number of times and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a are set.

  In the process of S615, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S615: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol big hit, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol. The opening period of the electric accessory 640a associated with 640 is set to 1 second, the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S616), and the process proceeds to S619. In the process of S614, if the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S614: No), the process proceeds to S617. In the process of S617, the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbol, or because the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set. It is set to 0.2 seconds and the number of times of opening is set to 1 (S617), and the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S612, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S612: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set (S618). In the process of S618, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "x" is set to be displayed as a stopped symbol (second symbol) in a lit state. When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S619.

  In the process of S619, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S619: Yes), the variable display on the second symbol display device The variation time of is set to 3 seconds (S620), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the normal time saving state of the symbol (S619: No), the variation time of the variable display on the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S621), and this processing ends. In this way, except when the special symbol big hit, when the high probability of the normal symbol, compared to the low probability of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display is very short, "30 seconds → 3 seconds", further, Since the opening period of the second entrance 640 is extremely long, which is "0.2 seconds x 1 → 1 second x 2", the ball easily enters the second entrance 640.

  In the processing of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variable display being executed on the second symbol display device has elapsed ( S622). The variable time here is a time preset by the process of S620 or the process of S621 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device.

  In the processing of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S622, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, the lottery of the normal symbol is a win, and if the display mode is set by the process of S613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is a stop display (lighting display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set. On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbols is missed and the display mode is set by the processing in S618, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device. Is set as follows. By the process of S623, when the stop display is set, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 34) is executed next, the variable display in the second symbol display device ends. Then, in the display mode set in the processing of S613 or the processing of S618, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is the hit of the ordinary symbol. A determination is made (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this processing ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing in S625, the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is performed when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 34) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the opening number set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the current lottery result is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through-gate passage process (S107) is executed in the timer interruption process (see FIG. 25), and it is judged whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through-gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through-gate passage processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of a ball at the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interruption processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of times of variable display holding in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

  Whether the ball does not pass through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, the ball normally passes through the ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the number of reserved balls counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is stored in the empty holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. The data is stored in the first area (S705), and this processing ends. In the process of S705, the value of the ordinary symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set as the value, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, the NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. To do.

  Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout emission control device 111, and the information on occurrence of power interruption is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a startup process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the main control device 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, a wait process (1 second in the present embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (the peripheral control devices such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power-off was not normally completed, the processing is also shifted to S912 in this case.

  If the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is shut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in such a case also, the process proceeds to S912. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203, as described later in the process of S1014 of FIG. Instead of this RAM judgment value, the validity of the backup may be judged by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S910). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and is ready to start the payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S911, S911) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed at the time of executing the startup processing, the RAM initialization processing (S911, S912) is executed. In addition, the initialization processing (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like). .. In the RAM initialization processing (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is performed, the storage valve 607a is set to be closed (S913), and the process proceeds to S914.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal ( (S907: Yes), the power-off occurrence information is cleared while the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held (S908). Next, a payout return command at power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the game state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S914. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is ready to start the payout control of the game balls while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

  In the process of S914, a command (state command) for notifying the game state at the time of power restoration is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S914). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in a probability changing state, whether or not it is a time saving state of a normal symbol, the number of times of saving and saving of a normal symbol, and the like. A state command is generated according to the value of the hour/hour counter 203r and the state of the probability variation flag 203g, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can match the recognition of the game state. Therefore, even though the special symbol is in a low probability state, the right-hand navigation (see FIG. 5(a)) is displayed, or conversely, the player is in a state where the special symbol is in the probable change state, It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) is displayed when the right-handed is performed. That is, it is possible to match the game state with the effect to be executed.

  When the process of S914 ends, a production permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various productions (S915). Then, the interrupt is permitted (S916), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above startup process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a regular processing of a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25), output data such as a command stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each sub-side control device (peripheral device). The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 25) is determined, and if there is the winning detection information, it corresponds to the number of balls acquired to the payout control device 111. Send the prize ball command. In addition, the reserved symbol number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) and the start winning process (see FIG. 28) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variable display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Also, the opening command, the round number command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the change type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the big hit state, the big hit performance is executed or the Big hit control for opening or closing the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a of the first variable winning device 65 and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a of the second variable winning device 650 Processing is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, in each round of the jackpot state, according to the opening scenario set by the process of S217 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26), the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, And set closure. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening/closing process, the opening/closing control of the electric auditors is started when the opening/closing control start of the electric auditors is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30). The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S616 or the processing of S617 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

  Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the variation display according to the variation pattern, the first symbol display Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, until the variation time elapses after the variation is started, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. And turn on the green LED. If the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED. If the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, each time a main process is executed, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 so that the player can confirm the change of the LED lighting color, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In the first symbol display update process, in the first symbol display device 37, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27) ends. The variation display being executed is ended, and in the display mode set by the processes of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 27), the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display device 37. Display (lighting display).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S620 or the process of S621 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, the variable display is performed in which the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately turned on. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. The variable display is ended, and in the display mode set by the process of S613 or the process of S618 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 30), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( (Lit display).

  Next, based on the stored winning detection information, a winning information command setting process for notifying the voice lamp controller 113 of the winning information is executed (S1008). Based on the prize information command set by the prize information command setting process (S1008), the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a defect in the storage valve 607a. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the player is performing an irregular game (left-handed during a big hit state, left-handed in a special variation state of special symbols, etc.).

  When the process of S1008 ends, it is determined whether or not the power cut occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current main processing (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001 and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), during the remaining time until the predetermined time, that is, the execution timing of the next main processing, The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011 and S1012).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 and 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are respectively stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1012).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

  Further, in the processing of S1009, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 32 has been executed, the processing at the time of power shutdown after S1013 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power-off command indicating that the power is cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). And transmits (S1014). Then, the RAM judgment value is calculated, the value is stored (S1015), the access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the endless loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 203 that are backed up.

  The processing of S1009 is performed at the timing when the series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at S1001 to S1008 ends, or the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed, when returning from the power-off state, the processing is performed after the startup processing is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 similarly to the case where the process is initialized in the startup process. Therefore, even if the contents of the registers used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the stack pointer value is not saved in the power-off process, the stack pointer is not saved in the initial setting process (S901). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control processing (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 34), when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot and the first specific winning a prize. This is a process for opening or closing the mouth (first large opening) 65a and the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, the process of S218 or S220 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 26) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the process of S1101, if the big hit of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102).

  The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, the audio lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the opening command for display, the opening effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1102 ends, next, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 is set to open (S1103), and the present process ends. As described above, by opening the storage valve 607a, the balls that have entered the storage device 600 can flow down the guide flow path 607, so that the number of prize balls to be paid out is large (15). It becomes possible to enter a ball into 602 (see FIG. 9B).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is provided with the storage device 600, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, in the special game state, aiming at the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a or the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a in order to win the prize ball. A part of the filled sphere enters the storage device 600. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to the prize ball based on the ball entering the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, a general winning provided in the storage device 600. It is possible to make the player obtain a prize ball based on the entrance into the mouth (high-value winning hole) 602. Therefore, the number of prize balls that can be obtained from the start to the end of the jackpot can be increased, so that the player can enjoy playing the jackpot more enjoyably. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the jackpot is finished, a specially changed state of the special symbol or a time saving state of the ordinary symbol is given. As described above, in these states, the ball easily enters the second entrance 640, so the player tries to enter the ball into the second entrance 640 by right-handing. Yes (try to win the special symbol 2 lottery). Thereby, in many cases, the sphere can be flowed into the storage device 600 before the next big hit is started. Then, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state, so that the balls are stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a until the next big hit. Therefore, when the next big hit occurs and the storage valve 607a is opened, the stored balls flow down to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. That is, the player can obtain a large amount (15) of prize balls immediately after the jackpot is started. Therefore, in a situation in which the jackpot is won but the balls are exhausted, it is possible to secure the balls to play the jackpot game without newly requesting to lend the balls.

  In the process of S1101, if the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1104). As the jackpot of the special symbol, the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot of the special symbol (including during the jackpot game of the special symbol) is being displayed, and the special symbol. During the predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. In the process of S1104, if the special symbol big hit is not in progress (S1104: No), the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S1104 that the special symbol is in a big hit (S1104: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1105). When it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation for setting the operations of the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, the flow path switching valve 650d, etc. The setting process is executed (S1105), and this process ends.

  Here, the jackpot operation setting process (S1105) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the jackpot operation setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the newly-started jackpot is the 12th round (S1201), and it is not the 12th round (that is, 1 to 11 rounds and 13 to 15 rounds). (S1201: No), the opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that it is the twelfth round (S1201: Yes), the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a according to the jackpot type is read (S1203). Accordingly, in the case of the big hit A, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16A is executed, and in the case of the big hit B, the opening operation shown in FIG. 16B is executed. Next, the opening operation of the flow path solenoid 611 is set (S1202). That is, it is set so that the guiding flow path 652 is closed 6.5 seconds after the 12th round is started. Next, the opening operation of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a read by the processing of S1203 is set (S1205), and the processing proceeds to S1206.

  In the process of S1206 executed after the process of S1202 or S1205 is finished, a round number command indicating a newly started round is set (S1206), and the process is finished. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  In this way, since each operation of the first variable winning device 65 is set at the start of each round, even if an unexpected power interruption occurs during the jackpot game, the jackpot game ends midway. Such problems can be suppressed.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), is it the operation timing of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the flow path solenoid 611? It is determined (S1107). When it is determined that it is the operation timing in the process of S1107 (S1107: Yes), the corresponding solenoid is set to ON (S1108).

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1107, when it is determined that it is not the opening operation timing (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1108). Specifically, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is closed based on the completion of 15th round which is the final round of the big hit, and the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. When the waiting time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) for discharging the balls that have flowed into the interior of the game has elapsed, it is determined that the ending effect start timing. When it is determined by the process of S1108 that it is the ending effect start timing (S1108: Yes), the ending process is executed (S1109), and the present process is ended.

  Here, the details of the ending process (S1110) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the contents of this ending process (S1110). In the ending process (S1110), first, an ending command indicating the start of ending is set (S1301). The ending command set here is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp control in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1301 is completed, next, the storage valve 607a that was set to the open state at the start of the jackpot is set to the closed state (S1302). As described above, the closed state of the storage valve 607a continues until the next big hit. As a result, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), even if a ball is made to flow into the storage device 600, it is blocked by the storage valve 607a, so that the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is obtained. The ball cannot be made to flow down. That is, since the balls enter the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of prize balls, the merit of putting the balls into the storage device 600 can be reduced. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state (normal game state), by aiming at the storage device 600 at all times, an irregular game method in which the number of balls is increased only by paying out the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is fundamental. In a state other than the special game state (big jackpot state), the lottery for the special symbol can be performed to expect the jackpot to be played.

  As described above, the storage device 600 is configured such that one ball enters approximately three right-handed balls. The number of prize balls paid out when the player enters the general prize hole (small value prize hole) 601 is three. That is, even if the player hits the ball right in the normal state, it is difficult to perform the lottery for the special symbol, and the number of balls cannot be increased by paying out based on the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. This eliminates the merit of hitting right in the normal state, and allows the player to play a game aiming for a big hit by lottery of special symbols.

  Also, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), a part of the ball that has been right-handed enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. In the time saving state (that is, in a state where the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 provided on the right path of the game board 13 is easily opened), the ball holding is further improved by right-handing. Can be made. Therefore, even if the special symbol is changed to a certain state or the normal symbol becomes a time saving state and the state shifts to an advantageous state for the player, the number of balls held is gradually reduced, and it is in an advantageous state. It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the player cannot feel it. Therefore, in the probability change state of the special symbol or in the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, the player can continue the game without reducing the balls.

  It should be noted that the number of prize balls for the balls to enter the general prize hole (small value prize hole) 601 may be reduced (for example, the number of prize balls may be one). With this, in the probability changing state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the ordinary symbol, it is possible to more reliably prevent the payout amount from becoming too large and the number of balls to be held being excessive. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from being given to the hall. In addition, in the low probability state of the special symbol, and in the normal state of the ordinary symbol (that is, the state in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640), the merit of right-handing can be further reduced.

  When the process of S1302 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on (S1303). If it is determined that the flag is on, a ball is transferred to the probability variation ball entrance 654 in the 12th round of the jackpot. Since it means that the player has entered the ball, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON (S1304). As a result, after the jackpot is over, the special symbol shifts to the probability changing state. After the processing of S1304, the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to OFF (S1305), the status command including the information indicating that the probability variation status of the special symbol has been set is set (S1306), and this processing ends. ..

  On the other hand, in the process of S1303, when it is determined that the probability variation setting flag 203h is off (S1303: No), it means that the ball has not entered the probability variation entrance port 654 in the 12 rounds of the jackpot. In order to set the time saving period of 100 times the normal symbol after the jackpot, 100 is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203r (S1307). Then, a state command including information indicating that the time saving state has been set is set (S1308), and this processing ends. The status command set in the process of S1306 or S1308 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the state command, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, it is determined whether or not the probability variation setting flag 203h is on, and if it is on, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on. That is, the timing at which the probability variation flag 203g is turned on can be matched regardless of the timing at which the ball enters the probability variation entry ball opening 654. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player expecting to shift to the probability variation game state until the jackpot game is over. Furthermore, if the ball can be thrown into the probability variation entrance ball opening 654 during the special game state (during the jackpot state), the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the jackpot is finished. During the state), it is possible to make an interest in whether or not a ball enters the probability variation ball entrance 654.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: No), then a ball is thrown into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a (winning) or a certain change A winning process is executed to monitor the winning (winning) of the ball into the ball entrance 654 (S1111). Here, the winning process (S1112) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the contents of this winning process (S1111).

  In the winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not the round game is a set period (round valid period) (S1401). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a period from setting the opening of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a to the end of the interval period (3 seconds). If it is determined that the round is out of the valid period (S1401: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round is within the valid period (S1401: Yes), it is determined whether or not the ball has entered either the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a ( S1402). In the processing of S1402, when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: Yes), the winning number counter 203j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1403). , And the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not entered the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a (S1402: No), the processing of S1403 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S1404. And transition.

  In the process of S1404, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404). When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is 10 or more (S1404: Yes), the first specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 650a that is set to the open state is closed. Is set (S1406). After that, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1408. When the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON, it is determined that it is during the ball removal time for discharging the balls remaining inside the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650. it can.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1404, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203j is less than 10 (S1404: No), the round time (30 seconds in the present embodiment) which is a period until each round of the big hit ends. It is determined whether or not (second) has elapsed (S1405). In the process of S1405, when it is determined that the round time has elapsed (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1406. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, when it is determined that the round time has not elapsed (S1405: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

  In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the value of the motion counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408), and when it is determined that the value of the motion counter 203k is greater than 0 (S1408: Yes), The value of the motion counter 203k is updated by subtracting 1 (S1409), and then it is determined whether or not the player has entered the probability variation entrance 654 (whether or not the probability variation switch (not shown) has passed) (S1410). ). When it is determined that the sphere has passed the probability variation switch (S1410: Yes), the value of the probability variation passage counter 203i is updated by adding 1 (S1411), and the probability variation setting flag 203h is set to ON (S1412). The process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, in the process of S1410, when it is determined that the sphere does not pass through the probability change switch (S1410: No), the processes of S1411 and S1412 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1413.

  In the processing of S1413 executed after the processing of S1410 or S1412, it is determined whether or not the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413), and when it is determined that it is not 0 (S1413: No), this processing is directly terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S1413, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1413: Yes), the flow passage solenoid 611 is set to OFF to close the guide flow passage 652 (S1414), and the positive change effective. The flag 203o is set to ON (S1415), and this processing ends. The probability variation valid flag 203o is set to ON in the process of S1415, so that the sphere remaining in the guidance flow channel 652 remains the probability variation switch even after the flow channel switching valve 650d is switched and the guidance flow channel 652 is closed. When passing, the probability variation setting flag 203h can be set to ON (that is, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the big hit).

  In the process of S1408, when it is determined that the operation counter 203k is 0 (S1408: No), it is determined whether the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1416). Then, when it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203o is not on (that is, it is off) (S1416: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability variation valid flag 203o is on (S1416: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p (S1417). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is the upper limit value (1.2 s in the present embodiment) (S1418), and when the value is determined to be the upper limit value (S1418: Yes), the probability variation valid The flag 203o is set to off (S1419). Thereby, even if the passage of the probability variation switch is detected, the value of the probability variation setting flag 203h is controlled not to be updated. As described above, when the passage of the probability variation switch is detected after the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p reaches the upper limit value, there is a high possibility that the detection is due to some dishonest act. Therefore, by turning off the probability variation valid flag 203o, updating of the probability variation setting flag 203h is prohibited, and fraud is suppressed.

  When the process of S1419 ends, then the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is reset to 0 which is the initial value (S1420), and the present process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1418, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value (less than the upper limit value) (S1418: No), the process proceeds to S1410 described above.

  As a result, if the probability variation valid timer 203p is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variation switch, and thus the probability variation state of the special symbol can be set in consideration of the time of the ball brush. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time in which passage of the probability variation switch is determined to be valid, it is possible to prevent the sphere from being illegally passed through the probability variation switch and to be provided with the probability variation state of the special symbol.

  Returning to FIG. 35, the description will be continued. When the winning process (S1111) is executed, then, an abnormal process for detecting an abnormality that occurs during the special gaming state (big hit state) is executed (S1112), and this process is ended. Here, details of the abnormality processing (S1112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing this abnormality processing (S1112).

  In the abnormality processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether the round is in the valid period (S1501), and if it is determined that the round is not in the valid period (S1501: No), the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is within the round valid period (S1501: Yes), whether or not the ball has passed through the ball outlet switch provided in the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650. It is determined (S1502). When it is determined that the ball has passed through the ball discharge port switch (S1502: Yes), the value of the ball discharge number counter 203s is incremented by 1 and updated (S1503), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has not passed the ball outlet switch (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504), and when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer flag 203m is off (S1504: No), this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1504: Yes), it means that the ball is out of the ball, and the remaining ball timer 203n that counts the ball out period is incremented by one. And update (S1505). Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n after the update is the upper limit value (that is, whether 3 seconds have elapsed since the closing of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a was set). However, if it is determined that the upper limit value is not reached (3 seconds have not elapsed) (S1506: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1505, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), the number of discharged balls (the total value of the probability variation passage counter 203i and the discharged number counter 203q) is It is determined whether or not the number of winning prizes (the value of the winning number counter 203j) matches (S1507).

  When it is determined in the process of S1507 that the number of discharged balls and the number of winning balls match (S1507: Yes), the process proceeds to S1509. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of discharged balls and the number of winning balls do not match (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. The error command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control is performed. Sent to device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the error display (for example, the character of the winning number mismatch error is displayed) is set, and the output of the error signal is set to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from remaining illegally in the first variable winning device 65 and prevent the game ball from passing through the probability variation switch.

  In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to OFF (S1509), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to 0 which is an initial value (S1510). After that, the winning number counter 203j, the discharging number counter 203q, and the probability variation passage counter 203i are reset to their initial values (S1511), and this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the winning information command setting process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. As described above, the prize information command setting process (S1008) is a process for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the passing state of a ball to various prize openings (ball entrances).

  In the prize information command setting process, first, the prize detection information stored in the switch reading process (S101) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 25) is read (S1601). Then, it is determined whether or not there is new winning detection information (whether there is a new winning for any of the entrances) (S1602), and if there is no new winning detection information (S1603), it remains as it is. This process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1602, when it is determined that new winning detection information is present (S1602: Yes), the winning entrance (winning hole) in which the winning (winning) is detected according to the new winning detection information. The winning information command including the information of is set (S1603). This winning information command is composed of, for example, 2 bytes, and each winning bit, out opening, etc. are associated with each bit of 2 bytes. Then, the bit corresponding to the winning opening (winning entrance) that detects the winning (winning) of the ball is set to 1, and the bit corresponding to the winning opening (winning entrance) where the ball is not entered is 0. After being set, it is output as a winning information command. When the processing of S1603 ends, the stored winning detection information is cleared (S1604), and the present processing ends.

  The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the prize information command, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not there is a defect in the intellectual storage device 600, whether the player is playing an irregular game, or the like, in accordance with the prize information command. Then, when a defect or the like has occurred, a display error command corresponding to the type of the defect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display error command, the error is notified in the third symbol display device 81.

<Regarding the control process of the voice lamp control device according to the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 47. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a startup processing that is started when the power is turned on and a main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

  First, with reference to FIG. 41, a startup process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this startup processing. This startup process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process accompanying power-on is executed (S1701). Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing in progress flag is turned on, the power-up processing of S1816 is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called “instantaneous stop”) in the current startup processing (see FIG. 42). ) Is started during the execution of () is determined (S1702). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 42, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S1813 in FIG. 42), the power-off process of S1816 is executed. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is executed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process in S1816 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process in progress flag.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is off (S1702: No), the current startup processing is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure has occurred, and the power-off in S1816 is performed. It is started after completing the execution of the process, or is started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) only on the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703).

  The confirmation of the data destruction of the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1706. Therefore, it is possible to check the data stored in the specific area, and if the data is “55AAh”, there is no data destruction in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not “55AAh”, it is possible to confirm the data destruction in the RAM 223. When the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1703: Yes), the process proceeds to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1703: No), the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword “55AAh” is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to power shutdown). Then, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1703: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1704. On the other hand, the startup process of this time is started after the momentary power failure occurs and after the execution of the power-off process of S1516 is completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like. If it is started due to the trouble, since the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1703: No), and the process proceeds to S1708.

  If the power-off processing in progress flag is on (S1702: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after the momentary power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off processing of S1816, the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. The MPU 221 has been reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct. Therefore, in such a case, control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1704 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S1704, the entire storage area of the RAM 223 is checked (S1704). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is "0FFh". If "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” after “0FFh”. By this read/write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

  If the read/write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1705: Yes), the keyword “55AAh” is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1706). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data destruction in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if a read/write check abnormality is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1705: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1707), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You can

  In the process of S1708, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S1708). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1816 is executed (see S1815 in FIG. 42). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1816 is executed. Therefore, the process of S1708 with the power-off flag turned on is that the startup process of this time is instantaneous. This is the case after the power failure has occurred and is started in the state where the execution of the power-off processing in S1816 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1708: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1709), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710), and then the interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1711), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110.

  On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1708 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the startup process of this time is started after the power has been completely cut off, for example, and therefore the process of S1704 to S1706 is performed. This is a case where processing has been reached or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset by noise or the like and started (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1708: No), the process of clearing the work area of the RAM 223, S1709, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1710, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1710). Next, the probability variation state flag 223f and the probability variation state counter 223g are updated according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110 (S1711), interrupt permission is set (S1712), and the main processing is performed. Transition. By updating the probability variation state flag 223f and the probability variation state counter 223g based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, the effect can be appropriately executed according to the game state.

  It should be noted that the clear processing of S1709 is skipped because all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1704 when the processing of S1708 is reached through the processing of S1704 to S1706. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared. This is because the control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a main process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup process of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S1801 this time has been executed (S1801), 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S1801: No), the process proceeds to S1811 without performing the processes of S1802 to S1810. In the process of S1801, the process of determining whether or not 1 msec has elapsed is mainly the process related to display (effect) in S1802 to S1810, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). It is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1811 and the variable display setting process of S1812 in a short cycle. By executing the process of S1811 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S1812 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process is executed. Based on the above, it is possible to make the setting related to the variation effect without delay.

  If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S1801 (S1801: Yes), first, the various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1803 to S1812 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1802). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1808 described later (S1803), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1804). The power-on notification processing is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Be seen. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that the power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the power-on notification process is not performed and the process proceeds to S1805.

  In the process of S1805, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the retained quantity display update process is executed (S1806). In the customer waiting production process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the setting is controlled as a command. Device 114. In the number-of-holds display updating process, a process of turning on a holding lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 number of holding balls counter 223b is performed.

  Thereafter, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S1807). This frame button input monitoring/production process corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed by monitoring the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the production effect is monitored. It is a process of setting to produce an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring/effect process is completed, the ramp edit process is executed (S1808), and then the sound edit/output process is executed (S1809). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination portions 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing/output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the processing of S1809, the liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S1810). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, the time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variable pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp edit process of S1808 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound edit/output process of S1809 is also executed in a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1811). Details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the process proceeds to S1812. In the process of S1812, the variable display setting process is executed (S1812). In the variable display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the variable display setting process ends, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1813). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1815), and the power-off process is executed (S1816). After the power-off process is executed, the power-off process in progress flag is turned off (S1817), and then the process is infinitely looped. In the power-off process, the generation of the interrupt process is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the information about the occurrence of power failure is also deleted.

  On the other hand, if the power cut occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1813 (S1813: No), it is determined whether the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1814), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1814: No), the process returns to S1801 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 has been destroyed (S1814: Yes), the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the main process is not executed, and thereafter, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and thus can call a store clerk or the like in the hall and request the pachinko machine 10 to be repaired. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the command determination processing (S1811) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing (S1811). This command determination processing (S1811) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is determined. This is processing for.

  In the command determination process, first, of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not (S1901). When the fluctuation pattern command is received (S1901: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S1902), and the fluctuation pattern type is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S1903). Return to main processing. The fluctuation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of variation effect and its variation pattern type.

  On the other hand, if the variation pattern command has not been received (S1901: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1904). When the stop type command is received (S1904: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1905), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1906), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 47) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the change effect stop type.

  On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1904: No), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1907). When the reserved ball count command is received (S1907: Yes), it is determined whether the received reserved ball count command is the special map 1 reserved ball count command or the special map 2 reserved ball count command. , The value contained in the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 (the number of times N1 of variable display holding of the variable display in the special symbol), or the special symbol 2 holding ball of the main control device 110 The value of the number counter 203e (the number N2 of holdings of the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1908). In addition, in the processing of S1908, the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c that have been updated are set to the display holding sphere number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the respective values. After the processing of S1908 ends, the processing returns to the main processing.

  Here, the reserved ball number command is from the main controller 110 when the ball wins the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640 (start prize), or when the special symbol lottery is performed. Since it is transmitted, every time the start winning is detected, or every time the special symbol is selected, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball of the voice lamp control device 113 are processed by the process of S1908. The value of the number counter 223c can be adjusted to the values of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. Therefore, due to the influence of noise, the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol of the main control device 110. Even if the value deviates from the value of the 2 reserved sphere counter 203e, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 reserved sphere number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of the detection of the start winning or the lottery of the special symbol. Can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding sphere counter 203d or the special symbol 2 holding sphere counter 203e of the main controller 110. In addition, when the process of S1908 is executed, the display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the values of the updated special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c. Is set. Thereby, in the display control device 114, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of reserved balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1907, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls command has not been received (S1907: No), it is then determined whether the status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1909). Then, when the status command is received (S1909: Yes), the probability variation status flag 203f and the time saving status counter 203g are updated according to the gaming status notified by the status command (S1910), and this processing ends. .

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1909, when it is determined that the status command has not been received (S1909: No), it is then determined whether the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1911). When the winning information command is received (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not the winning is a normal winning based on the winning information command, and if there is a possibility of malfunction or fraud, an error is notified. The error notification process for executing is executed (S1912), and this process is ended.

  on the other hand. In the processing of S1911, if it is determined that the winning information command is not received (S1911: No), then it is determined whether the opening command is received (S1913), and if the opening command is received ( (S1913: Yes), the jackpot flag 223h is set to ON, and the counter value (1000) corresponding to 1 second is set to the value of the allowable time counter 223i (S1914). Then, the opening command for display is set (S1915), and this processing ends. The display opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display opening command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an opening effect for notifying the start of the big hit.

  In the processing of S1913, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S1913: No), it is then determined whether the ending command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1916). When it is determined that the ending command has been received in the processing of S1916 (S1916: Yes), the big hit medium flag 223h is set to OFF, and the counter value corresponding to the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 1 second (1000). Is set (S1917), the ending command for display is set (S1918), and this processing ends. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. Upon receiving the display ending command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an ending effect for notifying the end of the big hit.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1916, if the ending command has not been received (S1911: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the processing according to the received command is executed (S1919). ), and returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed controlled. The command is set to be transmitted to the device 114.

  Next, the details of the error notification process (S1912) executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. As described above, this error notification process is a process for notifying an error when there is a possibility of malfunction or fraud. FIG. 46 is a flow chart showing this error notification processing (S1912).

  In the error notification process (S1912), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 223h is ON (S1931), and if it is ON (S1931: Yes), the winning information notified by the received winning information command is included. It is determined whether or not the winning information for the first entrance 64 is included (S1932). Then, when it is determined that the winning information for the first entrance 64 is included (S1932: Yes), the player left-hands while the jackpot is in effect, resulting in the first entrance 64. Means that a ball has entered. That is, the player is performing a game method (how to hit) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a despite the special game state (big hit state). Means that the person is losing. Therefore, in order to allow the player to win the prize ball in the special game state (big hit state), the display error command corresponding to the left-handed warning image (see FIG. 7A) is set (S1933), and the processing is performed. To S1934.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, the left strike warning image (FIG. 7A) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by receiving the display rear image change command. This left-handed warning image (FIG. 7A) can prompt the player who is left-handed in the special game state (big hit state) to make a right-handed hit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from losing, and to obtain the prize ball more reliably.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1932, when it is determined that the winning information command does not include the winning information corresponding to the entry into the first entrance 64 (S1932: No), the processing of S1933 is skipped and the processing is executed. To S1934.

  In the process of S1934, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 (S1934), and if the counter value is 0 (S1934: Yes), a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a during the big hit. If there is a hit, the hit notification processing is executed (S1935), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1934: No), the pitching period (1 second) after the storage valve 607a is set to the open state is set. Since it means that the time has not elapsed, the process of S1935 is skipped and this process is ended. That is, when a sphere that has flown in (progressed) into the guide flow path 606 immediately before the storage valve 607a is opened enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 during the pitching period, there is a problem. It is prevented from being judged.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1931, when it is determined that the mid-big hit flag 223h is not on (off) (S1931: No), it is determined whether the value of the allowable time counter 233i is 0 (S1936), When it is determined to be 0 (S1936: Yes), in the normal time (either the specially changed state of the special symbol, the time saving state of the normal symbol, or the normal state), the storage valve 607a is informed when a malfunction occurs. The normal notification processing for performing the above is executed (S1937), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S1936: No), the ball is blown after the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state based on the end of the big hit. Since it means that the period (1 second) has not elapsed, the process of S1937 is skipped, and this process is ended. That is, when a ball that has flown (progressed) into the guide flow path 607 immediately before the storage valve 607a is closed enters the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 during the pitching period, there is a problem. It is prevented from being judged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the details of the hit notification processing (S1935) for giving notification when a malfunction occurs in the storage valve 607a during a big hit will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the hit notification processing (S1935).

  In the winning notification process (S1935), first, in the winning information command determined to be received in the process of S1911 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43), the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is entered. It is determined whether or not the corresponding winning information is included (S1941). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1941: Yes), the storing valve 607a should be set to the open state even during the big hit. Regardless, it means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 provided downstream of the guide flow path 606. That is, the storage valve 607a is no longer opened due to a failure of the storage valve 607a, and the state in which the sphere is stored above the storage valve 607a continues, and as a result, the sphere is guided to the guide flow path 606. There is a nature. Therefore, in this case, the display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1942), and this processing is ended.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7(b)) for notifying that the storage valve 607a is defective in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display error command is displayed. Is displayed.

  Although the sphere that has flowed into the guide flow path 606 may also enter the out port 603a arranged on the left side of the general winning opening 601 in the storage device 600, The corresponding winning information is not a target for determining whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because a small proportion of the balls that flow down to the outflow port 603a out of the balls that flow into the guide flow path 606, and most of them enter the general winning port (small value winning port) 601, and the big hit. This is because a large number of spheres flow into the storage device 600, and thus it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a malfunction has occurred by monitoring the general winning a prize opening (small value winning a prize opening) 601. Further, by determining only the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601, it is not necessary to perform the process of determining whether or not the player entered the out opening 603a. Therefore, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the processing of S1941, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1941: No), then the received winning information command is It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry into the winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included (S1943), and the winning corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 If the information is included (S1943: Yes), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the winning number counter 223j (S1944). Then, in order to update the image in the big hit in accordance with the value of the updated winning number counter 233j, the display rear image change command is set (S1945).

  The display rear image change command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. , To the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, the display content of the winning number display area MA in the third symbol display device 81 is updated by receiving this display back image change command. More specifically, after the image in which the number of times the player has entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 (the number of EXTRA BONUS) shown in FIG. 6B is displayed for a certain period of time, the image is updated. The image shown in FIG. 6(a) corresponding to the number of subsequent ball inputs is displayed. By displaying the number of winnings for the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the jackpot in the winning number display area MA, it is possible to hit the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a in the big hit. Apart from this, the player can be made aware of the number of times a prize ball has been won. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with the expectation that the number of times of entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 will increase. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine that a failure has occurred in the storage valve 604a when the ball entry information corresponding to the ball entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included. However, the display error command may be set even when the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the entry into the outlet 603a. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and surely determine that a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

  Next, referring to FIG. 46, in order to notify when a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a in a normal time (either a special variation state of a special symbol, a time saving state of a normal symbol, or a normal state). The normal notification process will be described. In this normal time notification process (S1937), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation state flag 223f is on (S1951), and if it is determined not to be on (S1951), the current state is not the special symbol probability variation state (S1951). Since it means a low probability state of the special symbol), it is then determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 (S1952). In the process of S1952, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is 0 (S1952: No), it is neither the probability variation state of the special symbol at present nor the time saving state of the normal symbol (which is the normal state). means.

  In this case, in order to determine whether or not the player is making a right hit, and whether or not there is a problem in the operation of the storage valve 607a, first, the general winning a prize (large value It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the winning in the winning opening) 602 is included (S1953). When it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the winning in the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 is included (S1953: Yes), the ball is not in the special game state (big hit state). Is flowing downstream from the position where it should be closed by the storage valve 607a. That is, it is highly possible that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed or that the player has entered the ball into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by an illegal method. Therefore, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1954), and this processing is ended.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7(b)) for notifying that the storage valve 607a is defective in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display error command is displayed. Is displayed.

  It should be noted that the spheres that have flown into the guide flow path 607 while the storage valve 607a is still open due to a malfunction are the outlets 603b arranged on the left and right of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. , 603c may be entered, but the winning information corresponding to the entry into the outlets 603b, 603c is not a target for determining whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 607a. This is because a small percentage of the spheres that flow down to the outlets 603b and 603c out of the spheres that flow into the guide flow path 607, and most of the spheres enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. This is because it is possible to sufficiently determine whether or not a malfunction has occurred by monitoring the general winning a prize opening (large value winning a prize opening) 602. Further, by determining only the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, it is not necessary to perform the processing of determining whether or not the player has entered the out outlets 603b and 603c. Since it is improved, the processing load of the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In addition, in the processing of S1953, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included in the winning information command (S1953: No), then the general winning It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entry into the mouth (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955), and if it is determined that the winning information is not included, the present process is ended. .

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included in the winning information command (S1955: Yes), in a normal time (probably changed state of the special symbol, It means that the player is making a right-handed stroke, regardless of the time saving state of the normal symbol, and the normal state). In other words, it means that it is difficult for the player to enter the ball into the second entrance 640, and the player is playing the game with a game method in which the chance of receiving the special symbol lottery is small. Therefore, in this case, by displaying a right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) that prompts the player to aim the first entrance 64 by left-handedly and play the game, It is possible to prevent the person from losing and receive a lottery for the special symbol 1.

  When it is determined in the processing of S1951 that the probability variation state flag 223f is ON (S1951: Yes), or when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 223g is larger than 0 in the processing of S1952 (S1952: Yes), It is determined whether or not the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to a ball entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (S1957). Then, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1957: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1957, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the winning in the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is included (S1957: Yes), it is not the special gaming state (big hit state). Nevertheless, it means that the ball is flowing down to the downstream side of the storage valve 607a. That is, it is possible that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed or the player illegally put the ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with the storage valve 607a closed. high. Therefore, in this case, the display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1958), and this processing is ended.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7(b)) for notifying that the storage valve 607a is defective in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display error command is displayed. Is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine that a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 604a when the entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included. However, the display error command may be set even when the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to a ball entering the outlets 603b and 603c. As a result, it is possible to more quickly and surely determine that a malfunction has occurred in the storage valve 607a.

  Next, the variable display setting process (S1812) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the variable display setting process (S1812). This fluctuation display setting process (S1812) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the fluctuation effect on the third symbol display device 81, The display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S2001). If it is determined that the variation start flag 223d is not on (that is, it is off) (S2001: No), it means that the variation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus the processing of S2006 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2001: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2002), and then, in the processing of S1903 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 43), the fluctuation pattern The variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2003).

  Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a variation pattern command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2004). In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for display, with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display, the variable display of the third symbol is performed on the third symbol display device 81, The display control of the variation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S2005). In the process of S2005, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area 223a is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of first area→execution area, second area→first area, third area→second area, fourth area→third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S2006.

  In the process of S2006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is on (S2006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S2006: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main control device 110, and thus S2007 to S2013. The respective processes up to are skipped, and the process proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2006: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2007), and then in the process of S1906 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43), The stop type in the fluctuating effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2008), and the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is used as it is for the fluctuating effect in the third symbol display device 81. It is set as a stop type (S2008). Next, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2009). In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, The stop display of the variable effect is controlled.

  When the process of S2009 ends, it is then determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 223g is greater than 0 (S2010: No), and when it is determined that the value is not greater than 0 (that is, 0) (S2010: No), the process proceeds to S2014. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is larger than 0 (S2010: Yes), the value of the time saving state counter 203g is first decremented by 1 (S2011). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving state counter 203g after the subtraction is 0 (S2012), and when it is determined to be 0 (S2012), the time saving state of the normal symbol is changed to the normal state of the normal symbol (low. Since it means that the back image has been switched to the probability state), a back image change command for switching to the back image corresponding to the normal state is set (S2013), and the process proceeds to S2014.

  On the other hand, in the process of S2012, when it is determined that the value of the time saving state counter 203g is not 0 (S2012: No), it means that the time saving state of the normal symbol continues, so the back surface corresponding to the time saving state of the normal symbol No need to change from the image. Therefore, in this case, the process of S2013 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S2014.

  The back image displayed during the time saving state is specifically the back image on which the right-hand navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the big hit ends, it is switched to the rear surface type in which the right hit navigation is displayed regardless of the big hit type. Then, when the time saving state of the normal symbol is finished, the right-side navigation is switched to the rear image for the normal state in which the navigation is not displayed. In addition, when the special symbol probability change state after the jackpot is over, the probability change state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot, so the right-handed navigation is not changed from the rear surface type displayed.

  In the process of S2014, it is determined whether or not the value of the allowable time counter 223i is larger than 0 (S2014), and when it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S2014: Yes), the value of the allowable time counter 223i is set to 1 This is subtracted and updated (S2015), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the permissible time counter 223i is 0 (S2014: No), the process of S2015 is skipped and this process ends. By the processes of S2014 and S2015, the value of the allowable time counter 223i can be updated periodically.

  In the present embodiment, the probability type of the special symbol and the back face type set in the time saving state of the normal symbol are common, but different back face types may be displayed. As a result, a wide variety of effects can be realized. Further, the remaining time saving period may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the value of the time saving state counter 203g. This allows the player to easily recognize the remaining time saving period.

  In the present embodiment, the allowable time counter 223h is updated in the variable display setting process (S1812), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the update may be performed in the main processing (see FIG. 42) that is executed every 1 ms (sound editing/output processing, liquid crystal effect execution management processing, etc.). This allows the allowable time counter 223h to be updated regularly.

<Regarding Control Process of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 61. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes a main process, and executes a command interrupt process and a V interrupt process in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

  The activation of the main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When the display control device 114 is powered on from the power supply circuit 115 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , And outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction, thereby activating the main processing.

  If all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 confirms that the address designated by the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read the data and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, since it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR type ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 in the boot program after the system reset is released, so that the NOR type ROM operates at high speed. Since the memory is a data readable memory, when the address “0000H” is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address “0000H” within a short time after the address “0000H” is designated, the MPU 231 can activate the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2101), and the display control device 114 is configured so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. To start.

  Here, the boot process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S2101) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the fixed value data are not stored in the dedicated program ROM provided by the conventional game machine, but are stored in the third symbol display device 81. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided to store the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a low read speed particularly when performing random access. Therefore, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the present boot processing, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. A process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing it is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d after the system reset is released and set in the buffer RAM 234c, Of the control programs stored in the 2 program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2201). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the leading address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2202). As a result, the MPU 231 starts execution of the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2201.

  Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2202, the MPU 231 can execute various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes are executed. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute the processing corresponding to the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the processing of S2202, subsequently, according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. The remaining control programs and the fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs that are being stored are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S2203). Specifically, the control program and a part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are data tables. It is transferred to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing required for the boot processing (S2204), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S2101 in FIG. 48). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2102 of FIG. 48) (S2205), the execution of the boot program is completed, and the boot process is completed.

  As described above, by executing the boot process (S2201), the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot processing, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 loads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed by using.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the work storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. By transferring the data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and the fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

  On the other hand, the NOR ROM 234d does not store all boot programs, but stores a predetermined number of instructions from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the NOR ROM 234d having an extremely small capacity, it is possible to suppress the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortened time. You can

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 49, the predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2201 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, the predetermined amount of the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S1901 is a boot program that executes the boot process that should be processed subsequent to the process of S1902. May be a part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, by this, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is designated by the instruction pointer. Alternatively, the processing set in 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S2203 to S2205 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the processing of S2201 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is thereby started. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, to the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a process of transferring a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount and subsequently setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2201. Also, after repeating a plurality of times including the processing of S2202, the processing of S2203 to S2205 may be executed.

  As a result, even if the boot program has a large program size and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in the one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S2203 to S2205 without performing the processes of S2201 and S2202. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary effect part in the MPU 231 which can be performed after the boot process can be started earlier.

  Here, returning to the description of FIG. When the boot process is completed, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2102). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I/O device are performed. In addition, processing such as clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, the work RAM 233 is provided with various flags, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “OFF” or “0” is set as the initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237, the image controller 237 draws an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instructing execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by checking whether the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the activation can be started normally.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S2103). The transfer instruction includes the start address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the power-on main image area 235a is included. According to this transfer instruction, the image controller 237 outputs image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image of the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  When the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 sends a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can recognize that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. Note that when the image controller 237 completes the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, it transfers transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a partial area of the internal memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby recognizing that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do it.

  The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2103, then the power-on fluctuation image is displayed. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S2104). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235). , The start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, and the image controller stores image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. The image data transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S2104, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. Is turned on (S2105). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 59A) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S3602 in FIG. 59A).

  Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. Accordingly, during that time, the simple command determination process (see FIG. 50) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image or power-on variation image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B). 50(b) S2408) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 50B S2409) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to its slow reading speed, It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is transferred to the third image. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or a person related to the hall, when the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining image data to be resident over time from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without having to worry about whether the operation is stopped.

  Also, in the operation check in the factory at the time of manufacturing, the main image at power-on is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the third symbol display device 81 starts its operation without any problem when the power is turned on. It can be immediately confirmed that the operation efficiency of the operation check is prevented from being deteriorated by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed for the character ROM 234.

  Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the power-on main image is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third pattern. When the player starts playing the game while the display device 81 is displaying, there is a ball (start prize) into the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, and an instruction to start the variation effect is given. When it is received from the main control unit 110 via the voice lamp control unit 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image is immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation is performed. You can direct. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234. Since it is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data, so that the main image continues to be displayed at power-on time after power-on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on variation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power-on, immediately after power-on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after that, even when the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the process of S2105, the interrupt permission is set (S2106), and thereafter, the main process executes the infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set in the process of S2106, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, the command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when the command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption processing, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2301), and the processing is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50B, the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 50B is a flow chart showing this V interrupt processing. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 24) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

  As described above, the V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal which is generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process and the display process have not been completed, so that the image controller 237 starts drawing a new image while drawing an image, It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored according to a new drawing instruction.

  Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 50B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2401: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so not the power-on image but the normal effect image is the third symbol. A command determination process (S2402) is executed to display on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S2403) is executed.

  In the command determination processing (S2402), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt processing is analyzed, and the processing according to the command is executed and the display demo command and the demo command are displayed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination processing, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the processing is executed. This is because the command determination processing is performed at 20 millisecond intervals when the V interrupt processing is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during the 20 millisecond. is there. Particularly, in the main controller 110, when the start of the variation effect is determined, it is highly possible that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the variation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the voice lamp controller 113 can be quickly grasped, and an effect image corresponding to the mode can be displayed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In the display setting process (S2403), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2402) or the like, an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81. Specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing situation and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58.

  After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2404). In this task process, the image is constructed based on the contents of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S2403) or the simple display setting process (S2409). The type of the sprite (display object) to be specified is specified, and various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, the enlargement ratio, and the rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S2405). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 for normal use is sent to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. When a transfer instruction for transferring to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set, and even when a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview production and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S2406). In this drawing process, from the types of various sprites forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite determined in the task process (S2404), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405). 24, and sends the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2407). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As the counter updated by the process of S2407, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, out-of-front reach, reach other than out-of-front reach, complete) The stop type table and the stop type counter corresponding to (off, chance) are compared, and the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S2401, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2401: Yes), it means that transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2408) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S2409) is executed, and the process proceeds to S2404.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55, details of the above-described command determination processing (S2402) which is one processing of the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 51, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2501), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2501: No), The command determination process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S2503) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2502), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S2503).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2504), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2504: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2505), the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S2601).

  Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made in the main control device 110 for several seconds or more, no more than two display fluctuation pattern commands are received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command judgment processing is executed. It is not possible for two or more display variation pattern commands to be stored in the command buffer area when executing, but some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc. It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S2601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

  If a fluctuation display data table corresponding to a fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a feeling of strangeness.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation actually longer than the set display data table is set. Even when the time-varying fluctuating effect is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the fluctuating effect according to the display data table buffer 233d ends, the main control device 110 displays the next display. Until the pattern command is received, the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuations in the design.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2601 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2602). Then, among the data table determination flags provided for each variable display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table determination flag corresponding to the variable display data table set by the process of S2601 is turned on, and other variations are performed. The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S2603). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set in the process of S2603, it is possible to easily determine which fluctuation pattern the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2604), and the pointer is set. 233f is initialized to 0 (S2605). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2606), the fluctuation pattern command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this variation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2605 is updated, while the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2601 is updated. , The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in step S3, and the necessary sprite image data in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 and the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h in which the time data is set in the process of S2604 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table, and when the variable effect in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2504, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2504: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2506), If there is a display variation type command (S2206: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2507) and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, details of the stop type command process (S2507) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, out-of-front/rear reach, reach other than out-of-front/outside reach, complete disconnection, chance chance) indicated by the display stop type command. (S2701), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) is executed, and the third symbol display device is displayed. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed in 81 is finally set (S2702).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flags corresponding to other stop symbols are turned off. Is set (S2703), and this processing ends.

  Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for identifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation based on the data table was started. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S2404), after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S2702 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S2703, and the specification thereof is performed. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address at which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

  It should be noted that the main controller 110 always makes a determination of the start of the change at a distance of several seconds or more, so that it does not receive two or more display stop type commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is not possible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but some commands change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command erroneously stops display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S2701, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type is stopped. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete disengagement is set by the process of S2702.

  If the stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the "special symbol" is actually displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if the "special symbol is out". The stop symbol corresponding to "the jackpot" is displayed, and the player may confuse the pachinko machine 10 with "a special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement is set, and in reality, if the "special symbol big hit", the complete disengagement stop on the third symbol display device 81. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a “special symbol jackpot”, which can please the player.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2506, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2506: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S2508), and display is performed. If there is an opening command for use (S2508: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S2509), and the process returns to S2501.

  Details of the opening command process (S2509) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the opening command process. The opening command process is a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S2801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the processing of S2801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S2804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S2805), the opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S2804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2801, The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified. Transfer data information defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

  When the opening command process is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereby, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, and therefore the read speed is slow, so that the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is effected. It takes a long time before the image data used for the above is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The display round number command indicating the newly started round number is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the timing at which the opening effect in the third symbol display device 81 is finished, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the display round number command is received, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There is a possibility that time will be generated and the player may feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped, and may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 in synchronization with the timing when all the round effects (for 15 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81 are completed, When the image data necessary for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the ending command for display, a lot of waiting time is required from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. This may cause the player to feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped, and may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the end of the jackpot variation display on the third symbol display device 81. The control is performed so that the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is completed. As a result, when the opening effect is finished on the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects on the third symbol display device 81 (for 15 rounds). ) When it ends, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation is stopped, and there is no discomfort. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

  Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the process of S2508, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S2508: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S2510), and the display is performed. If there is a use round number command (S2510: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S2511), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the round number command processing (S2511) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the round number command processing, first, a round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data is displayed. The table buffer 233d is set (S2901). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S2902).

  Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S2901, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S2903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S2904). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are both set to OFF (S2905), the round number command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2510, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S2510: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S2512), and display is performed. If there is an ending command for use (S2512: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S2513), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, details of the ending command processing (S2513) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. The ending command process is a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the displaying ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. The data is set in the buffer 233d (S3001). Next, Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3002).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3001, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S3004). Then, the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are both set to OFF (S3006), the ending command process is ended, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2512, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S2512: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S2514), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S2514: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S2515), and the process returns to S2501.

  Here, the details of the back image change command process (S2515) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55A is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The back image change command process is a process for executing a process corresponding to the back image change command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S3603) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S3101). . Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back images corresponding to other back image types are turned on. The determination flag is set to OFF (S3102), the back image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3101 is turned on, the changed back image type is specified from the back image determination flag set by the process of S3102. . If the specified back image type is the back image B or the back image C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the task processing, when it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed depending on the back surface type of the back surface image defined in the display data table, the back surface image determination flag set in the processing of S3102 is used. The RAM type in which the back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified in accordance with the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, no more than two back image change commands are received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination processing is executed. If there are two or more backside image change commands stored in the command buffer area, some commands may change due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command may change the backside image by mistake. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S2802, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, it is also possible to extract any one back surface image change command and turn on the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the command. Since this change of the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. In the processing of S2514, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S2514: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among unprocessed commands (S2516), and there is an error command. If (S2516: Yes), the error command process is executed (S2517), and the process returns to S2501.

  Details of the error command process (S2517) will be described with reference to FIG. 55(b). FIG. 55B is a flowchart showing the error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 114.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S3201). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are turned off (S3202), and the error command The process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3201, the error type generated is judged from the error determination flag set by the process of S3202, and the error type is dealt with. The processing is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the processing in S2902 sets the error determination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player or the person involved in the hall can correctly understand the error occurrence status.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. If it is determined in the process of S2516 that there is no error command (S2516: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2518), and the process returns to S2501.

  In the processing of S2501 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2501: Yes). ), and the processes of S2502 to S2518 are executed again. Then, the processes of S2501 to S2518 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2501 that there are no unprocessed new commands, this command determination The process ends.

  The simple command determination process (S2409) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B) is the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area, only the commands necessary for displaying the image at power-on, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are displayed. Extracting and executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 52A) and the stop type command processing (see FIG. 52B), which are the processings corresponding to the respective commands, The process corresponding to the command is discarded without executing the process.

  Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 52A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the variation image at power-on becomes the display data table buffer 233d in the process of S2601. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2602, a process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233b and clearing its contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58, details of the above-described display setting process (S2403) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 56, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is ON (S3301), and if the new command flag is not ON, that is, OFF (S3301: No), In the command determination process executed first, it is determined that the new command is not processed, the processes of S3302 to S3304 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S3301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and the new command flag is set to off (S3302), and then S3303 to S3304. The process corresponding to the new command is executed by the process.

  In the process of S3303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is ON (S3303). If the error occurrence flag is on (S3303: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S3304).

  Here, details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, referring to the error determination flag, all the error determinations that are set to ON The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S3401).

  In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and it is necessary for each sprite to draw such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle. Determine various parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S3401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S3402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S3304) or in the process of S3303, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S3303: No), the process proceeds to S3305.

  In S3305, pointer update processing is executed (S3305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

  In this pointer update processing, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S3501). That is, in principle, the updating process is performed so that the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address “0000H”, and the entity of each data is defined after the address “0001H”, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 while being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer updating process, so that the value is updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S3501, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information or not. Is determined (S3502). As a result, if it is End information (S3502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d past the address at which the actual data is described.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demo display data table (S3503), and if it is the demo display data table (S3503: Yes), the display data table buffer is displayed. The time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S3504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S3505), and this processing is finished and displayed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S3503, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S3503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S3506). ), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the display setting processing. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, for example, when the variable display data table is set, the end address of the immediately preceding address in which the End information is written is written. Since the drawing content is constantly expanded, the third image display device 81 can display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the processing of S3502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S3502: No), this processing is terminated and returns to the display setting processing.

  Here, returning to FIG. 56, the description is continued. After the pointer update processing, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update processing is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3306). In the task process, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the rendering content that was developed in the process of S3306 together with the warning image that was previously developed, and the display coordinate position for each sprite is specified. It determines various parameters necessary for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S3307), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S3308). When the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S3308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S3308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing for ending the variable display and performing the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S3309).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is ON (S3309: Yes), the finalized display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d because the finalized display effect has not yet been produced and the finalized display effect is to be produced. The data is set (S3310), and then the Null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the content (S3311). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time in the confirmed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3312), and the value of the pointer 233f is further initialized to 0 (S3313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in the ON state is set to ON (S3314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the last stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S3315), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  Thereby, in the case where the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fixed symbol display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As described above, the drawing content can be set. In addition, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the fixed display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 is not heavily loaded. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  The last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the variation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuating effect is changed according to the stop symbol of the fluctuating effect that was performed immediately before, and in the fluctuating display data table, fluctuation based on the data table From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2404), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the variation was started, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S3315. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is identified. Thereby, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding variation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3309, if the confirmed display flag is not on but on (S3309: No), it is determined whether the demo display flag is on (S3316). If the demo display flag is off (S3316: Yes), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less due to the end of the fixed display effect. Therefore, the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. 233d (S3317) and then Null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S3318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demo display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S3319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3320), the demo display flag indicating that the demonstration effect is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S3321), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

  As a result, after the fixed display effect is finished, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be set so that is displayed.

  In the process of S3316, if the demo display flag is on (S3316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the finalized display effect is finished, and the demonstration effect is finished, so the display setting process is ended as it is. Then, the procedure returns to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the same processing as the display setting processing is performed in the simple display setting processing (S2409) that is executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 50B). However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the fluctuating effect by the power-on fluctuation image is finished, the power-on fluctuation image corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time. A process of setting a display data table that defines display in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59 and FIG. 60, details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S2405) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is turned on (S3601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S3602), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3601, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S3601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234. Have been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S3603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S3602) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S3602).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not an instruction to transfer image data that has not been transferred is given to the image controller 237 (S3701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S3701: Yes). ) Further, based on the transfer instruction, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 is completed (S3702). In the process of S3702, when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S3702 that the transfer processing is not completed (S3702: No), the image controller 237 is continuously performing the image transfer processing, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3702: Yes), the process moves to S3703. Also, as a result of the processing of S3701, even when the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S3701: No), the processing proceeds to S3703.

  In the process of S3703, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S3703). A transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the resident target image data for transfer is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S3704), and the resident image transfer setting process ends.

  As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and transfer destination (transferred here). The head address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 in which the resident target image data should be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then, during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  If all the resident target image data have been transferred as a result of the processing in S3703 (S3703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S3705), and the resident image transfer setting processing ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 50B), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2408 of FIG. 50B) and the simple display setting process (see S2409 of FIG. 50B). Since the determination processing (see FIGS. 51 to 55) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 56 to 58) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 60) (see S3601: No in FIG. 59A).

  By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is retained without being overwritten during power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process becomes resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed at. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawn image can be immediately displayed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, in the resident video RAM 235, image data of frequently-displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, the main controller 110, the voice lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114 are displayed. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made resident immediately after the display is determined by, for example, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timing are performed. The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

  Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S3603) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2405) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S3603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, the pointer 233f updated from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the pointer update process (S3305) of the previously executed display setting process (S2403). The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S3801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S3802), and if it is transfer data information (S3802: Yes), the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information. Of the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address), and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) start address are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S3803, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S3804), and the process proceeds to step S3805.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but Null data in the process of S3802 (S3802: No), the processes of S3803 and S3804 are skipped and the process proceeds to S3805. In the process of S3805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set to the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S3805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S3805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S3806).

  In the process of S3806, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, and when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. . If it is determined by the processing in S3806 that the transfer processing is not completed (S3806: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this normal image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S3806: Yes), the process proceeds to S3807. Further, as a result of the process of S3805, even if the image data transfer instruction has not been set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S3805: No), the process proceeds to S3807.

  In the process of S3807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S3807). If the transfer start flag is on (S3807: Yes), image data to be transferred is present. Is turned off (S3808), the sprite image data indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S3803 is set as the transfer target image data, and the process proceeds to S3813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but on (S3807: No), then it is determined whether the back image change flag is on (S3809). If the rear image change flag is not on but on (S3809: No), there is no image data to start transfer, and the normal image transfer setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S3809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed. Therefore, after the back image change flag is set off (S3810), the back image provided for each back image type is set. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S3811). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the back image indicated by the back image discrimination flag, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are stored. The head address is acquired (S3812), and the process proceeds to S3813.

  In the process of S3813, it is determined whether or not the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813). The determination in the process of S3813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "ON", the image data of the sprite that is the transfer target is the normal video. If the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing in S3813 (S3813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. Then, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

  On the other hand, as a result of the processing in S3813, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S3813: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S3814). As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information of the transfer target image data, and the image controller 237 stores the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the transfer target image can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and transfer destination (transfer here). The start address of a sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the transfer target image to be stored is stored. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified by the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Transfer to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the processing of S3814, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S3815), and this normal transfer setting processing is ended. As described above, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to “ON”, and also in the sub storage of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to the other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  In this way, by executing this normal-use image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is the jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. When the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the back image of the resident video RAM 235 is included in the image data used for the back image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. When the display data table is set to, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to cause the image controller 237 to follow the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d should be surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. You can

  Here, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

  As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  In the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. Thus, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the process related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in the unit of sprite, the transfer of the image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in load on transfer.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, details of the above-described drawing process (S2406) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2404) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information) , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the drawing list shown in FIG. 24 is generated (S3901). That is, in the process of S3901, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites that form one frame determined in the task process (S2404). A parameter required for the sprite determined in the task processing is associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of sprites to be arranged from the rearmost side in the image for one frame to the front side, and the sprite order after the rearrangement is detailed for each sprite. As the detailed drawing information (detailed information), the drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and the address where the image data of the sprite is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2405), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the last address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S3902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information for instructing to develop the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing target buffer information Includes information for instructing to develop an image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c as drawing target buffer information.

  Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the beginning of the drawing list, and develops the images by overwriting them in the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the most back side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the most front side.

  If the drawing list includes transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data are calculated from the transfer data information. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source end address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is in the unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on a drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and an image is drawn according to the drawing list.

  The image controller 237 reads out the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be simultaneously processed in parallel. You can

  In the drawing process, after the process of S3902, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated (S3903). Then, the drawing process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and setting it to "0" when it is "1". Done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It is performed every time the drawing process of the embedded process (see FIG. 50B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading out image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of 1 frame are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image of 1 frame, 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of 1 frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. To be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer from which the image information for one frame is read are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternately designating, the display processing of the image for one frame can be continuously performed every 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) are provided as winning openings that are opened in the special gaming state (big hit state). ) Is provided, and one of the winning openings is opened according to the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each of these two types of winning holes is configured as a winning hole through which a large number (15) of winning balls are paid out by the balls. In addition, the two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) are both provided on the right side path (flow path) of the game board 13. With this, the ball can be entered even if any of the winning openings are opened by merely hitting the ball to the right side of the game board 13 (right hitting) during the special game state (big hit state). Therefore, the number of prize balls to be paid out in the special game state (big hit state) can be made less likely to be influenced by the skill of the player, so that even a beginner player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the two types of winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a and second specific winning opening 650a) among the paths (flow paths) provided on the right side of the game board 13. A storage device 600 having a plurality of winning openings is provided on the upstream side. This storage device 600 is configured so that when the player hits the ball to the right, a part of the struck ball can flow into the inside thereof, and the spilled ball can be transferred to a different winning opening. A plurality of flow paths are provided for the purpose of flowing down. Specifically, the number of prize balls is compared with the guide flow path 606 for flowing the balls down to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 where the number of winning balls is relatively small (the number of winning balls is three). A guide flow path 607 is provided for allowing the balls to flow down to a large number of general prize holes (15 prize balls) (general value prize hole) 602. Since the number of award balls that can be acquired can be varied depending on the type of the guiding flow path that flows down, when the ball flows into the storage device 600, the number of flow paths through which the ball flows down to the player is reduced. The type can be interestingly observed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the storage that can close the guide flow path 607 for flowing the balls down to the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602 having a relatively large number of winning balls (15 winning balls). A valve 607a is provided in the guide passage 607. The storage valve 607a is set to the open state during the special game state (during the big hit state), and is set to the closed state during the other game states. In addition, the game balls that have flowed into the storage device 600 are basically arranged in such a manner that the guide flow passages 607 are easier to flow into the guide flow passages 607 than the guide flow passages 606 (FIG. 9 ( See b)). Therefore, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to being able to obtain a prize ball by throwing the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, it is provided downstream of the guide flow path 607. The prize ball can be obtained by inserting the ball into the general prize hole (large value prize hole) 602. The storage device 600 is provided on the upstream side of the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, and the player only hits the right with the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. This is because it is possible to enter a ball into any of the storage device 600. As a result, the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one special game state (big hit state) can be increased, and the merit of the player due to the big hit can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to make the player enjoy the game with a big hit, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to win, and if the lottery result is a winning lottery result, a specific winning opening is opened and the winning opening is changed to that specific winning opening. There is one that gives a large amount of prize balls based on the ball entering (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-129177). In this conventional game machine, in addition to a specific winning opening, a plurality of winning openings are provided, and by adhering the specific winning opening and other winning openings, There is a structure in which a ball shot aiming at can enter a specific winning opening and another winning opening. Here, as one of the occasions when a specific number of balls enter the specific winning opening, it is common to control to close the specific winning opening, so the number of winning balls for the specific winning opening The number of prize balls that a player can win in a hit increases as the balls enter the other winning openings before the number becomes a specific number. Therefore, since the number of prize balls per hit can be increased by adjoining a specific prize hole and another prize hole, the player's expectation for the hit can be further improved.

  However, in a conventional game machine, there is a case where an irregular game method of winning a prize ball by hitting a ball aiming at another prize hole adjacent to a specific prize hole is performed even in a state other than a win. It was

  On the other hand, in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the guide passage 607 is closed by the storage valve 607a. In this state, since one sphere can be stored in the space formed by the upper portion of the storage valve 607a and the upstream portion of the guide flow path 607, the storage device 600 is first closed after the storage valve 607a is closed. The sphere that has flowed into the interior of is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a. Then, when the sphere flows into the storage device 600 in a state where the sphere is stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, the flow direction is changed by colliding with the stored sphere, and as a result, the sphere moves to the guide flow path 602. It becomes easier to flow down (see FIG. 9(b)). Therefore, even if a ball is thrown into the storage device 600 in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), the ball easily enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with few prize balls. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the merit of putting the ball into the storage device 600. Therefore, even in a state other than the special game state, by always aiming at the storage device 600, the irregular game method of increasing the number of balls by only paying out the general winning a prize hole (large value winning a prize hole) 602 is basically not established, and is special. In a state other than the gaming state (big jackpot state), a lottery for special symbols can be performed to expect a big jackpot to be played.

  It should be noted that the storage device 600 is configured such that one ball enters into approximately three right-handed balls. The number of prize balls paid out when the player enters the general prize hole (small value prize hole) 601 is three. In other words, even if the player hits right in a gaming state other than the special gaming state (big hit state), it is difficult for the special symbols to be drawn, and the payout is based on the entry into the general winning a prize (small value winning a prize) 601. You cannot increase the number of spheres by. This eliminates the merit of hitting right in the normal state, and allows the player to play a game aiming for a big hit by lottery of special symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the ball flowing down the guide flow path 606 enters the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 and the ball flowing down the guide flow path 607 enters the general entering entrance 602. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a publicly known clune means having a plurality of winning openings is provided on the downstream side of each guiding flow path, and different prize balls are paid out according to the winning openings into which the winning balls are entered. Good. As a result, even if the prize flow path 606 flows down, it is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls by entering the prize hole with a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out. Therefore, the player can be interestingly watched until the ball that has entered the storage device 600 enters one of the winning openings. Therefore, when a ball enters the storage device 600, the player can be more entertained.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a closes the guide passage 607 so that the sphere can be stored on the way of the guide passage 607. However, for example, an electromagnet or the like is used to guide the guide passage. You may comprise so that a sphere may be stored on the way of 607. That is, an electromagnet is embedded in the inner wall portion of the induction flow path 607, and magnetized by energizing the electromagnet in a state other than the special game state (during the big hit state). As a result, the sphere that first flows into the guide flow path 607 can be drawn to the location where the electromagnet is provided, and the flow of the sphere can be stopped (the sphere is stored at the position of the electromagnet). With this configuration, the space for burying the storage valve 607a can be reduced. Therefore, the storage device 600 can be made more compact. Further, in this case, the width of the guide passage 607 is widened (for example, in FIG. 8, the branch member 604 and the storage valve 607a are deleted), and the guide passage 605 of the guide passage 607 is removed. The electromagnet may be embedded only in the portion directly below, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 may be provided directly below the portion in which the electromagnet is embedded. Further, when there is a sphere that has been pulled down by the electromagnet and has stopped flowing down, the stopped sphere and another sphere come into contact with the electromagnet portion and the downflow direction is changed, so that the electromagnet is not embedded. The part may be made to flow down, and may be made to flow down in a direction different from that of the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. The general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 may be arranged below the portion of the guide passage 607 where the electromagnet is not embedded. As a result, the branch member 604 can be eliminated, and the number of parts of the storage device 600 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a is one, but the number is not limited to this, and two or more balls may be stored. Furthermore, when a plurality of balls are stored, they may be stored in the vertical direction or may be arranged side by side.

  In the present embodiment, the sphere can be stored above the storage valve 607a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage valve 607a may be provided at the upper end portion of the guide passage 607, and when the storage valve 607a is closed, the sphere may be prevented from flowing into the guide passage 607. With the configuration in which the balls are not stored, the balls can be discharged without remaining inside the storage device 600 even if the ball is hit right in a state other than the special game state (big hit state).

  In particular, in the first embodiment, the second entrance port 640 is easily opened in a high probability state of a special symbol given after the end of a big jackpot or in a time saving state of a normal symbol. In addition, in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the starting winning prize to the second entrance 640), compared to the lottery of the special symbol 1 (lottery based on the starting prize to the first entrance 64), the game The jackpot B that is advantageous to the player is likely to occur. Therefore, when the jackpot is over, the player hits the ball to the second ball entrance 640 by right-handed hitting. Therefore, for example, when the time saving period of the normal symbol ends, the sphere is stored in the storage device 600 with a high probability. This may cause the player to feel that the ball has been damaged. On the other hand, by providing the storage valve 607a at the upper end of the guide flow path 607 and not storing the balls in the storage device 600, the player can feel that the balls have been used up without waste. .. Therefore, the player can be satisfied.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning openings (small value winning openings) 601, 602 and the outlets 603a to 603c are provided inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second winning opening 640 may be arranged at a position where the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is provided. That is, in the first embodiment, the second entrance 640 provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 is moved to the inside of the storage device 600. You may. Further, in this case, as an opening condition of the storage valve 607a, for example, when the special symbol lottery is executed 1000 times without ending the big hit after the big hit ends, the storage valve 607a is opened. You may.

  Accordingly, when the special symbol lottery is executed 1000 times after the jackpot is over, the ball can be inserted into the second entrance 640 by making a right hit, so the special symbol 2 The lottery can be executed. In the first embodiment described above, the number of prize balls to be paid out when entering the second entrance 640 is five, but in the case of this modified example, three payouts are made. It should be configured so that That is, the number of balls that can be entered into the storage device 600 when hitting to the right is one in three, so by performing right hitting after the storage valve 607a is opened, It is possible to enter into the second entrance 640 at a rate of 1 out of 3 balls. That is, it is possible to receive the lottery for the special symbol 2 while maintaining the ball. With such a configuration, even if the special symbol lottery is repeated without being a jackpot (so-called, even if a big humor has occurred), the storage valve 607a is expected to be opened and the game is played. Can be done. Therefore, even if the period in which the big hit is not extended, the player's motivation for the game can be maintained. It should be noted that by increasing the number of prize balls to be paid out when entering the second entrance 640 (for example, 10), after the storage valve 607a is opened, the ball is only hit right and then You may comprise so that it may increase. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the merit in the case where the special symbol lottery is missed 1000 times or more in a row. Therefore, after the jackpot is over, let's hope that it will be a big jackpot again with a small number of special symbol lottery, and if you continue to miss the special symbol lottery, continue to miss the special symbol lottery 1000 times or more in a row I can make you wish. Furthermore, after opening the storage valve 607a, the number of balls increases by just making a right hit, so by continuing to miss the special symbol lottery, the player can hold the ball in the payout to the second entrance 640. It can be hoped that the condition that keeps increasing continues for a long time. Therefore, depending on the number of times the special symbol is drawn, it is possible to hope that the special symbol will be a big hit, or to continue to be out of the special symbol lottery, and thus provide the player with novel game playability. You can

  In this embodiment, in the storage device 600, only one storage valve 604a is provided, but a plurality of storage valves 604a may be provided. Specifically, the downstream side of the guide passage 606 may be configured to branch in two directions, and one passage may be provided with a storage valve that is opened only during the special game state (during the big hit state). That is, the same structure as the guide flow paths 606 and 607 and the branch member 604 may be further provided on the downstream side of the guide flow path 606. Then, a general winning opening with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15) is provided downstream of the flow path on which the storage valve is provided, and a small number of prize balls is provided in the flow path without the storage valve (for example, 15). (3) General prize holes may be provided. With this configuration, since a larger number of balls can be stored in the storage device 600, the special game state (big hit state) is started, and each storage valve is opened to store. The balls that have been played can be made to flow down to the general winning opening with a large number of prize balls (for example, 15). Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one big hit. Further, instead of providing a plurality of storage valves inside the storage device 600, a plurality of storage devices 600 may be provided in the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. Also in the case of such a configuration, as in the case of providing a plurality of storage valves, it is possible to increase the number of prize balls that can be obtained in one jackpot.

  In the present embodiment, in the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, the storage device 600 is provided downstream of the second ball inlet 640, and the first variable winning device is provided downstream of the storage device 600. 65 is provided, and the second variable winning device 650 is provided downstream of the first variable winning device 65, but the present invention is not limited to this arrangement and may be any arrangement. For example, the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 may be arranged on the upstream side of the second ball entrance 640. In the arrangement of the first embodiment, in the special game state (big hit state), the ball launched to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650 is the second winning opening first. Although it may be difficult to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, it may be difficult to enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. By arranging on the upstream side, it is possible to smoothly obtain the prize ball during the special game state (during the big hit state).

  Further, by arranging the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a on the upstream side, by arranging on the upstream side of the storage device 600, during the special game state (during the big hit state), the storage device It is possible to prevent (suppress) that the ball enters about 600 and becomes hard to reach the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, each round in the special game state (during the big hit state) can be progressed more smoothly.

  In the present embodiment, the first entrance 64 and the second specific entrance 640 are provided as entrances that trigger a lottery for special symbols, but either one may be omitted. For example, the second ball entrance 640 may be eliminated and the electric accessory 640 may be provided for the first ball entrance 64. This reduces the merit of hitting the ball to the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 in a state other than the special game state (big hit state), so that the ball is shot aiming at the storage device 600. It is possible to more reliably prevent (suppress) the typical game method.

  In the present embodiment, in a special game state (big hit state), when a ball flows into (fills into) the storage device 600, a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 with many prize balls to be paid out In addition to this, in one special game state (big hit state), in addition to this, the number of balls that entered the general entrance 602 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured to do so. As a result, in the special game state (big hit state), in addition to winning a prize ball by winning the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a, how many extra balls are obtained It is possible to let the player recognize whether or not the game has been completed. Therefore, it is possible to make more people think that more balls are to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 602, and thus it is possible to set a target for the number of entered balls. The number of winnings to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 does not necessarily have to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a dedicated display device may be separately provided. Thereby, in the third symbol display device 81, the effect during the big hit state can be executed in a wider display area.

  In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a, and the ball entering (winning) the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the same number as the prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entering (general winning) the general prize hole (high value prize hole) 602 are the same (15). , But is not limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entering (general winning) the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is changed to the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. The number may be smaller than the number of prize balls to be paid out based on entering (winning) balls (for example, to be 10). As a result, even if the balls just flow into the storage device 600 as a result of the deviation of the traveling direction of the balls in the special game state (big hit state), the disadvantage against the hole can be reduced.

  Contrary to the above, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the balls entering (general winning) the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening. The number of prize balls may be greater than the number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls enter (win) the prize opening 650a. Specifically, for example, the number of prize balls to be paid out by entering (winning) the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a is 10, and the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters (wins) 602 may be set to 15. This makes it possible to increase the profit that the player can enjoy by causing the balls to flow into the storage device 600 in the special game state (big hit state), so that the player's interest in the big hit game can be further improved. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is opened based on the start of the big hit, and the storage valve 607a is closed based on the end of the big hit. Is not limited to this. It may be set to be opened for a shorter period than in the present embodiment, or may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state a plurality of times in a big hit. For example, the storage valve 607a may be opened based on the interval period set between the jackpot rounds, and the storage valve 607a may be closed based on the end of the interval period. By limiting the period in which the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state) to the interval period, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot being too large. That is, it is possible to prevent variations in the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player in one big hit, so that it is possible to easily predict the sales of the pachinko machine 10. Further, by opening the storage valve 607a during the interval period, it is provided on the right side of the game board 13 in the interval period (that is, the state where the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a are closed). A part of the sphere that has reached the downstream side of the path (flow path) can flow into the storage device 600. That is, even during the interval period, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by inserting the ball into the general winning opening 602. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the balls from being wasted even during the interval period.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the storage valve 607a is configured to be closed at the start of the jackpot ending effect, but it may be configured to be closed at the end of the ending effect. This allows a part of the balls remaining on the board at the start of the ending effect to flow into the storage device 600. That is, it is possible to win the prize ball by inserting the ball into the general winning opening 602 during the ending effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted during the ending production. Further, the storage valve 607a is kept open until a fixed period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the ending effect is finished, and the storage valve 607a is closed after a fixed period (for example, 5 seconds) passes. It may be configured to switch to the state. This allows a part of the balls remaining on the board at the end of the ending effect to flow into the storage device 600. That is, it is possible to obtain a prize ball by inserting the ball into the general winning opening 602 after the ending effect is finished. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from being wasted after the ending effect is finished.

  Also, the storage valve 607a is opened when a game state different from the special game state (big hit state) is set, and when the set game state is changed to another game state, the storage valve 607a. May be closed. For example, you may comprise so that the storage valve 607a may be opened in the period when the probability change state of a special symbol is set. As a result, in the probability change state of the special symbol, while receiving the lottery of the special symbol 2 which is likely to be a big hit B by right-handing, a ball to the general prize hole (large value prize hole) 602 with a large number of prize balls to be paid out. Can be entered. Therefore, the probability change state of the special symbol can be made more advantageous to the player. Further, the storage valve 607a may be opened when the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. Basically, the time saving state of the normal symbol is a state where there is little merit for the player as compared to the probability changing state of the special symbol, but the storage valve 607a may be configured to be opened during the time saving state of the normal symbol. For example, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged when the normal symbol is in a time saving state.

  Further, instead of switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, or in addition to switching the state of the storage valve 607a according to the game state or the like, of the storage valve 607a at any timing of the player. The state may be switched. This allows each player to play a game in the state of the storage valve 607a according to his/her taste.

  In the present embodiment, the outlet is provided inside the storage device 600, but instead of the outlet, a prize opening for paying out prize balls may be provided. Further, the number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls enter each prize hole may be different. More specifically, for example, six prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603a, ten prize balls are provided in place of the out port 603b, and prize balls are replaced in place of the out port 603c. However, 12 prize holes may be provided. As a result, it is possible to more interestingly observe when the sphere flows down the guide flow path 606 and to which winning port the guide flow path 607 enters. Further, a member such as a nail capable of changing the flow direction of the ball may be provided downstream of the guide flow path 606 or the guide flow path 607 so that the winning opening into which any ball enters becomes more random. . Accordingly, when the sphere flows into the storage device 600, it is possible to more interestingly observe the whereabouts of the sphere until the sphere enters any of the winning openings. In addition, by providing nails or the like, it is possible to set a ball entrance through which a clerk in the hall can easily enter a ball. Therefore, the exit rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be adjusted on the side of the hall.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls the opening and closing of the storage valve 607a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 may control the storage valve 607a. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 607a may be controlled to switch to the open state when the opening command is received from the main control device 110, and may be controlled to switch to the closed state when the ending command is received. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, the main process relating to the game, the selection process of the variation effect, the lottery process of the special symbol, etc. can be executed without delay.

  In this embodiment, the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state) in the special game state (big hit state), and the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (stored state) in states other than the special game state (big hit state). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 604a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, or the like. In addition, the switching may be performed based on the result of the lottery that is performed regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage 607a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and a lottery is executed once a minute to determine whether to switch to the open state (released state). Good. When the lottery is won, the storage valve 607a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the ball can be flown into the storage device 600 with the storage valve 607a set in the open state (released state) by winning the lottery, the ball is transferred to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. Since it is possible to enter the game, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with the expectation that more lottery will be won. Further, the clerk in the hall may adjust the lottery probability of the lottery whether or not to set the storage valve 607a to the open state (released state). As a result, when the player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict a table having a good lottery probability and perform the machine selection. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit when setting the lottery probability of the hole, so that the interest of the player can be improved at the stage of selecting the machine before starting the game. ..

  In the present embodiment, according to the jackpot type, a jackpot (jackpot B) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at a timing at which it is easy to enter the probability variation entrance 654 in the 12th round of the jackpot, and the probability variation entrance. The jackpot 654 is provided with a jackpot (jackpot A) in which the second specific winning opening 650a is opened at a timing when it is difficult to enter the ball, but depending on the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the jackpot, which one It may be configured to indicate whether it is a jackpot type. For example, in each round of 1 to 11 rounds of jackpot, an effect in which a ally of justice and a monster fight may be performed. Then, if the teammate of justice wins by the 11th round, the jackpot B is notified, and if the teammate of justice is defeated, the jackpot A may be reported. That is, when the teammate of justice wins, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is a chance to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol. As a result, it is possible to make the player observe the result of the effect performed in the jackpot more interestingly.

  In addition, there are variations in the effect contents, and the expectation that a teammate of justice wins is high (it is easy to select in the case of jackpot B) and the possibility that the teammate of justice is defeated (in the case of jackpot A) (Easy to be selected for) production contents may be provided. For example, if a ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special move, or if the ally of justice avoids the attack of the enemy, the odds of winning are increased, and the attack of the ally of justice is missed, It may be configured so that it is more likely to be defeated when the enemy attacks with a special move. As a result, not only the result of whether or not a ally of justice wins, but the result can be predicted by the flow of the performance until the victory or defeat. Therefore, the interest of the player in the jackpot game can be improved.

  It should be noted that the content of the performance performed up to the 11th round is not limited to the above-described performance in which the ally of justice and the monster fight each other, and an advantageous jackpot B and a jackpot A that is more disadvantageous than the jackpot B can be suggested. Any form may be used. For example, if the boy character 710 performs an effect of searching for a treasure and can find the treasure by the eleventh round, the jackpot B may be notified. It may be configured to display the effect of eating a large amount of food and notify that the jackpot B is a big hit when the food provided is completely exhausted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 600 having a peculiar structure which is not mounted in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the game play related to the storage device 600 is provided. You may stay. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear image, and the conditions under which the storage valve 607a is opened, the merits when opened and the disadvantages when the ball is hit to the right in the closed state. You may comprise so that the image (explanatory image) explaining may be displayed. This allows the player to easily understand the playability. Further, the back side type in which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back side type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who is accustomed to the game on the pachinko machine 10 and who fully understands the playability can change to the rear type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in a normal state (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a normal state of a normal symbol), right-handing is performed, and when it is detected that a ball has entered the storage device 600, a right-handing warning image is detected. (See FIG. 5B) is displayed, but the right-handed warning image may not be displayed under a predetermined condition. For example, if the player is hitting the ball to the right while the balls are not stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a, a right-handed warning image is displayed until the balls are stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a (FIG. 5(b)). It may be configured not to display (see). By keeping the balls in the upper part of the storage valve 607a in the normal state, a special symbol is subsequently hit, and when the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state), the upper part of the storage valve 607a It is possible to immediately enter the balls stored in the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. Therefore, the ball paid out by having entered the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 can be used as a ball used in the jackpot game. Therefore, even if the player has run out of balls despite the jackpot, it is possible to play the jackpot game without renting a new ball.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 76. In the above-described first embodiment, the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650, and is provided inside the storing device 600 in the special game state (big hit state). It is configured so that a prize ball can be obtained by inserting the ball into the general prize hole (large value prize hole) 602. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the balls are paid out to the storage device 600 in addition to being paid out by putting the balls into the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a. The prize balls were paid out by entering the balls. As a result, more prize balls are paid out in the jackpot, which further enhances the player's interest in the jackpot game.

  In addition, in the first embodiment, in a state (normal gaming state) other than the special game state (big hit state), by closing the upstream of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 with the storage valve 607a, the ball Is configured so that it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the balls can be stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 607a. Then, in the normal gaming state, when there is a ball stored inside the storage device 600, the stored ball and another ball newly flowing into the storage device 600 can interfere (contact) with each other. Was configured as. Then, when interference (contact) with the stored sphere occurs, the direction in which the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 600 flows down is the direction of the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 with a small number of winning balls. It was configured to change to (direction of the guide flow path 606). As a result, in the normal game state, by hitting the ball to the right with the aim of winning the general winning a prize (high value winning a prize) 602 of the storage device 600, it is an anomalous attempt to increase the number of balls held without going through a big hit. It was configured so that the game method could not be fundamentally established.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600 in the first embodiment. Then, whether or not the balls are stored in the storage device 700 can be switched by the operation of the player. Further, when the sphere is stored in the storage device 700, two flow paths through which the sphere can flow down are provided, and depending on the downflow speed and the approach angle of the sphere that has flown into the storage device 700, the adjustment degree of the nail, and the like. The spheres can flow into either of the flow paths.

  Further, in the second embodiment, a winning opening that is easy to enter when the balls are not stored (a state where the storage valve 704a is open) and two flow paths that are easy to flow when the balls are stored in the storage valve 704a. Each of the two types of winning openings provided on the downstream side of is different in the number of prize balls to be paid out. That is, when the balls are stored in the storage valve 704a, one of the two types of prize holes that can be won is a prize hole with a large number of prize balls to be paid out, and the other is a prize hole with a small number of prize balls to be paid out. It is configured as follows. Further, the winning opening through which the ball can be won in the state where the storage valve 704a is opened is configured to be in the middle of the above-mentioned two kinds of payout numbers. That is, switching between a state in which the player can enter a winning opening with a large number of prize balls and a winning hole with a small number of prize balls, and a state in which the average payout can be stably received by causing the balls to flow into the storage device 700. You can Therefore, according to the player's preference, it is possible to switch the playability when the ball is flown into the storage device 700, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The difference between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment in structure is that the arrangement of the first variable winning device 65 is below the first ball entrance 64. 2 The variable winning device 650 is abolished, the storage device 700 is provided instead of the storage device 600, and the release button 800 for changing the state of the storage valve 704a to the open state by the operation of the player is provided. Is performed, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110 is partially changed, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is partially changed, and the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 executes the configuration. Part of the processing is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. is there. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 62, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a first variable winning device 65 is provided below the first ball entrance 64. Then, the second variable winning device 650 provided on the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13 in the first embodiment is abolished. The first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is configured to be opened in all rounds of big hits. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), the ball can be inserted into the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a by performing left-handed hitting.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided on the path (flow path) on the right side of the game board 13. In this storage device 700, the number of nails around the entrance is smaller than that around the entrance of the storage device 600 of the first embodiment, and the ratio of the balls flowing in when hitting to the right is the storage device of the first embodiment. It is configured to be less than 600 (for example, 1 out of 10 balls). Details of the storage device 700 according to the second embodiment will be described later with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 63, an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 63 shows an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the probability changing state of the special symbol, or the time saving state of the ordinary symbol (the period in which the player does not lose even if he/she hits right). It is a figure. FIG. 63(a) shows the display contents when the release button 800 is not pressed (the storage valve 704a is not opened), and FIG. 63(b) shows that the release button 800 is pressed. The display content in the state (state in which the storage valve 704a is opened) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 63(a), when the release button 800 has not been pressed (operated) by the player, the boy character 710 in the first embodiment (FIG. 5( Instead of Ds2 in a)), the words "Press the button to open the gate!" are displayed. By displaying this character, it is possible to set the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 to the open state by pressing the release button 800 (button) for the player. It can be easily recognized. The display contents in the display areas other than the small area Ds2 are the same as the probability changing state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63(b), when the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, the word "gate opening" is displayed in the small area Ds2. Thereby, it can be easily recognized that the storage valve 704a (gate) provided in the storage device 700 is in the open state.

  Next, details of the storage device 700 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. First, FIG. 64 is a front view of the storage device 700 according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 64, the storage device 700 is provided with a guide flow path 707 for flowing down the spheres that have flowed in from the upper part, and three flow paths are provided on the downstream side of the guide flow path 707. (The downstream of the guide flow path 707 is branched in three directions). Specifically, the guiding flow path 706 for flowing down the inflowing sphere in the lower left direction in front view, the guiding flow path 704 for flowing in the lower direction in front view, and the lower flow direction in the lower right direction in front view. And a guide channel 708 for As shown in FIG. 64, since the nail 709a and the nail 709b are provided on the downstream side of the guide passage 705, the sphere is on the right side or the left side while flowing down the guide passage 705. Even in this case, the downward direction of the sphere can be corrected toward the center by passing between the nails 709a and 709b. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide flow passage 705 is likely to flow into the guide flow passage 704 provided on the center side downstream of the guide flow passage 705.

  A general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 having a relatively large number of prize balls to be paid out (for example, 6) is provided downstream of the guide flow path 706. Further, downstream of the guide flow path 704, there is a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 having a smaller number of prize balls (for example, three) than the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702. It is provided. Furthermore, as the entrances other than the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702, there are outlets 703a to 703e in which the winning balls are not paid out even if the balls enter. It is provided. Then, the game ball flowing down the guide flow path 708 enters the out mouth (small value prize hole) 703d or the out mouth (small value prize hole) 703e, so that the ball flows down the guide flow passage 708. In addition, there is no merit to the player. A ball that has flowed down the guide flow path 706 but has not entered the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703a or the out opening 703b. To be done. A ball that has flowed down the guide flow path 704 but has not entered the general winning opening (mid-value winning opening) 701 is discharged to the outside by entering the out opening 703b or the out opening 703c. To be done. These outlets 703a to 703c prevent (suppress) the spheres from accumulating below the storage device 700 and reliably discharge the spheres even if the spheres move irregularly due to vibration or the like. You can

  A storage valve 704a is provided in the guide passage 704. Similar to the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment, the storage valve 704a closes the guide flow path 704 to store one sphere that has flowed into the storage device 700 after the closing in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a. be able to. The storage valve 704a is different from the storage valve 607a in the first embodiment in that the closed state can be released (set to the open state) by the operation of the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) by the player. Has been done. When the balls are stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704, the flow direction is changed by the impact of the balls that have flowed into the storage device 700 and interfere (contact) with the stored balls. This change (switch) in the flow direction will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an orbit (downward direction) of a sphere that flows down (enters) into the storage device 700 while the storage valve 704a is closed. First, with reference to FIG. 65( a ), a case will be described in which a sphere that interferes (contacts) with a stored sphere repels to the left in front view due to the impact of interference.

  As shown in FIG. 65(a), when the sphere that has flown into (entered into) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the sphere stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a and repels to the left in the front view, The sphere flows into the guide channel 706 and flows down the guide channel 706. Here, since the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 is provided in the downstream of the guide flow path 706, a relatively large amount of spheres enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702. (For example, 6) prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when the ball repels to the right, it is advantageous for the player.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 65B, a case will be described in which a sphere that interferes (contacts) with a stored sphere repels to the right side in front view due to the impact of interference. As shown in FIG. 65(b), when the sphere that has flown into (stored in) the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the sphere stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a and repels in the right direction when viewed from the front, The sphere flows into the guide channel 708 and flows down the guide channel 708. Here, since the outlets (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guide flow path 708, the ball enters either of the outlets. That is, when the ball repels to the right in the front view, the prize ball is not paid out, and there is no merit for the player.

  As described above, in the state in which the storage valve 704a is closed, the number of prize balls (game value) obtained by the player varies depending on the direction in which the ball that has flown (entered) into the storage device 700 repels. Therefore, when a sphere flows into (enters) the storage device 700, it is expected that the sphere will repel in the left direction when viewed from the front due to interference (contact) with the sphere stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a. A game can be played. That is, the downward direction (repulsion direction) of the ball that has flown into (stored in) the storage device 700 can be more interestingly confirmed, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, the direction in which the ball easily repels changes depending on the momentum of the ball, the angle of the ball entering the storage device 700, and the degree of adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b. Can be devised how to hit. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved. In addition, when selecting the pachinko machine 10 for playing a game, the pachinko machine 10 in which a ball easily enters the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is selected by taking into account the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b. You can Therefore, at the stage of selecting the pachinko machine 10 before starting the game, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of finding the pachinko machine 10 that is likely to be advantageous to himself.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an operation will be described in the case where a sphere flows in (enters) the storage device 700 while the storage valve 704a is set to the open state. When the sphere flows into the storage device 700, the sphere first flows down the guide flow path 705. Since the nail 709a and the nail 709b are provided on the left and right sides of the downstream of the guide flow passage 705 (see FIG. 66), the ball is on the right side or the left side while flowing down the guide flow passage 705. Even in this case, the downward direction of the sphere can be corrected toward the center by passing between the nails 709a and 709b. Therefore, the sphere that has flowed down the guide flow channel 705 flows into the guide flow channel 704 provided on the central side on the downstream side of the guide flow channel 705.

  When the storage valve 704a is opened, the sphere can flow down the guide flow passage 704. Therefore, the sphere flowing into the guide flow passage 704 flows down the guide flow passage 704 to the general winning opening (medium). Value winning prize) 701. As a result, the number of prize balls (three, for example) smaller than the number of prize balls for entering the general prize hole (high value prize hole) 702 is paid out.

  As described above, in the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the ball that has flown into the storage device 700 enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. That is, the flow-down direction does not change due to repulsion and flows into the guide passage 706 and the guide passage 708. That is, instead of being unable to put the ball into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, which has a large number of winning balls, the ball enters the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. It doesn't happen that you lose the prize ball. Therefore, when a ball is thrown into the storage device 700, it is possible to stably obtain a prize ball, which makes the player feel secure.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) to set the storage valve 704a in the open state while the operation is performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that a ball will enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. The state (there is a high gambling state in which there is a possibility that many prize balls may be obtained, but there is a possibility that no prize balls may be obtained). In addition, by setting the storage valve 704a in the open state, the ball that has flown into the storage device 700 can be inserted into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (a small amount, but stable. It is possible to obtain a prize ball). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated. You can play games.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the second embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. The electrical configuration of the second embodiment differs from the electrical configuration of the first embodiment in that the prescribed content of the first random number table 202b of the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 is changed, and the configuration of the RAM 203 is one. Partly changed, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input/output port 205 of the main control unit 110, and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control unit 113 is partially changed. They differ in points. The other electrical configuration is the same as the electrical configuration in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 67, the release button 800 is electrically connected to the input/output port 205. The release button 800 is arranged at a position (for example, around the frame button 22) that the player can arbitrarily press (operate). When the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player, a signal (press detection signal) for notifying the MPU 201 that pressing has been detected is output to the input/output port 205. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 controls the storage device solenoid 610 so as to open the storage valve 704a based on the depression detection signal. That is, the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on.

  Next, the first hit type selection table 202b provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which the determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, like the first hit type selection table 202b in the first embodiment.

  In the first hit type selection table 202b in the present embodiment, the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in association with each jackpot type only. That is, unlike the first embodiment, regardless of whether the special symbol 1 is a big hit or the special symbol 2 is a big hit, the same value for the same first hit type counter C2 is the same. The jackpot type is associated.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 68A, the jackpot C is defined in association with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 being “0 to 49” (FIG. 68(a). ) 202b1)). In addition, this jackpot C is a jackpot in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds. Further, after the jackpot C is finished, a time saving state of a normal symbol is added as an added value (a low probability state of a special symbol, and a time saving state of a normal symbol is transferred). Further, the time saving state of the ordinary symbol given after the end of the jackpot C is continued until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

  On the other hand, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”, the big hit D is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 68A). The jackpot D is a jackpot in which the special game state (jackpot state) continues for 15 rounds. In addition, after the jackpot D, the special symbol probability change state of the special symbol is added as an added value (transition to the special symbol probability change state). In addition, the probability variation state of the special symbol which is given after the end of the big hit D continues until the next big hit.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot is finished is predetermined according to the jackpot type that is won. That is, a more general configuration is adopted than the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Along with this, in the second embodiment, the specified content of the first hit type selection table 202b is changed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68(b), the specified contents of the RAM 203 in the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment has a probability variation setting flag 203h, a probability variation passage counter 203i, a winning number counter 203j, an operation counter 203k, and a remaining ball, which are provided in the RAM 203 in the first embodiment. The timer flag 203m, the remaining ball timer 203n, the probability variation valid flag 203o, the probability variation valid timer 203p, and the discharge number counter 203q are deleted. This is because these configurations are provided in connection with determining whether or not to shift to the probability changing state of the special symbol after the jackpot is over in the second specific winning device 650. In other words, in the present embodiment, depending on the type of jackpot, the gaming state to be set at the end of jackpot is set in advance, and whether to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol during the special gaming state (during the jackpot) Since no determination is made, it is not necessary to use each of the above configurations in this embodiment.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 68B, the RAM 203 in the second embodiment is provided with a release flag 203s. This release flag 203s indicates whether or not the player has pressed (operated) the release button 800 to set the storage valve 704a in the open state (whether or not the state in which the balls can be stored above the storage valve 704a has been released). Or)). The release flag 203s is set to ON when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state (see S4008 in FIG. 71). On the other hand, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, it is set to off (see S4004 in FIG. 71).

  Next, returning to FIG. 67, the configuration of the RAM 223 in the voice lamp control device 113 according to the second embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the RAM 223 in the present embodiment, the winning number counter 223j provided in the RAM 223 in the first embodiment is abolished, and the storage state flag 223k and the downflow time counter 223k are added. There is.

  The storage state flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not the storage valve 704a is set to the open (release) state. When the storage state flag 223k is turned on, it indicates that the storage valve 704a is closed and the ball can be stored above the storage valve 704a. On the other hand, if the storage state flag 223k is off, the storage valve 704a is set to the open (release) state, which indicates that the ball can flow down the guide flow path 704. The storage state flag 223k is updated every time a storage state command is received from the main controller 110 to a value corresponding to the storage state indicated by the command (see S1922 in FIG. 72). The voice lamp control device 113 determines the setting of the storage valve 704a based on the storage state flag 223k, and determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the storage valve 704a.

  The downflow time counter 223k is a ball entrance (general winning opening 701, general winning opening 701, general winning a prize, which is a ball that has flown into the guiding channel 704, the guiding channel 706, or the guiding channel 708 immediately before switching the state of the storage valve 704a. It is a counter for counting the time (ball throwing time) until the player enters the mouth 702, the outlet 703d, or the outlet 703e). By counting the ball-balding period, a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or an out opening (small value winning) When a ball enters the winning hole) 703e, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the ball is a normal operation. This downflow time counter 233k is set with a counter value corresponding to 1 second each time a storage state command is received from the main controller 110 (see S1923 in FIG. 72). Further, it is decremented by 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 42) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

  In the present embodiment, in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed, a ball enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the storage valve 704a, or the storage valve 704a is opened. In the state, when the ball enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e, a warning image (Fig. 7 ( b)) is displayed. However, if the sphere flows into the guide flow path 704 immediately before the storage valve 704a is switched from the open state to the closed state, the sphere is switched to the closed state after the storage valve 704a is switched to the general winning opening (medium value). In some cases, the player may enter the winning opening 701. Similarly, when the sphere flows into the guide flow passage 706 or the guide flow passage 708 immediately before the storage valve 704a is switched from the closed state to the open state, the sphere is generally formed after the storage valve 704a is switched to the open state. The player may enter the winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or the out opening (small value winning opening) 703e. In order to treat these as a normal ball entry (not display a warning image), in the present embodiment, when the state of the storage valve 704a is switched, a predetermined period (1 second) is set for the downflow time counter 233k. Set the corresponding counter value. Then, until the one second set as the counter value has elapsed, the ball is a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701, a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702, an out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, or It is configured to determine that the operation is normal (not display a warning image) when the ball enters the out mouth (small value winning mouth) 703e.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Second Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. In this embodiment, the content of the main process (see FIG. 69) is changed from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, only various kinds of processing executed in this main processing (see FIG. 69) will be described, and detailed description of the other processing that has not been changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 69, a main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing this main processing. Similar to the first embodiment, the main processing of the game is executed in this main processing.

  In the main process (see FIG. 69) of the present embodiment, the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) is used instead of the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in contrast to the main process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 34). The difference is that is executed. Another difference is that the storage control process (S1022) for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a is executed after the second symbol display update process (S1007) is completed. Another difference is that error command processing 2 (S1023) is executed instead of the error command processing (see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment. The other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the jackpot control process 2 (S1021) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the big hit control process 2 (S1021). This jackpot control processing 2 (S1021) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 69), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the special gaming state (jackpot state), execution of various effects according to the jackpot, This is a process for opening or closing the 1 specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a.

  Of the jackpot control processing 2 (S1021), in each processing of S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109, S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, and S1109 of the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. The same processing as each processing is executed. Further, in the jackpot control process 2 of this embodiment, the process of S1103 (the process of setting the opening of the storage valve) in the first embodiment is omitted. In the second embodiment, since the player sets the storage valve 704a to the open state based on the operation of the release button 800, the state of the storage valve 704a regardless of whether it is the special game state (big hit state) or not. This is due to the switching.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment, when it is determined by the process of S1105 that the start timing of a new round is reached (S1105: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set. The release is set (S1121), the round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1122), and this processing is ended. The number-of-rounds command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, the display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1105, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is determined whether or not the closing condition for the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123). ). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, or the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. If a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won after opening the game, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1123, when it is determined that the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1123: Yes), the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is opened. This is closed (S1124), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is not satisfied (S1123: No), it is determined whether it is the ending effect start timing (S1109). Specifically, when 15 rounds of the special game state (big hit state) are finished, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect.

  In the processing of S1109, when it is determined that it is the timing to start the ending effect (S1109: Yes), first, the ending command is set (S1125). The ending command set here is stored in the command transmitting ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp control in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201. Sent to device 113. Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the ending command for display, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  When the process of S1125 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the big hit of this time is a big hit D (probable variation big hit) (S1126). No), 100 is set to the value of the hour/hour counter 203r (S1127), and this processing is ended. By setting 100 in the hour/hour counter 203r, it is possible to shorten the ordinary symbol time period until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times after the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1126, when it is determined that the big hit this time is the big hit D (probability variation big hit), the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON in order to give the probability variation state of the special symbol after the big hit ends ( (S1128), this process ends. In the processing of S1109, when it is not the ending start timing (S1109: No), this processing ends. That is, the winning process (S1111, see FIG. 38) and the abnormality process (S1112, see FIG. 39) in the first embodiment are not executed in the jackpot control process 2 of the present embodiment.

  By making the jackpot control process 2 (see FIG. 70) different from the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment as described above, only one winning opening is provided during the jackpot. The present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine in which the state after the jackpot is predetermined according to the jackpot type (that is, a more general pachinko machine).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the storage control process (S1022) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this storage control process (S1022). The storage control process (S1022) is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a, as described above.

  In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether or not the release flag 203s is on (S4001), and when it is determined to be on (S4001: Yes), the storage valve 704a is opened (the storage device 700). Since it means that the state in which the balls can be stored is released), it is then determined whether or not the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player (S4002). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

  In the processing of S4002, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is detected) (S4002: Yes), in order to keep the storage valve 704a in the open state, This processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S4002: No), in order to close the storage valve 704a, The solenoid 610 is turned off (S4003). Then, in order to indicate that the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, the release flag 203s is set to OFF (S4004), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the closed state. Therefore, the storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4005), and this processing is ended.

  The storage state mand set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the display rear image change command for setting the rear surface type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image changing command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63(a), it is set in a mode in which the text "Open the gate when the button is pressed!" is displayed in the small area Ds2. This allows the player to easily recognize that the storage valve 704a can be set to the open state by pressing the release button 800.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4001, when it is determined that the release flag 203s is off (S4001: No), the storage valve 704a is closed (the storage device 700 is set to a state capable of storing balls). Means that the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by the player (S4006). That is, it is determined whether or not the press detection signal is detected.

  In the process of S4006, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S4006: No), the storage valve 704a is kept closed. In order to keep it, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected (that is, a pressing detection signal is detected) (S4006: Yes), the storage device solenoid 610 is turned on to open the storage valve 704a. (S4007). Then, in order to indicate that the storage valve 704a is set to be opened, the release flag 203s is set to ON (S4008), and the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the storage valve 704a is in the opened state. Therefore, the storage state command corresponding to the open state of the storage valve 704a is set (S4009), and this processing is ended.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 69) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the release state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs to the display control device 114 a display rear image change command for setting the rear type corresponding to the release state. The display control device 114 changes the back image based on the display back image changing command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63(b), it is set in a mode in which the character "gate opening" is displayed in the small area Ds2. This allows the player to easily recognize that the storage valve 704a is in the open state.

  By executing this storage control process, opening or closing of the storage valve 704a can be set in accordance with the operation status of the release button 800. As a result, by storing the balls in the upper part of the storage valve 704a at any timing of the player, either the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 or the out winning openings (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. It is possible to switch between a state in which a crab ball enters and a state in which a ball that has flown (entered) into the storage device 700 flows down toward a general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 114 in the second embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, the content of the command determination process (see FIG. 72) is partially changed from the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. In the following, only the command determination process (see FIG. 72) will be described, and detailed description of the other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the command determination processing (1811) in this embodiment. In this command determination process, in each of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919, the same process as each of S1901 to S1911 and S1913 to S1919 of the command determination process (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment is performed. Executed respectively.

  Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the winning information command is received in the process of S1911 (S1911: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a malfunction such as a failure in the storage valve 704a. Then, a warning process is performed to give a warning when a defect has occurred (S1921), and this process is terminated.

  Further, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the ending command is not received in the process of S1916 (S1916: No), whether or not the storage state command is received is then determined. It is determined (S1922). If it is determined that the storage state command has been received (S1922: Yes), the storage state flag 223k is updated according to the state of the storage valve 704a notified by the storage state command (S1923). Specifically, when the closed state (storage state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a, the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the open state (released state) is notified as the state of the storage valve 704a. In this case, the storage state flag 223k is set to OFF. In addition, when the storage state flag 223k is updated, the rear surface image (see FIGS. 63(a) and 63(b)) corresponding to the storage state after the update is also set to display the third symbol display device 81. Update the content.

  When the process of S1923 ends, a counter value corresponding to 1 second is set in the downflow time counter 223l (S1924), and this process ends. It is possible to accurately determine whether or not there is a defect in the storage valve 704a by using the ball-blanking time set for the downflow time counter 223l. In addition, in the process of S1922, when it is determined that the storage state command is not received (S1922: No), the process proceeds to S1919.

  As described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the release state command or the closed state command from the main control device 110. A command for causing the display control device 114 can be set. This allows the player to easily recognize the state of the storage valve 704a.

  Next, the warning process (S1921) executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 73. As described above, this warning process (S1921) is a process for determining whether or not there is a malfunction such as a failure in the storage valve 704a, and issuing a warning when a malfunction occurs.

  In the warning process (S1921), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S4101), and if it is on (S4101: Yes), then the value of the downflow time counter 223l is 0. It is determined whether or not (S4102). Then, when it is determined that the value of the downflow time counter 223l is 0 (S4102: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state), and the pitching period has elapsed. Therefore, in the closed state (storage state) of the storage valve 704a, a storage time notification process for reporting a defect is executed (S4103), and the present process is ended. Further, when it is determined that the value of the downflow time counter 223l is not 0 in the process of S4102 (S4102: No), it means that the current ball-bulging period is due to the storage valve 704a being set to the closed state. Therefore, the process of S4103 is skipped, and the present process is terminated.

  Here, the details of the storage time notification process (S4103) described above will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the storage time notification process (S4103), first, it is determined whether or not the notified prize information command includes prize information corresponding to the entrance to the general prize hole (medium value prize hole) 701 (S4201), If the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium-valued winning opening) 701 is not included (S4201: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 is included (S4201: Yes), the storage valve 704a is set to the closed state (storage state). Regardless, it means that the ball flows down to the downstream of the storage valve 704a and enters the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. That is, it means that the storage valve 704a is not normally closed even though the storage valve 704a is set to be closed. Therefore, the display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 704a is set (S4202). , This process ends.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7(b)) for notifying that the storage valve 704a is defective in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display error command is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), it is possible for the player or the store clerk in the hall to easily notice the occurrence of the problem, so that the problem can be promptly resolved.

  Returning to FIG. 73, the description will be continued. In the process of S4101, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (that is, it is off) (S4101: No), it is determined whether or not the value of the downflow time counter 223l is 0 (S4104), When it is determined that it is not 0 (that is, 1 or more) (S4104: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the downflow time counter 223l is 0 (S4104: Yes), it means that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), and the pitching period has elapsed. Therefore, when the storage valve 704a is in the open state (released state), a release-time notification process for reporting a defect is executed (S4105), and this process ends. This cancellation notification processing (S4105) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the cancellation notification process (S4105). In the notification process at the time of cancellation (S4105), first, it is determined whether or not the received winning information command includes winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 (S4301). If the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 is included (S4301: Yes), the process proceeds to S4303.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4301, if it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the ball to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is not included (S4301: No), then the winning information command It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the entrance to the mouths (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e is included (S4302), and the entrance to the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e is performed. If the winning information to be paid is not included (S4302: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  In the processing of S4302, when it is determined that the winning information corresponding to the entry into the out mouth (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e is included (S4302: Yes), the processing proceeds to S4303. If the winning information command includes winning information corresponding to a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 (S4301: Yes), or out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e In the process of S4303 that is executed when the winning information corresponding to the winning is included (S4302: Yes), the display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 704a is set (S4303), and this process is executed. finish. When the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state), the sphere that has flown into the storage device 700 flows down the guide flow path 704, so a general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 or an out The reason why the balls enter the mouths (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e is that the storage valve 704a is likely not normally opened.

  The display error command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1802) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the control device 114. In the display control device 114, a warning image (see FIG. 7(b)) for notifying that the storage valve 704a is defective in the third symbol display device 81 by receiving this display error command is displayed. Is displayed. By displaying this warning image (see FIG. 7B), it is possible for the player or the store clerk in the hall to easily notice the occurrence of the problem, so that the problem can be promptly resolved.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with the storage device 700 capable of storing balls inside. The storage device 700 is provided with a plurality of flow passages (guide flow passages 704, 706, 708) inside, and is configured to allow the balls to flow down to different entrances. A storage valve 704a capable of closing the flow passage is provided in the guide flow passage 704. When the guiding flow path 704 is closed by the storage valve 704a, one ball can be stored (held) in the upper part thereof.

  Further, in the state where the storage valve 704a is opened, the sphere that has flown into the storage device 700 flows down the guide flow channel 704 (compared to the guide flow channel 706 and the guide flow channel 708, the flow path to the guide flow channel 704). Since it is configured such that the spheres can easily flow in, the spheres can be inserted into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 provided downstream of the guide flow path 704. Therefore, by causing the balls to flow into the storage device 700, it is possible to stably receive the payout of the prize balls based on the entrance into the general prize opening (medium value prize opening) 701.

  On the other hand, in the state where the storage valve 704a is closed and the sphere is stored above the storage valve 704a, the sphere that has flowed into the storage device 700 interferes (contacts) with the stored sphere, so that the guide flow path 706, Alternatively, it repels in either direction of the guide flow path 708. That is, either the general winning opening (large-value winning opening) 702 or the outlets (small-value winning opening) 703d or 703e where the winning balls are not paid out due to the repulsion of the flowing direction and thus the number of winning prize balls is large. Enter the crab. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while expecting the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

  Here, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a holding device for temporarily holding the ball that has been hit on the game board. Among these conventional game machines, there is a game machine in which the held balls can be discharged to the game board by the operation of the player and entered into a predetermined winning opening provided in the traveling direction ( For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-190443).

  However, in the conventional game machine, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the interest of the player because the released ball is only put into a predetermined winning opening.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the player operates the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) to set the storage valve 704a in the open state while the operation is performed. That is, by keeping the storage valve 704a in the closed state, there is a possibility that a ball will enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e. The state (there is a high gambling state in which there is a possibility that many prize balls may be obtained, but there is a possibility that no prize balls may be obtained). In addition, by setting the storage valve 704a in the open state, the ball that has flown into the storage device 700 can be inserted into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701 (a small amount, but stable. It is possible to obtain a prize ball). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated. You can play games. Therefore, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a can be switched by the release button 800 at any timing of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, or the like. This allows each player to start the game while the storage valve 704a is in a state suitable for his or her taste. Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of the lottery that is performed regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and a lottery is performed once a minute to switch to the open state (released state). You may.

  When the lottery is won, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. As a result, if the balls can easily enter the out openings (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e with the storage valve 704a closed due to the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, the balls are stored by lottery. A game can be played in the expectation that the valve 704a will be opened. On the other hand, if it is easy for the ball to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 with the storage valve 704a closed due to the adjustment of the nails 709a and 709b, the ball continues to be missed in the lottery, A game can be played in the expectation that the storage valve 704a continues to be closed. Further, the clerk in the hall may adjust the lottery probability of the lottery whether or not to set the storage valve 607a to the open state (released state). As a result, when the player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict a table having a good lottery probability and perform the machine selection. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit when setting the lottery probability of the hole, so that the interest of the player can be improved at the stage of selecting the machine before starting the game. ..

  In the present embodiment, there are two types of flow passages, the guide flow passage 706 and the guide flow passage 708, through which the balls can flow when the storage valve 704a is closed, but the flow passages are not limited to this. More flow paths and winning openings may be provided. Further, it is possible to give more variations to the number of prize balls to be paid out when the balls enter the respective winning openings. This makes it possible to increase the randomness of the number of prize balls that can be acquired when the storage valve 704a is closed, so that the player can more interestingly observe the flow-down direction of the balls that have entered the storage device 700. Can be made.

  Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of flow paths through which the balls can flow when the storage valve 704a is opened. And, when flowing down through each flow path, a different number of prize balls may be provided for each of the ball entrances. As a result, even when the storage valve 704a is opened, the number of prize balls to be paid out can be randomized. Can be observed more interestingly.

  In the present embodiment, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the second entrance 640, but the arrangement may be reversed. By providing the storage device 700 on the upstream side, it is possible to make it easier for the balls to flow into the storage device 700.

  In the present embodiment, only the first specific winning opening 65a is provided as the winning opening opened in the special game state (big hit state), but a plurality of winning openings may be provided as in the first embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only while the release button 800 is being pressed (operated), but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during the predetermined period in which the storage valve 704a is opened. This eliminates the need to continue pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704a open. In addition, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (storage state) and the open state (released state) may be switched. With such a configuration, since the release button 800 only needs to be operated when it is desired to switch the state, the number of times of operation by the player can be reduced. Further, contrary to the release button 800, an operation means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating may be provided. Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, each player can be made to select a game characteristic that suits his or her taste.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the storage valve 704a is displayed in text on the small area Ds2 in the sub display area Ds, but the mode of notifying the player of the state of the storage valve 704a is limited to this. Not a thing. For example, depending on the state of the storage valve 704a, it may be configured to display either a real image of the storage valve 704a in an open state or a real image of a closed state. Further, the display showing the state of the storage valve 704a may be displayed in a display area other than the small area Ds2. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display showing the state of the storage valve 704a is configured to be displayed as a rear image, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that it may be displayed on the front side rather than the 3rd design. Further, the aspect of the third symbol may be changed according to the state of the storage valve 704a, and the state of the storage valve 704a may be recognized according to the aspect of the third symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls the opening and closing of the storage valve 704a, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 may control the storage valve 704a. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. Then, the storage valve 704a may be controlled to be switched to the open state when the release state command is received from the main control device 110, and may be controlled to be switched to the closed state when the closed state command is received. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, the main process relating to the game, the selection process of the variation effect, the lottery process of the special symbol, etc. can be executed without delay.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 700 having a peculiar structure which is not mounted in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the playability of the storage device 700 is provided. You may stay. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 700 is displayed as a rear image, and an image (explanatory image) for explaining the conditions under which the storage valve 704a is opened and the merits and demerits of opening the storage valve 704a is displayed. It may be configured as follows. This allows the player to easily understand the playability. Further, the back side type in which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back side type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who has become accustomed to the game on the pachinko machine 10 and who fully understands the playability can change to the rear type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the front surface of the first winning opening 64 so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by left-handing. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, like the first embodiment, the first specific winning port 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700. As a result, the ball can be made to flow into the first specific winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 only by performing a right hit in the special game state (big hit state), and thus the prize ball in the special game state (big hit state) You can do more. Therefore, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, when the sphere stored in the upper portion of the storage valve 704a and the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 interfere (contact) with each other, the flow path through which the newly flowing sphere flows down is It was configured to be random. That is, in a state where the spheres are stored above the storage valve 704a, the ratio of the spheres newly flowing into the storage device 700 to the guide flow passage 706 and the guide flow passage 708 is substantially the same. Although configured, it is not limited to this. For example, the width of the storage valve 704a is widened (for example, as 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere) so that the sphere stored in the upper part of the storage valve 704a is located on the right side in front view or the left side on front view. It may be configured to obtain. When the sphere is arranged on the upper side of the storage valve 704a to the left in the front view, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 easily collides with the right side surface of the stored sphere. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is easily repelled to the right side in front view, and the sphere easily flows down the guide flow path 708. As described above, since the outlets (small-value winning holes) 703d and 703e are provided downstream of the guide flow path 708, the player cannot obtain a prize ball (which is disadvantageous to the player). .. On the other hand, when the ball is arranged on the right side in the front view in the upper part of the storage valve 704a, the ball newly flowing into the storage device 700 easily collides with the left side surface of the stored ball. Therefore, the sphere newly flowing into the storage device 700 is easily repelled to the left side in front view, and the sphere easily flows down the guide flow path 706. As described above, since the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 is provided downstream of the guide flow path 708, the player can obtain a relatively large amount of prize balls (advantageous for the player. Will be). As described above, by arranging the balls stored above the storage valve 704a, it is possible to form a state advantageous to the player and a state disadvantageous to the player, so that the storage valve 704a is closed when the storage valve 704a is closed. You can be aware of the arrangement of the balls stored in the upper part of the. Therefore, if the arrangement of the balls is unfavorable (that is, if the balls are stored to the left in the front view), the release button 800 is pressed (operated) to open (release) the storage valve 704a. it can. Also, if the arrangement of the balls is advantageous (that is, if the balls are stored to the right in the front view), it is possible to make the player want to continue the game while maintaining the arrangement of the balls. .. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of determining whether or not to press the release button 800 according to the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

<Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 85. In the above-described first embodiment, the state of the second specific winning opening 650a (open state or closed state) and the state of the storage valve 607a provided in the storage device 600 (open state or closed state) are independent of each other. In the privilege game state (big hit state), the storage valve 607a is always controlled to be in the open state, while the second specific winning opening 650a has a predetermined period in 12 rounds (see FIG. 16). The open state is set only during the open period defined for each jackpot type). Further, two kinds of flow paths (a guide flow path 652 and a guide flow path 653) are provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and only when the sphere flows down the guide flow path 652, the guide It was configured to be able to enter the positive variation ball inlet 654 provided on the downstream side of the flow path 652. That is, even if a ball hits the second specific winning opening 650a during the big hit, the special symbol does not move to the probability changing state after the big hit unless the ball flows down the guide passage 652. It was

  On the other hand, in this modification, the slide member 900 is used instead of the member for opening and closing the second specific winning opening 650a and the storage valve 607a of the first embodiment, and the second specific winning opening 650a and the storage. The state of the device 600 is configured to be switchable. That is, one member is configured to be able to perform the opening/closing operation of the second specific winning opening 650a and the opening/closing control of the guide passage 607 in the storage device 600, and are configured to switch the states in cooperation with each other. That is, when the second specific winning opening 650a is opened, the guide flow path 607 (general winning opening 602) is also opened, and when the second specific winning opening 650a is closed, the guiding flow path 607 (general winning opening 602) is opened. ) Is also configured to be closed. When configured in this manner, the second specific winning opening 650a, the general winning opening 602 (that is, the winning opening opened by the slide member 900 during the big hit) together, the winning opening for obtaining the prize ball during the big hit. Can be treated as

  Further, only the guide passage 652 leading to the certainty variation entrance 654 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650, and the passage switching valve 650d, the guide passage 653, and the normal entrance 655 are provided. Has been abolished. That is, if the ball can be inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a, the special symbol is configured to shift to the probability changing state after the jackpot is over. Also, the winning opening to be opened in the 12th round is changed according to the jackpot type. That is, in the 12th round, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are set to the open state (V route open big hit), and the first identification in all the rounds of the big winning. The jackpot 65a is set to be in an open state (the second specific winning port 650a and the general winning port (high value winning port) 602 are not opened during the jackpot) and a jackpot (V route closed jackpot) is provided. Has been.

  Along with these changes from the first embodiment, the ending conditions for each round of jackpots are also changed. Specifically, in the first to eleventh rounds and the thirteenth to fifteenth rounds of jackpots, balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602. Is changed to 10 in total, or when 30 seconds have passed from the start of the round, the round game is finished (the first specific winning opening 65a is closed). In the 12th round, the total number of balls that have entered the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is 10 or the round. When 30 seconds have passed from the start of the round game, the round game is finished (the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening 602 are closed).

  The point that the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the first embodiment is structurally different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that it is a member for switching the state of the second specific winning port 650a (closing portion 910). The member for switching the state of the guide flow path 607 (the ball storage section 920) and the member (slide member 900) are configured by one member, and the ball is paid out when the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. The number of prize balls to be played is changed to 3 (15 in the first embodiment), the content of the ROM 202 is partially changed, and the partial processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Is different from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, and a part of the processing executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. For other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 76, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, an example of an image (effect) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the 12th round of the V route opening jackpot (jackpot F). explain. As shown in FIG. 76, when 12 rounds of the V route open jackpot (jackpot F) are reached, the word "ROUND 12" is displayed in the display area 714 for displaying the number of rounds. Further, a display area 717 for notifying that the second specific winning port 650a has been opened is formed on the upper center of the third symbol display device 81 as viewed from the front. In this display area 717, the characters "CHANCE!!" and the character "probably changing route open!!" are displayed. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the special symbol shifts to the probability changing state of the special symbol after the jackpot is finished by inserting the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a. Note that other display contents of the boy character 710 and the like are the same as the display contents displayed on the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 6A), and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the configuration on the downstream side of the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13 will be described. As shown in FIG. 77, on the downstream side of the route (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13, a storage device 600, a first variable winning device 65, and a second device as in the first embodiment. A variable winning device 650 is provided. In addition, a member for opening or closing the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 (closing portion 910) and a member for opening or closing the flow path of the storage device 600 (ball storing portion 920). Are arranged in a straight line. Although the details will be described later, this is because the closing portion 910 and the ball storage portion 920 are both part of the slide member.

  Further, nails 921a and 921b are provided at the entrance of the storage device 600. The store clerk in the hall can adjust the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600 by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b before opening the hall, for example. By changing the ratio of the balls that flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to change the number of balls that enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the storage device 600 in the 12th round of the jackpot. it can. Therefore, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball hit by the right hitting can easily flow into the storage device 600, it is possible to increase the prize balls that the player can obtain in the jackpot. Therefore, the player's expectation for the jackpot game can be further improved, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  On the contrary, when it is made difficult for the ball to flow into the storage device 600 by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, the first specific winning opening 65a provided downstream of the storage device 600 and the second The number of balls that reach the specific winning opening 650a can be increased. Therefore, the jackpot can be digested more quickly. Further, in the 12th round, since it is easy to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, when the jackpot F is achieved, it is possible to easily transition to the state where the special symbol is changed. Therefore, the jackpots are more likely to continue in a short period of time, and the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The configuration for adjusting the ease with which the balls flow into the storage device 600 (the ease with which the balls enter the second specific winning opening 650a) is not limited to nails. For example, a windmill may be provided at the entrance of the storage device 600 so that the ease of rotation can be adjusted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 78, a slide member 900 including the above-described closing portion 910 and sphere storing portion 920 in its configuration will be described. 78(a) and 78(b) are cross-sectional views of the gaming board 13 taken along the line LXXVIIb-LXXVIIb in FIG. 77. Here, the slide member 900 is configured to be slidable to the back side or the front side in front view with respect to the game board 13, and the second identification is performed by sliding the displacement to the front side in the front view. The winning opening 650a and the guide passage 607 can be closed. On the other hand, by slidingly displacing the slide member 900 toward the inner side with respect to the game board 13, the second specific winning port 650a and the guide passage 607 can be opened.

  FIG. 78(a) is a diagram when viewed from above the game board 13 when the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide passage 607 are closed by the slide members 900, respectively. On the other hand, FIG. 78(b) is a diagram when viewed from above the game board 13 when the second specific winning opening 650a and the guide flow path 607 are opened.

  As shown in FIG. 78( a ), the slide member 900 has a shape in which a substantially rectangular shaped closing portion 910 and a spherical storage portion 920 are respectively projected from the right end portion and the left end portion of the substantially rectangular base portion 930 (substantially “ U-shaped”). The closing part 910 and the ball storing part 920 are projected to the front side of the game board 13 or buried in the back side of the game board 13 through the opening parts 940a and 940b formed in the base plate 60, respectively. can do.

  In the state where the slide member 900 is slid and displaced toward the front side in front view, as shown in FIG. 78(a), since the upper portion of the second specific winning port 650a is closed by the closing part 910, the sphere is changed to the second variable position. It becomes impossible to enter the inside of the winning device 650. Similarly, since the guide flow path 607 is closed by the sphere reservoir 920, the sphere can be put into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 provided downstream of the guiding flow path 607. become unable.

  As shown in FIG. 78(b), when the slide member 900 is slid and displaced to the inner side of the game board 13, the upper part of the second variable winning a prize device 650 is opened and the guide passage 607 is also opened. Therefore, by hitting the ball to the right, the ball goes to the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 provided on the downstream side of the guide flow path 607 and the second specific winning opening 650a provided on the downstream side of the storage device 600. Can be entered.

  As described above, in this modification, the switching of the state of the second specific winning port 650a and the switching of the state of the guide flow path 607 can be realized only by the slide member 900. Therefore, the processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the second specific winning port 650 and the storage valve 607a are separately controlled as in the first embodiment. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processing in the game such as lottery for special symbols and determination of variation time, if the processing speed decreases due to an increase in processing load, The impact on the game will increase. On the other hand, in this modification, since the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, the first hit type selection table 202b in the present modification will be described with reference to FIG. 79. As described above, in the present modified example, when the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a, the ball always enters the certainty variation entrance 654. Then, as jackpot types, a jackpot in which the second specific winning opening 650 is opened in the twelfth round and a jackpot in which the first specific winning opening 65a is opened in the twelfth round are provided.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 79, the jackpot E (V route closing jackpot) is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 from 0 to 49 (see 202b1 in FIG. 79). This jackpot E (V route closed jackpot) is a jackpot to which a special game state of 15 rounds is given, and in each round of the jackpot, the first specific winning opening 65a has a predetermined time (until 30 seconds elapse, or a ball is hit). It is a jackpot that is opened until 10 balls are entered. That is, in the special game state (big hit state), it is not possible to put the ball into the positive variation ball entrance 654 provided inside the second variable winning device 650, so the time saving state of the normal symbol is 100 after the big hit ends. Will be given once.

  On the other hand, the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) is associated with the range of the first hit type counter C2 from 50 to 99 (see 202b2 in FIG. 79). This jackpot F is a jackpot to which a special game state of 15 rounds is given, and in the 12 rounds of jackpot, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are a predetermined time (30 seconds elapse). Or until 10 balls have been entered, and in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the first specific winning opening 650a has reached a predetermined time (30 seconds has elapsed, or 10 balls have entered). It is a jackpot that is released until you hit the ball. In the jackpot F, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the twelfth round, so if the ball can be put into the second specific winning opening 650a in the twelfth round, the special symbol is changed after the jackpot. Is given. On the other hand, in the twelfth round, if the ball is not hit to the right, or even if it is hit to the right, a ball just enters the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and as a result, the ball goes to the second specific winning opening 650a. If 12 rounds are finished without entering the ball, 100 times the time saving state of the normal symbol is given after the jackpot F is over.

<Regarding Control Process of Main Controller in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. In this embodiment, the content of the main process (see FIG. 34) is changed from that of the first embodiment. Specifically, the big hit control process 3 (see FIG. 80) is executed instead of the big hit control process (see FIG. 35) executed in the main process (see FIG. 34) of the first embodiment. ing. In the following, only the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) will be described, and detailed description of the other processes that have not been changed from the first embodiment will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 80, the jackpot control process 3 (S1031) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the modification of the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the big hit control process 3 (S1031). The big hit control process 3 is a process of setting the opening and closing of the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a for each round of the big hit state.

  In each of the jackpot control processing 3, S1101, S1102, S1104, S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112, S1101, S1102, S1104 executed in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. , S1105, S1109, S1110, and S1112 are executed. Further, in the big hit control process 3 (S1031), the respective processes of S1103, S1107, and S1108 that were executed in the big hit control process (FIG. 35) in the first embodiment are abolished.

  Further, in the jackpot control process 3 (S1031), when it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process in the first embodiment (see FIG. 36). Instead of this, the jackpot operation setting process 2 is executed (S1121), and this process is terminated. Details of the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) will be described with reference to FIG. 81.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) described above. This jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) is a process for setting the state (open state or closed state) of the first specific winning port 65a and the second specific winning port 650a.

In each of the jackpot operation setting processing 2 (S1121), each processing of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 is the same as each processing of S1201 to S1203 and S1206 in the jackpot operation setting processing (see FIG. 36) of the first embodiment. The process of is executed.
In addition, in the jackpot operation setting process 2 (S1121) in the present modification, when it is determined in the process of S1201 that it is the 12th round (S1201: Yes), the jackpot type of this time is jackpot F (V route open). It is determined whether or not it is a big hit (S1211).

  If it is determined that the jackpot is not the jackpot F in the processing of S1211 (S1211: No), it means that the first specific winning opening (first big opening) 65a is the jackpot E that is opened in all rounds of the jackpot. The opening of the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set (S1202), and the process proceeds to S1206.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot is a big jackpot F in the processing of S1211, (S1211: Yes), it is the jackpot type that the second specific winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round. The opening of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a is set (S1203). As described above, the closing part 910 that closes the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is the same member as the ball storage part 920 that closes the guide flow path 607 of the lottery device 600. Of the slide member 900, and the closing portion 910 and the ball storing portion 920 are slidably displaced in conjunction with each other. Therefore, by setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a in the process of S1203, the guide flow path 607 inside the storage device 600 is also opened (that is, the general winning opening 602 is also opened). ).

  After setting the opening of the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 by the process of S1203, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a , And the guidance flow path 607 is set to the open state (released state), the storage state command corresponding to the open state (released state) is set to notify the voice lamp control device 114 (S1212). , And the process proceeds to S1206. The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage state command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage state command. When the display control device 114 receives the display rear image change command, the display area 717 is generated in the third symbol display device 81, and the characters "CHANCE!!" and "probably changing route open!!" Is displayed (see FIG. 76). By displaying these characters, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that it is a chance to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol.

  If the special symbol shifts to the probability changing state, the jackpot tends to become a jackpot again in a short period after the jackpot ends, which is a very advantageous state for the player. Therefore, in the 12th round of the jackpot F, the player can be more seriously aimed at the second specific winning opening 650a and hit a ball. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) that the big hit becomes a mere work for obtaining the prize ball, and to enjoy the game during the special game state (during the big hit state).

  As described above, the proportion of balls that reach the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a among the right-handed balls is determined by the nails 921a and 921b (provided at the entrance of the storage device 600). It can be varied by adjusting (see FIG. 77). For example, by adjusting the nail 921a to open to the right in the front view or adjusting the nail 921b to open to the left in the front view (opening the nail), the ball hit to the right flows further into the storage device 600. Easier to do. Therefore, the ratio of the balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is relatively low. That is, the more the nails 921a and 921b are opened, the more difficult it is for a ball to enter the second specific winning port 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F. Further, if 10 balls enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 without being able to enter the second specific winning opening 650, the 12th round ends. . Therefore, it becomes difficult for the special symbol to shift to the probability changing state. If the balls easily flow into the storage device 600, the balls easily enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, which has a larger number of prize balls than the second specific winning opening 650a. (See FIG. 9B). As a result, the player can obtain a large number of prize balls, and thus the player's interest in winning the jackpot can be improved.

  Here, in many cases, the player makes a right hit at the first specific winning opening 65a in the 1st to 11th rounds, so that the player is arranged downstream of the route (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. The sphere also flows into the storage device 600 provided. Therefore, by the time the 12th round starts, one sphere has been stored in the upper part of the sphere storage unit 920. Therefore, when the 12th round starts and the slide member 900 is slid and displaced to open the upper part of the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storing portion 920 are transferred to the general winning opening. (Large-value winning opening) Flows down to 602. As a result, among the balls that have hit the right side in the twelfth round, nine balls are actually moved to the second specific winning opening 650a before entering the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602. If the ball cannot be entered, the 12th round will end.

  On the other hand, adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that they are close to each other (closing the nails) makes it difficult for the right-handed ball to flow into the storage device 600. Therefore, the ratio of the balls that reach the second specific winning port 650 is relatively high, and thus it becomes easier to put the balls into the second specific winning port 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F. Therefore, after the jackpot ends, it becomes easy to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol. As a result, the jackpots F are likely to be jackpots again within a short period after the jackpot F is finished, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In this way, by changing the easiness of the ball to enter the storage device 600 when the ball is hit to the right, the second ball entrance 650a provided downstream of the inlet part of the storage device 600 is changed. You can change the ease of entering the ball. Therefore, the clerk in the hall can change the playability when the jackpot F is achieved, simply by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the game playability in which it is easy to shift to the state of special symbol probability change, and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is easy to enter, 12 It is easy to get a lot of prize balls in the round, but it is possible to switch to a game property in which it is difficult to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol. Therefore, the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall.

  Returning to FIG. 80, the description will be continued. In the process of S1109 of the jackpot control process 3, if it is determined that it is not the ending effect start timing (S1109: No), then the winning process (S1111) executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 35) in the first embodiment. ), the winning process 2 is executed (S1122), and the process proceeds to S1112. Details of the winning process 2 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the winning process 2 (S1122) executed by the MPU 201 in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 80) in the present modification. Of the prize winning process 2 (S1122), the respective processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 are the same as the respective processes of S1401 to S1405 and S1408 to S1420 in the winning process (see FIG. 38) of the first embodiment. The processing of is executed.

  Further, in the winning process 3 (S1122) in the present modification, the value of the winning number counter 203j becomes 10 or more in the process of S1404 (that is, the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a, the second specifying). If it is determined that the total number of winnings to the winning opening (second large opening opening) 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is 10 or more) (S1404: Yes), or round time When it is determined that (30 seconds from the start of the round) has elapsed (S1405: Yes), any winning opening (first specified winning opening (first large opening) 65a or second specified opening) The winning opening closing process for setting the closing of the winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602) is executed (S1431), and the process proceeds to S1408. The winning opening closing process (S1431) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the winning opening closing process (S1431). The winning opening closing process (S1431) is a process of setting the closing of the winning opening when the conditions for closing the winning opening are satisfied in each round of the jackpot.

  In the winning opening closing process (S1431), first, it is determined whether or not the present is the 12th round (S4401). If it is not the 12th round (S4401: No), it means that the winning opening currently open is the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a. The one large opening 65a is set to be closed (S4402), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4401, if it is determined that the present is the 12th round (S4401), the winning jacks that are open are different rounds depending on the jackpot type. It is determined whether or not it is an open jackpot (S4403). When it is determined that the jackpot is not the jackpot F (V route open jackpot) (that is, the jackpot is E (V route closed jackpot)) (S4403: No), the winning opening that is currently open is the first specific winning opening ( This means that the first specific winning opening (first large opening) 65a is set to be closed (S4402), and the present processing is executed. finish.

  In the processing of S4403, when it is determined that the big hit this time is the big hit F (V route opening big hit) (S4403: Yes), the second specific winning opening (second big opening) 650a is opened only in the 12th round. It means that the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are currently open. Therefore, in this case, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 are set to be closed (S4404), and the second specific winning opening (second large opening). In order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the mouth 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are closed, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state (storage state) is set ( (S4405), and ends this processing.

  The storage state command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201, a voice lamp is used. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the storage state command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display rear image change command to the display control device 114 based on the storage state command. When the display control device 114 receives the display back image change command, the display area 717 displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is erased. This allows the player to easily recognize that the chance to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol has ended.

  By executing the winning opening closing process (S1431), the opened winning opening can be closed accurately.

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of First Embodiment>
Next, the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. In the pachinko machine 10 of this modification, the processing content of the command determination processing is partially changed from the command determination processing (see FIG. 43) in the first embodiment. More specifically, in order to execute the process for receiving the storage state command output from the main control device 110 in the jackpot, each of S1921 to S1923 in the command determination process (see FIG. 69) of the second embodiment. Execute the process. Since the processing content itself is the same as the command determination processing (see FIG. 69) in the second embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the command determination processing in this modification is configured to execute the error notification processing 2 (S1971) instead of the error notification processing (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment. This error notification process 2 (S1971) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the error notification processing 2 (S1971) described above. In the error notification process 2 (S1971), in each process of S1931 to S1934, S1936, and S1937, the same process as the error notification process (see FIG. 44) in the first embodiment is executed. Further, in the error notification process 2 (S1971) in the present modification, when it is determined that the value of the allowable time counter 223i is 0 in the process of S1934 (S1981), the hit notification process in the first embodiment (FIG. 45). Instead of (see), hit notification processing 2 is executed (S1981), and this processing ends. This hit notification processing 2 (S1981) is processing for notifying when a failure occurs in the storage valve 607a during a big hit, as in the hit notification processing (see FIG. 45) in the first embodiment. Is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the hit notification processing 2 (S1981) described above will be described. In the hit notification process 2 (S1981), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991). In the process of S1991, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on (S1991: Yes), it is then determined whether or not the value of the downflow time counter 223l is 0 (S1992), and the counter value is 0. If not (S1992), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1992, when it is determined that the value of the downflow time counter 223l is 0 (S1992: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state), and the ball-blanking period elapses. Since it means that the winning information is included, it is determined whether or not the winning information command includes the winning information corresponding to the winning in the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 (S1993).

  Then, when it is determined that the entry information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is not included (S1993: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the entry information corresponding to the entry to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is included (S1993: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the closed state (storage state). However, it means that the ball is flowing down to the downstream of the storage valve 607a. Therefore, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally closed, a display error command corresponding to the malfunction of the storage valve 607a is set (S1994), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S1991, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (off) (S1991: No), it is then determined whether or not the value of the downflow time counter 223l is 0 (S1995). ). Then, when it is determined that the value of the flow-down time counter 223l is not 0 (S1995: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is turned on in the process of S1995 (S1995: Yes), then the received prize information command is entered into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601. It is determined whether or not the winning information corresponding to the ball is included (S1996). Then, if the winning information corresponding to the entry into the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is not included (S1996: No), this processing is ended as it is.

  In the process of S1996, if the winning information corresponding to the ball to the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 is included (S1996: Yes), the storage valve 607a is set to the open state (released state). That is, it means that the ball has entered the general winning opening (small value winning opening) 601 even though the pitching period has passed. That is, since there is a high possibility that the storage valve 607a is not normally opened, the process proceeds to S1994 to notify the malfunction of the storage valve 607a.

  By this hit time notification process 2 (S1981), when a malfunction occurs in the operation of the storage valve 607a, the malfunction can be promptly notified, so that the malfunction can be promptly resolved.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the modified example of the first embodiment, the slide member 900 is used to open/close the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a and the guiding flow path in the storage device 600. The opening/closing operation of 607 can be performed at the same time. That is, the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is configured as one of the winning openings for obtaining a prize ball during a big hit.

  Since the switching of the state of the second specific winning opening 650a and the switching of the state of the guide flow channel 607 can be realized only by slidingly displacing the slide member 900, as in the first embodiment, the second specific winning port 650a can be realized. The processing load can be reduced as compared with the case where the winning opening 650 and the storage valve 607a are separately controlled. That is, the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced. In particular, since the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 executes important processing in the game such as lottery for special symbols and determination of variation time, if the processing speed decreases due to an increase in processing load, The impact on the game will increase. On the other hand, in this modification, since the processing load of the MPU 201 can be reduced by introducing the slide member 900, the main processing in the game can be executed more reliably.

  In addition, in the present modification, only the certainty variation entrance port 654 is provided inside the second variable winning a prize device 650, and the ball that has flowed into the inside of the second variable winning award device 650 always enters the certain variation entrance ball port 654. It is configured to be a sphere. Thereby, if the ball can be inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a, it is possible to realize a simple game property in which the special symbol shifts to the probability changing state after the jackpot is over. Therefore, since it becomes easier for the player to understand whether or not the special symbol shifts to the probability changing state, it is possible to provide a game feature that even a beginner can enjoy. In addition, since the flow path switching valve 650d, the guide flow path 653, and the normal ball entrance 655, which are provided inside the second variable winning device 650 in the first embodiment, are eliminated, the second variable winning device 650. The structure of can be simplified. Therefore, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be suppressed.

  Further, in the present modification, by adjusting the ratio of the balls that flow into the storage device 600 among the balls that have been hit to the right, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b (see FIG. 77) provided at the inlet portion of the storage device 600. It is configured to be variable.

  Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is drawn based on whether or not a game ball is won at a starting winning opening, and whether or not to shift to a probability variation state is separately decided during the winning. There is a lottery. As a result, it is possible to suppress the hitting being a mere work for getting a lot of balls, and to make the player playing the hitting game with a sense of expectation for shifting to the probability fluctuation state, thereby improving the player's interest in playing the game. I am trying.

  Some of the above-mentioned gaming machines are provided with a predetermined area that allows the game ball to enter only during the hit, and the probability variation state after hitting by entering the game ball into the predetermined area There is one that shifts to (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-180999).

  However, in the conventional game machine, the rate of the game ball entering the predetermined area during hitting is preset for each model, so in order to make the rate of transition to the probability variation state different, There was no choice but to introduce a different model. In other words, in the conventional game machine, there is no degree of freedom in the rate of transition to the probability fluctuation state, and it is difficult to flexibly deal with different business policies for each hall. Therefore, a more versatile gaming machine has been demanded.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, the ease with which the ball enters the storage device 600 when right-handing is performed can be easily changed by adjusting the degree of adjustment of the nails 921a and 921b. Is configured. This makes it possible to change the ease of entering the second entrance 650a provided downstream of the entrance of the storage device 600. Therefore, the clerk in the hall can change the playability when the jackpot F is achieved, simply by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. That is, it is difficult to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602, and the game is easy to shift to a state where the special symbol is changed, and the special winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 is easy to enter, and special It is possible to switch between the game nature in which it is difficult to shift to the probability change state of the symbol. Therefore, since the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be easily changed according to the business policy of the hall, versatility can be improved.

  In the present modification, the second specific winning opening (second large opening) 650a is configured to be opened for up to 5 seconds in 12 rounds of the jackpot F, but the opening time may be set arbitrarily. For example, by setting the opening time to 10 seconds, it is possible to make it easier for a ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a. Therefore, it becomes easy to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. The opening time may be set to 2 seconds, for example. By shortening the opening time, various striking methods are performed in order to enter the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a within a limited time, and the pachinko machine 10 in which the nails 921a and 921b are further closed. Can be selected. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be absorbed in the game.

  In this modified example, the entrance of the storage device 600 is provided upstream of the second specific winning opening 650a, and the ease of entering the storage device 600 can be varied by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b. However, the configuration for varying the ratio of the balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a is not limited to this. For example, instead of the storage device 600, an out-out port or a winning port through which a prize ball is paid out by a ball entering may be provided. And the 2nd specific winning a prize mouth 650a may be constituted so that an open/closed state may be switched by a single member. Even with such a configuration, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b to change the ease of entering the out mouth or the winning opening, the ratio of the balls reaching the second specific winning opening 650a can be changed. Can be made. Further, since the structure can be simplified by replacing the storage device 600 with an outlet or a winning opening, the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Further, the easiness of flowing into the storage device 600 does not necessarily need to be adjustable. That is, instead of the nails 921a and 921b, a columnar member fixed to the board surface may be provided. As a result, it is possible to make it impossible for the hole side to adjust whether or not the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a in the 12th round of the jackpot F, so that the ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a. Even if the ball is not thrown, it is possible to prevent the discouragement from heading to the hole. That is, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the player from feeling distrust of the hall.

  In this modified example, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are configured to be opened in the 12th round of the big hit F, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be opened in the first round. With this, it is possible to determine early whether or not to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind in the subsequent special game state (big hit state). Further, the second specific winning opening 650a may be configured to be opened in the 15th round. As a result, since it is not decided until the 15th round which is the final round whether or not to shift to the probability variation state of the special symbol, the player's expectation for the probability variation state of the special symbol can be maintained longer. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player during the big hit game. In addition, for example, when the big hit F is reached, the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 may be continuously opened in a plurality of rounds. Specifically, for example, it may be configured to be opened in the 12th and 13th rounds. As a result, the balls stored in the upper part of the ball storage section 920 by the end of the 11th round enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 in the 12th round, and in the 13th round, the ball storing section. There may be no sphere above 920. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of putting the ball into the second specific winning opening 650a.

  In this modification, as in the first embodiment, only one sphere can be stored inside the storage device 600, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of spheres can be stored. For example, four balls may be stored above the ball storage unit 920. In this case, the ending condition of the 12th round is changed, and the 12th round is ended when a total of 5 balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a, the second specific winning opening 650a, and the general winning opening 602, for example. It may be configured to do so. In the first to eleventh rounds of jackpots, a game is played by entering the ball into the first specific winning opening 65a by hitting it right, so in many cases, the ball is stored in the upper part of the storage section 920 before the start of the twelfth round. The upper limit number (4) is stored. In other words, when the 12 rounds are started and the sphere storage section 920 is opened, the four stored balls flow into the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 all at once. Then, four balls have entered the specific winning openings (first specific winning opening 65a, second specific winning opening 650a, and general winning opening 602). Therefore, one more ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 to complete the 12th round (a total of five balls are the second specific winning opening). 650a or the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 is the situation, so the opportunity to enter the second specific winning opening 650a can be limited to one ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel more nervous and play the game for 12 rounds. In addition, in the first to eleventh rounds of the jackpot, hoping that the spheres do not flow into the storage device 600 as much as possible (that is, the number of spheres stored in the upper part of the sphere storage section 920 is not the upper limit number of four balls and 12 You can play jackpot games, hoping to reach the round. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while giving a sense of tension even during a big hit, so that it is possible to prevent (suppress) the big hit from being just a work for obtaining a prize ball, and the big hit game of the player. You can improve your interest.

  It should be noted that the number of balls that enter the specific winning opening, which is the condition for ending the 12th round, and the upper limit number of balls that can be stored in the upper portion of the ball storage unit 920 may be arbitrarily determined. For example, the condition for ending 12 rounds may be equal to or less than the number of spheres that can be stored in the upper portion of the sphere storage unit 920. As a result, it is possible to more strongly hope that the balls will not be stored inside the storage device 600 by the start of the 12th round, and to play the game. Conversely, the upper limit number of spheres that can be stored in the sphere storage unit 920 may be reduced. As a result, even if the upper limit number of balls has been stored in the upper part of the ball storage portion 920 by the start of the 12th round, it is possible to provide the second specific winning port 650a with multiple opportunities to enter the ball in the 12th round. You can Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In this modification, in the twelfth round of the big hit F, the effect image shown in FIG. 76 is displayed when the ball storage 920 is opened, but the effect during the big hit is limited to this. is not. For example, the jackpot E or the jackpot F may be notified according to the result of the effect executed by the 11th round of the jackpot. More specifically, for example, in each of the first to eleventh rounds, an effect in which a ally of justice and a monster fight may be performed. Then, if the ally of justice wins by the 11th round, the jackpot F is notified, and if the ally of justice is defeated, the jackpot E may be notified. That is, when the teammate of justice wins, the second specific winning opening 650a is opened in the 12th round, so that the player can recognize that it is a chance to shift to the specially changed state of the special symbol. This makes it possible for the player to more interestingly observe the result of the effect performed in the jackpot.

  In addition, there is a variation in the effect contents, and the expectation that a teammate of justice will win (it is easy to select in case of big hit F) and the possibility that the teammate of justice will be defeated (in case of big hit E) The content of the effect may be provided. For example, if a ally of justice attacks the enemy with a special move, or if the ally of justice avoids the attack of the enemy, the odds of winning are increased, and the attack of the ally of justice is missed, It may be configured so that it is more likely to be defeated when the enemy attacks with a special move. As a result, not only the result of whether or not a ally of justice wins, but the result can be predicted by the flow of the production until winning or losing. Therefore, the interest of the player in the jackpot game can be improved.

  It should be noted that the content of the effect performed up to the 11th round is not limited to the above-described effect of fighting a ally of justice and a monster, and an advantageous jackpot F and a jackpot E, which is disadvantageous to the jackpot F, can be suggested. Any form may be used. For example, the boy character 710 may perform a search for a treasure, and if the treasure can be found by the 11th round, the jackpot F may be notified. It may be configured to display the effect of eating a large amount of food and notify that the jackpot is a big hit F when the provided food is completely exhausted.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the storage device 600 having a peculiar structure which is not mounted in a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the game play related to the storage device 600 is provided. You may stay. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear surface image, and the conditions under which the storage valve 607a is opened, the advantages when it is opened, and the disadvantages when the ball is hit to the right in the closed state. You may comprise so that the image (explanatory image) explaining may be displayed. This allows the player to easily understand the playability. Further, the back side type in which the explanation image is displayed may be configured so that the back side type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who has become accustomed to the game on the pachinko machine 10 and who fully understands the playability can change to the rear type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In this modification, both the second specific winning opening 650a and the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 are treated as winning openings for obtaining a jackpot of a big hit. The winning hole) 602 may be treated as a normal winning hole. In other words, as a termination condition for each round of jackpots, each round of jackpots ends when 10 or more balls enter the first specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 650a. It may be configured such that the number of balls entered into the winning opening 602 is not involved. As a result, the more the ball hits the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 602 in the 12 rounds of big hits, the more profitable the player can be, which further enhances the player's interest in the game.

  In this modified example, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the spheres can easily flow into the storage device 600, it is difficult to insert the spheres into the second specific winning port 650a, and the storage device 600 is stored. By adjusting the nails 921a and 921b so that the ball does not easily flow in, the ball is configured to easily enter the second specific winning port 650a. That is, by adjusting the nails 921a and 921b, it was configured to be able to change the rate of transition to the probability variation state of the special symbol after the jackpot, but to change the rate of transition to the probability variation state of the special symbol. The method is not limited to this. For example, instead of keeping the ratio of the balls flowing into the storage device 600 constant, inside the second variable winning device 650, a positive variation ball inlet 654 and a normal ball inlet 655 are provided as in the first embodiment. It may be configured. Then, the clerk in the hall may be configured to adjust the ratio of the balls that have flowed into the second variable winning device 650 to the positive variation ball entrance 654 and the normal ball entrance 655. More specifically, for example, the second variable winning a prize device 650 in the present modification is replaced with the second variable award winning device 650 (see FIG. 15) in the first embodiment, and then the flow path switching valve 650d and the switching. The shaft 650e and abolished. Then, for example, a nail may be struck at the branch position between the guide flow passage 652 and the guide flow passage 653 (that is, above the location where the switching shaft 650e was provided in the first embodiment). Further, the position at which the nail is hit may be, for example, a distance above the position where the switching shaft 650e is provided in the first embodiment (see FIG. 15), for example, a distance about the radius of the sphere. In other words, it may be a position where the sphere that has flowed down the guide flow channel 651 may come into contact (collision) and a position where the sphere can flow down to the guide flow channel 652 and the guide flow channel 653. With this configuration, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the right, the game ball that has flowed down the guide passage 651 will easily come into contact (collide) with the left side surface of the nail. Therefore, the ball tends to be repelled to the left in the front view. Therefore, the sphere easily flows into the guide flow channel 652 provided on the left side in front view downstream of the second variable winning device 650, and thus the sphere easily enters the certainty variation ball entrance 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right, the special symbol can be easily changed to a certain state after the jackpot. On the contrary, if the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 is adjusted to the left, the game ball that has flowed down the guide flow path 651 is likely to come into contact (collide) with the right side surface of the nail, so that the ball is in front. It tends to be repelled in the right direction. Therefore, the sphere easily flows into the guide flow path 653 provided on the left side in front view downstream of the second variable winning device 650, and thus the sphere easily enters the certainty variation ball entrance 654. Therefore, by adjusting the nail provided inside the second variable winning device 650 to the right, it is possible to make it difficult for the special symbol to be changed to a certain state after the jackpot is over. In this way, by making it possible to adjust the ease of entering the probability variation entrance 654, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be varied according to the business policy of the hall. Therefore, it is possible to provide the playability corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

  Further, as another specific example configured to be able to change the rate of transition to the special variation state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot, instead of the nails 921a and 921b in the present modification, the inlet portion of the storage device 600 is in an open state. A variable member for switching between the closed state and the closed state may be provided. The variable member may be configured to repeat the open state and the closed state while the power is on. In this case, after fixing the length of one cycle composed of the open state and the closed state (for example, 3 seconds), the period set to the open state and the period set to the closed state The ratio may be adjusted so that the holes can be adjusted. More specifically, for example, an operation means such as a DIP switch that can be set in a plurality of states is provided. Then, for example, when the state of the switch indicates (00000000B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is configured not to be closed. That is, since the entrance is always open, the game ball is set to a state in which it easily flows into the storage device 600. Then, if the state of the switch indicates (11111111B), the inlet of the storage device 600 is always set to the closed state. That is, in the jackpot, there is no ball that flows into the storage device 600, and the state is set such that the ball easily flows into the second specific winning port 650a. Then, when the dip switch is in another state (00000001B to 11111110B), the period in which the dip switch is in the closed state may be extended as going from (00000000B) to (11111111B). That is, it may be configured such that the ball is more likely to enter the second specific winning opening 650a as it goes to (11111111B), and the probability variation state of the special symbol is easily set after the jackpot is over. If configured in this way, the hole in which you want to use the pachinko machine 10 as a gaming machine that is unlikely to be in a sudden change state of the special symbol is, for example, a closed state of 0.5 seconds for the variable member and 2.5 seconds for the variable member. The DIP switch settings may be adjusted so that the open state is repeated. On the other hand, the hole that wants to use the pachinko machine 10 as a game machine having a game property that is likely to be in a state where the special symbol is likely to change, for example, the variable member repeats a closed state for 2.5 seconds and an open state for 0.5 seconds. Adjust the DIP switch setting. As a result, the specifications of the pachinko machine 10 can be varied according to the business policy of the hall, so that it is possible to provide highly versatile game play corresponding to the business policy of each hall.

<Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 94. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, the guide passage 704 provided inside the storage device 700 can be closed by the storage valve 704a, and one ball can be stored above the storage valve 704a in the closed state. Was configured. Then, in a state where the balls are stored, it becomes easy for the balls to enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 or the out opening (small value winning openings) 703d, 703e with many prize balls to be paid out. With the configuration, when the storage valve 704a is opened, the balls are easily introduced into the general winning opening (medium-value winning opening) 701 in which the number of prize balls to be paid out is small. The storage valve 704a is basically set to a closed state, and is configured to be opened when the player operates the release button 800. In other words, if the storage valve 704a is closed, there is a possibility that a ball will enter the general winning opening (large value winning opening) 702 and the out opening (small value winning opening) 703d, 703e (prize). There is a possibility that a large number of balls will be obtained, but there is a possibility that no prize balls will be obtained. A state in which a ball can be inserted into the mouth (medium-value winning hole) 701 (a small amount, but a stable winning ball can be obtained). Therefore, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched by the player depending on whether or not the release button 800 (see FIG. 67) is operated, so that each player selects the playability that suits his or her taste. It was configured to be able to play games.

  On the other hand, in this modification, a maximum of two spheres can be stored inside the storage device 700. In addition, when the storage valve 704a is closed, depending on the arrangement of the stored balls, it is easy for the balls to enter the ball (it is easy to enter the general winning port 702 or the out port). Is it easier to sphere) is configured to change. That is, when the storage valve 704a is closed, by confirming the arrangement of the stored balls, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. Is configured to be able to.

  The only difference between the pachinko machine 10 according to the modification of the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment in structure is the difference in the internal structure of the storage device 700. Regarding other configurations, various processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp controller 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display controller 114, the second embodiment will be described. It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the form. Hereinafter, the same elements as those of the second embodiment will be denoted by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 86, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present modification will be described. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification. As shown in FIG. 86, also in the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example, the storage device 700 is provided downstream of the path provided on the right side of the game board 13. As described above, in this modified example, a maximum of two spheres can be stored inside the storage device 700. Details of the storage device 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing an example in which the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 is closed and two balls are stored. As shown in FIG. 87, in this modified example, the storage valve 704a is inclined downward in the front right direction when viewed from the front. Therefore, most of the spheres that first flow into the guide passage 704 with the storage valve 704a closed are stationary in a state of being biased to the right side of the guide passage 704 due to the inclination of the storage valve 704a. Further, as shown in FIG. 87, the upper portion of the storage valve 704a in the guide passage 704 is longer than that in the second embodiment. In addition, the guide flow path 704 is not wide enough to have two balls arranged side by side. For this reason, when one sphere is stored in the guide flow path 704 to the right and another sphere flows into the guide flow path 704, in many cases, a new sphere is newly added to the upper left side of the previously stored sphere. Is stored (a new sphere is stored between the previously stored sphere and the inner wall portion on the left side of the guide flow path 704).

  In the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 87 (the first stored sphere is on the right side and the second stored sphere is on the left side, respectively), the spheres that have flowed into the storage device 700 after that are It becomes easy to collide with the right side surface of the second stored sphere. Therefore, the sphere that has flown into the storage device 700 changes its traveling direction to the right due to the impact of the collision (contact) with the stored sphere. That is, the sphere flows into the guide passage 708 and enters the out port (small value winning opening) 703d or 703e.

  As described above, in the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 87, even if the sphere can be made to flow into the storage device 700, the sphere enters the outlets (small value winning openings) 703d, 703e. The player cannot get the prize ball because the ball is hit. That is, the storage state shown in FIG. 87 is in a disadvantageous state for the player.

  A ball entrance sensor 704b is provided on the upper left side of the storage valve 704a in the guide passage 704 to detect the ball when the ball exists on the front side in front view. The ball placement sensor 704b can determine the placement of the ball. More specifically, when the incoming ball sensor 704b continues to detect spheres for a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute), it is determined that the arrangement is as shown in FIG. By determining whether or not the arrangement is as shown in FIG. 87, an image prompting the player to press the release button 800 when a certain period of time has elapsed after the arrangement of FIG. 87 is obtained (see FIG. 89). ) Can be displayed. As a result, the disadvantageous arrangement (refer to FIG. 87) in which the balls that have flowed into the storage device 700 are likely to enter the outlets (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e for a long time continues, which is a disadvantage for the player. It can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 88, another example in which two spheres are stored will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 88, the game sphere that first flows into the guide passage 704 with the storage valve 704a closed is stored to the left of the guide passage 704 and is the second guide passage. The sphere that has flowed into the flow path 704 is stored to the right of the guide flow path 704. In the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 88, the sphere that has flown into the storage device 700 after that easily collides (contacts) with the left side surface of the second stored sphere. Therefore, the falling direction of the balls that have collided (contacted) with the stored balls is likely to change to the left, so that the number of prize balls to be paid out that flow down the guidance flow path 706 is large (generally 6 payouts). It becomes easy to enter the winning opening (high value winning opening) 702.

  In this way, in the case of the storage state shown in FIG. 88, the balls are made to flow into the storage device 700, so that the balls easily enter the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. , It is in an advantageous state for a player who can expect to win a prize ball every time a ball flows in.

  Since the storage valve 704a is inclined downward to the lower right, the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is harder to realize than the storage state shown in FIG. 87. For example, when two spheres flow into the guide passage 704 almost simultaneously after the storage valve 704a is closed, or when the sphere that first reaches the storage valve 704a is the storage valve 704a or the guide passage 704. This can be realized, for example, when the second sphere flows into the guide flow path 704 while colliding with the inner wall portion and repulsing in the upper left direction.

  Most of the cases where the storage valve 704a is closed are in the storage state shown in FIG. 87, but also in this modification, the storage valve 704a can be opened by operating the release button 800 as in the second embodiment. .. That is, it is possible to reset the storage state and store the spheres in the storage device 700 in the expectation that the storage state shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with the goal of bringing the player into the storage state shown in FIG. 88, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved. Further, when the storage state shown in FIG. 88 is realized, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment, and to continue winning the ball into the general winning opening (medium value winning opening) 701. You can have a sense of expectation that you can get a lot of balls.

  Further, in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement is shifted from the ball entrance sensor 704b (the ball is not arranged to block the front side of the ball entrance sensor 704b), so that even if the arrangement shown in FIG. 88 continues for a long time. It is possible to prevent (suppress) displaying an image (see FIG. 89) that prompts the player to press the release button 800. Therefore, the advantageous state in which it is easy to enter the general winning opening (high-value winning opening) 702 can be continued for a longer time.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, an image (indication display image) prompting the user to press the release button 800 will be described. FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an image (indication display image) prompting the user to press the release button 800. This suggestion display image is an image displayed when it is determined that the arrangement, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for a certain time (1 minute), as shown in FIG. More specifically, when the ball input sensor 704b continuously detects a ball for 1 minute, it is determined that the ball is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. 87, and the suggestion display image is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 89, when the display of the suggestion display image is set, the character “Unfavorable arrangement” is displayed in the small area Ds2. By displaying this character, the arrangement shown in FIG. 89 for the player is an arrangement that is unfavorable to the player (the arrangement in which the balls flowing into the storage device 700 are guided to the outlets 703d and 703e). Can be made aware of that. Further, below the character "disadvantageous arrangement", a character "Push button to reset arrangement!!" is displayed. By displaying this character, it is possible to make the player recognize that the disadvantageous state is eliminated by pressing (operating) the release button 800.

  As described above, in the present modified example, the player is informed of the disadvantageous arrangement by the suggestion display image, and the depression (operation) of the release button 800 prompts the elimination of the disadvantageous arrangement, and the advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88). A game can be played aiming at becoming the arrangement shown in which the ball is guided to the general winning opening 702). Therefore, the player can be actively participated in the game.

  In this embodiment, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed when a long time (1 minute) has passed while the player is in a disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87). Instead of this, the storage valve 704a may be configured to be switched to an open state (released state). That is, when the sphere sensor 704b continuously detects a sphere for a fixed time (for example, 1 minute), it is determined that the sphere is stored in an unfavorable state, and the arrangement of the spheres stored in the storage device 700 is reset. For this purpose, the storage valve 704a may be opened. Thereby, even a beginner who does not fully understand the mechanism of the storage device 700 can suppress playing a game for a long time without noticing a disadvantageous state.

  In this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to open when the ball sensor 704b continuously detects a ball for 1 minute, but the arrangement of FIG. 87 is reset (the storage valve 704a is opened). The time up to () is not limited to this, and may be set arbitrarily. By shortening the time (for example, 30 seconds), it is possible to shorten the period in which the player is in a disadvantageous state. Further, by increasing the time (for example, 5 minutes), it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the suggestion display image is displayed. Therefore, the processing load of the display control device 114 can be reduced.

<Regarding Electrical Configuration in Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 90, an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present modification will be described. The electrical configuration of the modified example of the second embodiment is that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is partially changed from that of the electrical configuration of the second embodiment, and that of the voice lamp control device 113. The difference is that a ball entrance sensor 228 is electrically connected to the input/output port 225. The other electrical configuration is the same as the electrical configuration in the second embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In addition to the configuration of the RAM 223 in the second embodiment, the RAM 223 in the modified example of the second embodiment has at least a disadvantage time counter 223m and a suggestion display flag 223n.

  The disadvantage time counter 223m is a counter used for determining the elapsed time after the player is placed at a disadvantage (a state where the ball is guided to the outlets 703d and 703e) shown in FIG. 87. The value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is incremented by 1 each time the ball sensor 228 detects a ball (S4503 in FIG. 92). Further, when the ball is not detected by the ball entrance sensor 228 in the state in which the counter value is added (the value is larger than 0), the ball is reset to 0 (S4508 in FIG. 92). In this modification, when it is determined that the player is in an unfavorable arrangement for the player (a state in which the ball is guided to the outlets 703d and 703e) shown in FIG. 87 based on the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m, Control is performed so that the above-described suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed.

  The suggestion display flag 223n is a flag indicating whether or not the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed. If this suggestion display flag 223n is on, it indicates that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is being displayed, and if it is off, that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not being displayed. Showing. This suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON when the display of the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is set (see S4506 in FIG. 92). On the other hand, when the storage state command indicating that the storage valve 704a is set to the open state (released state) is received, it is set to off (see S4607 in FIG. 94).

<Regarding Control Process of Voice Lamp Control Device in Modification of Second Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94, various processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the modification of the second embodiment will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 91, a main process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present modification will be described.

  Of the main processing (see FIG. 92) in this modification, in each processing of S1801 to S1817, the same processing as each processing of S1801 to S1817 in the second embodiment is executed. Further, in the main process (see FIG. 92) in this modified example, when the liquid crystal effect execution management process (S1810) is completed, then a cancellation suggestion display process for displaying the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is executed ( (S1821), and the process proceeds to S1811. Details of the cancellation suggestion display process (S1821) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the cancellation suggestion display process (S1821). In this cancellation suggestion display processing, first, it is determined whether or not the ball entrance sensor 228 is on (S4501), and if it is determined that it is on (S4501: Yes), then the suggestion display flag 223n is on. It is determined whether there is any (S4502). If the suggestion display flag 223n is on (S4502: Yes), the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is already being displayed, and it is not necessary to determine whether or not to display the suggestion display image. This process ends.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4502, when it is determined that the suggestion display flag 223n is off (S4502: No), the value is updated by adding 1 to the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m (S4503), and the disadvantage time after the update. It is determined whether or not the value of the counter 223m is larger than 60000 (S4504). Here, the disadvantage time counter 223m is updated by 1 (every 1 ms) each time the main processing (see FIG. 91) is performed, so the counter value 60000 corresponds to 1 minute.

  In the process of S4503, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is 60000 or less (S4504: No), the present process is directly terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is larger than 60000 (S4504: Yes), a suggestion for informing the player that a long time (1 minute) has elapsed after the disadvantageous arrangement is made. A display rear image change command for displaying the display is set (S4505), the suggestion display flag 223n is set to ON (S4506), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4501, if the ball entrance sensor 228 determines that the ball is not detected (the ball entrance sensor is off) (S4501: No), there is no disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87). Therefore, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S4507). As a result of the determination in S4507, when it is determined that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is larger than 0 (S4507: Yes), the counter value is initialized to 0 (S4508), and the present process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the disadvantage time counter 223m is 0 (S4507: No), the disadvantage time counter 223m has already been initialized and there is no need to initialize it again, so the process of S4508 is skipped. Then, this processing is finished.

  By executing this cancellation suggestion display processing (S1821), the player may play the game for a long time while the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 remains unfavorable to the player (see FIG. 87). Can be prevented.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a command determination process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device according to the modification of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing. Of the command determination processing, in each processing of S1901 to S1919 and S1921, the same processing as each processing of S1901 to S1919 and S1921 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 72) in the second embodiment is executed. .. Further, in the command determination process in the present modification, in the process of S1921, when it is determined that the storage state command is received from the main control device 110 (S1921: Yes), an image corresponding to the received storage state command is displayed. The storage state command process is executed (S1929), and this process ends.

  Details of the storage state command process (S1929) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing this storage state command processing (S1929). In the storage state command processing (S1929), first, it is determined whether or not the storage state command has notified that the storage valve 704a has been switched to the closed state (storage state) (S4601). Then, when it is determined that it is notified that the state has been switched to the closed state (stored state) (S4601: Yes), then the image corresponding to the closed state (see FIG. 63(a)) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. A display rear image change command for display is set (S4602), and the storage state flag 223k is set to ON to indicate that the storage valve 704a is in the closed state (S4603), and the process proceeds to S4604. And transition.

  On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, when it is determined that the notification of the storage state command is not the closed state (storage state) (it is notified that the state is switched to the open state (released state)) (S4601: No) , Next, the display rear image change command for displaying the image (see FIG. 63(b)) corresponding to the open state (released state) on the third symbol display device 81 is set (S4605), and the storage valve The storage state flag 223k is set to OFF to indicate that the current state of 704a is the open state (release state) (S4606). Then, to indicate that the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is not displayed, the suggestion display flag 223n is set to OFF (S4607), and the process proceeds to S4604.

  In the process of S4603 or S4604 that is executed after the process of S4607, in order to determine whether or not it is a pitching period from the switching of the storage valve 704a to the pitching of the ball, the downflow time counter 223l is checked. A counter value corresponding to 1 second is set (S4604), and this processing ends. By executing this storage state command processing (S1931), the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be appropriately updated in association with the state of the storage valve 704a notified from the main control device 110.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the second embodiment is configured so that two balls can be stored inside the storage device 700. Further, as the storage state when the balls are stored inside, at least the storage state shown in FIG. 87 and the storage state shown in FIG. 88 can be taken. In these storage states, the ball entrance into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device 700 is likely to enter is different. Moreover, since the inside of the storage device 700 is configured to be visible to the player, the storage state can be easily visually determined. Therefore, the player can select whether or not it is better to reset the storage state by setting the storage valve 704a to the open state once.

  Further, an advantageous storage state (a storage state in which a ball easily enters the general winning opening 701 shown in FIG. 88) and a disadvantageous storage state (a storage state in which a ball easily enters the out opening shown in FIG. 87) By providing and, the game can be played in the expectation that it will be in an advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88). And, even if it becomes a disadvantageous storage state (see FIG. 87), the storage state is reset by opening the storage valve 704a, and again aims at an advantageous storage state (see FIG. 88). Can be done. In addition, it is possible to give the player a sense of accomplishment due to the advantageous storage state, and to win a lot of prize balls by continuing to enter the balls into the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702. You can have a sense of anticipation for what you can do.

  Although the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification is configured to store two balls inside the storage device 700, the present invention is not limited to this, and may have an internal structure capable of storing three or more balls. .. In this case, if the ball entrance sensor 228 is provided near the upper end of the guide flow path 704 on the left side, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in a disadvantageous arrangement in which it is guided to the out port.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present modified example, by providing the ball entrance sensor 228 near the upper end of the guide flow path 704 to the left, is the arrangement of the balls stored inside the storage device 700 unfavorable to the player? Although it is configured to be able to determine whether or not it is, the mounting position of the ball entrance sensor 228 is not limited to this. For example, it may be arranged near the upper end of the guide flow path 704 to the right. That is, when the balls stored in the storage device 700 have the arrangement shown in FIG. 87, the stored balls are not detected by the ball entrance sensor 228, but in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88, The incoming ball sensor 228 may be arranged such that the upper ball of the stored balls is detected by the incoming ball sensor 228. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the ball is arranged so as to easily enter the general winning opening 702 (see FIG. 88). Therefore, based on the detection result of the ball entrance sensor 228, for example, when the ball is continuously detected by the ball entrance sensor 228 for 5 seconds or more, it can be determined that the ball is stationary in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88. .. Therefore, based on the fact that the stored balls shown in FIG. 88 are advantageous to the player, the fact that the current state is advantageous to the player is notified. You can As a method of informing, for example, in the small area Ds2 of the third symbol display device 81, a character string "advantageous arrangement" and a character string "Great chance to hit right!" are displayed. You may. This allows the player to easily recognize that the present state is advantageous, so that the release button 800 is pressed (operated) by mistake to cause the balls stored in the storage device 700 to flow down. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of resetting (advantageous resetting).

  Further, the number of ball entrance sensors 228 is not limited to one, but a plurality of ball sensors may be provided. More specifically, for example, the ball entrance sensors 228 may be provided near the upper end of the guide flow path 704 on the right side and on the left side, respectively. Accordingly, when the sensor provided on the left side continuously detects the sphere for 5 seconds, for example, it can be determined that the sensor is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. Further, when the sensor provided on the right side continues to detect the sphere for, for example, 5 seconds continuously, it can be determined that the arrangement is stable in the arrangement shown in FIG. 88. Therefore, in the case of the arrangement shown in FIG. 87 (arrangement that is disadvantageous to the player in which the ball is guided to the outlets 703d and 703e), the game is displayed by displaying the above-described suggestion display image (see FIG. 89). It is possible to urge the person to reset the unfavorable arrangement. Further, in the case of the arrangement of FIG. 88 (arrangement advantageous for the player in which the ball is guided to the general winning opening 702), an image notifying that the arrangement is advantageous for the player (for example, “advantageous” By displaying the image "displayed in the small area Ds2" in which the characters "arranged" and the characters "right hitting a big chance!" are displayed, it is possible to recognize that the current state is advantageous, and the game Motivation can be improved.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to incline in the lower right direction, but the inclination may be reversed. As a result, a storage state that is advantageous for the player (see FIG. 88) is easily realized, and the player can be more positively aimed at the storage device 700 to hit a ball. Further, the inclination formed by the storage valve 704a may be eliminated. This makes it possible to completely randomize the advantageous storage state or the disadvantageous storage state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present modification, the trigger for opening the storage valve 704a is only the pressing (operation) of the release button 800, but other triggers may be provided. For example, the storage valve 704a may be set to an open state during a big hit, or the storage state may be reset periodically. If the player is completely entrusted with the opportunity to reset the stored state, once the advantageous stored state (see FIG. 88) is reached, the game is continued while maintaining the stored state, and the hole is unsuccessful. It may be profitable. On the other hand, if the storage state is reset periodically, it is possible to prevent (suppress) the advantageous storage state from continuing for a long time, so that it is possible to prevent disadvantages for the holes.

  In this modification, the state of the storage valve 704a is switched based on the depression (operation) of the release button 800, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched according to the elapsed time, the current time, the number of installation days, or the like. This allows each player to start the game while the storage valve 704a is in a state suitable for his or her taste.

  Further, the state of the storage valve 704a may be switched based on the result of the lottery that is performed regularly or irregularly. For example, the storage valve 704a is basically configured to be in a closed state (storage state), and a lottery is performed once a minute to switch to the open state (released state). May be. When the lottery is won, the storage valve 704a may be opened for 10 seconds, for example. Thereby, when the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is a disadvantageous arrangement (see FIG. 87) in which the balls are easily guided to the outlets (small value winning openings) 703d and 703e, the lottery is won. By doing so, a game can be played in the hope that the storage valve 704a will be opened. On the other hand, when the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700 is an advantageous arrangement (see FIG. 88) in which the balls are easily guided to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 702 (see FIG. 88), the storage valve 704a is opened. You can play the game in the hope that you will continue to miss the lottery. Therefore, since different lottery results can be expected depending on the arrangement of the balls stored in the storage device 700, novel game play can be provided. Further, the clerk of the hall or the like may adjust the lottery probability of the lottery whether or not to set the storage valve 704a in the open state (released state). As a result, when the player selects one of the plurality of pachinko machines 10 to play a game, it is possible to predict a table having a good lottery probability and perform the machine selection. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 can be selected in consideration of the habit when setting the lottery probability of the hole, so that the interest of the player can be improved at the stage of selecting the machine before starting the game. .

  In this modified example, since the storage device 700 having a peculiar structure which is not mounted on a general game machine is provided, an effect for explaining the game property related to the storage device 700 may be provided. More specifically, for example, an image of the storage device 600 is displayed as a rear surface image, and an image (explanatory image) for explaining conditions under which the storage valve 704a is opened, merits and demerits of being opened is displayed. It may be configured to do so. This allows the player to easily understand the playability. Further, the back side type in which the explanation image is displayed may be configured such that the back side type can be switched by pressing (operating) the frame button 22. As a result, a player who is accustomed to the game on the pachinko machine 10 and who fully understands the playability can change to the rear type in which the explanation image is not displayed.

  In this modification, the storage valve 704a is configured to be opened only while the release button 800 is being pressed (operated), but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when the pressing (operation) of the release button 800 is detected, the storage valve 704a may be set to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). In this case, the operation of the release button 800 may not be accepted during the predetermined period in which the storage valve 704a is opened. This eliminates the need to continue pressing the release button 800 in order to keep the storage valve 704a open. Further, each time the release button 800 is pressed (operated), the closed state (storage state) and the open state (released state) may be switched. With such a configuration, since the release button 800 only needs to be operated when it is desired to switch the state, the number of times the player operates can be reduced. Further, contrary to the release button 800, an operation means for closing the storage valve 704a by operating may be provided. Even with this configuration, as in the present embodiment, each player can be made to select a game characteristic that suits his or her taste.

  In the present modified example, when a certain time (1 minute) has elapsed after the player is placed at a disadvantageous position shown in FIG. 87, the suggestion display image (see FIG. 89) is displayed to release it to the player. Although it is configured to prompt the user to press (operate) the button 800, the method of pressing (operating) the release button 800 is not limited to this. For example, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 may be configured as one body (that is, the frame button 22 and the release button 800 are combined into one operation button, and the main control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113 are integrated. May be electrically connected to each other). Then, when it is determined that the ball sensor 704b has continuously detected the ball for a certain period (1 minute) or more (that is, the arrangement is unfavorable to the player shown in FIG. 87), the frame button 22 is pressed. It may be configured such that the variation type in which the effect is developed can be easily selected. Accordingly, when the frame button 22 is pressed (operated) to develop the effect, the storage valve 704a can be simultaneously set to the open state (released state). In general, since the player observes the result of the fluctuating effect informing whether or not it is a big hit most interestingly, when the fluctuating effect in which the effect is developed by pressing the frame button 22 is executed, the frame button 22 is surely pressed. It is possible for the player to recognize that the player is being urged. Therefore, the disadvantageous state (see FIG. 87) can be reset more reliably.

  In this modification, the first specific winning opening 65a is provided below the first winning opening 64 in a front view so that the ball enters the first specific winning opening 65a by left-handed hitting. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, like the first embodiment, the first specific winning port 65a may be provided downstream of the storage device 700. As a result, the ball can be made to flow into the first specific winning opening 65a and the storage device 700 only by performing a right hit in the special game state (big hit state), and thus the prize ball in the special game state (big hit state) You can do more. Therefore, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the storage valve 607a of the storage device 600 and the storage valve 704a of the storage device 700 are provided by slidingly moving to the front side in front view and the back side in front view. Although the flow path is closed and the sphere can be stored above the flow path, the operation of the storage valve is not limited to this. For example, in the closed state, the storage valve is configured to stand upright with respect to the inner wall portion of the flow channel to close the flow channel, and in the open state, the storage valve collapses in the downstream direction of the flow channel. The flow path may be configured so that spheres can pass through. Further, the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a do not need to completely close the guide flow passage 607 and the guide flow passage 704, respectively. For example, in a state where the width of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is shortened and the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a protrudes to the front side in front view, a state in which the guide passage 607 or the guide passage 704 is partially opened is You may comprise so that it may become. Further, the widths of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a may be set so that the width of the open portion is equal to or smaller than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the price of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. Further, when the guide flow channel 607 and the guide flow channel 704 are set to the open state (released state) by the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a, the guide flow channel 607 and the guide flow channel 704 do not have to be completely opened. .. That is, a part of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be in a state of protruding into the guide flow passage 607 or the guide flow passage 704. In addition, the width of the open portion of the guide channel 607 or the guide channel 704 may be set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the operating range between the open state and the closed state of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be narrowed, so that the power consumed for switching the states of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a can be reduced. it can. Further, if the width of the open portion is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere, although the inflowing sphere may come into contact with the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a to reduce the downflow momentum, the sphere eventually flows down. (It can be made hard to be stored (held) at the positions of the storage valve 607a and the storage valve 704a). Therefore, even with this configuration, the same operation as that of each of the above-described embodiments can be realized. That is, it is possible to form a state in which the sphere can be stored on the guide flow channel 607 and the guide flow channel 704 and a state in which the sphere flowing into the guide flow channel 607 and the guide flow channel 704 flows down to the downstream side. ..

  In each of the above-described embodiments, both ends of the respective ball entrances provided in the storage devices are out ports, but the out ports at both ends may be omitted. Even if the out port is abolished and the inner wall is used, the ball can enter the other entrance port. Further, by eliminating the outlets at both ends, the storage device can be made more compact.

  In each of the above embodiments, a plurality of outlets are provided inside the storage device, but instead of the outlets provided inside the storage device, an outlet 66 provided below the game board 13 in front view. (See FIG. 2) It is also possible to use a flow path that allows the sphere to flow down to. As a result, only one out port can be provided, and therefore it is sufficient to detect only the number of balls that have entered the out port 66 in order to grasp the number of discharged balls. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of detection switches for detecting the entry of a ball, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the balls stored in the upper portion of the storage valve are one ball (the first embodiment, the modified example of the first embodiment, and the second embodiment) or two balls (the modified example of the second embodiment). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured to store three or more spheres. Furthermore, when a plurality of balls are stored, they may be stored vertically or may be arranged side by side. In this case, the number of balls stored above the storage valve may be configured to be countable. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, five balls can be stored above the storage valve 607a, and the storage valve 607a may be opened when the fifth ball is stored. .. As a result, immediately after the storage valve 607a is opened, five balls flow down to the general winning opening (high value winning opening) 602 all at once, so that a large amount (5×15) of winning balls are paid out in a short time. Can be received. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player desire to store the balls inside the storage device 600, the player's motivation for the game can be increased.

  In each of the above embodiments, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a may be closed while the power is cut off. That is, when the shutoff of the power supply is detected, the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a is set to be closed, and when the power is turned on, the state of the storage valve 607a or the storage valve 704a at the time of power shutoff is restored. May be. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress an illegality in which a ball is thrown into the storage device 600 or the storage device 700 while the power is cut off, and a prize ball is immediately acquired when the power is restored.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the ball entrance (prize entrance) into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device enters is fixed by the guide flow path through which the ball flows (that is, the arrangement of each ball entrance). Was fixed), but is not limited to this. For example, the position of the entrance may be changed periodically or randomly. More specifically, a known clune or the like may be arranged on the bottom surface of the storage device, and each winning port (ball entrance) may be annularly provided on the clune. Then, by rotating the clune, the winning opening (ball entrance) into which the balls flowing down the respective guide channels flow may be given randomness. This allows the player to watch the ball entrance into which the ball that has flowed into the storage device is interesting. Therefore, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the inside of the storage device is configured to be visible, but it may be configured to make it difficult to view the inside of the storage device from the front.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 controls opening and closing of the storage valve, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 may control the storage valve. More specifically, the storage device solenoid 610 may be electrically connected to the input/output port 225 of the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, the processing load of the MPU 201 of main controller 110 can be reduced. Therefore, the main process relating to the game, the selection process of the variation effect, the lottery process of the special symbol, etc. can be executed without delay.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, when a ball enters each entrance (prize), the number of prize balls according to the type of entrance (prize) is paid out. , But is not limited to this. For example, it is applied to a type of pachinko machine that does not receive a prize ball as a game value such as an enclosed pachinko machine. It may be configured to increase the balance.

  All or part of the above-described embodiments may be combined.

  The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from those of the above embodiments. For example, once a big hit occurs, a pachinko machine (commonly called a 2nd right thing, a 3rd right thing, etc.) that can increase the expected value of a big hit until a big hit state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 or 3 times) including that. Referred to as). Further, after the jackpot pattern is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player on condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. In addition, it may be implemented in a pachinko machine which is in a special game state, having a winning device having a special area such as a V zone, and winning a ball in the special area is a necessary condition. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, various game machines such as arepaches, sparrow balls, slot machines, game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are integrated may be implemented.

  In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in the state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is that "a display device that variably displays an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and then confirms the identification information is provided, and is caused by the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started by the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses, the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed, and then stopped. It becomes a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, or the like. Take as an example.

  Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for fixedly displaying the symbols after variably displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols is provided, and a handle for ball launching is provided. Some are not. In this case, after throwing in a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the fluctuation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or the predetermined By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the definite symbol at the time of stopping is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a special game value. Is a large amount of balls dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as a gaming value in the gaming hall, which is the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment and the restriction on the place where the game machine is installed due to the separate handling of the medal and the ball.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Give a prize ball to a ball that has entered the holding device at the time of a big hit)
A specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down, a ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball down the first flow path can enter, and A specific privilege granting unit for granting a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entering unit; The first distribution state in which the game spheres that have flowed into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the game ball is easily distributed to the second flow path in comparison with the first distribution state. And a setting means capable of setting the flow path distribution means that can be changed to a distribution status and the status of the flow path distribution means to at least the first distribution status and the second distribution status according to the gaming status. A game machine A1 characterized by.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball is won based on winning a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, there is known one having a plurality of winning openings through which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins. In this conventional game machine, by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning hole, it is possible to change the number of prize balls obtainable according to the direction in which the player shoots the game balls. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

  However, since the number of prize balls that can be won by winning is generally larger than the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize hole, the player usually decides whether or not he or she wins. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. In other words, it was common for a player to keep hitting a game ball in the same direction until a hit. Therefore, when the player hits a ball in the same direction, the ball may continue to win the same winning opening, and the number of prize balls to be paid out may be scarce. That is, the game may be monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the specific flow path is branched into the first flow path and the second flow path. When the game ball flows down the second channel based on the game ball entering the ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first channel can enter. A specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the above is granted by the predetermined privilege granting means. The first distribution state in which the game spheres flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path as compared to the first distribution state. The flow path distribution means can be changed. The state of the flow path distribution means is changed to at least a first distribution state and a second distribution state by the setting means according to the game state.

  As a result, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, it becomes easy to give a specific privilege by the game balls flowing into the specific flow path, and the game is set to the second distribution state. In the state, it becomes difficult to give a specific privilege. Therefore, even if the player hits the game ball toward the specific flow path, the privilege granted according to the game state can be made different, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. There is an effect.

  In the gaming machine A1, a normal ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and a predetermined ball based on the game ball entering the normal ball entering means. A gaming machine A2 comprising: a gaming value granting means for imparting a gaming value, wherein the specific privilege granting means grants a gaming value higher than the predetermined gaming value as the specific privilege.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are produced. That is, the normal ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and based on the game ball entering the normal ball entering means, a predetermined value is given by the game value adding means. A gaming value is given. By the specific privilege granting means, a gaming value higher than a predetermined gaming value is granted as the specific privilege.

  As a result, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, a larger number of games are played when the game balls flow into the specific flow path, as compared with the gaming state set to the second distribution state. It's easier to get value. Therefore, since the game value given according to the game state can be made different, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition, and a bonus game in which the game state is advantageous to a player based on the lottery result of the lottery means being a specific lottery result And a game state setting means for setting the state, wherein the setting means sets the state of the flow path distributing means to the first distribution state based on the setting to the privilege game state by the game state setting means. A gaming machine A3 characterized by being set to.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, the following effects are produced. That is, the lottery means executes the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is advantageous to the player by the game state setting means on the basis that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result. Is set to. Based on the fact that the gaming state setting means has set the privilege gaming state, the state of the flow channel sorting means is set to the first sorting state by the setting means.

  As a result, when the gaming state is set to the special gaming state, the special gaming state is advantageous to the player, and more gaming value is given by the game balls flowing into the specific flow path. It is easy to be done. Therefore, the privilege game state can be made more advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's expectation of the bonus game state.

  In the gaming machine A3, a variable ball entering means capable of changing between a first ball entering state in which a game ball can enter and a second ball entering state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter in comparison with the first ball entering state. Based on that the special value imparting means for imparting a specific game value based on the fact that a game ball enters the variable admission means, and the privilege game state set by the game state setting means A gaming machine A4 comprising: a variable control means for varying the variable ball entering means to the first ball entering state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable ball entering means is changed to a first ball entering state in which the game ball can enter and a second ball entering state in which the game ball is less likely to enter than the first ball entering state, and the variable A specific game value is imparted by the specific value imparting means based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball injecting means. Based on the fact that the game state setting means sets the privilege game state, the variable control means changes the variable ball entering means to the first ball entering state until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  As a result, the game ball can enter the variable ball entering means in the privilege game state, so that a specific game value can be obtained by aiming the ball at the variable ball entering means. Therefore, in the privilege game state, it is possible to make the player obtain more game value, and thus it is possible to further increase the player's expectation of the privilege game state.

  In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the game value giving means gives a predetermined amount of game medium as the predetermined game value when a game ball enters the normal ball entering means. The gaming machine A5, wherein the specific privilege granting unit grants a game medium of an amount larger than the predetermined amount as the specific privilege when a game ball enters the ball entering unit.

  According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A2 to A4, the following effect is produced. That is, when the game ball enters the normal ball entering means, the game value giving means gives a predetermined amount of game medium as a predetermined game value. When the game ball enters the ball entering means, the specific privilege granting means grants an amount of game medium larger than a predetermined amount as the specific privilege.

  As a result, the player can play the game using the provided game medium, so that the game can be played longer. Therefore, there is an effect that the operating rate of the gaming machine can be improved.

  In the gaming machine A4 or A5, the variable control means sets the variable ball entry means from the second ball entry state to the first ball entry state based on the fact that the game state setting means sets the privilege game state. Is changed to a predetermined number of times, and the game state setting means sets the game state different from the privilege game state based on the variable control means being changed the predetermined number of times by the variable control means. A gaming machine A6 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are produced. That is, the variable ball entering means is changed a predetermined number of times from the second ball entering state to the first ball entering state by the variable control means based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means. Based on the variable control means changing the variable ball entering means a predetermined number of times, the game state setting means sets a game state different from the privilege game state.

  As a result, in the one privilege game state, the player is given a chance to enter the ball into the variable ball entering means a predetermined number of times, so that the player can obtain more specific game value. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further increase the player's expectation of the bonus game state.

  In any of the gaming machines A4 to A6, the specific value giving means gives a specific amount of game medium as the specific game value, and the gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A4 to A6, a specific amount of game medium is added as a specific game value by the specific value adding means. Can be played. Therefore, it is possible to allow the player to play the game for a longer period of time, which has the effect of improving the operating rate of the gaming machine.

  In any one of the game machines A4 to A7, a guide flow path that can guide a game ball to the specific flow path is provided, and the variable ball entering means is the specific flow of the game balls flowing into the guide flow path. A gaming machine A8, which is provided at a position where a gaming ball that has not flowed into the road can enter.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A4 to A7, the gaming sphere is guided to the specific flow path by the guiding flow path, and to the specific flow path of the game balls flowing into the guiding flow path. Since the variable ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball that did not flow can enter, the player simply hits the game ball into the guide channel in the special game state, and the specific channel and variable ball A sphere can be flowed into the means. Therefore, in the privilege game state, it is possible to obtain a specific privilege and a specific game value, so that the merit of the player in the privilege game state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further increase the player's expectation of the bonus game state.

  In any of the gaming machines A4 to A8, a counting means for counting the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means is provided, and the variable control means has at least a predetermined number of the number counted by the counting means. Based on this, the variable ball entering means is changed to the second ball entering state, and the game state setting means sets the specific condition in the privilege game state, whereby the bonus game is achieved. The setting means sets the gaming state different from the state, and the setting means sets the flow path sorting means to the flow passage sorting means for at least a predetermined period from the setting of the privilege gaming state to the establishment of the specific condition. A gaming machine A9, which is set to one distribution state.

  According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A4 to A8, the following effect is produced. That is, the number of game balls entering the variable ball entering means is counted by the counting means. At least when the number counted by the counting means reaches the predetermined number, the variable ball entering means is changed to the second ball entering state by the variable control means. When the specific condition is established in the privilege game state, the game state setting means sets a game state different from the privilege game state. The flow path distributing means is set to the first distributing state by the setting means at least for a predetermined period from the setting of the privilege game state to the establishment of the specific condition.

  As a result, the opportunity for the player to obtain a specific game value can be limited until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable ball entering means. Therefore, it is possible to play a game during the privilege game state in the hope that more game balls will flow into the specific flow path before the predetermined number is reached and the specific privilege is given more times. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in the bonus game state of the player.

  In any of the gaming machines A3 to A9, a ball detection unit that detects that a game ball has entered the normal ball input unit, and the normal ball input unit during the privilege game state by the ball detection unit. A gaming machine A10, further comprising: an informing unit that executes a predetermined informing when it is detected that a game ball has entered.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines A3 to A9, the fact that the game ball has entered the normal ball entering means is detected by the ball entering detecting means, and the ball entering detecting means detects the privilege game. When it is detected that the game ball has entered the normal ball entering means during the state, a predetermined notification is executed by the notification means, so that the flow path distributing means is set even though the privilege game state is set. When a defect that is not set to the first distribution state occurs, the defect can be made known to a player or a store clerk by a predetermined notification. Therefore, there is an effect that the defect can be promptly resolved.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the first flow path is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is more likely to flow in than the second flow path, The flow path distribution means opens the first flow path in the first distribution state and closes the first flow path in the second distribution state, and the second flow path is the first flow path. A gaming machine A11, which is provided at a position where a game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided while the flow path is closed.

  According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effect obtained by any of the game machines A1 to A10, the following effect is obtained. That is, the first flow path is provided at a position where the game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path are more likely to flow in than the second flow path. The first flow path is opened by the flow path distribution means in the first distribution state, and the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state. The second flow path is provided at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided while the first flow path is closed.

  As a result, it is possible to change the flow path through which the game ball flowing into the specific flow path flows down depending on whether or not the first flow path is closed. Therefore, even if the player continuously hits the game ball toward the specific flow path, the specific privilege may or may not be granted, which can prevent the game from becoming monotonous. ..

  In the gaming machine A11, the flow path distributing means is capable of holding up to a predetermined upper limit number of game balls upstream of the closed position when the first flow path is closed in the second distributed state. Yes, the second flow path contacts the held game ball and the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path. The gaming machine A12 is provided at a position where the inflow is facilitated based on a change in the downflow direction.

  According to the gaming machine A12, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A11. That is, when the first flow path is closed in the second distribution state, the flow path distribution means holds the game balls up to a predetermined upper limit number upstream of the closed position. Based on the fact that in the state where a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are held on the first flow path, the held game ball and the game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path come into contact with each other and the flow direction changes. The second flow path is provided at a position where it easily flows in.

  As a result, even if the player continuously hits the game ball toward the specific flow path, the specific privilege may or may not be granted, which can prevent the game from becoming monotonous. is there.

  In any of the gaming machines A1 to A12, it is provided with display means for displaying an image and display control means for controlling the display means to display an image according to the state of the flow path distributing means. Characteristic game machine A13.

  According to the gaming machine A13, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines A1 to A12, the display control means controls the display means to display an image corresponding to the state of the flow path distributing means. There is an effect that the player can easily recognize the state of the flow path distributing means.

  In the gaming machine A13, the display control means sets the specific value when the game ball flows into the specific flow path based on the setting means setting the flow path distribution means to the first distribution state. An amusement machine A14, which displays an image indicating that a privilege is easily given.

  According to the gaming machine A14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A13, the flow path sorting means is set to the first sorting state by the setting means, and is specified when the game ball flows into the specific flow path. An image suggesting that the privilege is easily given is displayed by the display control means. As a result, even if the player is a beginner, it is possible to easily understand the merits when the game ball flows into the specific flow path.

<Characteristic B group> (Switches the flow paths of other balls with the balls held in the holding device)
A specific flow path branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path are provided at a position where the game ball can enter. There is a first entering means, a first giving means for giving a first game value based on a game ball entering the first entering means, and a game flowing down the second flow path. Second ball entering means provided at a position where the ball can enter, and the first game provided by the first providing means based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A second giving means for giving a second game value different from a value, a first position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the first flow path on the first flow path, and a first position thereof. The variable means that can change the game ball that has flowed into the first flow path to the second position that is difficult to be held on the first flow path in comparison with the position, and the variable means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. A switching unit for switching from the first position to the second position is provided, and the variable unit holds the game ball, and thereby easily guides the game ball to the second flow path by the held game ball. A gaming machine B1 characterized in that

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that conducts a lottery as to whether or not a game ball is won based on winning a specific winning opening. In addition to a specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided for paying out the winning ball when the ball wins. This conventional type gaming machine is capable of changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the direction in which the player shoots the game balls, by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning hole. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

  However, since the number of prize balls that can be won by winning is generally larger than the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize hole, the player usually decides whether or not he or she wins. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. In other words, it was common for a player to keep hitting a game ball in the same direction until a hit. Therefore, when the player hits a ball in the same direction, the ball may continue to win the same winning opening, and the number of prize balls to be paid out may be scarce. That is, the game may be monotonous.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine B1, the specific flow path is branched into a plurality of flow paths including at least a first flow path and a second flow path. The first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and the first ball is first entered by the first giving means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means. The game value of is added. Further, the second ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the first ball giving means causes the game ball to enter the second ball entering means. A second game value different from the first game value given is given by the second giving means. A first position at which at least one game ball that has flowed into the first flow path can be held on the first flow path, and a game ball that has flowed into the first flow path in comparison with the first position is on the first flow path. The variable means is changed to the second position that is difficult to hold. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Here, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the held game ball easily guides the game ball to the second flow path.

  As a result, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the specific flow path, the game ball entering the specific flow path enters depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be changed to the first game value and the second game value depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine B1, the first game value given by the first giving means has a higher game value than the second game value given by the second giving means. A gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the first game value given by the first giving means is constituted so that the game value is larger than the second game value given by the second giving means, and therefore, to the player. It is possible to make the player feel that he/she wants the game ball to flow into the specific flow path when the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a lottery result by the lottery means are set to a privilege game state advantageous to a player based on a specific lottery result. A variable state ball that can be varied between a game state setting means, a first ball state in which a game ball can enter, and a second ball state in which a game ball is hard to enter in comparison with the first ball state. Means, a specific value giving means for giving a specific game value based on a game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and based on being set to the privilege game state by the game state setting means And variable control means for varying the variable ball entry means to the first ball entry state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the switching means is set to the privilege game state by the game state setting means. Based on this, the game machine B3 is characterized in that the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position.

  According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effect is achieved. That is, the lottery means executes the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is advantageous to the player by the game state setting means on the basis that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result. Is set to. The variable ball entering means is changed to the first ball entering state in which the game ball can enter and the second ball entering state in which the game ball is hard to enter in comparison with the first ball entering state, and the variable ball entering. A specific game value is imparted by the specific value imparting means based on the game ball entering the means. Based on the setting of the privilege game state by the game state setting means, the variable ball entering means is changed to the first ball entering state by the variable control means until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  As a result, in addition to the fact that the player can obtain a specific game value by entering the game ball into the variable ball entering means in the privilege game state, the game ball can enter the first ball entering means. The player can obtain the first game value. Therefore, it is possible to increase the merit of the player in the privilege game state, and it is possible to further increase the player's expectation of the privilege game state.

  In the gaming machine B3, a guide sphere capable of guiding the game sphere to the specific flow passage is provided, and the variable ball entering means is a game sphere flowing down the guide flow passage without flowing into the specific flow passage. A gaming machine B4, which is provided at a position where a ball can enter.

  According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of the game machine B3, the following effect is achieved. That is, the game ball is guided to the specific flow path by the guide flow path. The variable ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the guide channel without flowing into the specific channel can enter.

  Thereby, the player can cause the ball to flow into the specific flow path and the variable ball entering means only by launching the game ball into the guide flow path in the privilege game state. Therefore, in the privilege game state, the first game value and the specific game value can be acquired, and the merit of the player in the privilege game state can be further increased. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to further increase the player's expectation of the bonus game state.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, a third flow path, which is one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path, and a game ball that flows down the third flow path are in a position where balls can enter. On the basis of the provided third ball entering means and the game ball entering the third ball entering means, a third game value different from the second game value given by the second giving means is provided. And a third imparting means for imparting a gaming value, wherein the varying means retains a gaming ball to cause the gaming ball held by the gaming ball to the second flow path and the third flow path. A gaming machine B5 characterized by being easy to guide.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are achieved. The third flow path is provided as one of the plurality of branched flow paths in the specific flow path. A third ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the third flow path can enter the ball. Based on the game ball entering the third ball entering means, a third game value different from the second game value provided by the second giving means is given by the third giving means. When the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball is guided to the second flow path and the third flow path by the held game ball.

  As a result, when the game ball is held by the variable means, the game ball flowing into the specific flow path can enter both the second ball entering means and the third ball entering means. Become. That is, the player can acquire one of the second game value and the third game value having different game values, so that the game value acquired by the player can be randomized. . On the other hand, when the variable means is changed to the second position, the game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path enter the first ball entering means, whereby the first game value is given by the first giving means. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the gaming value acquired by the player. Therefore, different playability can be realized depending on whether or not the predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5, the third game value given by the third giving means has a higher game value than the first game value given by the first giving means. A gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the third gaming value given by the third giving means has a greater gaming value than the first gaming value given by the first giving means. Since it is configured as described above, it is possible to expect the game ball to flow down the third flow path while the game ball is held by the variable means. Therefore, it is possible to make the player more interestingly observe the traveling direction of the game ball flowing into the specific flow path, which has the effect of improving the player's interest in the game.

  In the gaming machine B5 or B6, when the variable means holds the game ball on the first flow path, the game ball that has flowed into at least the specific flow path is arranged as the held game ball in the second flow path. It is possible to hold by a first disposition that is easily guided to the flow channel and a second disposition that is easily guided to the third flow channel as compared to the first disposition. A gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5 or B6, the following effects are produced. That is, when the game sphere is held on the first flow path by the variable means, at least the game sphere that has flowed into the specific flow path is easily guided to the second flow path as the arrangement of the held game sphere. The first arrangement and the second arrangement that facilitates guiding to the third flow path as compared to the first arrangement are held.

  This has the effect of allowing the player to determine the flow path in which the game balls are likely to flow simply by confirming the arrangement of the game balls.

  In the gaming machine B7, a determination unit that determines whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable unit is the first arrangement, and a performance that executes a specific effect indicating the determination result by the determination unit. A gaming machine B8, characterized in that it comprises an executing means.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B7, the following effects are produced. That is, it is determined by the determination means whether or not the arrangement of the game balls held by the variable means is the first arrangement, and the specific effect indicating the determination result by the determination means is executed by the effect execution means. There is an effect that the player can more easily discriminate the flow path into which the game ball easily flows.

  Any one of the gaming machines B5 to B8 is provided with an adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls flowing into the specific flow path into the second flow path and the third flow path. A gaming machine B9.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B8, the ratio of the gaming balls flowing into the specific flow passage into the second flow passage and the third flow passage is respectively adjusted by the adjusting means. Since the adjustment is made, the gaming machine can be easily given the second privilege or the gaming machine can be easily given the third privilege depending on the business policy of the hall. Therefore, there is an effect that the specifications of the gaming machine can be easily adjusted according to the business policy of each hall.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B9, an operation means operable by a player and a detection means for detecting an operation on the operation means are provided, and the switching means allows the operation means to operate the operation means. A gaming machine B10, wherein the variable means is switched from the first position to the second position based on detection.

  The gaming machine B10 has the following effect in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B9. That is, the operation on the operating means is detected by the detecting means. The variable means is switched from the first position to the second position by the switching means based on the operation of the operating means being detected by the detecting means.

  As a result, it is possible for the player to switch whether or not the game ball flowing down to the specific flow path is flown down to the first ball entering means, so that each player suits his or her own taste. The effect is that it can be set to a state.

  The gaming machine B11 according to any one of the gaming machines B1 to B10, wherein the variable means is capable of holding only one gaming ball on the first flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B10, only one gaming ball is held on the first flow path by the varying means, so that the varying means is in the first position. Therefore, when the player quits the game, the game balls remaining on the first flow path can be minimized by being held by the variable means. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel that he/she has lost the game when he/she leaves the game.

<Characteristic C group> (The probability change rate is changed by adjusting the ratio of balls entering the holding device)
A first flow path provided with a specific flow path at least branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter. Means, a first benefit granting means capable of granting a first benefit based on a game ball entering the first entering means, and a game ball flowing down the second flow path. A second privilege different from the first privilege is granted based on the second ball entering means provided at a position where the player can enter the ball and the game ball entering the second ball entering means. A second privilege giving means capable of adjusting, and an adjusting means capable of adjusting the ratio of the game balls flowing down the specific flow path into the first flow path and the second flow path, respectively. A gaming machine C1 comprising:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that conducts a lottery as to whether or not a game ball is won based on winning a specific winning opening. In addition to a specific winning opening, it is known that a plurality of winning openings are provided for paying out the winning ball when the ball wins. This conventional type gaming machine is capable of changing the number of prize balls that can be obtained according to the direction in which the player shoots the game balls, by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning hole. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).

  However, since the number of prize balls that can be won by winning is generally larger than the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize hole, the player usually decides whether or not he or she wins. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. In other words, it was common for a player to keep hitting a game ball in the same direction until a hit. Therefore, when a player plays a game on the same type of gaming machine, as long as he or she hits the ball in the same direction, the ball will continue to win the same winning opening, and the number of prize balls to be paid out will be scarce. There were cases. That is, the game may be monotonous.

  According to the gaming machine C1, the specific flow path is branched into the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game ball can flow. A first ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter, and based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, the first privilege granting means determines The privilege of 1 is granted. Different from the first privilege, based on the fact that the second ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and the game ball enters the second ball entering means. The second privilege is granted by the second privilege granting means. The adjusting means adjusts the ratio of the game balls flowing down the specific flow path into the first ball entering means and the second ball entering means.

  Thus, by adjusting the adjusting means, it is possible to make the gaming machine easy to be given the first privilege or the gaming machine easily to be given the second privilege. Therefore, even with the same model, different playability can be realized by changing the adjustment degree by the adjusting means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine C1, a lottery means for executing a predetermined lottery based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a bonus game for giving a favorable privilege game to a player when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. The assigning means, the first lottery state in which the lottery result by the lottery means has a high probability of becoming the specific lottery result, and the second lottery state in which the probability of having the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. A settable lottery state setting means, wherein the first privilege granting means controls the first lottery state setting means to set the first lottery state as the first privilege. Gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, a predetermined lottery is executed by the lottery means based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and when the lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result, the game is played. A privilege game that is advantageous to a person is granted by the privilege game granting means. The lottery state setting means sets the first lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result of the lottery means being the specific lottery result is high, and the second lottery state in which the probability of the lottery result being the specific lottery result is lower than the first lottery state. . The first privilege granting means controls the first benefit so that the first benefit status is set by the lottery status setting means.

  Thereby, the easiness of shifting to the first lottery state can be adjusted by the adjusting means. Therefore, according to the business policy of the hall, the first lottery state is easily set and the game playability is easily set to the privilege game state, or the first lottery state is hard to be set and the second benefit is easily given. You can adjust what you do. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can adapt to the business policy of each hall.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second privilege granting means grants a predetermined amount of game medium as the second privilege, the gaming machine C3.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the second privilege granting means grants a predetermined amount of game media as a second privilege, so that it is easy to grant a predetermined amount of game media. Can be adjusted by adjusting means. Therefore, depending on the business policy of the hall, it is possible to adjust whether the game property is such that a predetermined amount of game medium is easily provided or the first benefit is easily provided. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a highly versatile gaming machine that can adapt to the business policy of each hall.

  In the gaming machine C2 or C3, a first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entering means, and a second position where the game ball does not easily enter the ball entering means as compared to the first position Variable means for changing the position, and variable control means for changing the variable means to the first position based on the privilege game being given by the privilege game giving means until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C4 comprising:

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2 or C3, the following effects are produced. That is, it is variable by the variable means between the first position where the game ball can enter the first ball entering means and the second position where the game ball does not easily enter the ball entering means as compared to the first position. To be done. Based on the privilege game granting means granting the privilege game, the variable control means changes the variable means to the first position until a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  As a result, the first privilege is easily granted in the privilege game state, so that it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the privilege game.

  In the gaming machine C4, the variable control means changes the variable means to the second position at least based on a lapse of a predetermined time after the variable means is changed to the first position. A gaming machine C5 characterized by the above.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C4, at least the variable means is moved to the second position by the variable control means based on the lapse of a predetermined time after the variable means is changed to the first position. Since it is variable, the opportunity for the player to obtain the first privilege can be limited until the predetermined time elapses. Therefore, since the scarcity value of the first privilege can be increased, the importance of the adjustment by the adjusting means can be increased. Therefore, when the player selects a gaming machine to play a game, the player can select the gaming machine in consideration of the adjustment degree of the adjusting means, which has the effect of providing the enjoyment of selecting the gaming machine. ..

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific game value is given based on a game ball entering, and a specific game value based on the game ball entering. And a small value entering means for giving a small game value, the second flow path, a specific path for flowing down the game ball to the specific entering means, and the small value entering means It is branched into a low-value flow path to be flowed down, and at least a first variable position capable of holding at least one game ball flowing into the specific flow path on the specific flow path, and a first variable position thereof. A gaming machine C6, which is provided with a position varying means that is capable of varying a gaming ball that has flowed into the specific flow path by comparison with a second variable position that is difficult to be held on the specific flow path.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a specific gaming value is given based on the gaming ball entering the specific ball entering means, and the gaming machine enters the low value ball entering means. A game value less than a specific game value is given based on the ball. The second flow path is branched into a specific flow path that allows the game ball to flow down to the specific ball entry means and a low value flow path that allows it to flow down to the low value ball entry means. A first variable position that can hold at least one game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path on the specific flow path, and a game ball that has flowed into the specific flow path in comparison with the first variable position is held on the specific flow path. The position changing means is changed to the second variable position which is hard to be operated.

  As a result, even if the player continues to shoot the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball that has flown into the second flow path in accordance with the variable position of the position changing means enters the ball entering means. Can be different. Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be changed according to the variable position of the position changing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  In the gaming machine C6, holding control means for controlling the position changing means to be changed to the second variable position on the basis of the bonus game being given by the bonus game giving means, the specific flow path Is arranged at a position where the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path is more likely to flow in than the low-value flow path, and the position varying means holds the game ball by holding it. A gaming machine C7, which facilitates guiding the gaming ball to the low-value flow path by the playing gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine C7, the following effects are produced in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6. That is, the position changing means is changed to the second variable position by the holding control means on the basis of the bonus game being given by the bonus game giving means. The specific flow path is arranged at a position where the game balls that have flowed into the second flow path are more likely to flow than the low-value flow path. When the game ball is held by the position changing means, the held game ball guides the game ball to the low-value flow path.

  Thereby, it is possible to change the ball entry means into which the game ball that has flowed into the second flow path enters according to the variable position of the position changing means and whether or not the game ball is held by the position changing means. . Therefore, the game value acquired by the player can be changed according to the variable position of the position changing means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

  Any one of the gaming machines C6 to C8, wherein the varying means and the position varying means are constituted by one member.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C6 to C8, the variable means and the position varying means are constituted by one member, so the position and position of the varying means can be varied by one control. The position of the means can be switched at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

  In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the adjusting means increases the ratio of the game ball flowing down to the specific flow path into the first ball entering means, and the game ball enters the second entering ball. The rate of flowing into the ball means is decreased, and the rate of entering the game ball into the second ball entering means is increased when the ratio of the game ball flowing into the first ball entering means is decreased. A gaming machine C10 characterized by being present.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, when the ratio of the gaming balls flowing down to the specific flow path into the first flow path is increased by the adjusting means, the game is played. The rate at which the spheres flow into the second flow path is reduced. Further, when the ratio of the game ball flowing down to the specific flow path into the first flow path is reduced by the adjusting means, the ratio of the game ball flowing into the second flow path is increased.

  As a result, there is an effect that the game ball can be made to more easily flow into the flow path on the side where the ratio is increased.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “provided with variable display means for dynamically displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is started due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the confirmed identification information is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

  Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, which shoots a ball to a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is moved to an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning a prize (or passing through an actuation port), there is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to make it possible to win a ball, and the value depending on the number of winning prizes. The value (including not only the gift ball but also the data written to the magnetic card, etc.) is given.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A14, B1 to B11, and C1 to C10, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the fused gaming machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information, and starting operation means (for example, operating lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. It is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information, and a ball is used as a game medium, and the identification information is also provided. The game machine is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special game state occurs.
<Other>
In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not a game ball is won based on winning a specific winning opening. Further, in addition to a specific winning opening, there is known one having a plurality of winning openings through which prize balls are paid out when a ball wins. In this conventional game machine, by changing the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the type of winning hole, it is possible to change the number of prize balls obtainable according to the direction in which the player shoots the game balls. (For example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2001-129177).
However, since the number of prize balls that can be won by winning is generally larger than the number of prize balls that are paid out by winning the prize hole, the player usually determines whether or not he or she wins. A game ball is launched aiming at a specific winning opening that triggers a lottery. In other words, it was common for a player to keep hitting a game ball in the same direction until a hit. Therefore, when the player hits the ball in the same direction, the ball may continue to win the same winning opening, and the number of prize balls to be paid out may be scarcely changed. That is, the game may be monotonous.
The present technical idea has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the game from becoming monotonous.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of the technical idea 1 is a specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which a game ball can flow down, and a game ball flowing down the first flow path. Based on the ball entering means provided at a position where the player can enter the ball and the game ball entering the ball entering means, the player is compared with the case where the game ball flows down the second flow path. Compared to a specific privilege granting means for granting an advantageous specific privilege, a first sorting state in which the game balls flowing into the specific channel are easily sorted to the first channel, and the first sorting state. The game ball can be changed to a second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path, and the state of the flow path distribution means is at least the first distribution state according to the game state. And a setting unit capable of setting the second distribution state.
The game machine according to the technical idea 2 is the game machine according to the technical idea 1, in which the game ball flowing down the second flow path is provided at a position where the game ball can enter and the normal ball entering means. And a game value granting means for granting a predetermined game value based on the entry of the game ball into the, and the specific privilege granting means provides a game value higher than the predetermined game value as the specific privilege. It is to be given.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 3 is, in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of a lottery condition, and a lottery result by the lottery means is a specific lottery result. And a game state setting means for setting the game state to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the setting means is set to the privilege game state by the game state setting means. Then, the state of the flow path distributing means is set to the first distribution state.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the specific flow path is branched into the first flow path and the second flow path. When the game ball flows down the second flow path based on the game ball entering the ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter. The specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the above is granted by the predetermined privilege granting means. The first distribution state in which the game spheres flowing into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and the second distribution state in which the game balls are easily distributed to the second flow path as compared to the first distribution state. The flow path distribution means is variable. The state of the flow path distribution means is changed to at least a first distribution state and a second distribution state by the setting means according to the game state.
As a result, in the gaming state in which the flow path distribution means is set to the first distribution state, it becomes easy to give a specific privilege by the game balls flowing into the specific flow path, and the game is set to the second distribution state. In the state, it becomes difficult to give a specific privilege. Therefore, even if the player hits the game ball toward the specific flow path, the privilege to be given can be changed according to the game state, so that the game can be prevented from becoming monotonous. There is an effect.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is achieved. That is, the normal ball entering means is provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter, and based on the game ball entering the normal ball entering means, a predetermined value is given by the game value adding means. A game value is given. By the specific privilege granting means, a gaming value higher than a predetermined gaming value is granted as the specific privilege.
As a result, in the gaming state in which the flow channel sorting means is set to the first sorting state, more games are played when the game balls flow into the specific channel, as compared with the gaming state set to the second sorting state. It's easier to get value. Therefore, since the game value given according to the game state can be made different, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the following effect is exhibited. That is, the lottery means executes the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery condition, and the game state is advantageous to the player by the game state setting means on the basis that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result. Is set to. Based on the fact that the gaming state setting means has set the privilege gaming state, the state of the flow channel sorting means is set to the first sorting state by the setting means.
As a result, when the gaming state is set to the special gaming state, the special gaming state is advantageous to the player, and more gaming value is given by the game balls flowing into the specific flow path. It is easy to be done. Therefore, the bonus game state can be made more advantageous for the player. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the player's expectation of the bonus game state.

10 Pachinko machines (gaming machines)
65a First specific winning opening (variable winning means)
112 firing control device (launching means)
601 General prize hole ( second winning means)
602 General winning a prize mouth ( first winning means)
606 Induction channel (second channel)
607 Induction channel (first channel)
607a Storage valve ( variable means)
650a Second specific winning opening (variable winning means)
701 General prize hole ( first winning means)
702 General prize hole ( third winning means)
703d General winning a prize mouth (second winning means)
704 induction channel (first channel)
704a Storage valve ( variable means)
706 induction channel (third channel)
708 induction channel (second channel)
800 Release button (operation means)
S218 variable game execution means S305 determination means S1103 switching means
S1202, S1203 variable control means S1302 switching means
S1406 variable control means S4003, S4007 switching means
S4402, S4404 variable control means

Claims (3)

A specific flow path branched into a first flow path and a second flow path through which the game ball can flow,
Ball entry means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the first flow path can enter the ball,
Based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, a specific privilege giving means for giving a specific privilege that is advantageous to the player as compared with the case where the game ball flows down the second flow path,
A first distribution state in which the game balls that have flowed into the specific flow path are easily distributed to the first flow path, and a game ball is more likely to be distributed to the second flow path in comparison with the first distribution state. Flow path distribution means that can be changed to two distribution states,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising setting means capable of setting the state of the flow path sorting means to at least the first sorting state and the second sorting state according to a gaming state. Normal ball entering means provided at a position where the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter,
A game value giving means for giving a predetermined game value based on a game ball entering the normal ball entering means,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific privilege granting means grants a game value higher than the predetermined game value as the specific privilege. Lottery means for executing lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions,
A game state setting means for setting the game state to a privilege game state advantageous to the player based on that the lottery result by the lottery means becomes a specific lottery result,
The setting means sets the state of the flow path sorting means to the first sorting state based on the setting of the privilege gaming state by the gaming state setting means. The gaming machine described in 1 or 2.

Images